Apparatus for preparing an eyeglass lens having a controller for initiation of lens curing

ABSTRACT

A high volume lens curing system is described. The high volume lens curing system is configured to cure multiple eyeglass lenses in a continuous manner.

BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION

[0001] 1. Field of the Invention

[0002] The present invention relates generally to eyeglass lenses. Moreparticularly, the invention relates to a lens forming composition,system and method for making photochromic, ultraviolet/visible lightabsorbing, and colored plastic lenses by curing the lens formingcomposition using activating light.

[0003] 2. Description of the Relevant Art

[0004] It is conventional in the art to produce optical lenses bythermal curing techniques from the polymer of diethylene glycolbis(allyl)-carbonate (DEG-BAC). In addition, optical lenses may also bemade using ultraviolet (“LTV”) light curing techniques. See, forexample, U.S. Pat. No. 4,728,469 to Lipscomb et al., U.S. Pat. No.4,879,318 to Lipscomb et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,364,256 to Lipscomb etal., U.S. Pat. No. 5,415,816 to Buazza et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,529,728to Buazza et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,514,214 to Joel et al., U.S. Pat. No.5,516,468 to Lipscomb, et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,529,728 to Buazza et al.,U.S. Pat. No. 5,689,324 to Lossman et al., U.S. Pat. No. 5,928,575 toBuazza, 5,976,423 to Buazza, U.S. Pat. No. 6,022,498 to Buazza et al.and U.S. patent application Ser. No. 07/425,371 filed Oct. 26, 1989,Ser. No. 08/439,691 filed May 12, 1995, Ser. No. 08/454,523 filed May30, 1995, 08/453,770 filed May 30, 1995, Ser. No. 08/853,134 filed May8, 1997, Ser. No. 08/844,557 filed Apr. 18, 1997, and Ser. No.08/904,289 filed Jul. 31, 1997, all of which are hereby specificallyincorporated by reference.

[0005] Curing of a lens by ultraviolet light tends to present certainproblems that must be overcome to produce a viable lens. Such problemsinclude yellowing of the lens, cracking of the lens or mold, opticaldistortions in the lens, and premature release of the lens from themold. In addition, many of the useful ultraviolet light-curable lensforming compositions exhibit certain characteristics that increase thedifficulty of a lens curing process. For example, due to the relativelyrapid nature of ultraviolet light initiated reactions, it is a challengeto provide a composition that is ultraviolet light curable to form aneyeglass lens. Excessive exothermic heat tends to cause defects in thecured lens. To avoid such defects, the level of photoinitiator may bereduced to levels below what is customarily employed in the ultravioletcuring art.

[0006] While reducing the level of photoinitiator addresses someproblems, it may also cause others. For instance, lowered levels ofphotoinitiator may cause the material in regions near an edge of thelens and proximate a gasket wall in a mold cavity to incompletely curedue to the presence of oxygen in these regions (oxygen is believed toinhibit curing of many lens forming compositions or materials). Uncuredlens forming composition tends to result in lenses with “wet” edgescovered by sticky uncured lens forming composition. Furthermore, uncuredlens forming composition may migrate to and contaminate the opticalsurfaces of the lens upon demolding. The contaminated lens is then oftenunusable.

[0007] Uncured lens forming composition has been addressed by a varietyof methods (see, e.g., the methods described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,529,728to Buazza et al). Such methods may include removing the gasket andapplying either an oxygen barrier or a photoinitiator enriched liquid tothe exposed edge of the lens, and then re-irradiating the lens with adosage of ultraviolet light sufficient to completely dry the edge of thelens prior to demolding. During such irradiation, however, higher thandesirable levels of irradiation, or longer than desirable periods ofirradiation, may be required. The additional ultraviolet irradiation mayin some circumstances cause defects such as yellowing in the lens.

[0008] The low photoinitiator levels utilized in many ultravioletcurable lens forming compositions may produce a lens that, whilefully-cured as measured by percentage of remaining double bonds, may notpossess sufficient cross-link density on the lens surface to providedesirable dye absorption characteristics during the tinting process.

[0009] Various methods of increasing the surface density of suchultraviolet light curable lenses are described in U.S. Pat. No.5,529,728 to Buazza et al. In one method, the lens is demolded and thenthe surfaces of the lens are exposed directly to ultraviolet light. Therelatively short wavelengths (around 254 nm) provided by someultraviolet light sources (e.g., a mercury vapor lamp) tend to cause thematerial to cross-link quite rapidly. An undesirable effect of thismethod, however, is that the lens tends to yellow as a result of suchexposure. Further, any contaminants on the surface of the lens that areexposed to short wavelengths of high intensity ultraviolet light maycause tint defects.

[0010] Another method involves exposing the lens to relatively highintensity ultraviolet radiation while it is still within a mold cavityformed between glass molds. The glass molds tend to absorb the moreeffective short wavelengths, while transmitting wavelengths of about 365nm. This method generally requires long exposure times and often theinfrared radiation absorbed by the lens mold assembly will causepremature release of the lens from a mold member. The lens mold assemblymay be heated prior to exposure to high intensity ultraviolet light,thereby reducing the amount of radiation necessary to attain a desiredlevel of cross-link density. This method, however, is also associatedwith a higher rate of premature release.

[0011] It is well known in the art that a lens mold/gasket assembly maybe heated to cure the lens forming composition from a liquid monomer toa solid polymer. It is also well known that such a lens may be thermallypostcured by applying convective heat to the lens after the molds andgaskets have been removed from the lens.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION

[0012] An embodiment of an apparatus for preparing an eyeglass lens isdescribed. The apparatus includes a coating unit and a lens curing unit.The coating unit may be configured to coat either mold members orlenses. In one embodiment, the coating unit is a spin coating unit. Thelens curing unit may be configured to direct activating light towardmold members. The mold members are part of a mold assembly that may beplaced within the lens curing unit. Depending on the type of lensforming composition used, the apparatus may be used to form photochromicand non-photochromic lenses. The apparatus may be configured to allowthe operation of both the coating unit and the lens curing unitsubstantially simultaneously.

[0013] The coating unit may be a spin coating unit. The spin coatingunit may comprise a holder for holding an eyeglass lens or a moldmember. The holder may be coupled to a motor that is configured torotate the holder. An activating light source may be incorporated into acover. The cover may be drawn over the body of the lens curing unit,covering the coating units. The activating light source, in oneembodiment, is positioned, when the cover is closed, such thatactivating light may be applied to the mold member or lens positionedwithin the coating unit. An activating light source may be anultraviolet light source, an actinic light source (e.g., a light sourceproducing light having a wavelength between about 380 nm to 490 nm), avisible light source and/or an infra-red light source. In oneembodiment, the activating light source is an ultraviolet light source.

[0014] The lens forming apparatus may include a post-cure unit. Thepost-cure unit may be configured to apply heat and activating light tomold assemblies or lenses disposed within the post-cure unit.

[0015] The lens forming apparatus may also include a programmablecontroller configured to substantially simultaneously control theoperation of the coating unit, the lens curing unit and the post-cureunit. The apparatus may include a number of light probes and temperatureprobes disposed within the coating unit, lens curing unit, and thepost-cure unit. These probes preferably relay information about theoperation of the individual units to the controller. The informationrelayed may be used to control the operation of the individual units.The operation of each of the units may also be controlled based on theprescription of the lens being formed.

[0016] The controller may be configured to control various operations ofthe coating unit, the curing unit, and the post cure unit.

[0017] Additionally, the controller provides system diagnostics andinformation to the operator of the apparatus. The controller may notifythe user when routine maintenance is due or when a system error isdetected. The controller may also manage an interlock system for safetyand energy conservation purposes. The controller may prevent the lampsfrom operating when the operator may be exposed to light from the lamps.

[0018] The controller may also be configured to interact with theoperator. The controller preferably includes an input device and adisplay screen. A number of operations controlled by the controller, asdescribed above, may be dependent on the input of the operator. Thecontroller may prepare a sequence of instructions based on the type oflens (clear, ultraviolet/visible light absorbing, photochromic, colored,etc.), prescription, and type of coatings (e.g., scratch resistant,adhesion promoting, or tint) inputted by an operator.

[0019] A variety of lens forming compositions may be cured to form aplastic eyeglass lens in the above described apparatus. Colored lenses,photochromic lenses, and ultraviolet/visible light absorbing colorlesslenses may be formed. The lens forming compositions may be formulatedsuch that the conditions for forming the lens (e.g., curing conditionsand post cure conditions) may be similar without regard to the lensbeing formed. In an embodiment, a clear lens may be formed under similarconditions used to form photochromic lenses by adding a colorless,non-photochromic ultraviolet/visible light absorbing compound to thelens forming composition. The curing process for forming a photochromiclens is such that higher doses of activating light than are typicallyused for the formation of a clear, non-ultraviolet/visible lightabsorbing lens may be required. In an embodiment, ultraviolet/visiblelight absorbing compounds may be added to a lens forming composition toproduce a substantially clear lens under the more intense dosingrequirements used to form photochromic lenses. The ultraviolet/visiblelight absorbing compounds may take the place of the photochromiccompounds, making curing at higher doses possible for clear lenses. Anadvantage of adding the ultraviolet/visible light absorbers to the lensforming composition is that the clear lens formed may offer betterprotection against ultraviolet/visible light rays than a clear lensformed without such compounds.

[0020] In an embodiment, a composition that includes two or morephotochromic compounds may further include a light effector compositionto produce a lens that exhibits an activated color that differs from anactivated color produced by the photochromic compounds without the lighteffector composition. The activated color is defined as the color a lensachieves when exposed to a photochromic activating light source (e.g.,sunlight). A photochromic activating light source is defined as anylight source that produces light having a wavelength that causes aphotochromic compound to become colored. Photochromic activating lightis defined as light that has a wavelength capable of causing aphotochromic compound to become colored. The photochromic activatingwavelength band is defined as the region of light that has a wavelengththat causes coloring of photochromic compounds. The light effectorcomposition may include any compound that exhibits absorbance of atleast a portion of the photochromic activating wavelength band. Lighteffector compositions may include photoinitiators, ultraviolet/visiblelight absorbers, ultraviolet light stabilizers, and dyes. In thismanner, the activated color of a lens may be altered without alteringthe ratio and or composition of the photochromic compounds. By using alight effector composition, a single lens forming composition may beused as a base solution to which a light effector may be added in orderto alter the activated color of the formed lens.

[0021] The addition of a light effector composition that absorbsphotochromic activating light may cause a change in the activated colorof the formed lens. The change in activated color may be dependent onthe range of photochromic activating light absorbed by the lighteffector composition. The use of different light effector compositionsmay allow an operator to produce photochromic lenses with a wide varietyof activated colors (e.g., red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo,violet, gray, or brown).

[0022] In an embodiment, an ophthalmic eyeglass lens may be made from anactivating light curable lens forming composition comprising a monomercomposition and a photoinitiator composition. The monomer compositionpreferably includes a polyethylenic functional monomer. Preferably, thepolyethylenic functional monomer composition includes an aromaticcontaining polyether polyethylenic functional monomer. In oneembodiment, the polyethylenic functional monomer is preferably anethoxylated bisphenol A di(meth)acrylate.

[0023] The monomer composition may include additional monomers to modifythe properties of the formed eyeglass lens and/or the lens formingcomposition. Monomers which may be used in the monomer compositioninclude polyethylenic functional monomers containing groups selectedfrom acrylyl or methacrylyl.

[0024] In another embodiment, an ophthalmic eyeglass lens may be madefrom an activating light curable lens forming composition comprising amonomer composition, a photoinitiator composition and a co-initiatorcomposition. An activating light absorbing compound may also be present.An activating light absorbing compound is herein defined as a compoundwhich absorbs at least a portion of the activating light. The monomercomposition preferably includes a polyethylenic functional monomer.Preferably, the polyethylenic functional monomer is an aromaticcontaining polyether polyethylenic functional monomer. In oneembodiment, the polyethylenic functional monomer is preferably anethoxylated bisphenol A di(meth)acrylate.

[0025] The co-initiator composition preferably includes amineco-initiators. Preferably, acrylyl amines are included in theco-initiator composition. In one embodiment, the co-initiatorcomposition preferably includes a mixture of CN-384 and CN-386.

[0026] Examples of activating light absorbing compounds includesphotochromic compounds, UV stabilizers, UV absorbers, and/or dyes.

[0027] In another embodiment, the controller is preferably configured torun a computer software program which, upon input of the eyeglassprescription, will supply the identification markings of the appropriatefront mold, back mold and gasket. The controller may also be configuredto store the prescription data and to use the prescription data todetermine curing conditions. The controller may be configured to operatethe curing unit to produce the appropriate curing conditions.

[0028] In one embodiment, the lens forming composition may be irradiatedwith continuous activated light to initiate curing of the lens formingcomposition. Subsequent to initiating the curing, the lens formingcomposition may be treated with additional activating light and heat tofurther cure the lens forming composition.

[0029] In another embodiment, the lens forming composition may beirradiated with continuous activated light in a heated curing chamber toinitiate curing of the lens forming composition. Subsequent toinitiating the curing, the lens forming composition may be treated withadditional activating light and heat to further cure the lens formingcomposition.

[0030] In another embodiment, a system for dispensing a heatedpolymerizable lens forming composition is described. The dispensingsystem includes a body configured to hold the lens forming composition,a heating system coupled to the body for heating the monomer solution,and a valve positioned proximate an outlet of the body for controllingthe flow of the lens forming composition out of the body.

[0031] A high-volume lens curing apparatus includes at least a firstlens curing unit and a second lens curing unit. The lens formingapparatus may, optionally, include an anneal unit. A conveyance systemmay be positioned within the first and/or second lens curing units. Theconveyance system may be configured to allow a mold assembly to betransported from the first lens curing unit to the second lens curingunit. Lens curing units include an activating light source for producingactivating light. Anneal unit may be configured to apply heat to an atleast partially relive or relax the stresses caused during thepolymerization of the lens forming material. A controller may be coupledto the lens curing units and, if present, an anneal unit, such that thecontroller is capable of substantially simultaneously operating thethree units. The anneal unit may include a conveyor system fortransferring the demolded lenses through the anneal unit.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[0032] The above brief description as well as further objects, featuresand advantages of the methods and apparatus of the present inventionwill be more fully appreciated by reference to the following detaileddescription of presently preferred but nonetheless illustrativeembodiments in accordance with the present invention when taken inconjunction with the accompanying drawings in which:

[0033]FIG. 1 depicts a perspective view of a plastic lens formingapparatus;

[0034]FIG. 2 depicts a perspective view of a spin coating unit;

[0035]FIG. 3 depicts a cut-away side view of a spin coating unit;

[0036]FIG. 4 depicts a perspective view of a plastic lens formingapparatus with a portion of the body removed;

[0037]FIG. 5 depicts a perspective view of the components of a lenscuring unit;

[0038]FIG. 6 depicts a perspective view of a plastic lens formingapparatus with a portion of the body removed and the coating unitsremoved;

[0039]FIG. 7 depicts a schematic of a fluorescent light ballast system;

[0040]FIG. 8 depicts a mold assembly;

[0041]FIG. 9 depicts an isometric view of an embodiment of a gasket;

[0042]FIG. 10 depicts a top view of the gasket of FIG. 9;

[0043]FIG. 11 depicts a cross-sectional view of an embodiment of amold/gasket assembly;

[0044]FIG. 12 depicts an isometric view of an embodiment of a gasket;

[0045]FIG. 13 depicts a top view of the gasket of FIG. 12;

[0046]FIG. 14 depicts a side view of a cured lens and molds afterremoval of a gasket;

[0047]FIG. 15 depicts a post-cure unit;

[0048]FIG. 16 depicts chemical structures of acrylated amines;

[0049] FIGS. 17-19 depict a front panel of a controller with a displayscreen depicting various display menus;

[0050]FIG. 20 depicts an isometric view of a heated polymerizable lensforming composition dispensing system;

[0051]FIG. 21 depicts a side view of a heated polymerizable lens formingcomposition dispensing system;

[0052]FIGS. 22 and 23 depict cross-sectional side views of a heatedpolymerizable lens forming composition dispensing system;

[0053]FIG. 24 depicts a mold assembly for making flat-top bifocallenses;

[0054]FIG. 25 depicts a front view of a lens curing unit;

[0055]FIG. 26 depicts a top view of a lens curing unit;

[0056]FIG. 27 depicts an isometric view of a high-volume lens curingapparatus;

[0057]FIG. 28 depicts a cross-sectional side view of a high-volume lenscuring apparatus;

[0058]FIG. 29 depicts a cross-sectional top view of a first curing unitof a high-volume lens curing apparatus;

[0059]FIG. 30 depicts an isometric view of a mold assembly holder;

[0060]FIG. 31 depicts an isometric view of a conveyor system for ahigh-volume lens curing apparatus;

[0061]FIG. 32 depicts a cross sectional top view of a high-volume lenscuring apparatus;

[0062]FIG. 33 depicts a side view of a portion of a conveyor system fora high-volume lens curing apparatus;

[0063]FIG. 34 depicts a side view of a high-volume lens curingapparatus;

[0064]FIG. 35 depicts a cross -sectional front view of a high-volumelens curing apparatus;

[0065]FIG. 36 depicts a schematic front view of an embodiment of a moldmember storage array coupled to a controller computer;

[0066]FIGS. 37a and 37 b depict schematic perspective views ofembodiments of indicators positioned on ophthalmic mold member storagelocations;

[0067]FIG. 38 depicts a schematic perspective view of an embodiment of avertical mold member storage array;

[0068]FIG. 39 depicts a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment ofthe vertical mold member storage array of FIG. 38;

[0069]FIG. 40 depicts a partial cross-sectional view of an embodiment ofa mold member storage unit in which mold members interact with theseparating devices;

[0070]FIGS. 41a, 41 b, and 41 c depict schematic perspective views ofvarious embodiments of cams that may be employed in a mold storagearray;

[0071]FIG. 42 depicts a schematic view of an embodiment of a systemconfigured to collect and transmit eyeglass lens information over acomputer network;

[0072]FIG. 43 depicts a flow chart illustrating an embodiment of amethod for collecting and transmitting eyeglass lens information over acomputer network;

[0073]FIGS. 44, 45, and 46 depict embodiments of graphical userinterfaces which may display eyeglass lens forming-related information;

[0074]FIG. 47 depicts an embodiment of a graphical user interface whichmay include a prescription input menu;

[0075]FIG. 48 depicts an embodiment of a graphical user interface whichmay include a prescription viewer display;

[0076]FIG. 49 depicts an embodiment of a graphical user interface whichmay include an alarm viewer display;

[0077]FIG. 50 depicts an embodiment of a graphical user interface whichmay include a maintenance viewer display;

[0078]FIG. 51 depicts an embodiment of a graphical user interface whichmay include a machine setup menu; and

[0079]FIGS. 52 and 53 depict embodiments of graphical user interfaceswhich may include a configuration setup menu.

DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS

[0080] Apparatus, operating procedures, equipment, systems, methods, andcompositions for lens curing using activating light are available fromOptical Dynamics Corporation in Louisville, Ky.

[0081] Referring now to FIG. 1, a plastic lens curing apparatus isgenerally indicated by reference numeral 10. As shown in FIG. 1, lensforming apparatus 10 includes at least one coating unit 20, a lenscuring unit 30, a post-cure unit 40, and a controller 50. In oneembodiment, apparatus 10 includes two coating units 20. Coating unit 20may be configured to apply a coating layer to a mold member or a lens.Coating unit 20 may be a spin coating unit. Lens curing unit 30 includesan activating light source for producing activating light. As usedherein “activating light” means light that may affect a chemical change.Activating light may include ultraviolet light (e.g., light having awavelength between about 300 nm to about 400 nm), actinic light, visiblelight or infrared light. Generally, any wavelength of light capable ofaffecting a chemical change may be classified as activating. Chemicalchanges may be manifested in a number of forms. A chemical change mayinclude, but is not limited to, any chemical reaction that causes apolymerization to take place. In some embodiments the chemical changecauses the formation of an initiator species within the lens formingcomposition, the initiator species being capable of initiating achemical polymerization reaction. The activating light source may beconfigured to direct light toward a mold assembly. Post-cure unit 40 maybe configured to complete the polymerization of plastic lenses.Post-cure unit 40 may include an activating light source and a heatsource. Controller 50 may be a programmable logic controller. Controller50 may be coupled to coating units 20, lens curing unit 30, andpost-cure unit 40, such that the controller is capable of substantiallysimultaneously operating the three units 20, 30, and 40. Controller 50may be a computer.

[0082] A coating unit for applying a coating composition to a lens or amold member and then curing the coating composition is described in U.S.Pat. No. 4,895,102 to Kachel et al., U.S. Pat. No. 3,494,326 to Upton,and U.S. Pat. No. 5,514,214 to Joel et al. (all of which areincorporated herein by reference). In addition, the apparatus shown inFIGS. 2 and 3 may also be used to apply coatings to lenses or moldmembers.

[0083]FIG. 2 depicts a pair of spin coating units 102 and 104. Thesespin coating units may be used to apply a scratch resistant coating or atint coating to a lens or mold member. Each of the coating unitsincludes an opening through which an operator may apply lenses and lensmold assemblies to a holder 108. Holder 108 may be partially surroundedby barrier 114. Barrier 114 may be coupled to a dish 115. As shown inFIG. 3, the dish edges may be inclined to form a peripheral sidewall 121that merges with barrier 114. The bottom 117 of the dish may besubstantially flat. The flat bottom may have a circular opening thatallows an elongated member 109 coupled to lens holder 108 to extendthrough the dish 115.

[0084] Holder 108 may be coupled to a motor 112 via elongated member109. Motor 112 may be configured to cause rotation of holder 108. Insuch a case, motor 112 may be configured to cause rotation of elongatedmember 109, that in turn causes the rotation of holder 108. The coatingunit 102/104, may also include an electronic controller 140. Electroniccontroller 140 may be coupled to motor 112 to control the rate at whichholder 108 is rotated by motor 112. Electronic controller 140 may becoupled to a programmable logic controller, such as controller 50, shownin FIG. 1. The programmable logic controller may send signals to theelectronic controller to control the rotational speed of holder 108. Inone embodiment, motor 112 is configured to rotate holder 108 atdifferent rates. Motor 112 may be capable of rotating the lens or moldmember at a rate of up to 1500 revolutions per minute (“RPM”).

[0085] In one embodiment, barrier 114 has an interior surface that maybe made or lined with an absorbent material such as foam rubber. Thisabsorbent material may be disposable and removable. The absorbentmaterial may be configured to absorb any liquids that fall off a lens ormold member during use. Alternatively, the interior surface of barrier114 may be substantially non-absorbent, allowing any liquids used duringthe coating process to move down barrier 114 into dish 115.

[0086] Coating units 20, in one embodiment, are positioned in a topportion 12 of lens forming apparatus 10, as depicted in FIG. 1. A cover22 may be coupled to body 14 of the lens forming apparatus to allow topportion 12 to be covered during use. A light source 23 may be positionedon an inner surface of cover 22. The light source may include at leastone lamp 24, preferably two or more lamps, positioned on the innersurface of cover 22. Lamps 24 may be positioned such that the lamps areoriented above the coating units 20 when cover 22 is closed. Lamps 24emit activating light upon the lenses or mold members positioned withincoating units 20. Lamps may have a variety of shapes including, but notlimited to, linear (as depicted in FIG. 1), square, rectangular,circular, or oval. Activating light sources emit light having awavelength that will initiate curing of various coating materials. Forexample, most currently used coating materials may be curable byactivating light having wavelengths in the ultraviolet region, thereforethe light sources should exhibit strong ultraviolet light emission. Thelight sources may also be configured to produce minimal heat during use.Lamps that exhibit strong ultraviolet light emission have a peak outputat a wavelength in the ultraviolet light region, between about 200 nm toabout 400 nm, preferably the peak output is between about 200 nm to 300nm, and more preferably at about 254 nm. In one embodiment, lamps 24 mayhave a peak output in the ultraviolet light region and have relativelylow heat output. Such lamps are commonly known as “germicidal” lamps andany such lamp may be used. A “germicidal” light emitting light with apeak output in the desired ultraviolet region is commercially availablefrom Voltarc, Inc. of Fairfield, Conn. as model UV-WX G10T5.

[0087] An advantage of using a spin coating unit is that lamps of avariety of shapes may be used (e.g., linear lamps) for the curing of thecoating materials. In one embodiment, a coating material is preferablycured in a substantially uniform manner to ensure that the coating isformed uniformly on the mold member or lens. With a spin coating unit,the object to be coated may be spun at speeds high enough to ensure thata substantially uniform distribution of light reaches the object duringthe curing process, regardless of the shape of the light source. The useof a spin coating unit preferably allows the use of commerciallyavailable linear light sources for the curing of coating materials.

[0088] A switch may be incorporated into cover 22. The switch ispreferably electrically coupled to light source 23 such that the switchmust be activated prior to turning the light source on. Preferably, theswitch is positioned such that closing the cover causes the switch tobecome activated. In this manner, the lights will preferably remain offuntil the cover is closed, thus preventing inadvertent exposure of anoperator to the light from light source 23.

[0089] During use a lens or lens mold assembly may be placed on the lensholder 108. The lens holder 108 may include a suction cup connected to ametal bar. The concave surface of the suction cup may be attachable to aface of a mold or lens, and the convex surface of the suction cup may beattached to a metal bar. The metal bar may be coupled to motor 112. Thelens holder may also include movable arms and a spring assembly that maybe together operable to hold a lens against the lens holder with springtension during use.

[0090] As shown in FIG. 4, the curing unit 30 may include an upper lightsource 214, a lens drawer assembly 216, and a lower light source 218.Lens drawer assembly 216 preferably includes a mold assembly holder 220,more preferably at least two mold assembly holders 220. Each of the moldassembly holders 220 is preferably configured to hold a pair of moldmembers that together with a gasket form a mold assembly. The lensdrawer assembly 216 is preferably slidingly mounted on a guide. Duringuse, mold assemblies may be placed in the mold assembly holders 220while the lens drawer assembly is in the open position (i.e., when thedoor extends from the front of the lens curing unit). After the moldassemblies have been loaded into the mold holder 220 the door may beslid into a closed position, with the mold assemblies directly under theupper light source 214 and above the lower light source 218. Vents (notshown) may be placed in communication with the lens curing unit to allowa stream of air to be directed toward the mold members when the moldmembers are positioned beneath the upper lamps. An exhaust fan (notshown) may communicate with the vents to improve the circulation of airflowing through the lens curing unit.

[0091] As shown in FIGS. 4 and 5, it is preferred that the upper lightsource 214 and lower light source 216 include a plurality of activatinglight generating devices or lamps 240. Preferably, the lamps areoriented proximate each other to form a row of lights, as depicted inFIG. 4. Preferably, three or four lamps are positioned to providesubstantially uniform radiation over the entire surface of the moldassembly to be cured. The lamps 240, preferably generate activatinglight. Lamps 240 may be supported by and electrically connected tosuitable fixtures 242. Lamps 240 may generate either ultraviolet light,actinic light, visible light, and/or infrared light. The choice of lampsis preferably based on the monomers used in the lens formingcomposition. In one embodiment, the activating light may be generatedfrom a fluorescent lamp. The fluorescent lamp preferably has a strongemission spectra in the 380 to 490 nm region. A fluorescent lampemitting activating light with the described wavelengths is commerciallyavailable from Philips as model TLD-15W/03. In another embodiment, thelamps may be ultraviolet lights.

[0092] In one embodiment, the activating light sources may be turned onand off quickly between exposures. Ballasts 250, depicted in FIG. 6, maybe used for this function. The ballasts may be positioned beneath thecoating unit. Power supply 252 may also be located proximate theballasts 250, underneath the coating unit.

[0093] Typically, when a fluorescent lamp is turned off the filaments inthe lamp will become cool. When the lamp is subsequently turned on, thelamp intensity may fluctuate as the filaments are warmed. Thesefluctuations may effect the curing of a lens forming compositions. Tominimize the intensity fluctuations of the lamps, a ballasts 250 mayallow the startup of a fluorescent lamp and minimizes the time requiredto stabilize the intensity of the light produced by the fluorescentlamp.

[0094] A number of ballast systems may be used. Ballasts for fluorescentlamps typically serve two purposes. One function is to provide aninitial high voltage arc that will ionize the gases in the fluorescentlamp (known herein as the “strike voltage”). After the gases areionized, a much lower voltage will be required to maintain theionization of the gases. In some embodiments, the ballast will alsolimit the current flow through the lamp. In some ballast systems, thefilaments of a lamp may be preheated before the starting voltage is sentthrough the electrodes.

[0095] An instant start ballast typically provides a strike voltage ofbetween 500-600 V. The electrodes of fluorescent lamps that are usedwith an instant start ballast are usually designed for starting withoutpreheating. Instant start ballast allow the fluorescent lamp to beturned on quickly without a significant delay. However, the intensity oflight produced by the fluorescent lamp may fluctuate as the temperatureof the filaments increases.

[0096] Rapid start ballasts include a high voltage transformer forproviding the strike voltage and additional windings that supply a lowvoltage (between about 2 to 4 V) to the filaments to heat the filamentsbefore the lamp is started. Because the filaments are already heated,the strike voltage required to ionize the gases in the lamp are lowerthan those used with an instant start ballast. A rapid start ballasttypically produces a strike voltage of 250 to 400 V. A rapid startballast may be used to minimize fluctuations in the intensity of thelight produced by the lamp. Since the filaments are preheated before thelamp comes on, the time required to heat up the filaments to theirnormal operating temperature is minimal.

[0097] Rapid start ballasts typically continually run the heatingvoltage through the filaments during operation of the lamp and when thelamps are switched off. Thus, during long periods when the lamps are notused, the filaments will be maintained in a heated state. This tends towaste power and increase the operating costs of the apparatus.

[0098] To allow more control over the heating of the filaments, aflasher ballast system may be used. A schematic drawing of an embodimentof a flasher ballast system is depicted in FIG. 7. In a flasher ballastsystem a fluorescent lamp 712 is electrically coupled to a highfrequency instant start ballast 714 and one or more transformers 716.The high frequency instant start ballast 714 may provide the strikevoltage and perform the current limiting functions once the lamp islighted. High frequency instant start ballasts are available from manydifferent manufacturers including Motorola, Inc. and Hatch Transformers,Inc. Tampa, Fla. The transformers 716 may be electrically coupled to oneor both of the filaments 718 to provide a low voltage (between about 2to about 4 V) to the filaments. This low voltage may heat the filaments718 to a temperature that is close to the operating temperature of thefilaments 718. By heating the filaments before turning the lamp on, theintensity of light produced by the lamp may be stable because thefilaments of the lamp are kept close to the optimum operatingtemperature. Transformers are available from many differentmanufacturers. In one embodiment toroidal transformers may be used tosupply low voltage to the filaments. Toroidal transformers may beobtained from Plitron Manufacturing Inc. Toronto, Ontario, Canada orToroid Corporation of Maryland, Salisbury, Md.

[0099] Because the instant start ballast 714 and the transformers 716are separate units they may be operated independently of each other. Acontroller 711 may be coupled to both the instant start ballast 714 andthe transformers 716 to control the operation of these devices. Thetransformers 716 may be left on or off when the striking voltage isapplied to the lamp. In some embodiments, controller 711 may turn offthe transformers 716 just before the strike voltage is applied to thelamp. The controller 711 may also monitor the operation of the lamp. Thecontroller 711 may be programmed to turn the transformers 716 on whenthe lamps are switched off, thus maintaining the lamps in a state ofreadiness. To conserve power, the filaments 718 may be warmed only priorto turning on the lamp. Thus, when the controller 711 receives a signalto turn the lamp on, the controller may turn on the transformers 716 towarm the filaments 718, and subsequently turn on the lamp by sending astriking voltage from the instant start ballast 714. The controller maybe configured to turn the transformer off after a predetermined amountof inactivity of the lamps. For example, the controller may beconfigured to receive signals when the lamps are used in a curingprocess. If no such signals are received, the controller may turn offthe lamps (by turning off the instant start ballast), but leave thetransformer on. The lamps may be kept in a state of readiness for apredetermined amount of time. If no signals are received by thecontroller to turn on the lamp, the controller may turn the transformeroff to conserve energy.

[0100] In one embodiment, an upper light filter 254 may be positionedbetween upper light source 214 and lens drawer assembly 216, as depictedin FIG. 5. A lower light filter 256 may be positioned between lowerlight source 218 and lens drawer assembly 216. The upper light filter254 and lower light filter 256 are shown in FIG. 5 as being made of asingle filter member, however, those of ordinary skill in the art willrecognize that each of the filters may include two or more filtermembers. The components of upper light filter 254 and lower light filter256 are preferably modified depending upon the characteristics of thelens to be molded. For instance, in an embodiment for making negativelenses, the upper light filter 254 includes a plate of Pyrex glass thatmay be frosted on both sides resting upon a plate of clear Pyrex glass.The lower light filter 256 includes a plate of Pyrex glass, frosted onone side, resting upon a plate of clear Pyrex glass with a device forreducing the intensity of activating light incident upon the centerportion relative to the edge portion of the mold assembly.

[0101] Conversely, in a an alternate arrangement for producing positivelenses, the upper light filter 254 includes a plate of Pyrex glassfrosted on one or both sides and a plate of clear Pyrex glass restingupon the plate of frosted Pyrex glass with a device for reducing theintensity of activating light incident upon the edge portion in relationto the center portion of the mold assembly. The lower light filter 256includes a plate of clear Pyrex glass frosted on one side resting upon aplate of clear Pyrex glass with a device for reducing the intensity ofactivating light incident upon the edge portion in relation to thecenter portion of the mold assembly. In this arrangement, in place of adevice for reducing the relative intensity of activating light incidentupon the edge portion of the lens, the diameter of the aperture 250 maybe reduced to achieve the same result, i.e., to reduce the relativeintensity of activating light incident upon the edge portion of the moldassembly.

[0102] It should be apparent to those skilled in the art that eachfilter 254 or 256 could be composed of a plurality of filter members orinclude any other means or device effective to reduce the light to itsdesired intensity, to diffuse the light and/or to create a lightintensity gradient across the mold assemblies. Alternately, in certainembodiments no filter elements may be used.

[0103] In one embodiment, upper light filter 254 or lower light filter256 each include at least one plate of Pyrex glass having at least onefrosted surface. Also, either or both of the filters may include morethan one plate of Pyrex glass each frosted on one or both surfaces,and/or one or more sheets of tracing paper. After passing throughfrosted Pyrex glass, the activating light is believed to have no sharpintensity discontinuities. By removing the sharp intensity distributionsa reduction in optical distortions in the finished lens may be achieved.Those of ordinary skill in the art will recognize that other means maybe used to diffuse the activating light so that it has no sharpintensity discontinuities. In another embodiment, a plastic filter maybe used. The plastic filter may be formed from a substantially clearsheet of plastic. The plastic filter may frosted or non-frosted. Thesubstantially clear sheet of plastic is formed from a material that doesnot significantly absorb wavelengths of light that initiate thepolymerization reaction. In one embodiment, the plastic filter may beformed from a sheet of polycarbonate. An example of a polycarbonate thatmay be used is LEXAN polycarbonate, commercially available from GeneralElectric Corporation. In another embodiment, the filter may be formedfrom a borosilicate type glass.

[0104] In operation, the apparatus may be appropriately configured forthe production of positive lenses which are relatively thick at thecenter or negative lenses which are relatively thick at the edge. Toreduce the likelihood of premature release, the relatively thickportions of a lens are preferably polymerized at a faster rate than therelatively thin portions of a lens.

[0105] The rate of polymerization taking place at various portions of alens may be controlled by varying the relative intensity of activatinglight incident upon particular portions of a lens. For positive lenses,the intensity of incident activating light is preferably reduced at theedge portion of the lens so that the thicker center portion of the lenspolymerizes faster than the thinner edge portion of the lens.

[0106] It is well known by those of ordinary skill in the art that lensforming materials tend to shrink as they cure. If the relatively thinportion of a lens is allowed to polymerize before the relatively thickportion, the relatively thin portion will tend to be rigid at the timethe relatively thick portion cures and shrinks and the lens will eitherrelease prematurely from or crack the mold members. Accordingly, whenthe relative intensity of activating light incident upon the edgeportion of a positive lens is reduced relative to the center portion,the center portion may polymerize faster and shrink before the edgeportion is rigid so that the shrinkage is more uniform.

[0107] The variation of the relative intensity of activating lightincident upon a lens may be accomplished in a variety of ways. Accordingto one method, in the case of a positive lens, a metal plate having anaperture disposed in a position over the center of the mold assembly maybe placed between the lamps and the mold assembly. The metal plate ispositioned such that the incident activating light falls mainly on thethicker center portion of the lens. In this manner, the polymerizationrate of the center of a positive lens may be accelerated with respect tothe outer edges of the positive lens, which receive less activatinglight. The metal plate may be inserted manually or may be inserted by anautomatic device that is coupled to the controller. In one embodiment,the prescription entered into the controller determines whether themetal plate is placed between the lamps and the mold assembly.

[0108] As shown in FIG. 7, the mold assembly 352 may include opposedmold members 378, separated by an annular gasket 380 to define a lensmolding cavity 382. The opposed mold members 378 and the annular gasket380 may be shaped and selected in a manner to produce a lens having adesired diopter.

[0109] The mold members 378 may be formed of any suitable material thatwill permit the passage of activating light. The mold members 378 arepreferably formed of glass. Each mold member 378 has an outer peripheralsurface 384 and a pair of opposed surfaces 386 and 388 with the surfaces386 and 388 being precision ground. Preferably the mold members 378 havedesirable activating light transmission characteristics and both thecasting surface 386 and non-casting surface 388 preferably have nosurface aberrations, waves, scratches or other defects as these may bereproduced in the finished lens.

[0110] As noted above, the mold members 378 are preferably adapted to beheld in spaced apart relation to define a lens molding cavity 382between the facing surfaces 386 thereof. The mold members 378 arepreferably held in a spaced apart relation by a T-shaped flexibleannular gasket 380 that seals the lens molding cavity 382 from theexterior of the mold members 378. In use, the gasket 380 may besupported on a portion of the mold assembly holder 220 (shown in FIG.4).

[0111] In this manner, the upper or back mold member 390 has a convexinner surface 386 while the lower or front mold member 392 has a concaveinner surface 386 so that the resulting lens molding cavity 382 ispreferably shaped to form a lens with a desired configuration. Thus, byselecting the mold members 378 with a desired surface 386, lenses withdifferent characteristics, such as focal lengths, may be produced.

[0112] Rays of activating light emanating from lamps 240 preferably passthrough the mold members 378 and act on a lens forming material disposedin the mold cavity 382 in a manner discussed below so as to form a lens.As noted above, the rays of activating light may pass through a suitablefilter 254 or 256 before impinging upon the mold assembly 352.

[0113] The mold members 378, preferably, are formed from a material thatwill not transmit activating light having a wavelength belowapproximately 300 nm. Suitable materials are Schott Crown, S-1 or S-3glass manufactured and sold by Schott Optical Glass Inc., of Duryea,Penn. or Corning 8092 glass sold by Corning Glass of Corning, N.Y. Asource of flat-top or single vision molds may be Augen Lens Co. in SanDiego, Calif.

[0114] The annular gasket 380 may be formed of vinyl material thatexhibits good lip finish and maintains sufficient flexibility atconditions throughout the lens curing process. In an embodiment, theannular gasket 380 is formed of silicone rubber material such as GESE6035 which is commercially available from General Electric. In anotherpreferred embodiment, the annular gasket 380 is formed of copolymers ofethylene and vinyl acetate which are commercially available from E. I.DuPont de Nemours & Co. under the trade name ELVAX7. Preferred ELVAX7resins are ELVAX7 350 having a melt index of 17.3-20.9 dg/min and avinyl acetate content of 24.3-25.7 wt. %, ELVAX7 250 having a melt indexof 22.0-28.0 dg/min and a vinyl acetate content of 27.2-28.8 wt. %,ELVAX7 240 having a melt index of 38.0-48.0 dg/min and a vinyl acetatecontent of 27.2-28.8 wt. %, and ELVAX7 150 having a melt index of38.0-48.0 dg/min and a vinyl acetate content of 32.0-34.0 wt. %. Inanother embodiment, the gasket may be made from polyethylene. Regardlessof the particular material, the gaskets 380 may be prepared byconventional injection molding or compression molding techniques whichare well-known by those of ordinary skill in the art.

[0115]FIGS. 9 and 10 present an isometric view and a top view,respectively, of a gasket 510. Gasket 510 may be annular, and ispreferably configured to engage a mold set for forming a mold assembly.Gasket 510 is preferably characterized by at least four discreteprojections 511. Gasket 510 preferably has an exterior surface 514 andan interior surface 512. The projections 511 are preferably arrangedupon inner surface 512 such that they are substantially coplanar. Theprojections are preferably evenly spaced around the interior surface ofthe gasket Preferably, the spacing along the interior surface of thegasket between each projection is about 90 degrees. Although fourprojections are preferred, it is envisioned that more than four could beincorporated. For example, a fifth projection may be incorporated intothe gasket which may be configured to contact one of the mold members.The gasket 510 may be formed of a silicone rubber material such as GESE6035 which is commercially available from General Electric. In anotherembodiment, the gasket 510 may be formed of copolymers of ethylene andvinyl acetate which are commercially available from E. I. DuPont deNemours & Co. under the trade name ELVAX7. In another embodiment, thegasket 510 may be formed from polyethylene. In another embodiment, thegasket may be formed from a thermoplastic elastomer rubber. An exampleof a thermoplastic elastomer rubber that may be used is, DYNAFLEX G-2780commercially available from GLS Corporation.

[0116] As shown in FIG. 11, projections 511 are preferably capable ofspacing mold members 526 of a mold set. Mold members 526 may be any ofthe various types and sizes of mold members that are well known in theart. A mold cavity 528 at least partially defined by mold members 526and gasket 510, is preferably capable of retaining a lens formingcomposition. Preferably, the seal between gasket 510 and mold members526 is as complete as possible. The height of each projection 511preferably controls the spacing between mold members 526, and thus thethickness of the finished lens. By selecting proper gaskets and moldsets, lens cavities may be created to produce lenses of various powers.

[0117] A mold assembly consists of two mold members. A front mold member526 a and a back mold member 526 b, as depicted in FIG. 11. The backmold member is also known as the convex mold member. The back moldmember preferably defines the concave surface of a convex lens.Referring back to FIGS. 9 and 10, locations where the steep axis 522 andthe flat axis 524 of the back mold member 526 b preferably lie inrelation to gasket 510 have been indicated. In conventional gaskets, araised lip may be used to space mold members. The thickness of this lipvaries over the circumference of the lip in a manner appropriate withthe type of mold set a particular gasket is designed to be used with. Inorder to have the flexibility to use a certain number of molds, anequivalent amount of conventional gaskets is typically kept in stock.

[0118] However, within a class of mold sets there may be points alongthe outer curvature of a the back mold member where each member of aclass of back mold members is shaped similarly. These points may befound at locations along gasket 510, oblique to the steep and flat axesof the mold members. In a preferred embodiment, these points are atabout 45 degree angles to the steep and flat axes of the mold members.By using discrete projections 511 to space the mold members at thesepoints, an individual gasket could be used with a variety of mold sets.Therefore, the number of gaskets that would have to be kept in stock maybe greatly reduced.

[0119] In addition, gasket 510 may include a recession 518 for receivinga lens forming composition. Lip 520 may be pulled back in order to allowa lens forming composition to be introduced into the cavity. Vent ports516 may be incorporated to facilitate the escape of air from the moldcavity as a lens forming composition is introduced.

[0120] Gasket 510 may also include a projection 540. Projection 540 mayextend from the side of the gasket toward the interior of the moldcavity when a first and second mold are assembled with the gasket. Theprojection is positioned such that a groove is formed in a plastic lensformed using the mold assembly. The groove may be positioned near anouter surface of the formed lens. In this manner the groove is formednear the interface between the mold members and the formed lens. FIG. 14depicts a side view of an lens 550 disposed between two mold members 526after curing and the removal of the gasket. A variety ofindentations/grooves may be seen along the outer surface of the lenscaused by the various projections from the gasket. Grooves 544 may becaused by the projections 511 of a gasket used to space the mold membersat the appropriate distance. Groove 546 may be caused by the projection540. The groove is positioned at the interface of the mold members andthe formed lens. While depicted as near the interface of the upper moldmember, it should be understood that the groove may also be positionedat the interface between the lower mold member and the formed lens. Inone embodiment, the fill port 538 (see FIGS. 12 and 13) may produce agroove near the interface of the upper mold member and the formed lens.The projection 511 may therefore be positioned at the interface betweenthe lower mold member and the formed lens. In this manner, two groovesmay be created at the interfaces between the formed lens and each of themold members.

[0121] After the gasket is been removed, the molds may adhere to theformed lens. In some instances a sharp object may be inserted betweenthe mold members and the formed lens to separate the formed lens fromthe mold members. The groove 546 may facilitate the separation of themold members from the formed lens by allowing the insertion of a sharpobject to pry the molds away from the formed lens.

[0122]FIGS. 12 and 13 present an isometric view and a top view,respectively, of an improved gasket. Gasket 530 may be composed ofsimilar materials as gasket 510. Like gasket 510, gasket 530 ispreferably annular, but may be take a variety of shapes. In addition,gasket 530 may incorporate projections 531 in a manner similar to theprojections 511 shown in FIG. 9. Alternatively, gasket 530 may include araised lip along interior surface 532 or another method of spacing moldmembers that is conventional in the art.

[0123] Gasket 530 preferably includes a fill port 538 for receiving alens forming composition while gasket 530 is fully engaged to a moldset. Fill port 538 preferably extends from interior surface 532 ofgasket 530 to an exterior surface 534 of gasket 530. Consequently,gasket 530 need not be partially disengaged from a mold member of a moldset in order to receive a lens forming composition. In order tointroduce a lens forming composition into the mold cavity defined by aconventional mold/gasket assembly the gasket must be at least partiallydisengaged from the mold members. During the process of filling the moldcavity, lens forming composition may drip onto the backside of a moldmember. Lens forming composition on the backside of a mold member maycause activating light used to cure the lens to become locally focused,and may cause optical distortions in the final product. Because fillport 538 allows lens forming composition to be introduced into a moldcavity while gasket 530 is fully engaged to a mold set, gasket 530preferably avoids this problem. In addition, fill port 538 may be ofsufficient size to allow air to escape during the introduction of a lensforming composition into a mold cavity; however, gasket 530 may alsoincorporate vent ports 536 to facilitate the escape of air.

[0124] A method for making a plastic eyeglass lenses using either gasket510 or 530 is presented. The method preferably includes engaging gasket510 with a first mold set for forming a first lens of a first power. Thefirst mold set preferably contains at least a front mold member 526 aand a back mold member 526 b. A mold cavity for retaining a lens formingcomposition may be at least partially defined by mold members 526 a and526 b and gasket 510. Gasket 510 is preferably characterized by at leastfour discrete projections 511 arranged on interior surface 512 forspacing the mold members. Engaging gasket 510 with the mold setpreferably includes positioning the mold members such that each of theprojections 511 forms an oblique angle with the steep and flat axis ofthe back mold member 526 b. In a preferred embodiment, this angle isabout 45 degrees. The method preferably further includes introducing alens forming composition into mold cavity 528 and curing the lensforming composition. Curing may include exposing the composition toactivating light and/or thermal radiation. After the lens is cured, thefirst mold set may be removed from the gasket and the gasket may then beengaged with a second mold set for forming a second lens of a secondpower. When using the gasket 530. the method further includesintroducing a lens forming composition through fill port 538, whereinthe first and second mold members remain fully engaged with the gasketduring the introduction of the lens forming composition. The lensforming composition may then be cured by use of activating light and/orthermal radiation.

[0125] After curing of the lens in lens curing unit 30, the lens may bede-molded and post-cured in the post-cure unit 40. Post-cure unit 40 ispreferably configured to apply light, heat or a combination of light andheat to the lens. As shown in FIG. 15, post-cure unit 40 may include alight source 414, a lens drawer assembly 416, and a heat source 418.Lens drawer assembly 416 preferably includes a lens holder 420, morepreferably at least two lens holders 420. Lens drawer assembly 416 ispreferably slidingly mounted on a guide. Preferably, lens drawerassembly 416 is made from a ceramic material. Cured lenses may be placedin lens holders 420 while the lens drawer assembly 416 is in the openposition (i.e., when the door extends from the front of post-cure unit40). After the lenses have been loaded into lens holders 420 the doormay be slid into a closed position, with the lenses directly under lightsource 414 and above heat source 418.

[0126] As shown in FIG. 15, it is preferred that the light source 414includes a plurality of light generating devices or lamps 440.Preferably, lamps 440 may be oriented above each of the lens holderswhen the lens drawer assembly is closed. The lamps 440, preferably,generate activating light. The lamps 440 may be supported by andelectrically connected to suitable fixtures 442. The fixtures may be atleast partially reflective and concave in shape to direct light from thelamps 440 toward the lens holders. The lamps may generate eitherultraviolet light, actinic light, visible light, and/or infrared light.The choice of lamps is preferably based on the monomers used in the lensforming composition. In one embodiment, the activating light may begenerated from a fluorescent lamp. The fluorescent lamp preferably has astrong emission spectra from about 200 nm to about 800 nm, morepreferably between about 200 nm to about 400 nm. A fluorescent lampemitting activating light with the described wavelengths is commerciallyavailable from Voltarc as model SNEUV RPR 4190. In another embodiment,the lamp may generate ultraviolet light.

[0127] In one embodiment, the activating light source may be turned onand off quickly between exposures. A ballast may be used for thisfunction. The ballast may be positioned beneath the post-cure unit.Alternatively, a ballast and transformer system, as depicted in FIG. 7and described above may be used to control the activating light source.

[0128] Heat source 418 may be configured to heat the interior of thepost-cure unit. Preferably, heat source 418 is a resistive heater. Heatsource 418 may be made up of one or two resistive heaters. Thetemperature of heat source 418 may be thermostatically controlled. Byheating the interior of the post-cure unit the lenses which are placedin post-cure unit 40 may be heated to complete curing of the lensforming material. Post-cure unit 40 may also include a fan to circulateair within the unit. The circulation of air within the unit may helpmaintain a relatively uniform temperature within the unit. The fan mayalso be used to cool the temperature of post-cure unit 40 aftercompletion of the post cure process.

[0129] In an embodiment, a lens cured by exposure to activating lightmay be further processed by conductive heating. The use of a conductiveheating post-cure procedure is described in detail in U.S. Pat. No.5,928,575 to Buazza which is incorporated by reference.

[0130] In another embodiment, the edges of a lens may be treated to cureor remove incompletely cured lens forming material (see abovedescription) before a post-cure heat is applied. Techniques for furthercuring of incompletely cured lens forming material are described in U.S.Pat. No. 5,976,423 to Buazza which is incorporated by reference.

[0131] In another embodiment, a lens may be tinted after receivingconductive heat postcure treatment in a mold cavity. During tinting ofthe lens, the lens is preferably immersed in a dye solution.

[0132] The operation of the lens curing system may be controlled by amicroprocessor based controller 50 (FIG. 1). Controller 50 preferablycontrols the operation of coating unit 20, lens curing unit 30, andpost-cure unit 40. Controller 50 may be configured to substantiallysimultaneously control each of these units. In addition, the controllermay include a display 52 and an input device 54. The display and inputdevice may be configured to exchange information with an operator.

[0133] Controller 50 preferably controls a number of operations relatedto the process of forming a plastic lens. Many of the operations used tomake a plastic lens (e.g., coating, curing and post-cure operations) arepreferably performed under a predetermined set of conditions based onthe prescription and type of lens being formed (e.g.,ultraviolet/visible light absorbing, photochromic, colored, etc.).Controller 50 is preferably programmed to control a number of theseoperations, thus relieving the operator from having to continuallymonitor the apparatus.

[0134] In some embodiments, the lens or mold members may be coated witha variety of coatings (e.g., a scratch resistant or tinted coating). Theapplication of these coatings may require specific conditions dependingon the type of coating to be applied. Controller 50 is preferablyconfigured to produce these conditions in response to input from theoperator.

[0135] When a spin coating unit is used, controller 50 may be configuredto control the rotation of the lens or mold member during the coatingprocess. Controller 50 is preferably electronically coupled to the motorof the spin coating unit. The controller may send electronic signals tothe motor to turn the motor on and/or off. In a typical coating processthe rate at which the mold or lens is rotated is preferably controlledto achieve a uniform and defect free coating. The controller ispreferably configured to control the rate of rotation of the mold orlens during a curing process. For example, when a coating material isbeing applied, the mold or lens is preferably spun at relatively highrotational rates (e.g., about 900 to about 950 RPM). When the coatingmaterial is being cured, however, a much slower rotational rate ispreferably used (e.g., about 200 RPM). The controller is preferablyconfigured to adjust the rotational rate of the lens or mold dependingon the process step being performed.

[0136] The controller is also preferably configured to control theoperation of lamps 24. The lamps are preferably turned on and off at theappropriate times during a coating procedure. For example, during theapplication of the coating material activating lights are typically notused, thus the controller may be configured to keep the lamps off duringthis process. During the curing process, activating light may be used toinitiate the curing of the coating material. The controller ispreferably configured to turn the lamps on and to control the amount oftime the lamps remain on during a curing of the coating material. Thecontroller may also be configured to create light pulses to affectcuring of the coating material. Both the length and frequency of thelight pulses may be controlled by the controller.

[0137] The controller is also preferably configured to control operationof the lens-curing unit. The controller may perform some and/or all of anumber of functions during the lens curing process, including, but notlimited to: (i) measuring the ambient room temperature; (ii) determiningthe dose of light (or initial dose of light in pulsed curingapplications) required to cure the lens forming composition, based onthe ambient room temperature; (iii) applying the activating light withan intensity and duration sufficient to equal the determined dose; (iv)measuring the composition's temperature response during and subsequentto the application of the dose of light; (v) calculating the doserequired for the next application of activating light (in pulsed curingapplications); (vi) applying the activating light with an intensity andduration sufficient to equal the determined second dose; (vii)determining when the curing process is complete by monitoring thetemperature response of the lens forming composition during theapplication of activating light; (viii) turning the upper and lowerlight sources on and off independently; (ix) monitoring the lamptemperature, and controlling the temperature of the lamps by activatingcooling fans proximate the lamps; and (x) turning the fans on/off orcontrolling the flow rate of an air stream produced by a fan to controlthe composition temperature. Herein, “dose” refers to the amount oflight energy applied to an object, the energy of the incident lightbeing determined by the intensity and duration of the light. Acontroller that is configured to alter the dose activating light appliedto a lens forming composition in response to the temperature of lensforming composition is described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,989,462 to Buazza etal. which is incorporated by reference.

[0138] In an embodiment, a shutter system may be used to control theapplication of activating light rays to the lens forming material. Theshutter system preferably includes air-actuated shutter plates that maybe inserted into the curing chamber to prevent activating light fromreaching the lens forming material. The shutter system may be coupled tothe controller, which may actuate an air cylinder to cause the shutterplates to be inserted or extracted from the curing chamber. Thecontroller preferably allows the insertion and extraction of the shutterplates at specified time intervals. The controller may receive signalsfrom temperature sensors allowing the time intervals in which theshutters are inserted and/or extracted to be adjusted as a function of atemperature of the lens forming composition and/or the molds. Thetemperature sensor may be located at numerous positions proximate themold cavity and/or casting chamber.

[0139] In some embodiments, the lens may require a post-curing process.The post-cure process may require specific conditions depending on thetype of lens being formed. The controller is preferably configured toproduce these conditions in response to input from the operator.

[0140] The controller is preferably configured to control the operationof lamps in the post-cure unit. The lamps are preferably turned on andoff at the appropriate times during the post-cure procedure. Forexample, in some post-cure operations the lights may not be required,thus the controller would keep the lights off during this process.During other processes, the lights may be used to complete the curing ofthe lens. The controller is preferably configured to turn the lights onand to control the amount of time the lights remain on during apost-cure procedure. The controller may also be configured to createlight pulses during the post-cure procedure. Both the length andfrequency of the light pulses may be controlled by the controller.

[0141] The controller is preferably configured to control operation ofthe heating device 418 during the post-cure operation. Heating device418 is preferably turned on and off to maintain a predeterminedtemperature within the post-cure unit. Alternatively, when a resistiveheater is used, the current flow through the heating element may bealtered to control the temperature within the post-cure unit. Preferablyboth the application of light and heat are controlled by the controller.The operation of fans, coupled to the post-cure unit, is also preferablycontrolled by the controller. The fans may be operated by the controllerto circulate air within or into/out of the post-cure unit.

[0142] Additionally, the controller may provide system diagnostics todetermine if the system is operating properly. The controller may notifythe user when routine maintenance is due or when a system error isdetected. The system monitors the following conditions to warn the userwhen the machine has malfunctioned, requires standard maintenance, or isdrifting out of its suggested operating envelope: I²C network errors;line voltage; top rack light intensity; bottom rack light intensity;post-cure rack light intensity; top activating light ballast current;bottom activating light ballast current; post-cure activating lightballast current; germicidal light ballast current; post-cure heatercurrent; top activating light filament heat transformer current; bottomactivating light filament heat transformer current; germicidal lightfilament heat transformer current; the number of times the topactivating light is turned on; the number of times the bottom activatinglight is turned on; the number of times the post-cure activating lightis turned on; the number of times the germicidal light is turned on; topactivating light on time; bottom activating light on time; post cureactivating light on time; germicidal light on time; top lamptemperature; bottom lamp temperature; spin board temperature; post-curetemperature.

[0143] For example, the controller may monitor the current passingthrough lamps of the coating, lens curing, or post-cure unit todetermine if the lamps are operating properly. The controller may keeptrack of the number of hours that the lamps have been used. When a lamphas been used for a predetermined number of hours a message may betransmitted to an operator to inform the operator that the lamps mayrequire changing. The controller may also monitor the intensity of lightproduced by the lamp. A photodiode may be placed proximate the lamps todetermine the intensity of light being produced by the lamp. If theintensity of light falls outside a predetermined range, the currentapplied to the lamp may be adjusted to alter the intensity of lightproduced (either increased to increase the intensity; or decreased todecrease the intensity). Alternatively, the controller may transmit amessage informing the operator that a lamp needs to be changed when theintensity of light produced by the lamp drops below a predeterminedvalue.

[0144] When the machine encounters an error in these areas, thefollowing error messages may be displayed:

[0145] post cure temperature

[0146] The temperature of your post cure is out of its suggestedoperating range. If the lens drawer is closed, the unit has hadsufficient warm-up time, and the problem continues after a systemrestart, your machine may need service.

[0147] light intensity

[0148] Your ______ light source output has dropped below its recommendedrange. If the problem continues after a system restart, you may need toreplace your ______ lamps.

[0149] lamp power

[0150] Your ______ lamps are not functioning properly. If the problemcontinues after a system restart, you may need to replace your ______lamps.

[0151] filament heat power

[0152] Your ______ lamps are not functioning properly. If the problemcontinues after a system restart, you may need to replace your ______lamps.

[0153] lamp on time

[0154] Your ______ lamps have exceeded their expected life. Pleasereplace your ______ lamps.

[0155] PC heaters

[0156] The heaters in your post cure unit are not functioning properly.If the problem continues after a system restart, your machine may needservice

[0157] The controller may also manage an interlock system for safety andenergy conservation purposes. If the lens drawer assembly from thecoating or post-cure units are open the controller is preferablyconfigured to prevent the lamps from turning on. This may prevent theoperator from inadvertently becoming exposed to the light from thelamps. Lamps 24 for the coating unit 20 are preferably positioned oncover 22 (See FIG. 1). In order to prevent inadvertent exposure of theoperator to light from lamps 24 a switch is preferably built into thecover, as described above. The controller is preferably configured toprevent the lamps 24 from turning on when the cover is open. Thecontroller may also automatically turn lamps 24 off if the cover isopened when the lenses are on. Additionally, the controller may conserveenergy by keeping fans and other cooling devices off when the lamps areoff.

[0158] The controller may display a number of messages indicatingproblems that prevent further operation of the lens forming apparatus.Process tips appear in the appropriate location on the display (over abutton when related to that function, at the top and flashing whenimportant, etc.). The controller uses the following list of tips toinstruct the user during machine use. The list is in order of priority(i.e. the tip at the top of the list is displayed if both it and thesecond item need to be displayed simultaneously).

[0159] WARNING JOBS RUNNING, CONFIRM PURGE

[0160] WARNING JOBS RUNNING, CONFIRM RERUN

[0161] ROTATE ENCODER TO CONFIRM PURGE

[0162] NOT ALLOWED WHILE JOBS RUNNING

[0163] MOVE CAVITY TO POST-CURE & PRESS THE KEY

[0164] CLOSE LID

[0165] PRESS & HOLD TO RERUN POST-CURE PROCESS

[0166] PRESS & HOLD TO RERUN CURE PROCESS

[0167] PRESS & HOLD TO RERUN ANNEAL PROCESS

[0168] PRESS & HOLD TO CANCEL

[0169] PRESS & HOLD TO RERUN COAT PROCESS

[0170] PRESS THE CURE KEY TO START JOB

[0171] MUST WAIT FOR POST-CURE TO COMPLETE

[0172] MUST WAIT FOR POST-CURE TO START

[0173] MUST SPIN LEFT AND RIGHT BOWLS

[0174] NO JOBS CURRENTLY IN MEMORY

[0175] ROTATE ENCODER TO SELECT JOB

[0176] NO CURED JOBS AVAILABLE TO POST-CURE

[0177] NO JOBS READY TO ANNEAL

[0178] LEFT MOLD DOES NOT EXIST, RE-ENTER RX

[0179] RIGHT MOLD DOES NOT EXIST, RE-ENTER RX

[0180] MOLDS NOT IN KIT, ACCEPT OR RE-ENTER RX

[0181] ROTATE ENCODER TO SELECT SAVE OR DISCARD

[0182] PRESS ENCODER WHEN READY

[0183] . . . PLEASE WAIT WHILE COMPUTING

[0184] ANNEAL COMPLETE

[0185] COAT COMPLETE

[0186] POST-CURE COMPLETE, DEMOLD & ANNEAL

[0187] MOLDS DO NOT EXIST, RE-ENTER RX

[0188] RIGHT MOLD NOT IN KIT, ACCEPT|RE-ENTER

[0189] LEFT MOLD NOT IN KIT, ACCEPT|RE-ENTER

[0190] THERE ARE NO STORED Rx's TO EDIT

[0191] THERE ARE NO JOBS TO PURGE/RERUN

[0192] THERE ARE NO STORED JOBS TO VIEW

[0193] THERE ARE NO STORED JOBS TO EDIT

[0194] The controller may also be configured to interact with theoperator. The controller preferably includes an input device 54 and adisplay screen 52. The input device may be a keyboard (e.g., a fullcomputer keyboard or a modified keyboard), a light sensitive pad, atouch sensitive pad, or similar input device. A number the parameterscontrolled by the controller may be dependent on the input of theoperator. In the initial set up of the apparatus, the controller mayallow the operator to input the type of lens being formed. Thisinformation may include type of lens (clear, ultraviolet absorbing,photochromic, colored, etc.), prescription, and type of coatings (e.g.,scratch resistant or tint).

[0195] Based on this information the controller is preferably configuredto transmit information back to the operator. The operator may beinstructed to select mold members for the mold assembly. The moldmembers may be coded such that the controller may indicate to theoperator which molds to select by transmitting the code for each moldmember. The controller may also determine the type of gasket required toproperly seal the mold members together. Like the mold members, thegaskets may also be coded to make the selection of the appropriategasket easier.

[0196] The lens forming compositions may also be coded. For theproduction of certain kinds of lenses a specific lens formingcomposition may be required. The controller may be configured todetermine the specific composition required and transmit the code forthat composition to the operator. The controller may also signal to theoperator when certain operations need to be performed or when aparticular operation is completed (e.g., when to place the mold assemblyin the lens curing unit, when to remove the mold assembly, when totransfer the mold assembly, etc.).

[0197] The controller may also display Help functions to instruct theuser on machine use and give general process guidance. The followingparagraphs are examples of some of the help files that may be availableto an operator:

[0198] 1) NAVIGATION AND DATA ENTRY

[0199] The information entry knob is used for most data selection andentry. Rotating the knob moves the cursor in menus and scrolls throughchoices on data entry screens. Pressing the knob down enters theselection. Prompts at the top of the screen help the user through theprocess. The arrow keys allow for correction of previously entered dataand can be used as an alternative to the data entry knob duringnavigation.

[0200] The menu key returns the user to the previous menu.

[0201] The help key gives general process help and also shows machinemalfunctions when there is a problem with the system. When an error ispresent, the user will be given information about any errors andsuggested courses of action to remedy them.

[0202] 2) SCREEN DESCRIPTIONS

[0203] NEW Rx

[0204] Prescription information is entered in this screen. Theavailability of molds is displayed on this screen in real time. Moldsthat are available have a checkmark next to them. Molds that can beadded to your kit are displayed with a box next to them. Powers that areout of the range of the machine will produce dashes in the area wherethe mold information is normally shown. When all prescriptioninformation is entered the data entry knob is pressed and the job issaved in memory. The view screen displays the data for cavity creation.If the data was entered in plus cylinder format, it will be transposedand shown in minus cylinder form. If you need to see the data as it wasinput, it is available in the EDIT Rx screen in both plus and minuscylinder forms.

[0205] VIEW and EDIT

[0206] Allow the user to see and modify jobs that are in memory. Oncethe view or edit selection is made on the main menu, the user can scrollthrough all jobs that have been saved. When using edit, pressing thedata entry knob will move the cursor into an edit screen where thedisplayed job's prescription can be modified. In the view menu, pressingthe knob will put the user at the main menu.

[0207] PURGE/RERUN JOB

[0208] Allows the user to delete and rerun jobs if necessary. When asingle lens of a pair needs to be rerun, edit job can be used to changethe job type to left or right only after rerun is selected for that job.Purge all jobs clears all jobs from the memory. If you would like tostart your job numbering back at zero, this feature is used.

[0209] INSTRUMENT STATUS

[0210] Shows the current status of individual sections of themachine—spin speeds, current being delivered to a device, network errorsetc. These screens are useful when diagnosing errors. The system'sserial numbers and software version numbers are also in the statusscreens.

[0211] ADVANCED

[0212] The advanced menu contains all user adjustable settings, programupload options, and mold kit selections. This menu is password protectedto minimize the risk that changes will be made by accident. Whenpassword is displayed, pressing the data entry knob lets the user entera password by rotating the data entry knob. Press the knob when theproper password is dialed in. Incorrect passwords will return the userto the password screen. The proper password will take the user to theadvanced menu which functions like the main menu. Within these menus,when the desired field is highlighted, the data entry knob is pressedand parentheses appear around the field indicating that it is changeableby rotating the data entry knob. When the proper value is selected,pressing the knob again removes the parentheses and sets the field tothe value selected. In the date and time setting screen, changes willnot be saved until the save settings field is highlighted and the dataentry knob is pressed. The kit menu allows the user to select theavailable mold package and power range.

[0213] 3) RUNNING A JOB

[0214] Making lenses is a 3 part process. Applying a scratch resistantcoating is optional and is covered at the end of this section.

[0215] When the user enters a prescription and saves the job, the viewscreen displays the data required to retrieve the molds and gasketnecessary for each lens. The system is designed for minus cylinderformat prescriptions. If the Rx information is entered in plus cylinderformat, it will be transposed and returned in minus cylinder form. Thecavity must be assembled based on the view screen data (the axis will be90° different from the plus cylinder input). The original prescriptioncan be viewed at the Edit Rx screen along with its transposed returninformation.

[0216] Before assembling a cavity, the molds and gasket must bethoroughly cleaned. Any contaminants on the molds or gasket may beincluded in the finished lens rendering it undispensable. Spin clean thecasting side of each mold with EPA and acetone. Assemble the cavitynext, ensuring that the axis is set properly. Fill the cavity with theappropriate monomer. A filled cavity should not be exposed to room lightfor more than 3 minutes. High ambient light levels caused by windows orhigh intensity room lighting can significantly shorten the allowableroom light exposure time.

[0217] CURING

[0218] Press the cure button to initiate a curing cycle. Rotating thedata entry knob will allow the user to select the job to be run. Thenecessary filters for the cycle are displayed with the job number. Whenthe correct job is displayed, press the cure key. The area over the keyinstructs you to put in the pair or the left or right lens only. Ensurethat the left and right lenses are always on the proper side of thechamber. Put the cavity in the initial curing drawer and press the curebutton. When the initial cure is done, transfer the cavity or cavitiesto the front part of the post cure drawer and press the post cure key.If the job was split because of power differences in the left and rightlenses, the area over the cure button will instruct the user to insertthe second cavity in the initial cure drawer and press the cure keyagain (the first cavity should be in the post cure when performing theinitial curing step on the second cavity). When prompted, move thecavity to the post cure section and press the post cure button again.

[0219] POST CURING

[0220] The front openings in the post cure oven drawer are used to postcure the cavities. When the post cure cycle is over, press the post curekey, remove the cavities from the post cure chamber, and allow them tocool for 1 to 2 minutes. After the cooling period, remove the gasket andseparate one mold from each assembly with the demolding tool. The toolis inserted in the gap created by the tab on the gasket and the mold isgently pried off the assembly. Place the remaining lens and mold in theQ-Soak container to separate the mold from the lens. Clean the lensesand proceed to the annealing step.

[0221] ANNEALING

[0222] If more than one job is available for annealing, the user canchoose which job they would like to anneal by rotating the data entryknob when the area over the anneal button displays a job number. Pressthe anneal button when the proper job is displayed. The cleaned lens isplaced over the rear openings of the post cure chamber drawer. Press theanneal key when prompted at the end of the annealing cycle.

[0223] COATING

[0224] Scratch coating is optional and is applied in the spin bowls ofthe main chamber. The timed buttons by the spin bowls initiate the coatcuring cycle. When the front molds are cleaned and coated, the hood isclosed and a 90 second curing cycle is started for the coatings. Whenthe cycle is complete, the light turns off, the motors stop, and thecontroller signals the user that the molds are ready. The cavity isassembled in the normal fashion and the lens monomer is dispensed intothe cavity.

[0225] Lens coating is also available and is applied to the finishedlens after the annealing step is complete.

[0226] 4) TINTING TIPS

[0227] After edging, lenses may be tinted by conventional means. As withmany modern lens materials, tinting results may be improved withslightly modified handling procedures. First, when mounting the lensesin the dye holders, do not use spring-type holders or apply excessivepressure to the lenses. Lenses become somewhat flexible at dye tanktemperatures and may bend. Faster and more uniform dye absorption willbe achieved if the lenses are agitated in a slow back and forth motionwhile in the dye tank.

[0228] In some embodiments, the controller may be a computer system. Acomputer system may include a memory medium on which computer programsconfigured to perform the above described operations of the controllerare stored. The term “memory medium” is intended to include aninstallation medium, e.g., a CD-ROM, or floppy disks, a computer systemmemory such as DRAM, SRAM, EDO RAM, Rambus RAM, etc., or a non-volatilememory such as a magnetic media, e.g., a hard drive, or optical storage.The memory medium may comprise other types of memory as well, orcombinations thereof. In addition, the memory medium may be located in afirst computer in which the programs are executed, or may be located ina second different computer that connects to the first computer over anetwork. In the latter instance, the second computer provides theprogram instructions to the first computer for execution. Also, thecomputer system may take various forms, including a personal computersystem, mainframe computer system, workstation, network appliance,Internet appliance, personal digital assistant (PDA), television systemor other device. In general, the term “computer system” can be broadlydefined to encompass any device having a processor which executesinstructions from a memory medium.

[0229] The memory medium preferably stores a software program forcontrolling the operation of a lens forming apparatus. The softwareprogram may be implemented in any of various ways, includingprocedure-based techniques, component-based techniques, and/orobject-oriented techniques, among others. For example, the softwareprogram may be implemented using ActiveX controls, C++ objects,JavaBeans, Microsoft Foundation Classes (MFC), or other technologies ormethodologies, as desired. A CPU, such as the host CPU, executing codeand data from the memory medium comprises a means for creating andexecuting the software program according to the methods or flowchartsdescribed below.

[0230] Various embodiments further include receiving or storinginstructions and/or data implemented in accordance with the foregoingdescription upon a carrier medium. Suitable carrier media include memorymedia or storage media such as magnetic or optical media, e.g., disk orCD-ROM, as well as signals such as electrical, electromagnetic, ordigital signals, conveyed via a communication medium such as networksand/or a wireless link.

Lens Forming Compositions

[0231] The lens forming material may include any suitable liquid monomeror monomer mixture and any suitable photosensitive initiator. As usedherein “monomer” is taken to mean any compound capable of undergoing apolymerization reaction. Monomers may include non-polymerized materialor partially polymerized material. When partially polymerized materialis used as a monomer, the partially polymerized material preferablycontains functional groups capable of undergoing further reaction toform a new polymer. The lens forming material preferably includes aphotoinitiator that interacts with activating light. In one embodiment,the photoinitiator absorbs ultraviolet light having a wavelength in therange of 300 to 400 nm. In another embodiment, the photoinitiatorabsorbs actinic light having a wavelength in the range of about 380 nmto 490 nm. The liquid lens forming material is preferably filtered forquality control and placed in the lens molding cavity 382 by pulling theannular gasket 380 away from one of the opposed mold members 378 andinjecting the liquid lens forming material into the lens molding cavity382 (See FIG. 11). Once the lens molding cavity 382 is filled with suchmaterial, the annular gasket 380 is preferably replaced into its sealingrelation with the opposed mold members 378.

[0232] Those skilled in the art will recognize that once the cured lensis removed from the lens molding cavity 382 by disassembling the opposedmold members 378, the lens may be further processed in a conventionalmanner, such as by grinding its peripheral edge.

[0233] A polymerizable lens forming composition includes anaromatic-containing bis(allyl carbonate)-functional monomer and at leastone polyethylenic-functional monomer containing two ethylenicallyunsaturated groups selected from acrylyl or methacrylyl. In a preferredembodiment, the composition further includes a suitable photoinitiator.In other preferred embodiments, the composition may include one or morepolyethylenic-functional monomers containing three ethylenicallyunsaturated groups selected from acrylyl or methacrylyl, and a dye. Thelens forming composition may also include activating light absorbingcompounds such as ultraviolet light absorbing compounds and photochromiccompounds. Examples of these compositions are described in more detailin U.S. Pat. No. 5,989,462 to Buazza et al. which is incorporated byreference.

[0234] In another embodiment, an ophthalmic eyeglass lens may be madefrom a lens forming composition comprising a monomer composition and aphotoinitiator composition.

[0235] The monomer composition preferably includes an aromaticcontaining polyethylenic polyether functional monomer. In an embodiment,the polyether employed is an ethylene oxide derived polyether, propyleneoxide derived polyether, or mixtures thereof. Preferably, the polyetheris an ethylene oxide derived polyether. The aromatic polyetherpolyethylenic functional monomer preferably has the general structure(V), depicted below where each R₂ is a polymerizable unsaturated group,m and n are independently 1 or 2, and the average values of j and k areeach independently in the range of from about 1 to about 20. Commonpolymerizable unsaturated groups include vinyl, allyl, allyl carbonate,methacrylyl, acrylyl, methacrylate, and acrylate.

R₂—[CH₂—(CH₂)_(m)—O]_(j)—A₁—[O—(CH₂)_(n)—CH₂]_(k)—R₂

[0236] A₁ is the divalent radical derived from a dihydroxyaromatic-containing material. A subclass of the divalent radical A₁which is of particular usefulness is represented by formula (II):

[0237] in which each R₁ is independently alkyl containing from 1 toabout 4 carbon atoms, phenyl, or halo; the average value of each (a) isindependently in the range of from 0 to 4; each Q is independently oxy,sulfonyl, alkanediyl having from 2 to about 4 carbon atoms, oralkylidene having from 1 to about 4 carbon atoms; and the average valueof n is in the range of from 0 to about 3. Preferably Q ismethylethylidene, viz., isopropylidene.

[0238] Preferably the value of n is zero, in which case A₁ isrepresented by formula (III):

[0239] in which each R₁, each a, and Q are as discussed with respect toFormula II. Preferably the two free bonds are both in the ortho or parapositions. The para positions are especially preferred.

[0240] In an embodiment, when para, para-bisphenols are chain extendedwith ethylene oxide, the central portion of the aromatic containingpolyethylenic polyether functional monomer may be represented by theformula:

[0241] where each R₁, each a, and Q are as discussed with respect toFormula II, and the average values of j and k are each independently inthe range of from about 1 to about 20.

[0242] In another embodiment, the polyethylenic functional monomer is anaromatic polyether polyethylenic functional monomer containing at leastone group selected from acrylyl or methacrylyl. Preferably the aromaticpolyether polyethylenic functional monomer containing at least one groupselected from acrylate and methacrylate has the general structure (VI),depicted below where R₀ is hydrogen or methyl, where each R₁, each a,and Q are as discussed with respect to Formula II, where the values of jand k are each independently in the range of from about 1 to about 20,and where R₂ is a polymerizable unsaturated group (e.g., vinyl, allyl,allyl carbonate, methacrylyl, acrylyl, methacrylate, or acrylate).

[0243] In one embodiment, the aromatic containing polyetherpolyethylenic functional monomer is preferably an ethoxylated bisphenolA di(meth)acrylate. Ethoxylated bisphenol A di(meth)acrylates have thegeneral structure depicted below where each R₀ is independently hydrogenor methyl, each R₁, each a, and Q are as discussed with respect toFormula II, and the values of j and k are each independently in therange of from about 1 to about 20.

[0244] Preferred ethoxylated bisphenol A dimethacrylates includeethoxylated 2 bisphenol A diacrylate (where j+k=2, and R₀ is H),ethoxylated 2 bisphenol A dimethacrylate (where j+k=2, and R₀ is Me),ethoxylated 3 bisphenol A diacrylate (where j+k=3, and R₀ is H),ethoxylated 4 bisphenol A diacrylate (where j+k=4, and R₀ is H),ethoxylated 4 bisphenol A dimethacrylate (where j+k=4, and R₀ is Me),ethoxylated 6 bisphenol A dimethacrylate (where j+k=6, and R₀ is Me),ethoxylated 8 bisphenol A dimethacrylate (where j+k=8, and R₀ is Me),ethoxylated 10 bisphenol A diacrylate (where j+k=10, and R₀ is H),ethoxylated 10 bisphenol A dimethacrylate (where j+k=10, and R₀ is Me),ethoxylated 30 bisphenol A diacrylate (where j+k=30, and R₀ is H),ethoxylated 30 bisphenol A dimethacrylate (where j+k=30, and R₀ is Me).These compounds are commercially available from Sartomer Company underthe trade names PRO-631, SR-348, SR-349, SR-601, CD-540, CD-541, CD-542,SR-602, SR-480, SR-9038, and SR-9036 respectively. Other ethoxylatedbisphenol A dimethacrylates include ethoxylated 3 bisphenol Adimethacrylate (where j+k=3, and R₀ is Me), ethoxylated 6 bisphenol Adiacrylate (where j+k=30, and R₀ is H), and ethoxylated 8 bisphenol Adiacrylate (where j+k=30, and R₀ is H). In all of the above describedcompounds Q is C(CH₃)₂.

[0245] The monomer composition preferably may also include apolyethylenic functional monomer. Polyethylenic functional monomers aredefined herein as organic molecules which include two or morepolymerizable unsaturated groups. Common polymerizable unsaturatedgroups include vinyl, allyl, allyl carbonate, methacrylyl, acrylyl,methacrylate, and acrylate. Preferably, the polyethylenic functionalmonomers have the general formula (VII) or (VIII) depicted below, whereeach R₀ is independently hydrogen, halo, or a C₁-C₄ alkyl group andwhere A₁ is as described above. It should be understood that whilegeneral structures (VII) and (VIII) are depicted as having only twopolymerizable unsaturated groups, polyethylenic functional monomershaving three (e.g., tri(meth)acrylates), four (e.g.,tetra(meth)acrylates), five (e.g., penta(meth)acrylates), six (e.g.,hexa(meth)acrylates) or more groups may be used.

[0246] Preferred polyethylenic functional monomers which may be combinedwith an aromatic containing polyethylenic polyether functional monomerto form the monomer composition include, but are not limited to,ethoxylated 2 bisphenol A dimethacrylate,tris(2-hydroxyethyl)isocyanurate triacrylate, ethoxylated 10 bisphenol Adimethacrylate, ethoxylated 4 bisphenol A dimethacrylate,dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate, 1,6-hexanediol dimethacrylate,isobornyl acrylate, pentaerythritol triacrylate, ethoxylated 6trimethylolpropane triacrylate, and bisphenol A bis allyl carbonate.

[0247] According to one embodiment, the liquid lens forming compositionincludes ethoxylated 4 bisphenol A dimethacrylate. Ethoxylated 4bisphenol A dimethacrylate monomer, when cured to form an eyeglass lens,typically produces lenses that have a higher index of refraction thancomparable lenses produced using DEG-BAC. Lenses formed from such amid-index lens forming composition which includes ethoxylated 4bisphenol A dimethacrylate may have an index of refraction of about 1.56compared to the non-ethoxylated monomer compositions which tend to havean index of refraction of about 1.51. A lens made from a higher index ofrefraction polymer may be thinner than a lens made from a lower index ofrefraction polymer because the differences in the radii of curvaturebetween the front and back surface of the lens do not have to be asgreat to produce a lens of a desired focal power. Lenses formed from alens forming composition which includes ethoxylated 4 bisphenol Adimethacrylate may also be more rigid than lenses formed fromnon-ethoxylated monomer based compositions.

[0248] The monomer composition may include additional monomers, which,when combined with ethoxylated 4 bisphenol A dimethacrylate, may modifythe properties of the formed eyeglass lens and/or the lens formingcomposition. Tris(2-hydroxyethyl)isocyanurate triacrylate, availablefrom Sartomer under the trade name SR-368, is a triacrylate monomer thatmay be included in the composition to provide improved clarity, hightemperature rigidity, and impact resistance properties to the finishedlens. Ethoxylated 10 bisphenol A dimethacrylate, available from Sartomerunder the trade name SR-480, is a diacrylate monomer that may beincluded in the composition to provide impact resistance properties tothe finished lens. Ethoxylated 2 bisphenol A dimethacrylate, availablefrom Sartomer under the trade name SR-348, is a diacrylate monomer thatmay be included in the composition to provide tintability properties tothe finished lens. Dipentaerythritol pentaacrylate, available fromSartomer under the trade name SR-399, is a pentaacrylate monomer thatmay be included in the composition to provide abrasion resistanceproperties to the finished lens. 1,6-hexanediol dimethacrylate,available from Sartomer under the trade name SR-239, is a diacrylatemonomer that may be included in the composition to reduce the viscosityof the lens forming composition. Isobornyl acrylate, available fromSartomer under the trade name SR-506, is an acrylate monomer that may beincluded in the composition to reduce the viscosity of the lens formingcomposition and enhance tinting characteristics. Bisphenol A bis allylcarbonate may be included in the composition to control the rate ofreaction during cure and also improve the shelf life of the lens formingcomposition. Pentaerythritol triacrylate, available from Sartomer underthe trade name SR-444, is a triacrylate monomer that may be included inthe composition to promote better adhesion of the lens formingcomposition to the molds during curing. Ethoxylated 6 trimethylolpropanetriacrylate, available from Sartomer under the trade name SR-454, mayalso be added.

[0249] Photoinitiators which may be used in the lens forming compositionhave been described in previous sections. In one embodiment, thephotoinitiator composition preferably includes phenylbis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) phosphine oxide (IRG-819) which iscommercially available from Ciba Additives under the trade name ofIrgacure 819. The amount of Irgacure 819 present in a lens formingcomposition preferably ranges from about 30 ppm by weight to about 2000ppm by weight. In another embodiment, the photoinitiator composition mayinclude a mixture of photoinitiator. Preferably, a mixture of Irgacure819 and 1-hydroxycyclohexylphenyl ketone, commercially available fromCiba Additives under the trade name of Irgacure 184 (IRG-184), is used.Preferably, the total amount of photoinitiators in the lens formingcomposition ranges from about 50 ppm to about 1000 ppm.

[0250] In another embodiment, an ophthalmic eyeglass lens may be madefrom lens forming composition comprising a monomer composition, aphotoinitiator composition, and a co-initiator composition. The lensforming composition, in liquid form, is preferably placed in a moldcavity defined by a first mold member and a second mold member. It isbelieved that activating light which is directed toward the mold membersto activate the photoinitiator composition causes the photoinitiator toform a polymer chain radical. The co-initiator may react with a fragmentor an active species of either the photoinitiator or the polymer chainradical to produce a monomer initiating species. The polymer chainradical and the monomer initiating species may react with the monomer tocause polymerization of the lens forming composition.

[0251] The monomer composition preferably includes an aromaticcontaining polyethylenic polyether functional monomer having a structureas shown above. Preferably, the polyethylenic functional monomer is anaromatic polyether polyethylenic functional monomer containing at leastone group selected from acrylyl or methacrylyl.

[0252] More preferably, the polyethylenic functional monomer is anethoxylated bisphenol A di(meth)acrylate. The monomer composition mayinclude a mixture of polyethylenic functional monomers, as describedabove. The photoinitiators which may be present in the lens formingcomposition have been described above.

[0253] The lens forming composition preferably includes a co-initiatorcomposition. The co-initiator composition preferably includes amineco-initiators. Amines are defined herein as compounds of nitrogenformally derived from ammonia (NH₃) by replacement of the hydrogens ofammonia with organic substituents. Co-initiators include acrylyl amineco-initiators commercially available from Sartomer Company under thetrade names of CN-381, CN-383, CN-384, and CN-386, where theseco-initiators are monoacrylyl amines, diacrylyl amines, or mixturesthereof. Other co-initiators include ethanolamines. Examples ofethanolamines include but are not limited to N-methyldiethanolamine(NMDEA) and triethanolamine (TEA) both commercially available fromAldrich Chemicals. Aromatic amines (e.g., aniline derivatives) may alsobe used as co-initiators. Example of aromatic amines include, but arenot limited to, ethyl-4-dimethylaminobenzoate (E-4-DMAB),ethyl-2-dimethylaminobenzoate (E-2-DMAB),n-butoxyethyl-4-dimethylaminobenzoate, p-dimethylaminobenzaldehyde,N,N-dimethyl-p-toluidine, and octyl-p-(dimethylamino)benzoatecommercially available from Aldrich Chemicals or The First ChemicalGroup of Pascagoula, Miss.

[0254] Preferably, acrylated amines are included in the co-initiatorcomposition. Acrylyl amines may have the general structures depicted inFIG. 39, where R₀ is hydrogen or methyl, n and m are 1 to 20, preferably1-4, and R₁ and R₂ are independently alkyl containing from 1 to about 4carbon atoms or phenyl. Monoacrylyl amines may include at least oneacrylyl or methacrylyl group (see compounds (A) and (B) in FIG. 16).Diacrylyl amines may include two acrylyl, two methacrylyl, or a mixtureof acrylyl or methacrylyl groups (see compounds (C) and (D) in FIG. 16).Acrylyl amines are commercially available from Sartomer Company underthe trade names of CN-381, CN-383, CN-384, and CN-386, where theseco-initiators are monoacrylyl amines, diacrylyl amines, or mixturesthereof. Other acrylyl amines include dimethylaminoethyl methacrylateand dimethylaminoethyl acrylate both commercially available fromAldrich. In one embodiment, the co-initiator composition preferablyincludes a mixture of CN-384 and CN-386. Preferably, the total amount ofco-initiators in the lens forming composition ranges from about 50 ppmto about 7% by weight.

[0255] An advantage to lens forming compositions which include aco-initiator is that less photoinitiator may be used to initiate curingof the lens forming composition. Typically, plastic lenses are formedfrom a lens forming composition which includes a photoinitiator and amonomer. To improve the hardness of the formed lenses the concentrationof photoinitiator may be increased. Increasing the concentration ofphotoinitiator, however, may cause increased yellowing of the formedlens, as has been described previously. To offset this increase inyellowing, a permanent dye may be added to the lens forming composition.As the amount of yellowing is increased the amount of dye added may alsobe increased. Increasing the concentration of the dye may cause thelight transmissibility of the lens to decrease.

[0256] A lens forming composition that includes a co-initiator may beused to reduce the amount of photoinitiator used. To improve thehardness of the formed lenses a mixture of photoinitiator andco-initiator may be used to initiate curing of the monomer. Theabove-described co-initiators typically do not significantly contributeto the yellowing of the formed lens. By adding co-initiators to the lensforming composition, the amount of photoinitiator may be reduced.Reducing the amount of photoinitiator may decrease the amount ofyellowing in the formed lens. This allows the amount of dyes added tothe lens forming composition to be reduced and light transmissibility ofthe formed lens may be improved without sacrificing the rigidity of thelens.

[0257] The lens forming composition may also include activating lightabsorbing compounds. These compounds may absorb at least a portion ofthe activating light which is directed toward the lens formingcomposition during curing. One example of activating light absorbingcompounds are photochromic compounds. Photochromic compounds which maybe added to the lens forming composition have been previously described.Preferably, the total amount of photochromic compounds in the lensforming composition ranges from about 1 ppm to about 1000 ppm. Examplesof photochromic compounds which may be used in the lens formingcomposition include, but are not limited to Corn Yellow, Berry Red, SeaGreen, Plum Red, Variacrol Yellow, Palatinate Purple, CH-94, VariacrolBlue D, Oxford Blue and CH-266. Preferably, a mixture of these compoundsis used. Variacrol Yellow is a napthopyran material, commerciallyavailable from Great Lakes Chemical in West Lafayette, Ind. Corn Yellowand Berry Red are napthopyrans and Sea Green, Plum Red and PalatinatePurple are spironaphthoxazine materials commercially available fromKeystone Aniline Corporation in Chicago, Ill. Variacrol Blue D andOxford Blue are spironaphthoxazine materials, commercially availablefrom Great Lakes Chemical in West Lafayette, Ind. CH-94 and CH-266 arebenzopyran materials, commercially available from Chroma Chemicals inDayton, Ohio. The composition of a Photochromic Dye Mixture which may beadded to the lens forming composition is described in Table 1.Photochromic Dye Mixture Corn Yellow 22.3% Berry Red 19.7% Sea Green14.8% Plum Red 14.0% Variacrol Yellow  9.7% Palatinate Purple  7.6%CH-94  4.0% Variacrol Blue D  3.7% Oxford Blue  2.6% CH-266  1.6%

[0258] The lens forming composition may also other activating lightabsorbing compounds such as UV stabilizers, UV absorbers, and dyes. UVstabilizers, such as Tinuvin 770 may be added to reduce the rate ofdegradation of the formed lens caused by exposure to ultraviolet light.UV absorbers, such as2-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-4-(1,1,3,3,-tetramethylbutyl)phenol, may beadded to the composition to provide UV blocking characteristics to theformed lens. Small amounts of dyes, such as Thermoplast Blue 684 andThermoplast Red from BASF may be added to the lens forming compositionto counteract yellowing. These classes of compounds have been describedin greater detail in previous sections.

[0259] In an embodiment, a UV absorbing composition may be added to thelens forming composition. The UV absorbing composition preferablyincludes a photoinitiator and a UV absorber. Photoinitiators and UVabsorbers have been described in greater detail in previous sections.Typically, the concentration of UV absorber in the lens formingcomposition required to achieve desirable UV blocking characteristics isin the range from about 0.1 to about 0.25% by weight. For example,2-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-4-(1,1,3,3,-tetramethylbutyl)phenol may beadded to the lens forming composition as a UV absorber at aconcentration of about 0.17%.

[0260] By mixing a photoinitiator with a UV absorbing compound thecombined concentration of the photoinitiator and the UV absorberrequired to achieve the desired UV blocking characteristics in theformed lens may be lower than the concentration of UV absorber requiredif used alone. For example,2-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-4-(1,1,3,3,-tetramethylbutyl)phenol may beadded to the lens forming composition as a UV absorber at aconcentration of about 0.17% to achieve the desired UV blockingcharacteristics for the formed lens. Alternatively, a UV absorbingcomposition may be formed by a combination of2-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-4-(1,1,3,3,-tetramethylbutyl)phenol with thephotoinitiator 2-isopropyl-thioxanthone (ITX), commercially availablefrom Aceto Chemical in Flushing, N.Y. To achieve similar UV blockingcharacteristics in the formed lens, significantly less of the UVabsorbing composition may be added to the lens forming composition,compared to the amount of UV absorber used by itself. For example,2-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-4-(1,1,3,3,-tetramethylbutyl)phenol at aconcentration of about 700 ppm, with respect to the lens formingcomposition, along with 150 ppm of the photoinitiator2-isopropyl-thioxanthone (2-ITX) may be used to provide UV blockingcharacteristics. Thus, a significant reduction, (e.g., from 0.15% downto less than about 1000 ppm), in the concentration of UV absorber may beachieved, without a reduction in the UV blocking ability of thesubsequently formed lens. An advantage of lowering the amount of UVabsorbing compounds present in the lens forming composition is that thesolubility of the various components of the composition may be improved.

[0261] Tables 2-6 list some examples of mid-index lens formingcompositions. The UV absorber is2-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-4-(1,1,3,3,-tetramethylbutyl)phenol. TABLE 2Ingredient Formula 1 Formula 2 Formula 3 Formula 4 Formula 5 Formula 6Irgacure 819 694.2 ppm 486 ppm 480 ppm 382 ppm 375 ppm 414 ppm Irgacure184 CN 384  0.962%  0.674%  0.757%  0.62%  0.61%  0.66% CN386  0.962% 0.674%  0.757%  0.62%  0.61%  0.66% SR-348  97.98%  68.65%  98.2% 81.2%  79 6%  86 4% SR-368 SR-480  29.95% CD-540 SR-399 SR-239  2.0% 20 8% SR-506 CR-73  17.2%  16.9%  10.0% PRO-629 Tinuvin 770 290 ppm UVAbsorber  0.173% Thermoplast  0.534 ppm  0.374 ppm  0.6 ppm  0.5 ppm 4.5 ppm 4.58 ppm Blue Thermoplast  0.019 ppm  0.0133  0.015 ppm  0.012ppm  0.58 ppm  0.58 ppm Red  ppm Mineral Oil 136 ppm  65 ppmPhotochromic 470 ppm 507 ppm Dye Mixture

[0262] TABLE 3 Ingredient Formula 7 Formula 8 Formula 9 Formula 10Formula 11 Formula 12 Irgacure 819 531.2 ppm 462 ppm 565.9 ppm 226 ppm443 ppm 294 ppm Irgacure 184  18.7 ppm 144 ppm CN 384  0.77%  0.887% 0.78%  0.40%  0.61% CN386  0.77%  0.887%  0.78%  0.53%  0.61% SR-348 72.4%  70.36%  58.20%  41.5%  88.70% SR-368  24.1%  23.87%  21.4%  70%SR-480 CD-540  18.7%  0.74%  97.76% SR-399  46.8% SR-239  1.86%  3.65% 20.1%  2.00% SR-506  10.0% CR-73  20.1%  2.9% PRO-629  0.05% Tinuvin770 UV Absorber Thermoplast  0.567 ppm  3.62 ppm  0.70 ppm  0.255 ppm 0.6 ppm  4.3 ppm Blue Thermoplast  0.0147 ppm  0.576 ppm  0.014 ppm 0.006 ppm  0.028 ppm  0.24 ppm Red Photochromic 450 ppm Dye Mixture

[0263] TABLE 4 Ingredient Formula 13 Formula 14 Formula 15 Formula 16Formula 17 Formula 18 Irgacure 819 760 ppm 620 ppm 289 ppm 105 ppm 343ppm Irgacure 184 CN 384  0.73%  0.34%  0.475% CN 386  0.73%  0.34%  100%  0.70%  0.475% 2-ITX 188 ppm 141 ppm SR-348  89.00%  92.00%  98.90%SR-368 SR-480 CD-540  97 57%  96.20%  99 28%  0.34% SR-399 SR-239  2.30% 2.30%  0.01% SR-506 SR-444 SR-454  10.00%  6.9% CR-73 PRO-629 Tinuvin770 UV Absorber 785 ppm Thermoplast  4.9 ppm  5 1 ppm  0.508 ppm  0 35ppm  0.69 ppm Blue Thermoplast  0.276 ppm  0 285 ppm  0.022 ppm  0.002ppm  0.034 ppm Red Dioctyl- 125 ppm phthalate Butyl stearatePhotochromic 499 ppm Dye Mixture

[0264] TABLE 5 Ingredient Formula 19 Formula 20 Formula 21 Formula 22Formula 23 Formula 24 Irgacure 819 490 ppm 635 ppm 610 ppm 735 ppm 320ppm 600 ppm Irgacure 184 CN 384  0.680%  0.746%  0.705%  0.60% CN 386 0.680%  0.746%  0.705%  0.60% 2-ITX SR-348  69.30%  68.60% SR-368 74.0%  22.10% SR-480 CD-540  98.45%  92.60%  98.50%  1.0%  1.97% SR-399SR-239  0.01%  3 86%  0.16% SR-506  0.10% SR-444  29.30% SR-454  25.0% 7.40% CR-73 PRO-629  0.007%  2.06% Tinuvin 770 UV Absorber Thermoplast 0.37 ppm  0.507 ppm  3.07 ppm  4.3 ppm  0.15 ppm  0 29 ppm BlueThermoplast  0.013 ppm  0.0126 ppm  0.336 ppm  0.41 ppm  0.006 ppm 0.012 ppm Red Dioctyl- phthalate Butyl stearate Photochromic 442 ppm497 ppm Dye Mixture

[0265] TABLE 6 Ingredient Formula 25 Formula 26 Formula 27 Formula 28Formula 29 Formula 30 Formula 31 Irgacure 819 650 ppm 464 ppm 557 ppm448 ppm 460 ppm Irgacure 184 300 ppm CN 384  0 650%  0.70% CN 386  0650%  0.70% 2-ITX 600 ppm 120 ppm SR-348  39.10% SR-368  13.00%  19.60% 20.70% SR-480  10 70% CD-540  88.96%  41.90%  1.60%  1.30%  99.94%  9996% SR-399 SR-239 SR-506  98.30%  79.00%  67.24% SR-444  9.70%  4.60%SR-454 CR-73 PRO-629 Tinuvin 770 UV Absorber Thermoplast  0.566 ppm 0.52 ppm  0.24 ppm  0.19 ppm  0.467 ppm Blue Thermoplast  0.02 ppm 0.013 ppm  0.01 ppm  0.008 ppm  0.024 ppm Red Dioctyl- phthalate Butylstearate  75 ppm  35 ppm Photochromic Dye Mixture

[0266] In one embodiment, plastic lenses may be formed by disposing amid-index lens forming composition into the mold cavity of a moldassembly and irradiating the mold assembly with activating light.Coating materials may be applied to the mold members prior to fillingthe mold cavity with the lens forming composition.

[0267] After filing the mold cavity of the mold assembly the moldassembly is preferably placed in the lens curing unit and subjected toactivating light. Preferably, actinic light is used to irradiate themold assembly. A clear polycarbonate plate may be placed between themold assembly and the activating light source. The polycarbonate platepreferably isolates the mold assembly from the lamp chamber, thuspreventing airflow from the lamp cooling fans from interacting with themold assemblies. The activating light source may be configured todeliver from about 0.1 to about 10 milliwatts/cm2 to at least onenon-casting face, preferably both non-casting faces, of the moldassembly. Depending on the components of the lens forming compositionused the intensity of activating light used may be <1 milliwatt/cm². Theintensity of incident light at the plane of the lens curing unit draweris measured using an International Light IL-1400 radiometer equippedwith an XRL140A detector head. This particular radiometer preferably hasa peak detection wavelength at about 400 nm, with a detection range fromabout 310 nm to about 495 nm. The International Light IL-1400 radiometerand the XRL140A detector head are both commercially availableInternational Light, Incorporated of Newburyport, Mass.

[0268] After the mold assembly is placed within the lens curing unit,the mold assemblies are preferably irradiated with activating lightcontinuously for 30 seconds to thirty minutes, more preferably from oneminute to five minutes. Preferably, the mold assemblies irradiated inthe absence of a cooling air stream. After irradiation, the moldassemblies were removed from the lens curing unit and the formed lensdemolded. The lenses may be subjected to a post-cure treatment in thepost-cure unit.

[0269] In general, it was found that the use of a photoinitiator (e.g.,IRG-819 and IRG-184) in the lens forming composition produces lenseswith better characteristics than lens formed using a co-initiator only.For example, formula 15, described in the Table 4, includes a monomercomposition (a mixture of SR-348 and SR-454) and a co-initiator(CN-386). When this lens forming composition was exposed to activatinglight for 15 min. there was no significant reaction or gel formation. Itis believed that the co-initiator requires an initiating species inorder to catalyze curing of the monomer composition. Typically thisinitiating species is produced from the reaction of the photoinitiatorwith activating light.

[0270] A variety of photoinitiators and photoinitiators combined withco-initiators may be used to initiate polymerization of the monomercomposition. One initiator system which may be used includesphotoinitiators IRG-819 and 2-ITX and a co-initiator, see Formulas17-18. Such a system is highly efficient at initiating polymerizationreactions. The efficiency of a polymerization catalyst is a measurementof the amount of photoinitiator required to initiate a polymerizationreaction. A relatively small amount of an efficient photoinitiator maybe required to catalyze a polymerization reaction, whereas a greateramount of a less efficient photoinitiator may be required to catalyzethe polymerization reaction. The IRG-819/2-ITX/co-initiator system maybe used to cure lenses forming compositions which include a UV absorbingcompound. This initiator system may also be used to form colored lenses.

[0271] An initiator system that is less efficient than theIRG-819/2-ITX/co-initiator system includes a mixture of thephotoinitiators IRG-819 and 2-ITX, see Formula 31. This system is lessefficient at initiating polymerization of lens forming compositions thanthe IRG-819/2-ITX/co-initiator system. The IRG-819/2-ITX system may beused to cure very reactive monomer compositions. An initiator systemhaving a similar efficiency to the IRG-819/2-ITX system includes amixture of IRG-819 and co-initiator, see Formulas 1-6, 8-9, 11, 14-15,19-22, and 25-26. The IRG-819 /co-initiator system may be used to cureclear lenses which do not include a UV blocking compound andphotochromic lens forming compositions.

[0272] Another initiator system which may be used includes thephotoinitiator 2-ITX and a co-initiator. This initiator system is muchless efficient at initiating polymerization reactions than the IRG-819/co-initiator system. The 2-ITX/co-initiator system is preferably usedfor curing monomer compositions which include highly reactive monomers.

[0273] The use of the above described mid-index lens formingcompositions may minimize or eliminate a number of problems associatedwith activating light curing of lenses. One problem typical of curingeyeglass lenses with activating light is pre-release. Pre-release may becaused by a number of factors. If the adhesion between the mold facesand the shrinking lens forming composition is not sufficient,pre-release may occur. The propensity of a lens forming composition toadhere to the mold face, in combination with its shrinkage, determinehow the process variables are controlled to avoid pre-release. Adhesionis affected by such factors as geometry of the mold face (e.g., high-addflat-top bifocals tend to release because of the sharp change in cavityheight at the segment line), the temperature of the mold assembly, andthe characteristics of the in-mold coating material. The processvariables which are typically varied to control pre-release include theapplication of cooling fluid to remove exothermic heat, controlling therate of heat generation by manipulating the intensities and timing ofthe activating radiation, providing differential light distributionacross the thin or thick sections of the mold cavity manipulating thethickness of the molds, and providing in-mold coatings which enhanceadhesion. An advantage of the above described mid-index lens formingcompositions is that the composition appears to have enhanced adhesioncharacteristics. This may allow acceptable lenses to be produced over agreater variety of curing conditions. Another advantage is that higherdiopter lenses may be produced at relatively low pre-release rates,broadening the achievable prescription range.

[0274] Another advantage of the above described mid-index lens formingcompositions is that they tend to minimize problems associated withdripping during low intensity curing of lenses (e.g., in the 1 to 6milliwatt range). Typically, during the irradiation of the lens formingcomposition with activating light, small amounts of monomer may besqueezed out of the cavity and run onto the non-casting faces of themolds. Alternatively, during filling of the mold assembly with the lensforming composition, a portion of the lens forming composition may driponto the non-casting faces of the mold assembly. This “dripping” ontothe non-casting faces of the mold assembly tends to cause the activatinglight to focus more strongly in the regions of the cavity locatedunderneath the drippings. This focusing of the activating light mayaffect the rate of curing. If the rate of curing underneath thedrippings varies significantly from the rate of curing throughout therest of the lens forming composition, optical distortions may be createdin the regions below the drippings.

[0275] It is believed that differences in the rate of gelation betweenthe center and the edge regions of the lens forming composition maycause dripping to occur. During the curing of a lens formingcomposition, the material within the mold cavity tends to swell slightlyduring the gel phase of the curing process. If there is enough residualmonomer around the gasket lip, this liquid will tend to be forced out ofthe cavity and onto the non-casting faces of the mold. This problemtends to be minimized when the lens forming composition undergoes fast,uniform gelation. Typically, a fast uniform gelation of the lens formingcomposition may be achieved by manipulating the timing, intensities, anddistribution of the activating radiation. The above described mid-indexlens forming compositions, however, tend to gel quickly and uniformlyunder a variety of curing conditions, thus minimizing the problemscaused by dripping.

[0276] Another advantage of the above described mid-index lens formingcompositions is that the compositions tend to undergo uniform curingunder a variety of curing conditions. This uniform curing tends tominimize optical aberrations within the formed lens. This is especiallyevident during the formation of high plus power flattop lenses whichtend to exhibit optical distortions after the lens forming compositionis cured. It is believed that the activating radiation may be reflectedoff of the segment line and create local differences in the rate ofgelation in the regions of the lens forming composition that thereflected light reaches. The above described mid-index lens formingcompositions tend to show less optical distortions caused by variationsof the intensity of activating radiation throughout the composition.

[0277] Other advantages include drier edges and increased rigidity ofthe formed lens. An advantage of drier edges is that the contaminationof the optical faces of the lens by uncured or partially cured lensforming composition is minimized.

[0278] In an embodiment, a lens forming composition may be cured into avariety of different lenses. The lens forming composition includes anaromatic containing polyether polyethylenic functional monomer, aco-initiator composition configured to activate curing of the monomer,and a photoinitiator configured to activate the co-initiator compositionin response to being exposed to activating light. The lens formingcomposition may include other components such as ultraviolet lightabsorbers and photochromic compounds. Lenses which may be cured usingthe lens forming composition include, but are not limited to, sphericsingle vision, aspheric single vision lenses, flattop bifocal lenses,and asymmetrical progressive lenses.

[0279] One lens forming composition, includes a mixture of the followingmonomers. 98.25% Ethoxylated₍₄₎bisphenol A dimethacrylate (CD-540) 0.75% Difunctional reactive amine coinitiator (CN-384)  0.75%Monofunctional reactive amine coinitiator (CN-386)  0.15% Phenylbis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) phosphine oxide (Irgacure-819)  0.10%2-(2H-Benzotriazol-2-yl)-4-(1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl)phenol  0.87 ppmThermoplast Blue 684  0.05 ppm Thermoplast Red LB 454

[0280] Another lens forming composition includes a mixture of thefollowing monomers. The presence of photochromic compounds in thiscomposition allows the composition to be used to form photochromiclenses. 97.09% Ethoxylated₍₄₎bisphenol A dimethacrylate (CD-540) 1.4%Difunctional reactive amine coinitiator (CN-384) 1.4% Monofunctionalreactive amine coinitiator (CN-386) 0.09% Phenylbis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl) phosphine oxide (Irgacure-819) 0.9 ppmThermoplast Red LB 454 50 ppm Variacrol Blue D 73.5 ppm Variacrol Yellow145 ppm Berry Red 29 ppm Palatinate Purple 55.5 ppm Corn Yellow 62 ppmSea Green 85 ppm Plum Red

[0281] A lens forming composition which includes an aromatic containingpolyether polyethylenic functional monomer, a co-initiator compositionand a photoinitiator may be used to form a variety of prescriptioneyeglass lenses, including eyeglass lenses which have a sphere powerranging from about +4.0 diopter to about −6.0 diopter. The lenses formedfrom this lens forming composition are substantially free ofdistortions, cracks, patterns and striations, and that have negligibleyellowing, in less than thirty minutes by exposing the lens formingcomposition to activating light and heat. An advantage of the lensforming composition is that it exhibits increased adhesion to the molds.This may reduce the incidence of premature release of the formed lensfrom the molds. Additionally, the use of adhesion promoting agents,typically applied to the molds to prevent premature release, may nolonger be necessary.

[0282] The increased adhesion of the lens forming composition to themolds allows curing of the lens forming composition at highertemperatures. Typically, control of the temperature of the lens formingcomposition may be necessary to prevent premature release of the lensfrom the molds. Premature release may occur when the lens formingcomposition shrinks as it is cured. Shrinkage typically occurs when thelens forming composition is rapidly heated during curing. Lens formingcompositions which include an aromatic containing polyetherpolyethylenic functional monomer, a co-initiator composition and aphotoinitiator may reduce the incidence of premature release. Theincreased adhesion of this lens forming composition may allow highercuring temperatures to be used without increasing the incidence ofpremature release. It is also believed that this lens formingcomposition may exhibit less shrinkage during curing which may furtherreduce the chance of premature release.

[0283] An advantage of curing at higher temperatures is that an eyeglasslens having a high crosslink density may be formed. The crosslinkdensity of an eyeglass lens is typically related to the curingtemperature. Curing a lens forming composition at a relatively lowtemperature leads to a lower crosslink density than the crosslinkdensity of a lens cured at a higher temperature. Lenses which have ahigher crosslink density generally absorb tinting dyes substantiallyevenly without blotching or streaking. Lenses which have a highcrosslink density also may exhibit reduced flexibility.

Methods of Forming Plastic Lenses

[0284] Plastic lenses may be formed by disposing a lens formingcomposition into the mold cavity of a mold assembly and irradiating themold assembly with activating light. Coating materials may be applied tothe mold members prior to filling the mold cavity with the lens formingcomposition. The lens may be treated in a post-cure unit after thelens-curing process is completed.

[0285] The operation of the above described system to provide plasticlenses involves a number of operations. These operations are preferablycoordinated by the controller 50, which has been described above. Afterpowering the system, an operator is preferably signaled by thecontroller to enter the prescription of the lens, the type of lens, andthe type of coating materials for the lens. Based on these inputtedvalues the controller will preferably indicate to the operator whichmolds and gaskets will be required to form the particular lens.

[0286] The formation of lenses involves: 1) Preparing the mold assembly;2) Filling the mold assembly with the lens forming composition; 3)Curing the lens; 4) Post-curing the lens; and 5) Annealing the lens.Optionally, the lens may be coated before use. The formation of lensesmay be accomplished using the plastic lens curing apparatus describedabove.

[0287] The preparation of a mold assembly includes selecting theappropriate front and back molds for a desired prescription and lenstype, cleaning the molds, and assembling the molds to form the moldassembly. The prescription of the lens determines which front mold, backmold, and gasket are used to prepare the mold assembly. In oneembodiment, a chart which includes all of the possible lensprescriptions may be used to allow a user to determine the appropriatemolds and gaskets. Such a chart may include thousands of entries, makingthe determination of the appropriate molds and gaskets somewhat timeconsuming.

[0288] In an embodiment, the controller 50 of the plastic lens curingapparatus 10 (see FIG. 1) will display the appropriate front mold, backmold, and gasket identification markings when a prescription issubmitted to the controller. The controller will prompt the user toenter the 1) the monomer type; 2) the lens type; 3) spherical power; 4)cylindrical power; 5) axis; 6) add power, and 7) the lens location(i.e., right or left lens). Once this information is entered thecomputer will determine the correct front mold, back mold and gasket tobe used. The controller may also allow a user to save and recallprescription data.

[0289]FIG. 17 shows an embodiment of a front panel for the controller50. The controller includes an output device 610 and at least one inputdevice. A variety of input devices may be used. Some input devicesinclude pressure sensitive devices (e.g., buttons), movable data entrydevices (e.g., rotatable knobs, a mouse, a trackball, or movingswitches), voice data entry devices (e.g., a microphone), light pens, ora computer coupled to the controller. Preferably the input devicesinclude buttons 630, 640, 650 and 660 and a selection knob 620. Thedisplay panel preferably displays the controller data requests andresponses. The output device may be a cathode ray tube, an LCD panel, ora plasma display screen.

[0290] When initially powered, the controller will preferably display amain menu, such as the menu depicted in FIG. 17. If the main menu is notdisplayed, a user may access the main menu by pressing button 650, whichmay be labeled Main Menu. In response to activating the Main Menu button650, the controller will cause the main menu screen to be displayed. Asdepicted in FIG. 17, a display screen offers a number of initial optionson the opening menu. The options may include 1) NEW Rx; 2) EDIT Rx; and3) VIEW Rx. The main menu may also offer other options which allow theoperator to access machine status information and instrument setupmenus. The scrolling buttons 630 preferably allow the user to navigatethrough the options by moving a cursor 612 which appears on the displayscreen to the appropriate selection. Selection knob 620 is preferablyconfigured to be rotatable to allow selection of options on the displayscreen. Knob 620 is also configured to allow entry of these items. Inone embodiment, selection knob 620 may be depressed to allow data entry.That is, when the appropriate selection is made, the knob may be pusheddown to enter the selected data. In the main menu, when the cursor 612is moved to the appropriate selection, the selection may be made bydepressing the selection knob 620.

[0291] Selection of the NEW Rx menu item will cause the display screento change to a prescription input menu, depicted in FIG. 18. Theprescription input menu will preferably allow the user to enter datapertaining to a new lens type. The default starting position will be thelens monomer selection box. Once the area is highlighted, the selectionknob 620 is rotated to make a choice among the predetermined selections.When the proper selection is displayed, the selection knob may be pusheddown to enter the selection. Entry of the selection may also cause thecursor to move to the next item on the list. Alternatively, a user mayselect the next item to be entered using the scrolling arrows 630.

[0292] Each of the menu items allows entry of a portion of the lensprescription. The lens prescription information includes 1) the monomertype; 2) the lens type; 3) lens location (i.e., left lens or rightlens); 4) spherical power; 5) cylindrical power; 6) axis; and 7) addpower. The monomer selection may include choices for either clear orphotochromic lenses. The lens type item may allow selection betweenspheric single vision, aspheric single vision lenses, flattop bifocallenses, and asymmetrical progressive lenses. The sphere item allows thesphere power of the lens to be entered. The cylinder item allows thecylinder power to be entered. The axis item allows the cylinder axis tobe entered. The add item allows the add power for multifocalprescriptions to be added. Since the sphere power, cylinder power,cylinder axis, and add power may differ for each eye, and since themolds and gaskets may be specific for the location of the lens (i.e.,right lens or left lens), the controller preferably allows separateentries for right and left lenses. If an error is made in any of theentry fields, the scrolling arrows 630 preferably allow the user to movethe cursor to the incorrect entry for correction.

[0293] After the data relating to the prescription has been added, thecontroller may prompt the user to enter a job number to save theprescription type. This preferably allows the user to recall aprescription type without having to renter the data. The job number mayalso be used by the controller to control the curing conditions for thelens. The curing conditions typically vary depending on the type andprescription of the lens. By allowing the controller access to theprescription and type of lens being formed, the controller mayautomatically set up the curing conditions without further input fromthe user.

[0294] After the job is saved, the display screen will preferablydisplay information which allows the user to select the appropriatefront mold, back mold and gasket for preparing the lens, as depicted inFIG. 19. This information is preferably generated by the use of a storeddatabase which correlates the inputted data to the appropriate lensesand gasket. The prescription information is also summarized to allow theuser to check that the prescription has been entered correctly. The moldand gasket information may be printed out for the user. A printer may beincorporated into the controller to allow print out of this data.Alternatively, a communication port may be incorporated into thecontroller to allow the data to be transferred to a printer or personalcomputer. Each of the molds and gaskets has a predeterminedidentification marking. Preferably, the identification markings arealphanumeric sequences. The identification markings for the molds andgasket preferably correspond to alphanumeric sequences for a library ofmold members. The user, having obtained the mold and gasketidentification markings, may then go to the library and select theappropriate molds and gaskets.

[0295] The controller is preferably configured to run a computersoftware program which, upon input of the eyeglass prescription, willsupply the identification markings of the appropriate front mold, backmold and gasket. The computer program includes a plurality ofinstructions configured to allow the controller to collect theprescription information, determine the appropriate front mold, backmold, and gasket required to a form a lens having the inputtedprescription, and display the appropriate identification markings forthe front mold, back mold and gasket. In one embodiment, the computerprogram may include an information database. The information databasemay include a multidimensional array of records. Each records mayinclude data fields corresponding to identification markings for thefront mold, the back mold, and the gasket. When the prescription data isentered, the computer program is configured to look up the recordcorresponding to the entered prescription. The information from thisrecord may be transmitted to the user, allowing the user to select theappropriate molds and gasket.

[0296] In one embodiment the information database may be a threedimensional array of records. An example of a portion of a threedimensional array of records is depicted in Table 9. The threedimensional array includes array variables of sphere, cylinder, and add.A record of the three dimensional array includes a list ofidentification markings. Preferably this list includes identificationmarkings for a front mold (for either a left or right lens), a back moldand a gasket. When a prescription is entered the program includesinstructions which take the cylinder, sphere and add information andlook up the record which is associated with that information. Theprogram obtains from the record the desired information and transmitsthe information to the user. For example, if a prescription for leftlens having a sphere power of +1.00, a cylinder power of −0.75 and anadd power of 2.75 is entered, the front mold identification marking willbe FT-34, the back mold identification marking will be TB-101, and thegasket identification marking will be G25. These values will betransmitted to the user via an output device. The output device mayinclude a display screen or a printer. It should be understood that theexamples shown in Table 9 represent a small portion of the entiredatabase. The sphere power may range from +4.00 to −4.00 in 0.25 diopterincrements, the cylinder power may range from 0.00 diopters to −2.00diopters in 0.25 diopter increments, and the add power may range from+1.00 to +3.00 in 0.25 diopter increments. TABLE 9 IDENTIFICATIONMARKINGS ARRAY VARIABLES Front Front Sphere Cylinder Add (Right) (Left)Back Gasket +1.00 −0.75 +1.25 FT-21 FT-22 TB-101 G25 +1.00 −0.75 +1.50FT-23 FT-24 TB-101 G25 +1.00 −0.75 +1.75 FT-25 FT-26 TB-101 G25 +1.00−0.75 +2.00 FT-27 FT-28 TB-1O1 G25 +1.00 −0.75 +2.25 FT-29 FT-30 TB-101G25 +1.00 −0.75 +2.50 FT-31 FT-32 TB-101 G25 +1.00 −0.75 +2.75 FT-33FT-34 TB-101 G25 +1.00 −0.75 +3.00 FT-35 FT-36 TB-101 G25 +0.75 −0.75+1.00 FT-19 FT-20 TB-102 G25 +0.75 −0.75 +1.25 FT-21 FT-22 TB-102 G25+0.75 −0.75 +1.50 FT-23 FT-24 TB-102 G25 +0.75 −0.75 +1.75 FT-25 FT-26TB-102 G25 +0.75 −0.75 +2.00 PT-27 FT-28 TB-102 G25 +0.75 −0.75 +2.25FT-29 FT-30 TB-102 G25 +0.75 −0.75 +2.50 FT-31 FT-32 TB-102 G25 +0.75−0.75 +2.75 FT-33 FT-34 TB-102 G25 +0.75 −0.75 +3.00 FT-35 FT-36 TB-102G25 +0.50 −0.75 +1.00 FT-19 FT-20 TB-103 G25 +0.50 −0.75 +1.25 FT-21FT-22 TB-103 G25

[0297] A second information database may include information related tocuring the lens forming composition based on the prescription variables.Each record may include information related to curing clear lenses(i.e., non-photochromic lenses) and photochromic lenses. The curinginformation may include filter information, initial curing doseinformation, postcure time and conditions, and anneal time. An exampleof a portion of this database is depicted in Table 10. Curing conditionstypically depend on the sphere power of a lens, the type of lens beingformed (photochromic or non-photochromic), and whether the lens will betinted or not. Curing information includes type of filter being used,initial dose conditions, postcure time, and anneal time. A filter with a50 mm aperture (denoted as “50 mm”) or a clear plate filter (denoted as“clear”) may be used. Initial dose is typically in seconds, with theirradiation pattern (e.g., top and bottom, bottom only) being alsodesignated. The postcure time represents the amount of time the moldassembly is treated with activating light and heat in the postcure unit.The anneal time represents the amount of time the demolded lens istreated with heat after the lens is removed from the mold assembly.While this second database is depicted as a separate database, thedatabase may be incorporated into the mold and gasket database by addingthe lens curing information to each of the appropriate records.

[0298] The controller may also be configured to warn the user if thelens power is beyond the range of the system or if their mold packagedoes not contain the necessary molds to make the desired lens. In thesecases, the user may be asked to check the prescription information toensure that the proper prescription was entered.

[0299] The controller may also be used to control the operation of thevarious components of the plastic lens curing apparatus. A series ofinput devices 640 may allow the operation of the various components ofthe system. The input devices may be configured to cause thecommencement of the lens coating process (640 a), the cure process (640b), the postcure process (640 c), and the anneal process (640 d).

[0300] In an embodiment, activating any of the input devices 640 maycause a screen to appear requesting a job number corresponding to thetype of lenses being formed. The last job used may appear as a defaultentry. The user may change the displayed job number by cycling throughthe saved jobs. When the proper job is displayed the user may enter thejob by depressing the selection knob. TABLE 10 LENS INFORMATION CURINGINFORMATION Lens Initial Postcure Anneal Sphere Type Tinted Filter DoseTime Time +2.25 Clear No 50 mm 90 Sec. 13 Min. 7 Min. Top and Bottom+2.25 Clear Yes 50 mm 90 Sec. 15 Min. 7 Min. Top and Bottom +2.25Photochromic No 50 mm 90 Sec. 13 Min. 7 Min. Top and Bottom +2.00 ClearNo Clear 7 Sec. 13 Min. 7 Min. Bottom +2.00 Clear Yes Clear 7 Sec. 15Min. 7 Min. Bottom +2.00 Photochromic No Clear 15 Sec. 13 Min. 7 Min.Bottom

[0301] After the job has been entered, the system will be ready tocommence the selected function. Activating the same input device again(e.g., depressing the button) will cause the system to commence theselected function. For example, pressing the cure button a second timemay cause a preprogrammed cure cycle to begin. After the selectedfunction is complete the display screen may display a prompt informingthe user that the action is finished.

[0302] The controller may be configured to prevent the user from usingcuring cycles other than those that have been prescribed by theprogrammer of the controller. After a prescription is entered, the jobenters the work stream where the controller allows only the prescribedcuring conditions. Timers (set by the algorithm picked at prescriptioninput) may run constantly during the lens cycle to monitor doses anddeliver both audible and visible prompts to the user of at times oftransition in the process. The system tracks job completion and statusand gives visual representation of job status in the view job screen.Boxes at the bottom of the screen are checked as the necessary steps arecompeted. In sensitive parts of the lens cycle, no deviation from theestablished method is allowed. Operator discretion is allowed when theprocess is not time critical. The software warns the user duringprocedures that will interrupt jobs during their execution, erase jobsthat are not finished, rerun jobs that are not finished, etc.

[0303] The system may be configured to prevent a new cure cycle frombeing started until the previous job's cure is finished. This“gatekeeper” function ensures post cure chamber availability during timesensitive transitions. When the cure stage is finished, both audible andvisual prompts instruct the user to place the cavities in the post curearea.

[0304] The main menu may also include selections allowing a saved job tobe edited. Returning to the main menu screen, depicted in FIG. 17,selecting the edit menu item will cause an interactive screen to bedisplayed similar to the input screen. This will allow a user to changethe prescription of a preexisting job. The view menu item will allow auser to view the prescription information and mold/gasket selectioninformation from an existing job.

[0305] Once the desired mold and gasket information has been obtained,the proper molds and gasket are selected from a collection of molds andgaskets. The molds may be placed into the gasket to create a moldassembly. Prior to placing the molds in the gasket, the molds arepreferably cleaned. The inner surface (i.e., casting surface) of themold members may be cleaned on a spin coating unit 20 by spraying themold members with a cleaning solution while spinning the mold members.Examples of cleaning solutions include methanol, ethanol, isopropylalcohol, acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, or a water based detergentcleaner. Preferably, a cleaning solution which includes isopropylalcohol is used to clean the mold members. As the mold member iscontacted with the cleaning solution, dust and dirt may be removed andtransferred into the underlying dish 115 of the curing unit. After asufficient amount of cleaning solution has been applied the mold membersmay be dried by continued spinning without the application of cleaningsolution.

[0306] In an embodiment, the inner surface, i.e., the casting face, ofthe front mold member may be coated with one or more hardcoat layersbefore the lens forming composition is placed within the mold cavity.Preferably, two hardcoat layers are used so that any imperfections, suchas pin holes in the first hardcoat layer, are covered by the secondhardcoat layer. The resulting double hardcoat layer is preferablyscratch resistant and protects the subsequently formed eyeglass lens towhich the double hardcoat layer adheres. The hardcoat layers arepreferably applied using a spin coating unit 20. The mold member ispreferably placed in the spin coating unit and the coating materialapplied to the mold while spinning at high speeds (e.g., between about900 to 1000 RPM). After a sufficient amount of coating material has beenapplied, the coating material may be cured by the activating lightsource disposed in the cover. The cover is preferably closed andactivating light is preferably applied to the mold member while the moldmember is spinning at relatively low speeds (e.g., between about 150 to250 RPM). Preferably control of the spinning and the application ofactivating light is performed by controller 50. Controller 50 ispreferably configured to prompt the operator to place the mold memberson the coating unit, apply the coating material to the mold member, andclose the cover to initiate curing of the coating material.

[0307] In an embodiment, the eyeglass lens that is formed may be coatedwith a hydrophobic layer, e.g. a hardcoat layer. The hydrophobic layerpreferably extends the life of the photochromic pigments near thesurfaces of the lens by preventing water and oxygen molecules fromdegrading the photochromic pigments.

[0308] In a preferred embodiment, both mold members may be coated with acured adhesion-promoting composition prior to placing the lens formingcomposition into the mold cavity. Providing the mold members with suchan adhesion-promoting composition is preferred to increase the adhesionbetween the casting surface of the mold and the lens formingcomposition. The adhesion-promoting composition thus reduces thepossibility of premature release of the lens from the mold. Further, itis believed that such a coating also provides an oxygen and moisturebarrier on the lens which serves to protect the photochromic pigmentsnear the surface of the lens from oxygen and moisture degradation. Yetfurther, the coating provides abrasion resistance, chemical resistance,and improved cosmetics to the finished lens.

[0309] In an embodiment, the casting face of the back mold member may becoated with a material that is capable of being tinted with dye prior tofilling the mold cavity with the lens forming composition. This tintablecoat preferably adheres to the lens forming composition so that dyes maylater be added to the resulting eyeglass lens for tinting the lens. Thetintable coat may be applied using the spin coating unit as describedabove.

[0310] The clean molds are placed on the gasket to form a mold assembly.The front mold is preferably placed on the gasket first. For singlevision prescriptions, the front mold does not have to be placed in anyparticular alignment. For flat-top bifocal or progressive front molds,the molds are preferably aligned with alignment marks positioned on thegasket. Once the front mold has been placed into the gasket, the backmold is placed onto the gasket. If the prescription calls for cylinderpower, the back mold must be aligned with respect to the front mold. Ifthe prescription is spherical (e.g., the lens has no cylinder power),the back mold may be placed into the gasket without any specialalignment. Once assembled the mold assembly will be ready for filling.

[0311] The controller may prompt the user to obtain the appropriate lensforming composition. In one embodiment, the controller will inform theuser of which chemicals and the amounts of each chemical that isrequired to prepare the lens forming composition. Alternatively, thelens forming compositions may be preformed. In this case the controllermay indicate to the operator which of the preformed lens formingcompositions should be used.

[0312] In an embodiment, dyes may be added to the lens formingcomposition. It is believed that certain dyes may be used to attack andencapsulate ambient oxygen so that the oxygen may be inhibited fromreacting with free radicals formed during the curing process. Also, dyesmay be added to the composition to alter the color of an unactivatedphotochromic lens. For instance, a yellow color that sometimes resultsafter a lens is formed may be “hidden” if a blue-red or blue-pink dye ispresent in the lens forming composition. The unactivated color of aphotochromic lens may also be adjusted by the addition ofnon-photochromic pigments to the lens forming composition.

[0313] In a preferred technique for filling the lens molding cavity 382,the annular gasket 380 is placed on a concave or front mold member 392and a convex or back mold member 390 is moved into place. The annulargasket 380 is preferably pulled away from the edge of the back moldmember 390 at the uppermost point and a lens forming composition ispreferably injected into the lens molding cavity 382 until a smallamount of the lens forming composition is forced out around the edge.The excess is then removed, preferably, by vacuum. Excess liquid that isnot removed could spill over the face of the back mold member 390 andcause optical distortion in the finished lens.

[0314] The lens forming composition is typically stored at temperaturesbelow about 100° F. At these temperatures, however, the lens formingcomposition may be relatively viscous. The viscosity of the solution maymake it difficult to fill a mold cavity without creating bubbles withinthe lens forming composition. The presence of bubbles in the lensforming composition may cause defects in the cured eyeglass lens. Toreduce the viscosity of the solution, and therefore reduce the incidenceof air bubbles during filling of the mold cavity, the lens formingcomposition may be heated prior to filling the mold cavity. In anembodiment, the lens forming composition may be heated to a temperatureof about 70° F. to about 220° F., preferably from about 130° F. to about170° F. prior to filing the mold cavity. Preferably, the lens formingcomposition is heated to a temperature of about 150° F. prior to fillingthe mold cavity.

[0315] The lens forming composition may be heated by using an electricheater, an infrared heating system, a hot air system, a hot watersystem, or a microwave heating system. Preferably, the lens formingcomposition is heated in a monomer heating system, such as depicted inFIGS. 20 and 21. FIG. 20 depicts an isometric view of the monomerheating system and FIG. 21 depicts a side view of the monomer heatingsystem depicted in FIG. 20. The monomer heating system includes a body1500 configured to hold the lens forming composition and a valve 1520for transferring the heated lens forming composition from the body to amold assembly. The monomer heating system may also include a moldassembly support 1540 for holding a mold assembly 1550 proximate thevalve. The monomer heating system may also include an opening forreceiving a container 1560 that holds a monomer composition.

[0316]FIG. 22 depicts a cross sectional view of the monomer heatingsystem. The body includes a monomer 1502 and top 1504. The top of thebody 1504 may include an opening 1506 sized to allow a fluid container1560 to be inserted within the opening. The opening may be sized suchthat the bottle rests at an angle when placed in the opening, asdepicted in FIG. 22. In some embodiments, the angle of the bottle may bebetween about 5 and about 45 degrees. In one embodiment, the opening issized to receive a cap 1562 of a fluid container 1560. The cap 1562 andthe opening 1506 may be sized to allow the cap to be easily insertedthrough the opening. If all of the fluid in the fluid container 1562will fit in the body 1500 of the monomer heating system, the cap 1562may be removed and the bottle placed in the opening. The fluid container1560 may be left until all of the fluid has been emptied into the body1500. The fluid container 1560 may be removed or left in the openingafter the monomer has emptied into the body 1500.

[0317] In another embodiment, the fluid container 1560 may include aself sealing cap 1562 coupled to the fluid container body 1569. A crosssectional view of the fluid container 1560 with a self sealing cap isdepicted in FIG. 23. The self sealing cap 1562 may be configured to fitwithin the opening 1506 in the body. The self sealing cap 1562 may becouplable to the fluid container body 1569 via a threaded fit (e.g.,screwed onto the fluid container) or, alternatively, may be fastened tothe fluid container body using a suitable adhesive. In anotherembodiment, the cap 1562 may be fastened to the fluid container body byboth a threaded fit and the use of a suitable adhesive.

[0318] The cap 1562 includes, in one embodiment, a fluid control member1564 and an elastic member 1566. The fluid control member 1564 may havea size and shape to substantially fit against an inner surface of thetop of cap 1562 such that the fluid control member inhibits the passageof fluid out of the fluid container. The elastic member 1566 may becoupled to the fluid control member 1564 such that the elastic memberexerts a force on the fluid control member such that the fluid controlmember is forced against the top inner surface of the cap. In oneembodiment, the elastic member may be a spring while the fluid controlmember may be a substantially spherical object. In a normal restingposition, the elastic member 1566 exerts a force against the fluidcontrol member 1564, forcing it against the top inner surface 1568 ofthe cap. The top of the cap is sized to inhibit the passage of thespherical object 1564 through the top 1568 of the cap. Thus, when not isuse, the fluid control member 1564 is forced against the top 1568 of thecap 1562, forming a seal that inhibits the flow of a fluid through thecap.

[0319] When the monomer heating station is to be filled, the fluidcontainer 1560 may be inserted into opening 1506 of the body 1500. If aself sealing cap is used, as depicted in FIG. 23, the body may beconfigured to force the fluid control member away from the top of thefluid container. As the fluid control member is moved away from the topof the cap, the fluid will flow around the fluid control member and outof the fluid container. In one embodiment, the body 1500 may include aprojection 1508 (see FIG. 23) that extends from the bottom 1502 of thebody and toward the opening. When the fluid container is inserted intothe opening, the projection may hit the fluid control member forcing thefluid control member away from the top. When the bottle is removed, theprojection will move away from the fluid control member and the fluidcontrol member may be pushed back to its resting position, thusinhibiting the further flow of fluid from the fluid container.

[0320] A heating system 1510 is preferably coupled to the body. Theheating system 1510 is preferably configured to heat the lens formingcomposition to a temperature of between about 80° F. to about 220° F.Preferably a resistive heater is used to heat the lens formingcomposition. Other heating systems such as hot air system, hot watersystems, and infrared heating systems may also be used. In oneembodiment, the heating system may include a silicon pad heater. Asilicon pad heater includes one or more of resistive heating elementsembedded within a silicon rubber material.

[0321] The heating system is preferably disposed within the body, asdepicted in FIG. 22. In an embodiment, the body may be divided into amain chamber 1512 and a heating system chamber 1514. The lens formingcomposition may be disposed within the main chamber 1514, while theheating system 1510 is preferably disposed within the heating systemchamber 1512. The heating system chamber 1512 preferably isolates theheating system 1510 from the main chamber 1512 such that the lensforming composition is inhibited from contacting the heating system.Typically, the heating system 1510 may attain temperatures significantlyhigher than desired. If the heating system 1510 were to come intocontact with the lens forming composition, the higher temperature of theheating system may cause the contacted lens forming composition tobecome partially polymerized. By isolating the heating system 1510 fromthe lens forming composition such partial polymerization may be avoided.To further prevent partial polymerization, the heating system ispreferably insulated from the bottom surface of the main chamber. Aninsulating material may be placed between the heating system and thebottom of the main chamber. Alternatively, an air gap may be formedbetween the heating system and the bottom of the main chamber to preventoverheating of the bottom of the main chamber.

[0322] A thermostat 1530 may be placed within the chamber, in contactwith either the lens forming composition and/or the heating systemchamber. In another embodiment, the thermostat may be placed in theheating system chamber between the main chamber and the heating element.When positioned in this manner, the thermostat may be more response tochanges in the temperature of the monomer. The thermostat 1530preferably monitors the temperature of the lens forming composition. Inan embodiment, the thermostat may be a bi-metal immersion temperatureswitch. Such thermostats may be obtained from Nason, West Union, S.C.The temperature switch may be configured for a specific temperature bythe manufacturer. For example, the optimal monomer composition may beabout 150° F. The temperature switch may be preset by the manufacturerfor about 150° F. When the monomer solution is below 150° F., the switchmay be in an “on” state, which causes the heating system to continueoperating. Once the temperature of the monomer solution reaches about150° F., the temperature switch may change to an “off” state. In the offstate the heating system may be switched off. As the temperature of themonomer solution cools to below 150° F., the switch may cause theheating system to turn back on.

[0323] Alternatively, a controller 1570 may be coupled to a thermocouple1530 and the heating system 1510. The thermocouple 1530 may provide asignal to the controller that indicates a temperature determined by thethermocouple. The thermocouple may be positioned within an aluminumblock disposed within the main chamber and adjacent to the heatingsystem chamber. The temperature detected by the thermocouple may be acombination of the temperature of the heating system chamber wall andthe lens forming composition. The controller 1540 may monitor thetemperature of the lens forming composition via the signals produced bythermocouple 1530 and controls the heating system 1510 to keep the lensforming composition at a predetermined temperature. For example, as thelens forming composition becomes cooler the controller may activate theheating system 1510 to heat the lens forming composition back to thedesired temperature. The controller 1540 may be a computer, programmablelogic controller, or any of other known controller systems known in theart. These systems may include a proportional-integral (“PI”) controlleror a proportional-integral-derivative (“PID”) controller.

[0324] A body 1500 may be in the form of a small volume conduit fortransferring the lens forming composition out of the body. The use of asmall volume conduit may minimize the amount of monomer solution that isin contact with the heating system at any given time. Monomer solutionpasses through the body and exits the body via the outlet valve 1520.

[0325] A fluid monitor 1580 may be used to monitor the level of fluid inthe body 1500. A fluid monitor 1580 may be positioned within the body1500. Fluid monitors are commercially available from Gems Sensors Inc.,Plainville, Conn. IN one embodiment model ELS-1100HT from Gems Sensorsmay be used. The fluid monitor may be configured to monitor the level offluid in the body 1500. If the fluid level drops below a preselectedminimum, the fluid sensor may produce a signal to a controller. Acontroller may be coupled to the monomer heating system (e.g.,controller 1570) or may be part of the lens forming apparatus (e.g.,controller 50). In one embodiment, the controller may produce a warningmessage when a low fluid level signal is received from the fluid sensor.Alternatively, the controller may determine when a fluid level may below in the body by monitoring the number of fills. For example, a sensormay be coupled to the body and may send a signal to the controller eachtime a fill is completed. The warning message may be an alphanumericreadout on a controller output device (e.g., and LCD screen) or thewarning message may involve causing a light to turn on signifying thelow fluid level. The controller may also be configured to turn theheating system 1510 off when the fluid level within the body is too low.The warning message may also be an alphanumeric readout on the monomerheating system. In addition, warning messages may also be generated bythe controller computer to signify a ready state of the fill unit or awarming up state of the fill unit.

[0326] Outlet valve 1520 is positioned near the outlet of the body. Theoutlet valve includes an elongated member 1522 and a movable member 1524for altering the position of the elongated member, as depicted in FIG.22. The elongated member 1522 preferably inhibits the flow of lensforming composition through the conduit when the elongated member is ina closed position. The elongated member may be moved into an openposition such that the lens forming composition may flow through theconduit.

[0327] As depicted in FIG. 22, the elongated member 1522 is in an openposition. The elongated member 1522 is preferably oriented perpendicularto the longitudinal axis of the body 1500, as depicted in FIG. 22. Theelongated member 1522 resides in a channel 1526 extending through thetop 1504 of the body 1500. When in the open position, the elongatedmember 1522 is positioned away from the outlet of the body. The end ofthe elongated member, as depicted in FIG. 22, has been moved past aportion of the bottom surface 1502 of the conduit such that the lensforming solution may flow through the conduit and out of the body. Theelongated member may be positioned to control the flow rate of the lensforming composition through the conduit. For example, as depicted inFIG. 22, the elongated member, although in an open position, stillpartially blocks the conduit, thus partially inhibiting flow of the lensforming composition through the conduit. As the elongated member ismoved further away from the outlet, the flow may of the lens formingcomposition may increase. The flow rate of the lens forming compositionmay reach a maximum when the elongated member no longer blocks theconduit.

[0328] In a closed position, the elongated member 1522 may extend to thebottom surface 1502 near the outlet. Preferably, the elongated member1522 extends past the outer surface of the bottom of the body proximatethe outlet, when in the closed position. Configuring the elongatedmember 1522 such that it extends past the outer surface of the conduitmay inhibit any residual lens forming composition from building up nearthe outlet. As the elongated member 1522 is extended toward the outletany lens forming composition present may be forced out, leaving theoutlet substantially clear of lens forming composition. The outlet maybe subsequently cleaned by removing the excess lens forming compositionfrom the outer surface of the conduit and the elongated member.

[0329] The interaction of the elongated member 1522 with the movablemember 1524 allows the elongated member to be positioned in either aclosed or open position. The movable member 1524 preferably includes aplurality of threads the interact with complimentary threads along theelongate member 1526. Rotation of the movable member may cause theelongated member to move away from or toward the outlet, depending onthe direction of rotation of the movable member.

[0330] A mold assembly holder 1540 may be coupled to the body of themonomer heating system, as depicted in FIG. 22. The mold assembly holder1540 is configured to hold the mold assembly at a preferred locationwith respect to the outlet of the body 1500. The mold assembly holdermay secure the mold assembly during filling. In one embodiment, themolds assembly holder is spring mounted to the bottom surface of themonomer heating system. The mold assembly holder includes an arm 1542that is coupled to the body 1500 by hinge 1544. The hinge allows themold assembly holder to be rotated away form or toward the body 1500 ofthe monomer heating solution. Hinge 1544 may be spring loaded such thata constant force is exerted on the arm, forcing the arm toward thebottom of the body 1500. To place the mold assembly 1550 on the moldassembly arm 1544, the arm may be rotated away from the body and themold assembly placed onto a portion of the arm configured to hold themold assembly. The portion of the arm configured to hold the moldassembly may include a clamping system to secure the mold assembly.

[0331] To fill the mold assembly, the mold assembly is placed on themold assembly holders and positioned proximate to the outlet. Themonomer solution is preferably introduced into the body of the fillstation and heated to a temperature of about 150° F. After the moldassembly is in place, the valve of the mold fill station is aligned witha fill port of the mold assembly. The lens forming composition is nowflowed through the valve and into the mold assembly. The movable member1524, may be adjusted to control the flow rate of the monomer.

[0332] After the mold assembly is filled, any monomer which may havespilled on the surface of the molds is removed using a lint free wipe.Excess monomer that may be around the edge of the filling port may beremoved by using a micro vacuum unit. The mold assembly may be inspectedto insure that the mold cavity is filled with monomer. The mold assemblyis also inspected to insure that no air bubbles are present in the moldcavity. Any air bubbles in the mold cavity may be removed by rotatingthe mold assembly such that the air bubbles rise to the top of theassembly.

[0333] The heating of the monomer solution may be coordinated with theentry of a prescription using a controller. In one embodiment, themonomer heating system may be electrically coupled to a lens formingapparatus, such as the apparatus depicted in FIG. 1. The monomer mayhave ports that are appropriate for using standard data transfer cablesto couple to ports that are disposed on the lens forming apparatus. Theoperation of the monomer heating system may thus coordinated with theoperation of the lens forming apparatus. In some embodiments, it may bedesirable to minimize the amount of time a monomer solution is heated.In these instances may be desirable to heat the monomer solution justbefore filling the mold assembly. The controller 50 of the lens formingapparatus may be configured to coordinate the filling operation with theneeds of an operator.

[0334] When forming a prescription lens, an operator may first enter theprescription into the controller 50 as described above. Once theprescription has been entered, the operator typically spends some timefinding and cleaning the appropriate molds for the prescription andassembling the molds with a gasket. In one embodiment, the controllermay signal a monomer heating system to begin heating the monomersolution when a prescription is entered. By the time the mold assemblyhas been assembled, the monomer solution may be at or near the desiredtemperature. This may minimize the amount of time required by theoperator to prepare and fill the mold assembly. In some instances theoperator may, after preparing a first prescription enter additionalprescriptions to process. In this case, the monomer heating system maybe left in an “on” state. If a prescription is not entered after apredetermined amount of time, the controller may turn off the monomerheating system, so that the monomer in the system does not remain in aheated state for long periods of time. In some embodiments, thepredetermined amount of time may be about 10 or more minutes.

[0335] After filing the mold assembly, the lens forming composition maybe cured using a lens curing apparatus. In one embodiment, the curing ofthe lens forming composition may be accomplished by a procedureinvolving the application of heat and activating light to the lensforming composition. Initially, activating light is directed toward atleast one of the mold members. The activating light is directed for asufficient time to initiate curing of the lens forming composition.Preferably, the activating light is directed toward at least one of themold members for a time of less than about 2 minutes. In someembodiments, the activating light is directed toward at least one of themold members for a time of less than about 25 seconds. In otherembodiments, the activating light is directed toward at least one of themold members for a time of less than about 10 seconds. The activatinglight is preferably stopped before the lens forming composition iscompletely cured.

[0336] After the curing is initiated, the mold assembly may betransferred to a post cure unit. In the post cure unit the mold assemblyis preferably treated with additional activating light and heat tofurther cure the lens forming composition. The activating light may beapplied from the top, bottom, or from both the top and bottom of thecuring chamber during the post cure process. The lens formingcomposition may exhibit a yellow color after the curing is initiated. Itis believed that the yellow color is produced by the photoinitiator. Asthe lens forming composition cures, the yellow color may graduallydisappear as the photoinitiator is used up. Preferably, the moldassembly is treated in the post cure unit for a time sufficient tosubstantially remove the yellow color from the formed eyeglass lens. Themold assembly may be treated in the post cure unit for a time of up toabout 15 minutes, preferably for a time of between about 10 minutes to15 minutes. After the lens is treated in the post cure unit, the formedeyeglass lens may be demolded and placed back into the post cure unit.TABLE 11 LENS INFORMATION CURING INFORMATION Lens Initial PostcureAnneal Sphere Type Tinted Filter Dose Time Time +4.00 to Clear No 50 mm90 Sec. 13 Min. 7 Min. +2.25 Back and Front +4.00 to Clear Yes 50 mm 90Sec. 15 Min. 7 Min. +2.25 Back and Front +4.00 to Photo 50 mm 90 Sec. 13Min. 7 Min. +2.25 Back and Front +2.00 to Clear No Clear Plate 7 Sec. 13Min. 7 Min. −4.00 Front +2.00 to Clear Yes Clear Plate 7 Sec. 15 Min. 7Min. −4.00 Front +2.00 to Photo Clear Plate 15 Sec. 13 Min. 7 Min. planoFront −0.25 to Photo Clear Plate 20 Sec. 13 Min. 7 Min. −4.00 Back, w/ 7Sec. Front starting @ 13 Sec. elapsed time.

[0337] In some instances, it may be desirable to subject the lens to ananneal process. When a lens, cured by the activating light, is removedfrom a mold assembly, the lens may be under a stressed condition. It isbelieved that the power of the lens can be more rapidly brought to afinal resting power by subjecting the lens to an anneal treatment torelieve the internal stresses developed during the cure. Prior toannealing, the lens may have a power that differs from the desired finalresting power. The anneal treatment is believed to reduce stress in thelens, thus altering the power of the lens to the desired final restingpower. Preferably, the anneal treatment involves heating the lens at atemperature between about 200° F. to 225° F. for a period of up to about10 minutes. The heating may be performed in the presence or absence ofactivating light.

[0338] The post-cure and anneal times given in Table 11 are strictlyexemplary of the particular system described herein. It should beunderstood that the time for the post-cure and anneal process may varyif the intensity of the lamps or the temperature of the process isaltered. For example, increasing the intensity of light used during thepost-cure process may allow a shorter post-cure time. Similarly,reducing the temperature of the post-cure unit during the annealingprocess may cause an increase in the anneal time. Generally, thepost-cure process is believed to be related to the time required tosubstantially complete curing of the lens forming composition. Theanneal process is believed to be related to the amount of time requiredto bring the formed lens to its final resting power.

[0339] The use of a lens forming composition which includes an aromaticcontaining polyether polyethylenic functional monomer, a co-initiatorcomposition and a photoinitiator allows much simpler curing conditionsthan other lens forming compositions. While pulsed activated lightcuring sequences may be used to cure the lenses, continuous activatinglight sequences may also be used, as described in Table 11. The use ofcontinuous activating light sequences allows the lens curing equipmentto be simplified. For example, if continuous activating light is used,rather than pulsed light, equipment for generating light pulses is nolonger required. Thus, the cost of the lens curing apparatus may bereduced. Also the use of such a lens forming composition allows moregeneral curing processes to be used. As shown in Table 11, sevendifferent processes may be used to cure a wide variety of lenses. Thisgreatly simplifies the programming and operation of the lens curingunit.

[0340] Furthermore, the use a lens forming composition which includes anaromatic containing polyether polyethylenic functional monomer, aco-initiator composition and a photoinitiator may alleviate the need forcooling of the lens forming composition during curing. This may furthersimplify the procedure since cooling fans, or other cooling systems, mayno longer be required. Thus, the lens curing apparatus may be furthersimplified by removing the mold apparatus cooling systems.

[0341] Table 11 shows the preferable curing conditions for a variety oflenses. The sphere column refers to the sphere power of the lens. Themonomer type is either clear (i.e., non-photochromic) or photochromic.Note that the lens type (e.g., spheric single vision, aspheric singlevision lens, flat-top bifocal lens or progressive multifocal lens) doesnot significantly alter the lens curing conditions. Tinted refers towhether the formed eyeglass lens will be soaked in a dye bath or not.

[0342] Based on the prescription information the lens curing conditionsmay be determined. There are four curing variables to be set. The typeof light filter refers to the filter placed between the lamps and themold assembly in the curing unit and the post cure unit. The initialdoes refers to the time that activating light is applied to the lensforming composition in the curing unit. The irradiation pattern (e.g.,irradiation of the front mold only, the back mold only, or both molds)is also dependent on the lens being formed. After the initial dose isapplied the mold assembly is transferred to the post cure unit where itis treated with activating light and heat. The chart lists the preferredtime spent in the post cure chamber. After treatment in the post curechamber the formed eyeglass lens is removed from the mold assembly. Thelens may undergo an annealing process, for the time listed, in which thelens is heated either in the presence or absence of activating light. Itshould be noted that all of the lens curing processes recited arepreferably performed without any cooling of the mold apparatus.

[0343] To further illustrate this procedure, the method will bedescribed in detail for the production of a clear, non-tinted lenshaving sphere power of +3.00. A mold assembly is filled with anon-photochromic monomer solution. The mold assembly is placed in a lenscuring unit to apply the initial dose to the lens forming composition.The curing of the lens forming composition is preferably controlled bycontroller 50. As shown in FIG. 17, the controller 50 includes a numberof input devices which allow an operator to initiate use of the variouscomponents of the plastic lens curing apparatus 10. In an embodiment,buttons 640 may be used to control operation of the coating process (640a), the curing process (640 b), the postcure process (640 c), and theanneal process (640 d). After the mold assembly is placed in the lenscuring unit, the curing process button 640 b may be pressed to set thecuring conditions. In one embodiment, an operator has preloaded theprescription information and saved the information as described above.Pressing the cure button may cause the controller to prompt the user toenter a reference code corresponding to the saved prescriptioninformation. The controller is preferably configured to analyze theprescription information and set up the appropriate initial doseconditions.

[0344] After determining the appropriate lens forming conditions, thecontroller may inform the user of the type of filters to be used. Thecontroller may pause to allow the proper filters to be installed withinthe lens curing unit. Typically, two types of filters may be used forthe initial cure process. The filters are preferably configured todistribute the light so that the activating light which is imparted tothe lens molds is properly distributed with respect to the prescriptionof the lens. A clear plate filter refers to a plate that issubstantially transparent to activating light. The clear plate may becomposed of polycarbonate or glass. A 50 mm filter refers to filterwhich includes a 50 mm aperture positioned in a central portion of thefilter. The 50 mm aperture is preferably aligned with the mold assemblywhen the filter is placed in the curing unit. Preferably, two filtersare used, the first being placed between the top lamps and the moldassembly, the second being placed between the bottom lamps and the moldassembly.

[0345] After the filters have been placed, the user may indicate to thecontroller that the filters are in place. Alternatively, the controllermay include a sensor disposed within the lens curing unit which informsthe controller when a filter is placed within the curing unit. After thefilters are placed in the curing unit, the controller may prompt theuser to ensure that the mold assembly is in the curing unit prior tocommencing the curing process. When the filters and mold are in place,the initial dose may be started by the controller. For a clear,non-tinted lens having sphere power of +3.00 the initial dose will be 90seconds of activating light applied to both the front and back molds. A50 mm filter is preferably positioned between the top and bottom lamps.

[0346] After the initial cure process is completed, the mold assembly istransferred to the post cure unit. The completion of the initial cureprocess may cause the controller to alert the operator that the processis completed. An alarm may go off to indicate that the process iscompleted. To initiate the post cure process, the post cure button 640 cmay be pressed. Pressing the post cure button may cause the controllerto prompt the user to enter a reference code corresponding to the savedprescription information. The controller is preferably configured toanalyze the prescription information and set up the appropriate postcure conditions. For a clear, non-tinted lens having sphere power of+3.00 the post cure conditions will include directing activating lighttoward the mold assembly in a heated post cure unit for 13 minutes. Thepost cure unit is preferably heated to a temperature of about 200° F. toabout 225° F. during the post cure process.

[0347] After the post cure process is completed, the mold assembly isdisassembled and the formed lens is removed from the mold members. Thecompletion of the post cure process may cause the controller to alertthe operator that the process is completed. An alarm may go off toindicate that the process is completed. After the molds are removed fromthe post cure unit, the gasket is removed and the molds placed in ademolding solution. A demolding solution is commercially available as“Q-Soak Solution” commercially available from Optical DynamicsCorporation, Louisville, Ky. The demolding solution causes the lens toseparate from the molds. The demolding solution also aids in thesubsequent cleaning of the molds. After the lens has been demolded, thelens is preferably cleaned of dust particles using a solution ofisopropyl alcohol and water.

[0348] In some instances it is desirable that the formed lens undergoesan anneal process. To initiate the anneal process the anneal button 640d may be pressed. Pressing the anneal button will set the conditions forthe anneal process. For a clear, non-tinted lens having sphere power of+3.00 the anneal conditions will include heating the lens in the postcure unit, in the absence of activating light, for about 7 minutes. Thepost cure unit is preferably heated to a temperature of about 200° F. toabout 225° F. during the anneal process.

[0349] In one embodiment, the drawer of the post cure unit includes afront row of mold assembly holders and a back row of lens holders. Forthe post cure process, the mold assemblies are preferably placed in thefront row. The front row is preferably oriented under the post curelamps when the post cure drawer is closed. For the anneal process thelenses are preferably placed in the back row of the post-cure drawer.The back row may be misaligned with the lamps such that little or noactivating light reaches the back row.

[0350] After the anneal process, the lens may be coated in the coatingunit with a scratch resistant hard coat. The lens may also be tinted byplacing in a tinting bath. It is believed that tinting of the lens isinfluenced by the crosslink density of the lens. Typically, a lenshaving a relatively high crosslink density exhibits more homogenousabsorption of the dye. Problems such as blotching and streaking of thedye are typically minimized by highly crosslinked lenses. The crosslinkdensity of a lens is typically controlled by the temperature of curingof the lens. A lens which is cured at relatively high temperaturestypically exhibits a crosslink density that is substantially greaterthan a low temperature cured lens. The curing time may also influencethe hardness of a lens. Treating a lens for a long period of time in apost cure unit will typically produce a lens having a greater crosslinkdensity than lenses treated for a shorter amount of time. Thus, toproduce lenses which will be subsequently treated in a tinting bath, thelens forming composition is treated with heat and activating light inthe post cure unit for a longer period of time than for the productionof non-tinted lenses. As shown in table 11, non-tinted clear lenses aretreated in the postcure unit for about 13 minutes. For clear lenseswhich will be subsequently tinted, the post cure time is extended toabout 15 minutes, to produce a lens having a relatively high crosslinkdensity.

[0351] The formation of flat-top bifocal lenses may also be accomplishedusing the above described procedure. One problem typical of curingflat-top bifocal eyeglass lenses with activating light is prematurerelease. Flat-top bifocals include a far vision correction zone and anear vision correction region. The far vision correction zone is theportion of the lens which allows the user to see far away objects moreclearly. The near vision correction zone is the region that allows theuser to see nearby objects clearer. The near vision correction zone ischaracterized by a semicircular protrusion which extends out from theouter surface of an eyeglass lens. As seen in FIG. 24, the portion ofthe mold cavity which defines the near vision correction zone 1610 issubstantially thicker than the portion of the mold cavity defining thefar vision correction zone 1620. Directing activating light toward themold members causes the polymerization of the lens forming compositionto occur. It is believed that the polymerization of the lens formingcomposition begins at the casting face of the irradiated mold andprogresses through the mold cavity toward the opposite mold. Forexample, irradiation of the front mold 1630 causes the polymerization tobegin at the casting surface of the front mold 1632 and progress towardthe back mold 1640. As the polymerization reaction progresses, the lensforming composition is transformed from a liquid state to a gel state.Thus, shortly after the front mold 1632 is irradiated with activatinglight, the portion of the lens forming composition proximate the castingface of the front mold member 1632 will become gelled while the portionof the lens forming composition proximate the back mold member 1640 willremain substantially liquid. If the polymerization is initiated from theback mold 1640, the lens forming composition throughout the far visioncorrection zone 1620 may become substantially gelled prior to gelationof the lens forming composition in the near vision correction zoneproximate the casting surface of the front mold member 1610 (hereinreferred to as the “front portion of the near vision correction zone”).It is believed that when the gelation of the lens forming composition inthe front portion of the near vision correction zone 1610 occurs afterthe far vision correction zone 1620 has substantially gelled, theresulting strain may cause premature release of the lens.

[0352] To reduce the incidence of premature release in flat-top bifocallenses, it is preferred that polymerization of the lens formingcomposition in the front portion of the near vision correction zone 1610is initiated before the portion of the lens forming composition in thefar vision correction zone proximate the back mold member 1640 issubstantially gelled. Preferably, this may be achieved by irradiatingthe front mold 1630 with activating light prior to irradiating the backmold 1640 with activating light. This causes the polymerization reactionto begin proximate the front mold 1630 and progress toward the back mold1640. It is believed that irradiation in this manner causes the lensforming composition in the front portion of the near vision correctionzone 1610 to become gelled before the lens forming composition proximatethe back mold 1640 becomes gelled. After the polymerization isinitiated, activating light may be directed at either mold or both moldsto complete the polymerization of the lens forming composition. Thesubsequent post cure and anneal steps for the production of flat-topbifocal lenses are substantially the same as described above.

[0353] Alternatively, the incidence of premature release may also bereduced if the front portion of the near vision correction zone 1610 isgelled before gelation of the lens forming composition extends from theback mold member 1640 to the front mold member 1630. In this embodiment,the polymerization of the lens forming composition may be initiated byirradiation of the back mold 1640. This will cause the gelation to beginproximate the back mold 1640 and progress toward the front mold 1630. Toreduce the incidence of premature release, the front mold 1630 isirradiated with activating light before the gelation of the lens formingcomposition in the far vision correction zone 1620 reaches the frontmold. After the polymerization is initiated in the front portion of thenear vision correction zone 1610, activating light may be directed ateither mold or both molds to complete the polymerization of the lensforming composition. The subsequent post cure and anneal steps for theproduction of flat-top bifocal lenses are substantially the same asdescribed above.

[0354] In another embodiment, a single curing unit may be used toperform the initial curing process, the post cure process, and theanneal process. A lens curing unit is depicted in FIG. 25 and FIG. 26.The curing unit 1230 may include an upper light source 1214, a lensdrawer assembly 1216, and a lower light source 1218. Lens drawerassembly 1216 preferably includes a mold assembly holder 1220 (see FIG.26), more preferably at least two mold assembly holders 1220. Each ofthe mold assembly holders 1220 is preferably configured to hold a pairof mold members that together with a gasket form a mold assembly.Preferably, the lens drawer assembly may also include a lens holder 1221(see FIG. 26), more preferably at least two lens holders 1221. The lensholders 1221 are preferably configured to hold a formed eyeglass lens.The lens drawer assembly 1216 is preferably slidingly mounted on a guide1217. During use, mold assemblies and/or lenses may be placed in themold assembly holders 1220 or lens holders 1221, respectively, while thelens drawer assembly is in the open position (i.e., when the doorextends from the front of the lens curing unit). After the holders havebeen loaded, the door may be slid into a closed position, with the moldassemblies directly under the upper light source 1214 and above thelower light source 1218. The lens holders and lenses disposed upon thelens holders may not be oriented directly under the upper and lowerlight sources. As depicted in FIG. 26, the light sources 1214 and 1218preferably extend across a front portion of the curing unit, while nolamps are placed in the rear portion of the curing unit. When the lensdrawer assembly is slid back into the curing unit, the mold assemblyholders 1220 are oriented under the lamps, while the lens holders 1221are oriented in the back portion where no lamps are present. Byorienting the holders in this manner curing process which involve lightand heat (e.g., post cure processes) and annealing processes, which mayinvolve either application of heat and light or the application of heatonly, may be performed in the same unit.

[0355] The light sources 1214 and 1218, preferably generate activatinglight. Light sources 1214 and 1218 may be supported by and electricallyconnected to suitable fixtures 1242. Lamps 1214 may generate eitherultraviolet light, actinic light, visible light, and/or infrared light.The choice of lamps is preferably based on the monomers andphotoinitiator system used in the lens forming composition. In oneembodiment, the activating light may be generated from a fluorescentlamp. The fluorescent lamp preferably has a strong emission spectra inthe 380 to 490 nm region. A fluorescent lamp emitting activating lightwith the described wavelengths is commercially available from Philips asmodel TLD-15W/03. In another embodiment, the lamps may be ultravioletlights.

[0356] In one embodiment, an upper light filter 1254 may be positionedbetween upper light source 1214 and lens drawer assembly 1216, asdepicted in FIG. 25. A lower light filter 1256 may be positioned betweenlower light source 1218 and lens drawer assembly 1216. Examples ofsuitable light filters have been previously described. The light filtersare used to create a proper distribution of light with regard to theprescription of the eyeglass lens. The light filters may also insulatethe lamps from the curing chamber. During post cure and annealingprocess it is preferred that the chamber is heated to temperaturesbetween about 200 and 225° F. Such temperatures may have a detrimentaleffects on the lamps such as shortening the lifetime of the lamps andaltering the intensity of the light being produced. The light filters1254 and 1256, when mounted into the guide 1217, will form an innerchamber which partially insulates the lamps from the heated portion ofthe chamber. In this manner, the temperatures of the lamps may bemaintained within the usual operating temperatures.

[0357] Alternatively, a heat barrier 1260 may be disposed within thecuring chamber. The heat barrier may insulate the lamps from the curingchamber, while allowing the activated light generated by the lamps topass into the chamber. In one embodiment, the heat barrier may include aborosilicate plate of glass (e.g., PYREX glass) disposed between thelight sources and the mold assembly. In one embodiment, a pair ofborosilicate glass plates 1264 and 1262 with an intervening air gapbetween the plates 1263 serves as the heat barrier. The use ofborosilicate glass allows the activating radiation to pass from thelight sources to the lamps without any significant reduction intensity.

[0358] Along with the heat barrier 1260 and filter 1254, an opaque plate1270, may be placed between the light sources and the mold assembly. Theopaque plate is substantially opaque toward the activating light.Apertures are preferably disposed in the opaque plate to allow light topass through the plate onto the mold assemblies.

[0359] In order to allow post cure and annealing procedures to beperformed, a heating system 1250 is preferably disposed within thecuring unit, as depicted in FIG. 26. The heating system 1250 may be aresistive heating system, a hot air system, or an infrared heatingsystem. The heating system 1250 may be oriented along the back side ofthe curing chamber. The heating system 1250 is preferably disposed at aposition between the two filters, such that the heating system ispartially insulated from the lamps 1214 and 1218. Preferably, theheating system is configured to heat the curing chamber to a temperatureof about 200° F. to about 225° F.

[0360] The incorporation of a heating system into a system which allowsirradiation of a mold assembly from both sides will allow many of theabove described operations to be performed in a single curing unit. Theuse of lamps in the front portion of the curing unit, while leaving theback portion of the curing chamber substantially free of lamps, allowsboth activating light curing steps and annealing steps to performed inthe same unit at the same time. Thus the curing conditions described inTable 11 may be performed in a single unit, rather than the two units asdescribed above.

[0361] In another embodiment, the method of producing the lenses may bemodified such that all of the initial curing process is performed whileheat is applied to the lens forming composition. Table 12 showsalternate curing conditions which may be used to cure the lens formingcompositions. TABLE 12 LENS INFORMATION CURING INFORMATION Lens AnnealSphere Type Tinted Filter Curing Conditions Time +4.00 to Clear No 50 mm90 Seconds Front and Back 7 Min. +2.25 13 Minutes Back Temperature 225°F. +4.00 to Clear Yes 50 mm 90 Seconds Front and Back 7 Min. +2.25 15Minutes Front Temperature 225° F. +4.00 to Photo 50 mm 90 Seconds Frontand Back 7 Min. +2.25 13 Minutes Front Temperature 225° F. +2.00 toClear No Clear Plate 7 Seconds Front 7 Min. −4.00 13 Minutes BackTemperature 225° F. +2.00 to Clear Yes Clear Plate 7 Seconds Front 7Min. −4.00 15 Minutes Back Temperature 225° F. +2.00 to Photo ClearPlate 15 Seconds Front 7 Min. plano 13 Minutes Back Temperature 225° F.−0.25 to Photo Clear Plate 20 Seconds Back 7 Min. −4.00 w/ 7 Sec. Frontstarting @ 13 Sec. elapsed time 13 Minutes Back Temperature 225° F.

[0362] After the mold assembly is filled with the appropriate monomersolution the mold assemblies are placed in the mold assembly holders ofthe drawer of the curing unit. The drawer is slid back into the curingunit. The curing unit may be preheated to a temperature of about 225° F.prior to placing the mold assemblies in the curing unit. The curingconditions include applying activating light to one or both of the moldmembers while substantially simultaneously applying heat to the moldassemblies. As shown in Table 12, the light curing conditions aresimilar to the previously described conditions. However, the initialdose and the post-cure processes have been combined into a singleprocess. Thus, for the formation of a photochromic lens having a spherepower of +1.50, the mold assemblies are placed in the lens curing unitand irradiated with activating light from the bottom of the unit forabout 15 seconds. The curing unit is preferably at a temperature ofabout 225° F. while the activating light is applied. After 15 seconds,the bottom light is turned off and the mold assemblies are treated withactivating light from the top lamps for about 13 minutes. Thissubsequent treatment with activating light is also performed at a curingchamber temperature of about 225° F. After the 13 minutes have elapsed,the lights may be turned off, the lens removed from the molds and ananneal process begun.

[0363] The anneal process may be performed in the same unit that thecure process is performed. The demolded lens is preferably placed in thelens holders of the curing unit drawer. The curing unit is preferably ata temperature of about 225° F., when the lens are placed in the curingunit. Preferably, the lens holders are positioned away from the lamps,such that little activating light reaches the lenses when the lamps areon. This allows anneal processed to be performed at the same time thatcuring processes are performed and within the same curing unit. Lensesthat have been formed with a mixture of heating and light typicallyexhibit crosslink density that are greater than lenses which are curedusing combinations of light only curing with light and heat curing.

[0364] The mold assembly, with a lens forming composition disposedwithin the mold cavity, is preferably placed within the lens curingunit. Curing of the lens forming composition is preferably initiated bythe controller after the lens curing unit door is closed. The curingconditions are preferably set by the controller based on theprescription and type of lens being formed.

[0365] After the curing cycle has been completed. The controllerpreferably prompts the user to remove the mold assembly from the lenscuring unit. In an embodiment, the cured lens may be removed from themold apparatus. The cured lens may be complete at this stage and readyfor use.

[0366] In another embodiment, the cured lens may require a post curetreatment. After the lens is removed from the mold apparatus the edgesof the lens may be dried and scraped to remove any uncured lens formingcomposition near the edges. The controller may prompt the user to placethe partially cured lens into a post-cure unit. After the lens has beenplaced within the post-cure unit the controller may apply light and/orheat to the lens to complete the curing of the lens. In an embodiment,partially cured lenses may be heated to about 115° C. while beingirradiated with activating light. This post-treatment may be applied forabout 5 minutes.

[0367] It has been determined that in some embodiments the finishedpower of an activating light polymerized lens may be controlled bymanipulating the curing temperature of the lens forming composition. Forinstance, for an identical combination of mold members and gasket, thefocusing power of the produced lens may be increased or decreased bychanging the intensity of activating light across the lens mold cavityor the faces of the opposed mold members. Methods for altering the powerof a formed lens are described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,989,462 to Buazzawhich is incorporated by reference.

[0368] In certain applications, all of the lens forming composition mayfail to completely cure by exposure to activating light when forming thelens. In particular, a portion of the lens forming composition proximatethe gasket often remains in a liquid state following formation of thelens. It is believed that the gaskets may be often somewhat permeable toair, and, as a result, oxygen permeates them and contacts the portionsof the lens forming material that are proximate the gasket. Since oxygentends to inhibit the polymerization process, portions of the lensforming composition proximate the gasket tend to remain uncured as thelens is formed. The wet edge problem has been addressed by a variety ofmethods described in U.S. Pat. No. 5,529,728 to Buazza et. al. and U.S.Pat. No. 5,989,462 to Buazza et al. which are incorporated by reference.

[0369] Methods for curing a lens forming composition by the use ofpulses of ultraviolet light are described in U.S. Pat. No. 6,022,498which is incorporated by reference.

[0370] Materials (hereinafter referred to as “activating light absorbingcompounds”) that absorb various degrees of ultraviolet/visible light maybe used in an eyeglass lens to inhibit ultraviolet/visible light frombeing transmitted through the eyeglass lens. Such an eyeglass lensadvantageously inhibits ultraviolet/visible light from being transmittedto the eye of a user wearing the lens. Curing of an eyeglass lens usingactivating light to initiate the polymerization of a lens formingcomposition that includes activating light absorbing compositions isdescribed in detail in U.S. Pat. No. 5,989,462 which is incorporated byreference.

[0371] Referring now to FIG. 27, a high-volume lens forming apparatus isgenerally indicated by reference numeral 800. As shown in FIG. 27, lensforming apparatus 800 includes at least a first lens curing unit 810 anda second lens curing unit 820. The lens forming apparatus may,optionally, include an anneal unit 830. In other embodiments, a postcure unit may be a separate apparatus which is not an integral part ofthe lens curing apparatus. A housing in which first lens curing unit810, second lens curing unit 820, and anneal unit 830 may be disposedmay be formed of an insulating material. In this manner, the housing maybe configured to reduce heat transfer between the first lens curingunit, the second lens curing unit and the anneal. unit. The lens formingapparatus may also include at least one monomer heating unit or fillunit as described in any of the above embodiments. The lens formingapparatus may also include conveyance system 850 positioned within thefirst and/or second lens curing units. The conveyance system 850 may beconfigured to allow a mold assembly, such as has been described above,to be transported from the first lens curing unit 810 to the second lenscuring unit 820. For example, the conveyance system may be configured toallow a plurality of mold assemblies, which may be filled with a lensforming composition, to be transported into, through, and out of thelens forming apparatus.

[0372] The lens forming apparatus may be configured to form an eyeglasslens in less than approximately one hour. In addition, the lens formingapparatus may be configured to form at least 25 prescription casteyeglass lenses per hour by application of activating light to cure aliquid forming composition into a prescription cast eyeglass lens. Forexample, the system may be configured to form approximately 100prescription cast eyeglass lenses per hour by application of activatinglight to cure a liquid forming composition into a prescription casteyeglass lens. Such a rate of production may also include a timerequired to anneal a prescription cast eyeglass lens.

[0373] Lens curing units 810 and 820 include an activating light sourcefor producing activating light. The activating light sources disposed inunits 810 and 820 are preferably configured to direct light toward amold assembly. Anneal unit 830 may be configured to apply heat to an atleast partially relive or relax the stresses caused during thepolymerization of the lens forming material. Anneal unit 830, in oneembodiment, includes a heat source. A controller 840 may be aprogrammable logic controller, e.g., a computer. Controller 840 may becoupled to lens curing units 810 and 820 and, if present, an anneal unit830, such that the controller is capable of substantially simultaneouslyoperating the three units 810, 820, and 830.

[0374] As shown in FIG. 28, first curing unit 810 may include upperlight source 812 and lower light source 814. FIG. 29 depicts a cut awaytop view of first curing unit 810. As shown in FIG. 29, light sources812 and 814 of first curing unit 810 may include a plurality ofactivating light generating devices or lamps. In one embodiment, thelamps are oriented proximate each other to form a row of lights, asdepicted in FIG. 29. While the lamps are depicted as substantiallyU-shaped, it should be understood that the lamps may be linear,circular, or any other shape that allows a uniform irradiation of a lensforming assembly placed in the first curing unit. In one embodiment,three or four lamps are positioned to provide substantially uniformradiation over the entire surface of the mold assembly to be cured. Thelamps may generate activating light.

[0375] The lamps may be supported by and electrically connected tosuitable fixtures 811. Lamps 812 and 114 may generate either ultravioletlight, actinic light, visible light, and/or infrared light. The choiceof lamps is preferably based on the monomers used in the lens formingcomposition. In one embodiment, the activating light may be generatedfrom a fluorescent lamp. The fluorescent lamp preferably has a strongemission spectra in the 380 to 490 nm region. A fluorescent lampemitting activating light with the described wavelengths is commerciallyavailable as model number FB290D15/ACT/2PC from LCD Lighting, Inc. inOrange Conn.

[0376] In some embodiments, the activating light sources may be turnedon and off frequently during use. Fixture 811 may also includeelectronic hardware to allow a fluorescent lamp to be frequently turnedon and off. Ballasts systems, such as the ones previously described, maybe used to operate the lamps. In some embodiments, a barrier 815 may beplaced between the lamps 811. The barrier may be configured to inhibitthe passage of activating light from one set of lamps to the other. Inthis manner, the lamp sets may be optically isolated from each other.The lamps may be connected to separate ballast systems and a controller.In addition, the lamps may be coupled separately to fans.

[0377] Thus, the lamps may be operated independently of each other. Inaddition, operation of the fans may be controlled by a controller tocoincide with operation of the lamps. For example, if a lamp is turnedon by a controller, a fan may also be turned on by a controller. Thismay be useful when lenses that require different initial curingsequences are being processed at the same time. The barrier 815 mayinhibit the passage of light from one set of lamps to a mold assemblypositioned below the other set of lamps.

[0378] In some embodiments, at least four independently controllablelamps or sets of lamps may be disposed in the first curing unit. Thelamps may be disposed within the first curing unit with a sliding rackwhich may maintain a position of the lamps within the first curing unit.The lamps may be disposed in left and right top positions and left andright bottom positions. As shown in Table 12, a variety of differentinitial curing conditions may be required depending on the prescription.In some instances the left eyeglass lens may require initial curingconditions that are substantially different from the initial curingconditions of the right eyeglass lens. To allow both lenses to be curedsubstantially simultaneously, the four sets of lamps may beindependently controlled. For example, the right set of lamps may beactivated to apply light to the back face of the mold assembly only,while, at the same time, the left set of lamps may be activated to applylight to both sides of the mold assembly. In this manner a pair ofeyeglass lenses whose left and right eyeglass prescriptions requiredifferent initial curing conditions may be cured at substantially thesame time. Since the lenses may thus advantageously remain together inthe same mold assembly holder throughout the process, the productionprocess is simpler with minimized job tracking and handlingrequirements.

[0379] To facilitate the positioning and the conveyance of moldassemblies, a mold assembly holder may be used. An isometric view of amold assembly holder 900 is depicted in FIG. 30. The mold assemblyholder includes at least one, preferably two, portions 910 and 912configured to hold a mold assembly 930. In one embodiment, the portions910 and 912 are indentations machined into a plastic or metal block thatis configured to hold a standard mold assembly. The mold assembly may beplaced in the indentation. An advantage of such the indentations, isthat the mold assemblies may be positioned in the optimal location forcuring in the first and second curing units 810 and 820.

[0380] The indentations 910 and 912 may be sized to hold the moldassembly such that substantially all of the molds may be exposed toactivating light when the mold assembly is positioned above or below anactivating light source. The mold assembly holder may include an openingextending through the mold assembly holder. The opening may bepositioned in the indentations 910 and 912 such that activating lightmay be shone through the mold assembly holder to the mold assembly. Insome embodiments, the opening may be of a diameter that is substantiallyequal to the diameter of the molds. The opening will therefore allowsubstantially all of the surface area of the mold to be irradiated withactivated light. In another embodiment, the diameter of the opening maybe substantially less than a diameter of the molds. In this respect theopening may serve as an aperture which reduces the amount of light thatcontacts the outer edges of the molds. This may be particularly usefulfor curing positive lenses in which curing is initiated with moreactivating light being applied to the central portion of the molds thanthe edges. The indentations may extend in the body to a depth such thatthe mold assemblies, when placed in the indentations is even with orbelow the upper surface of the mold assembly holder. This imparts a lowvertical profile to the mold assembly holder and allows the curing unitsof the high volume system to be constructed with a low vertical profile.In this manner, the size of the unit may be minimized.

[0381] The mold assembly holder 900 may also include further machinedindentations for holding the unassembled pieces of the mold assembly(e.g., the molds and the gasket). For example, the mold assembly holdermay be configured to hold at least two molds. During the assembly of themold assembly, an operator typically will find and clean the molds andgasket before assembly. To minimize the possibility of mixing up themolds and gaskets, and to help minimize recontamination after the moldsare cleaned, the mold assembly holder 900 includes sections to hold thevarious components. As depicted in FIG. 30, indentations 922, 924, 926,and 928 may also be formed in the mold assembly holder 900. Theindentations may be labeled to facilitate the placement of the molds orgaskets. For example, indentation 922 may be labeled left lens, frontmold, 924 may be labeled left lens, back mold, 928 may be labeled rightlens, front mold, and 926 may be labeled right lens, back mold. Othervariations of labeling and positioning of the indentations 922, 924,926, and 928 may be used. This may help prevent operators from makingmistakes due to use of incorrect molds to assemble the mold assemblies.

[0382] The mold assembly holder may also include a location for holdinga job ticket. Job ticket may be placed in a holder mounted to a side ofthe mold assembly holder. Alternatively, the job ticket may have anadhesive that allows the ticket to be attached to the side of the moldassembly. The job ticket may include information such as: theprescription information, the mold ID numbers, the gasket ID numbers,the time, date, and type of lens being formed. The job ticket may alsoinclude a job number, the job number may correspond to a job numbergenerated by the controller when the prescription is entered into thecontroller. The job number may also be depicted using a UPC codingscheme. Use of a UPC code on the job ticket may allow the use ofbar-code scanners to determine the job number corresponding to the moldassemblies placed on the mold assembly holder.

[0383] The mold assembly holder may also include at least one indicia oran identifying mark. An indicia may include a color, at least onealphanumeric character, at least one graphical character, a barcode, ora radio frequency emitter. The indicia of a mold assembly holder mayvary depending on the intended use of the mold assembly holder. Forexample, the color of a mold assembly holder may vary depending on thetype of lens which may be formed within the mold assembly holder. Forexample, a mold assembly holder having a first color may be suitable forforming a photochromic lens, and a mold assembly holder having a secondcolor may be suitable for forming a non-photochromic lens. In addition,alphanumeric characters formed in, printed on, or attached to the moldassembly unit may include, for example, “PHOTOCHROMIC LENS” or“NON-PHOTOCHROMIC LENS” depending on the type of lens which may beformed within the mold assembly holder. A graphical character may alsovary depending on the type of lens which may be formed within the moldassembly holder.

[0384] A radio frequency emitter may be commonly referred to as an “RFtag.” A radio frequency emitter may be formed within or coupled to amold assembly holder. A radio frequency emitter may be configured togenerate a radio frequency signal at least periodically. The generatedradio frequency signal may include a signature which may becharacteristic of the type of lens which may be formed within the moldassembly holder. A radio frequency detector may be coupled to a lensforming apparatus and may be configured to detect a radio frequencysignal generated by the radio frequency emitter. The type of lens whichmay be formed with the mold assembly holder may then be determined fromthe detected radio frequency signal. In addition, a system may include alens forming apparatus and mold assemblies of at least two differentforms of at least one of the indicia described above.

[0385] The mold assembly holder 900 may be used in combination with aconveyor system 850 to transfer mold assemblies from the first curingunit to the second curing unit. The second curing unit is configured toapply activating light and heat to the mold assemblies after the curingis initiated by the first curing unit. The use of two curing units inthis manner facilitates the application of curing sequences such as thesequences outlined in Table 11. In these embodiments, the mold assemblyis subjected to an initiating dose of activating light, followed by apost-cure dose of activating light and heat. The initial dose may lastfrom about 7 to 90 seconds. After the initial dose is applied the moldassembly is subjected to a combination of activating light and heat forabout 5 to 15 minutes. In many instances, subjecting the mold assemblyto longer times under the post-cure conditions does not significantlyeffect the quality of the formed lens. Thus, the second curing unit isdesigned such that the amount of time that the mold assemblies spend inthe second unit is not less than about 5 minutes.

[0386] During operation a mold assembly or mold assembly holder isplaced on the conveyor system and the mold assembly is moved to aposition within the first curing unit 810. In the first curing unit 810,the mold assemblies receive the initial dose of light based on theprescription of the lens, e.g., as outlined in Table 11. After the moldassemblies receive their initial dose, the mold assemblies are moved bythe conveyor system 850 to the second curing unit. In the second curingunit, the mold assemblies are treated with activating light and heat.The time it takes for the mold assembly to pass entirely through thesecond curing unit may be equal to or greater than the post-cure time.

[0387] In one embodiment, the conveyor system may be a single continuoussystem extending from the first curing unit through the second curingunit. During the operation of the lens forming apparatus 800, it isenvisioned that a continuous stream of mold assemblies may be placed onthe apparatus. FIG. 32 depicts a top cut away of a system in which acontinuous stream of mold assembly holders 900 are moving through thefirst and second curing units. Because the curing for any givenprescription lens is complete in the first curing unit in a time of 90seconds or less, the second unit may be constructed as a rectangularshaped unit that will hold multiple mold assemblies, as depicted in FIG.27. The length of the second cure unit is determined by the timerequired for each mold assembly in the first unit. Because the conveyorsystem is a single continuous unit, the molds will move through thesecond curing unit in increments equal to the amount of time spent inthe first curing unit. Thus, the molds move only when the curing cycleof the first curing unit is complete and the mold assemblies or moldassembly holder is advanced to the second curing unit.

[0388] In one embodiment, the mold assemblies are placed on a moldassembly holder 900 as described above. The mold assembly holder mayhave a predetermined length (L_(H)). After the mold assemblies areloaded onto the mold assembly holder, the mold assembly holder may beplaced on the conveyor system 850 and advanced to the first curing unit.The mold assembly holder will remain in the first curing unit for apredetermined minimum amount of time, i.e., the initiation time (T_(I)).For example, for most of the lens forming compositions and prescriptionsoutlined above, this maximum time will be about 90 sec. After theinitial cure is performed, the mold assembly holder is advanced to thesecond curing unit and another mold assembly holder is advanced to thefirst curing unit. To properly cure lens forming composition, the moldassemblies may need to remain in the second curing unit for a minimumamount of time, i.e., the post-cure time (T_(P)). The required minimumlength of the second curing unit (L_(SC)) may, therefore be calculatedby these predetermined values using the following equation.

L _(SC) =L _(H)×(T _(P) /T _(I))

[0389] By constructing the second curing unit to have a length based onthis equation, the mold assembly holder will exit from the second curingunit after the correct amount of post-curing has occurred. This willensure that the mold assembly will remain in a post-cure situation evenif the minimal initiation times are used.

[0390] In practice there is a wide variation in the initiation timesbased on the prescription and the type of lenses being formed. Forexample, Table 11 discloses some typical initiation times that rangefrom about 7 sec. to about 90 sec. In order to optimize the system, thelength of the second curing unit may be altered based on the maximumpredetermined initiation time. For example, the (T_(I)) rather thanbeing the minimum time will be the maximum time possible for initiationof the curing. In practice, the conveyor system may be configure toadvance a mold assembly holder from the first curing unit to the secondcuring unit at time intervals equal to the maximum possible initialcuring cycle (e.g., about 90 sec. for the above-described compositions)To accommodate the different initial curing cycles, a controller may becoupled to the lamps of the first curing unit. The controller may beconfigured to turn on the lamps such that the initial curing cycle endsat the end of the maximum initial curing time. For example, if themaximum initial curing time is 90 sec., however the prescription andlens type calls for only a 7 sec, cure. The lamps are kept off until 7sec. before the end of the 90 sec. time interval (i.e., for 83 seconds).The lamps are, therefore, only activated for the last 7 sec. This mayensure that the time interval between the end of the completion of theinitial cure and the entry into the second curing unit is the sameregardless of the actual initiation dosage. The length of the secondcuring unit may be adjusted accordingly to accommodate this type ofcuring sequence.

[0391] In another embodiment, the conveyor system may include twoindependently operated conveyors. The first conveyor may be configuredto convey the mold assembly holder or mold assemblies from the firstcuring unit to the second curing unit. A second conveyor may bepositioned within the second curing unit. The second conveyor may beconfigured to convey the mold assemblies or the mold assembly holderthrough the second curing unit. As such, a speed of the first and secondconveyors may be substantially different. For example, a speed of thefirst conveyor may be variable and a speed of the second conveyor may besubstantially constant. In this manner, the second curing unit may bedesigned independently of the initial curing times. Instead the lengthof the second curing unit may be based on the time required for atypical post-cure sequence. Thus the length of the second curing unitmay be determined by the rate at which the second conveyor system isoperated and the amount of time required for a post-cure. This alsoallows an operator to operate the curing units independently of theother.

[0392] The conveyor system may be configured to convey either moldassemblies or a mold assembly holder (e.g., mold assembly holder 900)through the first and second curing units. A view of the conveyor systemin which the curing units have been removed from the lens formingapparatus is depicted in FIG. 31. The conveyor system includes aplatform for conveying a mold assembly holder. The platform may beconfigured to support the mold assembly holder 900 as it passes throughthe first and second curing units. In one embodiment, the platform isformed from two rails 852 that extend the length of the lens formingapparatus. The rails, 852 may be any width, however should be spacedapart from each other at a distance that allows activating light to passpast the rails 852 and to the mold assemblies on the mold assemblyholder 900.

[0393] The conveyor system includes a flexible member 854 (e.g., a beltor chain) that is configured to interact with the mold assembly holder900. The flexible member will interact with the mold assembly holder andpull or push the mold assembly holder along the platform. FIG. 33depicts a close up view of a portion of the flexible member. In thisembodiment, the flexible member is composed of a chain 854 that includesa number of projections 856 and 858 that are placed at predeterminedpositions along the chain. The projections may be configured to interactwith the mold assembly holder. In one embodiment, the mold assemblyholder may include a ridge along the bottom surface. The ridge willinteract with the projections when the chain is moved to the appropriateposition. While depicted as a chain, it should be understood that theflexible member may be formed of other materials such as a rubber belt.For example, the flexible member may be formed of a flexible materialsuch as neoprene.

[0394] The flexible member 854 may be coupled to a pair of wheels orgears disposed at opposite ends of the lens forming apparatus. FIG. 33depicts a portion of the flexible member that is resting on a geardisposed at an end of the lens forming apparatus. The flexible membermay be moved along the lens forming apparatus by turning either of thewheels or gears. The wheels or gears may be manually turned or may becoupled to a motor. FIG. 34 depicts a lens forming apparatus in which amotor 851 is coupled to an end of the second curing unit. The motor maybe coupled to the flexible member such that the flexible member may bemoved by the operation of the motor. The motor 851 may either pull orpush the flexible member along the length of the lens forming apparatus.In addition, the motor and the flexible member may be configured suchthat the flexible member may continue to move under a mold member holdereven if movement of the mold member holder may be obstructed. In thismanner, the flexible member may “slip” under a mold member holder if,for example, a mold member has reached a safety stop coupled to thefirst or second curing units. For example, a safety stop may be coupledto an end of each of the curing units to prevent tray from falling offthe conveyance system.

[0395] The second curing unit may be configured to apply heat andactivating light to a mold assembly as it passes through the secondcuring unit. The second curing unit may be configured to applyactivating light to the top, bottom, or both top and bottom of the moldassemblies. As depicted in FIGS. 28 and 35, the second curing unit mayinclude a bank of activating light producing lamps 822 and heatingsystems 824. The bank of lamps may include one or more substantiallystraight fluorescent lamps that extend through the entire length of thesecond curing unit. The activating light sources in the second curingunit may produce light having the same spectral output as the activatinglight sources in the first curing unit. The spectral output refers tothe wavelength range of light produced by a lamp, and the relativeintensity of the light at the specific wavelengths produced.Alternatively, a series of smaller lamps may be disposed with the curingunit. In either case, the lamps are positioned such that the moldassemblies will receive activating light as they pass through the secondcuring unit. The heating unit may be a resistive heater, hot air system,hot water systems, or infrared heating systems. In this manner, achamber temperature may be controlled by altering the adjusting thepower to, for example, the resistive heater. An air distributor 826(e.g., a fan) may be disposed within the heating system to aid in aircirculation within the second curing unit. By circulating the air withinthe second curing unit, the temperature within the second curing may bemore homogenous.

[0396] In some embodiments, an anneal unit may also be coupled to thelens forming apparatus. As depicted in FIG. 27, an anneal unit 830 maybe placed above the second curing unit. Alternatively, the anneal unitmay be placed below or alongside of the first or second curing units.The anneal unit is configured to apply heat and, optionally light, toanneal a demolded lens. When a lens, cured by the activating light, isremoved from a mold assembly, the lens may be under a stressedcondition. It is believed that the power of the lens can be more rapidlybrought to a final resting power by subjecting the lens to an annealtreatment to relieve the internal stresses developed during the cure.Prior to annealing, the lens may have a power that differs from thedesired final resting power. The anneal treatment is believed to reducestress in the lens, thus altering the power of the lens to the desiredfinal resting power. Preferably, the anneal treatment involves heatingthe lens at a temperature between about 200° F. to 225° F. for a periodof up to about 10 minutes. It should be understood that the anneal timemay be varied depending on the temperature of the anneal unit.Generally, the higher the temperature of the anneal unit, the faster theanneal process will be completed. The anneal process time ispredetermined based on the amount of time, at a predeterminedtemperature, a formed lens will need to be annealed to be brought to itsfinal resting power.

[0397] In the embodiment depicted in FIG. 27, the anneal unit may beconstructed in a similar manner to the second curing unit. Turning toFIG. 35, the anneal unit may include a conveyor system 832 for moving ademolded lens through the anneal unit. The demolded lens may be placedin the same mold assembly holder that was used for the first and secondcuring units. The mold assembly holder 900 may be configured to holdeither the mold assembly and/or a demolded lens. The anneal unitincludes a heating element 834 (depicted in FIG. 28). The heatingelement may include a air distributor 836 for circulating air throughoutthe anneal unit.

[0398] The anneal unit may have a length that is determined by the rateat which the mold assembly holders are transported through the annealunit and the time required for the anneal process. For example, in someof the compositions listed above, an anneal time of about 10 min. may beused to bring the lens to its final resting power. The conveyor systemof the anneal unit may therefore be configured such that the demoldedlenses spend about 10 minutes within the anneal unit as the lensestraverse the length of the unit. A conveyor system similar to the systemdescribed above for the first and second curing units may be used. Theconveyor system in the anneal unit may also be configured to movethrough the anneal unit continuously.

[0399] The controller 840 may be configured to control operation of thelens-curing units.

[0400] The controller may perform some and/or all of a number offunctions during the lens curing process, including, but not limited to:(i) determining the initial dose of light required for the first curingunit based on the prescription; (ii) applying the activating light withan intensity and duration sufficient to equal the determined dose; (iii)applying the activating light with an intensity and duration sufficientto equal the determined second curing unit dose; (iv) turning the lampssources on and off independently and at the appropriate times; and (v)triggering the movement of the proper light filters into the properposition based on the prescription. These functions may be performed inresponse to information read by the bar code reader from the job ticketpositioned on the mold assembly holder. This information may include theprescription information and may be correlated with the initial curingconditions by the controller 840.

[0401] The controller may also control the flow of the mold assemblyholder through the system. The controller may include a monitoringdevice for determining the job number associated with a mold assemblyholder. FIG. 29 depicts a monitoring device 817 which is coupled to thelens forming apparatus proximate the first curing unit. The monitoringdevice may be a laser or infra-red reading device. In some embodiments,the monitoring device may be a bar code reader for reading a UPC barcode. The monitoring device may be positioned within the first curingunit. When a mold assembly holder is placed on the conveyer system, itmay be moved to a position such that the monitoring device may read ajob number printed on the job ticket. In one embodiment, the job numberis in the form of a UPC bar code. The monitoring device may be coupledto the controller. The controller may use the job number, read from themold assembly holder, to determine the curing conditions required forthe job that is being transferred to the first curing unit. In addition,the controller may use the job number, read from the mold assemblyholder, to determine when to apply light to the job being transferred tothe first curing unit. As described before, the job number maycorrespond to a prescription that was previously entered into thecontroller. In this manner the proper curing conditions may be achievedwithout relying on the operator to input the correct parameters.

[0402] Another advantage of the monitoring of the job number is thataccidental usage of the lamps may be avoided. If the monitoring deviceis positioned within the first cure unit. the controller may prevent theactivation of the first cure unit lamps, until a job ticket is detected.The detection of a job ticket may indicate that a mold assembly holderis placed in the proper position within the first curing unit. Once themold assembly holder is placed within the first curing unit, the lampsof the first curing unit may be activated to initiate curing and theconveyance system may begin to move. If no job ticket is detected, theapparatus may wait in a stand-by mode until the mold assembly holder isinserted into the first curing unit. In this manner, the lifetime of alamp of a lens forming apparatus may be extended.

[0403] Alternatively, a monitoring device positioned within the firstcure unit may include a photosensor which may commonly be referred to asa “photoeye”. The photosensor may be configured to determine if a moldassembly holder is placed at the entrance of an initialization unitwithin the curing unit. The photosensor may, for example, monitor anintensity of a light beam. If a mold assembly holder is in front of thephotosensor, then an intensity of the light beam may be reduced. Such areduction in intensity may be detected by the photosensor and may beprocessed to determine that a mold assembly holder may have been placedin the curing unit. As described above, once a mold assembly holder maybe detected within the first curing unit, the lamps of the first curingunit may be activated to initiate curing and the conveyance systemwithin the first curing unit may begin to move.

[0404] In addition, a speed of the conveyance system may increase upondetection of a mold assembly holder within the first curing unit. Inthis manner, a mold assembly holder may be moved into position quicklyonce the mold assembly holder has been placed in the curing unit.Furthermore, the photosensor may be configured to monitor an intensityof the light beam periodically. In this manner, the photosensor maydetermine how long a mold assembly holder may be located at a positionin the lens forming apparatus. In addition, if a mold assembly holder ismoved out of the light beam of the photosensor, the photosensor maydetect an increase in an intensity of the light beam. The photosensormay be further configured to send the detected intensity of the lightbeam to a controller computer. The controller computer may be configuredto control the conveyor system in response to the detected intensity ofthe light beam. In this manner, the controller computer may beconfigured to prevent a mold assembly holder from entering the lensforming apparatus until an increase in an intensity of a light beam isreceived from the photosensor by controlling the conveyor system.

[0405] Furthermore, multiple such photosensors may be positioned atvarious locations throughout a curing unit. In this manner, a presenceof the mold assembly holder may be detected at various positions througha curing unit. In addition, the output of the multiple photosensors maybe used to monitor the operation of the curing unit. Such a photosensor,or a plurality of photosensors, may also be positioned within the secondcure unit and may also be configured to determine a presence of a moldassembly holder in the second cure unit. Position of a tray within acuring unit may also be used to determine when light may be applied tothe mold assembly holder in an initialization chamber. For example, thecontroller may determine delay time for applying initialization lightfrom a speed of the conveyance system. In this manner, application ofinitialization light may be delayed until a last portion of the time inwhich the mold assembly holder may be in the initialization unit.Minimization of the delay between application of initialization lightand curing light may increase the consistency of resulting eyeglasslenses because each lens forming composition in each processed moldassembly holder may get the same treatment.

[0406] It should be understood, that the above-described lens curingsystem may be used in combination with any of the features of thepreviously described embodiments.

[0407] Additional embodiments relate to systems and method for thelocation, storage, and identification of ophthalmic mold members to beused in the production of ophthalmic lenses. The system may employ atwo-dimensional or three-dimensional ophthalmic mold member storagesystem (also called a storage array) that may allow a user to store andretrieve mold members in an organized fashion. The storage array may beconfigured as a horizontal, vertical or angled array. The mold membersmay be organized within the storage array such that mold members withsimilar properties may be arranged near one another. A controllercomputer may be coupled to the mold member storage array. Additionally,an indicator or indicators may be coupled to the mold member storagearray to assist a user in locating a desired mold member.

[0408]FIG. 36 depicts an embodiment of an ophthalmic mold member storagesystem including mold member storage array 1806 coupled to controllercomputer 1801. Mold member storage array 1806 may include rows orcolumns of mold member storage locations 1804. Indicators 1802 may bearranged proximate each mold member storage location 1804. In thisembodiment, four indicators 1802 may surround each mold member storagelocation 1804 with adjacent storage locations sharing the indicatorsbetween them. To direct a user to select a mold member in a storagelocation, controller computer 1801 may produce a signal therebyactivating indicators 1802. Mold member storage array 1806 may beconfigured as a vertical, horizontal, or angled array of storagelocations 1804 in which a ophthalmic mold member may be securely stored.

[0409]FIGS. 37a and 37 b depicts several embodiments of mold memberstorage locations 1821 and 1822. In the embodiment of FIG. 37a,indicator 1820 may be located adjacent to each mold member storagelocation 1821. In the embodiment of FIG. 37b, indicator 1823 may beconfigured to encircle or illuminate each mold member storage location1822. The indicator, however, may include any appropriate indicatorwhich may be known in the art.

[0410]FIG. 38 depicts an embodiment of an ophthalmic mold member storagearray 1806. Storage array 1806 may facilitate the storage of a largenumber of mold members 1830. Mold member storage array 1806 may beconfigured vertically, i.e. such that molds within the array arevertical. As shown in FIG. 39, molds may be arranged on shelf 1840.Shelf 1840 may be tilted toward the front of array 1833 at an angle ofabout 5 degrees to about 10 degrees.

[0411] If the stored mold members are lens molds, as shown in FIG. 38,it may be possible that individual molds 1830 may be damaged by contactwith one another. To prevent molds 1830 from contacting each other,separating device 1832 may be coupled to the mold storage array. Avariety of cams or other separating devices may be used to separateindividual molds. Separating device 1832 (more clearly illustrated inFIG. 39) may include one cam or a plurality of cams. Many differenttypes and arrangements of cams may be used. FIGS. 40, 41a, 41 b, and 41c depict a variety of cams which may be suitable for separating devices.Reference numerals 1852, 1853, 1861, and 1862 indicate rocking typecams. Reference numeral 1863 indicates a hinged cam. Reference numeral1864 indicates a reciprocating cam. FIG. 40 also depicts interaction ofcams 1852 and 1853 with mold members 1851 and 1855. At dispensing end1854, cam 1853 may retain mold member 1855 within the storage location,whereas within the body of the storage location, cam 1852 may preventmold members 1851 and 1855 from contacting one another. The position ofthe separating devices may vary depending on the mold member storagearray and preference. As each mold 1855 is removed for use, theseparating devices 1853 may move to dispense the mold 1855.

[0412] In the embodiment of FIG. 38, molds 1830 may be removed fromarray 1806 at front end 1833. When mold 1830 is removed (or dispensed)from array 1806, separating devices 1832 may move or disengage to allowthe adjacent mold to advance into the emptied storage location. Thisprocess may continue, with adjacent molds advancing into empty storagelocations until the empty storage location coincides with the storagelocations designated for restocking molds into mold member storage array1806.

[0413] Once a mold member has been used and cleaned it may be ready forstorage. The cleaned mold member may be returned to storage by placingthe mold member in the designated restocking location. The restockinglocation may be the same as the dispensing location, or it may bedifferent. For example, in the case where the mold member is a lensmold, and the mold member storage array is a vertical array, the moldmember storage array may be configured to allow the user to remove adesired mold from a first point. The array may further be configured toallow the user to restock the array at a second point. The second pointmay be on the opposite side of the array from the first point, or it maybe on a side adjacent to the side of first point. In the embodiment ofFIG. 38, the first point coincides with the front end of array 1833.Preferably, the second point coincides with back end 1834 of the array.However, rather than being restocked from back end 1834 of the array,the array may be configured to allow restocking from top end 1831 of thearray. Separating devices 1832 may load and secure returned molds 1830into place automatically.

[0414] Controller computer 1801, as depicted in FIG. 36, may beconfigured to interact with the operator. The controller computer mayinclude at least one input device 1805 and at least one output device1803. Input device 1805 may include a keyboard (e.g., a full computerkeyboard or a modified keyboard), a light sensitive pad, a mouse, atouch sensitive pad, a bar code scanner, a microphone, or anotherappropriate input device. In a preferred embodiment, input devices 1805may also include at least a keyboard, a mouse, and a bar code scanner.Output device 1803 or devices may include a display screen, a voicesynthesizer, or another suitable output device. In a preferredembodiment, output device 1803 may include at least a display screen.

[0415] Controller computer 1801 may utilize user input to establish somecontrol parameters. For example, the controller computer may allow theuser to input information regarding the lens to be formed. Thisinformation may include type of lens (clear, ultraviolet absorbing,photochromic, colored, etc.), lens prescription, type of coatings (e.g.,scratch resistant or tint) or other such information as may be desiredto describe the lens to be formed. Based on this information controllercomputer 1801 may preferably be configured to send information back tothe operator. For example, controller computer 1801 may inform the userof appropriate mold members to use in forming the desired lens, thelocation of the mold members, or process parameters. Controller computer1801 may also signal an operator when certain operations may need to beperformed or when a particular operation may be completed (e.g., when toplace the mold assembly in the lens curing unit, when to remove the moldassembly, when to transfer the mold assembly, etc.).

[0416] In an embodiment, controller computer 1801 may be a computersystem including display screen 1803 to view data, input device 1805such as a keyboard, keypad or scanning device to input data, and a CPUto store and process data, and run software applications. The controllercomputer may be configured to send an activation signal to individualindicators 1802 as appropriate to instruct the user as to the locationof a desired mold member, or the appropriate storage location for a moldmember being placed into storage array 1806.

[0417] Mold members may be marked for identification. The mark mayinclude a symbol, bar code, human readable code, text, or otheridentifying mark. In an embodiment, each mold member may be coded suchthat controller computer 1801 may indicate to a user which mold membersto select by conveying the code for each mold member. In an embodiment,after mold member 1809 is selected, identifying mark 1808 on mold member1809 may be sent to controller computer 1801. Controller computer 1801may be configured to provide feedback to the user confirming orrejecting the selection. In an embodiment, when mold member 1809 is tobe placed back into storage array 1806, identifying mark 1808 may besent to controller computer 1801. Controller computer 1801 may beconfigured to notify a user of designated storage location 1804 for moldmember 1809 by activating indicators 1802 proximate to that location1804.

[0418] In an embodiment, the controller computer may be manipulated byutilizing software applications as described above. The software mayinclude applications for classifying certain ophthalmic molds for theproduction of prescription eyeglass lenses. The logic controller and thesoftware may also be configured to accept data pertaining to certainparameters that characterize an ophthalmic mold for lens production. Ina preferred embodiment, the desired parameters may be recognized by thecontroller computer and a signal may be sent from controller computer1801 to indicators 1802 proximate mold member storage location 1804,where the mold member possessing the desired parameters for productionmay be stored. In this manner, indicators 1802 may be activated to calla user's attention to the desired mold member.

[0419] As depicted in FIG. 36, device 1807 may be coupled to thecontroller computer to ease inputting data pertaining to mold member1809. Device 1807 may be a scanner that reads a human readable code orbar code 1808 attached to mold member 1809. In a preferred embodiment, acode or marking may be assigned and attached to each ophthalmic moldmember 1809. For example, bar code 1808 may located on an outside edgeof ophthalmic mold 1809, as depicted in FIG. 36. Scanning device 1807may read bar code 1808 on an outside edge of ophthalmic mold 1809. Inaddition, the controller computer 1801 may be configured to send anactivation signal to indicators 1802 adjacent to the proper mold memberstorage location 1804 for mold member 1809.

[0420] In an alternate embodiment, device 1807 may include a peripheraldevice that may be configured to process data by way of voicerecognition. The peripheral device may include a microphone configuredto recognize voice input from the user. Once controller computer 1801recognizes the input data, it may send a signal to mold member storagearray 1806 or mold member storage location 1804 to indicate the properstorage location for an ophthalmic mold member.

[0421] Additional embodiments relate to a system and acomputer-implemented method for the collection and transmission ofeyeglass lens information over a computer network. The system may alsoinclude at least one controller computer coupled to a lens formingapparatus. The system, in some embodiments, includes computer hardwareand software operable to send and receive data over a computer networkto and from a client computer system. In an embodiment, thecomputer-implemented method may be implemented by program instructionswhich may be computer-executable and may be incorporated into a carriermedium.

[0422] Eyeglass lens information may generally refer to any datarepresentative of an eyeglass lens prescription, an eyeglass lenscomposition, operating conditions configured to produce an eyeglasslens, and/or other appropriate characteristics of an eyeglass lens suchas tint. The eyeglass lens composition information may include, forexample, an identity of a monomer-containing fluid which may bepolymerized to form an eyeglass lens. Such information may be in theform of raw data, including binary or alphanumeric. formatted data, orreports. In some embodiments, eyeglass lens information relates to datacollected from an client or customer. More specifically, eyeglass lensinformation may take the form of data collected from a doctor examininga patient and/or prescribing an eyeglass lens for a patient, anoptician, an optometrist, an ophthalmologist, a retailer of eyeglasslenses, an optical lab, or a wholesaler of eyeglass lenses. Theinformation may be encrypted for security purposes.

[0423] The term “computer system” as used herein generally describes thehardware and software components that in combination allow the executionof computer programs. The computer programs may be implemented insoftware, hardware, or a combination of software and hardware. Computersystem hardware generally includes a processor, memory media, andinput/output (I/O) devices. As used herein, the term “processor”generally describes the logic circuitry that responds to and processesthe basic instructions that operate a computer system. The term “memorymedium” includes an installation medium, e.g., a CD-ROM, floppy disks; avolatile computer system memory such as DREAM, SRAM, EDO RAM, RambusRAM, etc.; or a non-volatile memory such as optical storage or amagnetic medium, e.g., a hard drive. The term “memory” is usedsynonymously with “memory medium” herein. The memory medium may includeother types of memory or combinations thereof. In addition, the memorymedium may be located in a first computer in which the programs areexecuted, or may be located in a second computer that connects to thefirst computer over a network. In the latter instance, the secondcomputer provides the program instructions to the first computer forexecution. In addition. the computer system may take various forms,including a personal computer system, mainframe computer system,workstation, network appliance, Internet appliance, personal digitalassistant (PDA), television system or other device. In general, the term“computer system” can be broadly defined to encompass any device havinga processor that executes instructions from a memory medium.

[0424] The memory medium preferably stores a software program orprograms for the reception, storage, analysis, and transmittal ofeyeglass lens information. The software program(s) may be implemented inany of various ways, including procedure-based techniques,component-based techniques, and/or object-oriented techniques, amongothers. For example, the software program may be implemented usingActiveX controls, C++ objects, JavaBeans, Microsoft Foundation Classes(MFC), or other technologies or methodologies, as desired. A centralprocessing unit (CPU), such as the host CPU, for executing code and datafrom the memory medium includes a means for creating and executing thesoftware program or programs according to the methods, flowcharts,and/or block diagrams described below.

[0425] A computer system's software generally includes at least oneoperating system such as Windows NT, Windows 95, Windows 98, or WindowsME (all available from Microsoft Corporation); or Mac OS and Mac OS XServer (Apple Computer, Inc.), MacNFS (Thursby Software), PC MACLAN(Miramar Systems), or real time operating systems such as VXWorks (WindRiver Systems, Inc.), QNX (QNX Software Systems, Ltd.), etc. Theforegoing are all examples of specialized software programs that manageand provide services to other software programs on the computer system.Software may also include one or more programs configured to performvarious tasks on the computer system and various forms of data to beused by the operating system or other programs on the computer system.Software may also be operable to perform the functions of an operatingsystem (“OS”). The data may include, but is not limited to, databases,text files, and graphics files. A computer system's software generallyis stored in non-volatile memory or on an installation medium. A programmay be copied into a volatile memory when running on the computersystem. Data may be read into volatile memory as the data is required bya program.

[0426] A server program may be defined as a computer program that, whenexecuted, provides services to other computer programs executing in thesame or other computer systems. The computer system on which a serverprogram is executing may be referred to as a server, though it maycontain a number of server and client programs. In the client/servermodel, a server program awaits and fulfills requests from clientprograms in the same or other computer systems. Examples of computerprograms that may serve as servers include: Windows NT (MicrosoftCorporation), Mac OS X Server (Apple Computer, Inc.), MacNFS (ThursbySoftware), PC MACLAN (Miramar Systems), etc

[0427] A web server is a computer system which maintains a web sitebrowsable by any of various web browser software programs. As usedherein, the term ‘web browser’ refers to any software program operableto access web sites over a computer network.

[0428] An intranet is a network that may be contained within anenterprise. An intranet may include many interlinked local area networks(LANs) and may use data connections to connect LANs in a wide areanetwork (WAN). An intranet may also include single layer low-reflectancecoatings for many camera and video lenses. In one embodiment, thethickness of the antireflective coating layers of an eyeglass lens maybe varied or the indices of refraction may be altered to produce lenseswhich have different visible light reflective characteristics. Both ofthese variations will alter the optical thickness of the coating layersand change the optimal effective wavelength of light that istransmitted. As the optical thickness of the coating layers is alteredthe reflected color of the lens will also be altered. In an iterativemanner, the optimal reflected color of the eyeglass lens may becontrolled by the manufacturer.

[0429] While two layer antireflective coatings have been described, itshould be understood that multi-layer systems that include more than twolayers may also be used. In a two-layer system, a substrate is coatedwith a high index of refraction layer. The high index of refractionlayer is then coated with a low index of refraction layer. In anembodiment, a third high index of refraction (e.g., at least higher thanthe underlying second coating layer) may be formed on the second coatinglayer. A fourth low index of refraction layer (e.g., at least lower thanthe index of refraction of the third coating layer) may also be formed.The four layer stack may exhibit antireflective properties. The fourlayer stack may have an optical thickness of less than about 1000 nm,and more particularly less than about 500 nm. Additional layers may beformed upon the stack in a similar manner with the layers alternatingbetween high and low index of refraction materials.

[0430] In another embodiment, the second coating layer may be formed asa combination of two chemically distinct compositions. The secondcoating layer may be formed by forming a silicon layer upon the firstcoating layer. The silicon layer may be formed from colloidal silica ora silane monomer. The silicon layer is applied to the first coatinglayer and at least partially cured. The silicon layer may be cured bydrying, heating, or the application of ultraviolet light. apparatus.Alternatively, multiple controller computers may be coupled to the lensforming apparatus, and each of the multiple controller computers may beconfigured to monitor and control a subset of the equipment coupled tothe lens forming apparatus.

[0431] Controller computer 2002 may operable to connect to a computernetwork 2004 such as a local area network which may include an Ethernetdevice. As used herein, “computer network” may also refer to any type ofintranet or extranet network which connects computers and/or networks ofcomputers together, thereby providing connectivity between varioussystems for communication there between, using various networkcommunication protocols, such as TCP/IP, FTP, HTTP, HTTPS, etc.Controller computer 2002 may execute software to communicate with othercomputer systems connected to network 2004. In addition, a plurality ofcontroller computers may be connected to network 2004. Each controllercomputer may be coupled to a lens forming apparatus that may beconfigured as described in above embodiments.

[0432] A receiver computer 2006 may also be connected to network 2004.Receiver computer 2006 may be configured to receive an eyeglass lensorder from a user. The user may enter the eyeglass lens order by usingan user input device such as a keyboard coupled to receiver computer2006. Alternatively, receiver computer 2006 may be configured to receivean eyeglass lens order from a client. For example, a client may includea doctor, an optician, an optometrist, an ophthalmologist, a retailer ofeyeglass lenses, an optical lab, or a wholesaler of eyeglass lenses, afranchise of a national or local retail chain, or another enterprisewhich supplies eyeglass lenses. Therefore, the client may be locatedremotely from receiver computer 2006. A user at a client site such as anemployee of a doctor or an employee of a franchise may enter an eyeglasslens order into computer system 2008 located at the client site. Theeyeglass lens order may include eyeglass lens information as describedabove. Computer system 2008 at the client site may be configured to sendthe eyeglass lens order to the receiver computer.

[0433] Computer system 2008 may be a computer system, network appliance,Internet appliance, personal digital assistant (PDA) or other system.Computer system 2008 may execute software to communicate with receiverunit 2006, thus facilitating transmission of eyeglass lens data fromcomputer system 2008 to receiver computer 2006 and vice versa. Forexample, computer system 2008 may be coupled to receiver computer 2006by connection mechanism 2007 as described above. In one embodiment,computer system 2008 may execute software operable to transmit eyeglasslens data via any of various communication protocols over a network toone or more recipient computer systems and to receive responses from therecipient computers. These protocols may include, but are not limitedto, TCP/IP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS. For example, computer system 2008 atthe client site may be coupled to receiver computer 2006 by computernetwork 2010 such as an extranet as described above. Alternatively,computer system 2008 at the client site may be coupled to receivercomputer 2006 by computer network 2004 as described above. In addition,the information may be encrypted for security purposes as describedabove.

[0434] Receiver computer 2006 may store the received eyeglass lens orderin a database. In addition, the database may be stored in memory ofreceiver computer 2006, controller computer 2002, and/or client computersystem 2008. Therefore, the database may include a plurality of eyeglasslens orders. Each eyeglass lens order may include eyeglass lensinformation as described above. For example, each eyeglass lens ordermay include a patient name, a priority classification, a job type suchas right and/or left lens, a lens type such as aspheric, flat top, andparadigm progressive, a monomer or tint type, and an eyeglass lensprescription. The database may also include a sorted list of theplurality of eyeglass lens orders. For example, the receiver computermay be configured to sort the database by patient name, priorityclassification, or job type. In addition, the receiver computer may beconfigured to send such a database through network 2004 such that thedatabase may be stored on controller computer 2002 or client computersystem 2008.

[0435] Receiver computer 2006 may also be configured to generate a jobticket in response to the received eyeglass lens information. Forexample, a job ticket may include a barcode representative of thereceived eyeglass lens information. The barcode may be generated by thereceiver computer. The job ticket may also include a portion or any ofthe received eyeglass lens information as described above. Receivercomputer 2006 may also be configured to store the generated barcode inthe database as a field associated with the received eyeglass lensinformation. In this manner, the database may include a look-up-tablethat may be searched by barcode or by any of the eyeglass lensinformation as described above. In addition, receiver computer 2006 maybe further configured to send the generated job ticket to printer 2009.Printer 2009 may be configured to print job tickets in addition to anyother type of document. A printed job ticket may be attached to a moldassembly holder by a user. The mold assembly holder may be configured tosupport an eyeglass lens mold during a process performed by the lensforming apparatus.

[0436] Lens forming apparatus 2000 may include first barcode reader2012. First barcode reader 2012 may be configured to scan a barcodeprinted on a job ticket. For example, first barcode reader 2012 mayinclude a light source and a detector. The light source may beconfigured to scan a beam of light across a barcode. The detector may beconfigured to detect light reflected from the barcode. The job ticketmay be generated by the receiver computer 2006 as described above. Firstbarcode reader 2012 may be coupled to controller computer 2002 and maybe configured to send information representative of the barcode such asthe detected light to controller computer 2002 over a serial lineconnection. The controller computer may be configured to send theinformation representative of the barcode to receiver computer 2006 overnetwork 2004.

[0437] In addition, receiver computer 2006 may be configured to searchthe database of eyeglass lens orders using the informationrepresentative of the barcode as described above. Alternatively, thereceiver computer may process the information representative of thebarcode to determine information representative of an eyeglass lensorder. For example, the receiver computer may search a first databasewith the barcode to determine information representative of an eyeglasslens order associated with the barcode. In addition, the receivercomputer may use the determined information representative of aneyeglass order to search a second database. Furthermore, receivercomputer 2006 may be configured to send results of searching thedatabase to controller computer 2002 over computer network 2004. Resultsof searching the database may include any of the informationrepresentative of an eyeglass lens order as described above and abarcode associated with the eyeglass lens order. For example, results ofsearching the database may include a job number, a patient name, a moldassembly holder number, a priority, a bin location, a lens location(i.e., left lens or right lens), a lens type, a monomer type and/ortint, a spherical power, a cylindrical power, axis, an add power, curingconditions. In addition, controller computer 2002 may be configured toat least temporarily store the information in a memory coupled tocontroller computer 2002.

[0438] In a further embodiment, receiver computer 2006 may be configuredto determine a front mold member identity and a back mold memberidentity from the information representative of the eyeglass lens order.In addition, receiver computer 2006 may be configured to send thedetermined front mold member identity and the determined back moldmember identity to controller computer 2002. Alternatively, controllercomputer 2002 may be configured to determine the front mold memberidentity and the back mold member identity from informationrepresentative of an eyeglass lens order, which may be received fromreceiver computer 2006.

[0439] Controller computer 2002 may be further coupled to mold memberstorage array 2014. In addition, controller computer 2002 may beconfigured to send the determined front mold member identity and thedetermined back mold member identity to mold member storage array 2014.Mold member storage array 2014 may be configured as described in any ofthe above embodiments. For example, the mold member storage array may beconfigured to hold a plurality of eyeglass lens molds. In addition, themold member storage array may be configured to determine a location of afront mold member and a back mold member and to generate a signal toindicate the determined locations. Alternatively, the location of frontand back mold members may be determined by the controller computer. Themold member storage array may also be configured to display thegenerated signal to a user. The signal may be a visual and/or audiblesignal suitable for detection by a user. The mold member storage arraymay also be configured to generate and/or display the signalsequentially as described in above embodiments. As such, a generatedsignal may indicate an appropriate mold member to a user. The user mayremove the appropriate mold member from the mold member storage arrayand may assemble an eyeglass lens mold in the mold assembly holder asdescribed above. Assembly of the eyeglass lens mold may also includefilling a space between two mold members with a lens formingcomposition. The lens forming composition may include any of the lensforming compositions as described in above embodiments.

[0440] Lens forming apparatus 2000 may be configured to receive a moldassembly holder and an assembled eyeglass lens mold in a first curingunit (not shown) as described in any of the above embodiments. Forexample, the first curing unit may be configured to direct light to theeyeglass lens mold to at least partially cure the lens formingcomposition. In addition, first curing unit may include second barcodereader 2016. Second barcode reader 2016 may be configured to scan abarcode on a job ticket as described in above embodiments. The jobticket may be attached to a mold assembly holder as described in aboveembodiments. In addition, the second barcode reader may be disposedwithin the first curing unit proximate to a location at which the moldassembly holder may be placed into the first curing unit by a user.Additional barcode readers may be disposed within the first curing unitproximate to a location at which the mold assembly holder may be removedfrom the first curing unit by a user and at various location through thefirst curing unit. As such, the second barcode reader may be configuredto scan a barcode of job ticket on a mold assembly holder containing anassembled eyeglass lens mold prior to, during, or subsequent to at leastpartial curing of a 50. GUI 2262 may be displayed on a controllercomputer and/or a receiver computer. The controller computer and thereceiver computer may be configured as described in any of the aboveembodiments. Maintenance viewer GUI 2262 may preferably allow a user toview information related to operational status of a lens curingapparatus. Operational status of a lens curing apparatus may bedetermined by parameters of a number of instruments coupled to the lenscuring apparatus. For example, instruments coupled to the lens curingapparatus may include, but are not limited to, thermocouples, timingdevices, light detection devices such as photodiodes, and electricalmeasurement devices. Therefore, parameters of an instrument may include,for example, output of a thermocouple, a timing device, a lightdetection device, or an electrical measurement device. In this manner,information related to operational status of lens curing apparatus mayinclude, but may not be limited to, temperatures of a post-cure chamber,time, light intensity, and electrical currents being drawn by lampscoupled to the lens curing apparatus. As such, information which may bedisplayed on the maintenance viewer may include lamp current draws,current upper and lower limits for the current draw, and lamp liferemaining.

[0441] Information related to operational status of a lens curingapparatus may be displayed in alphanumeric and graphical format. Forexample, as shown in FIG. 49, GUI 2262 may include output windows 2264which may include alphanumeric characters representative of informationrelated to operational status of a lens curing apparatus as describedabove. In addition, GUI 2252 may include a plurality of digital inputs2266 which may include alphanumeric characters describing an operationalstatus of a lens curing apparatus and a corresponding graphical icon.For example, alphanumeric characters may be used to describe anoperation or a process which may be performed by a lens formingapparatus. A graphical icon corresponding to the alphanumeric charactersmay indicate if the operation or process is currently being performed bythe lens forming apparatus or if the operation or process is beingperformed satisfactorily. For example, if the air pressure within a lensforming apparatus is within operational limits, a graphical the lightpulse which is provided to an assembled eyeglass lens mold by a firstcuring unit may vary depending on the eyeglass lens being formed.

[0442] Furthermore, controller computer 2002 may be configured tomonitor a parameter of at least one instrument coupled to the firstcuring unit during curing of a lens forming composition in the firstcuring unit. In addition, the controller computer may be configured tocompare the monitored parameter to an acceptable range for the parameterand to display an error message if the monitored parameter is outside ofthe acceptable range. In this manner, the controller computer may beconfigured to monitor a curing process in situ and to provide real-timeinformation to a user of the lens forming apparatus.

[0443] Lens forming apparatus 2000 may also be configured such that anassembled eyeglass lens mold may be transported from the apparatussubsequent to being treated in the first curing unit. For example, lensforming apparatus 2000 may include a conveyor system (not shown)configured to transport mold assembly holders which may contain eyeglasslens molds through a first curing unit as described in aboveembodiments. Therefore, subsequent to treatment in a first curing unit,a user may remove the mold assembly holder and the assembled eyeglasslens mold contained within the mold assembly holder from a conveyorsystem. Furthermore, the user may place the mold assembly holder into asecond curing unit (not shown) of lens forming apparatus 2000.

[0444] In addition, second curing unit may include third barcode reader2018. Third barcode reader 2018 may be configured to scan a barcode on ajob ticket as described in above embodiments. The job ticket may beattached to a mold assembly holder as described in above embodiments. Inaddition, the third barcode reader may be disposed within the secondcuring unit proximate to a location at which the mold assembly holdermay be placed into the second curing unit by a user. An additionalbarcode reader may also be disposed within the second curing unitproximate to a location at which the mold assembly holder may be removedfrom the second curing unit by a user or at various locations within thesecond curing unit.

[0445] As such, the third barcode reader may be configured to scan abarcode on a job ticket attached to a mold assembly holder containing anassembled eyeglass lens mold prior to, during, or subsequent to curingof a lens forming composition disposed within the assembled eyeglasslens mold. In addition, third barcode reader 2018 may be coupled tocontroller computer 2002 and may be configured to send informationrepresentative of the barcode such as detected light to controllercomputer 2002 over a serial line connection. In addition, controllercomputer 2002 may be configured to monitor the progress of mold assemblyunits through the second curing unit from output from at least onebarcode reader. The controller computer may also be configured to altera parameter of an instrument coupled to the first curing unit fromoutput from at least the one barcode reader. In this manner, thecontroller computer may be configured to control the first curing unitbased on conditions present in the second curing unit. As such, curingof a lens forming composition in the first and the second curing unitmay be synchronized and/or optimized by the controller computer.Furthermore, the controller computer may be configured to determine athroughput of the second curing unit from the output from at least onebarcode reader.

[0446] The controller computer may be configured to determine aneyeglass lens order and/or eyeglass lens information from theinformation received from the third barcode reader as described in aboveembodiments. In addition, the controller computer may be configured tosend the information received from the third barcode reader to receivercomputer 2006 over network 2004. Receiver computer 2006 may beconfigured to determine an eyeglass lens order and/or eyeglass lensinformation from the information received from the third barcode readeras described in above embodiments. Receiver computer 2006 may beconfigured to send the determined eyeglass lens order and/or thedetermined eyeglass lens information to controller computer 2002.

[0447] In addition, controller computer 2002 may be configured to altera parameter of an instrument coupled to lens forming apparatus 2000 inresponse to the determined eyeglass lens order and/or the determinedeyeglass lens information. For example, controller computer 2002 may becoupled to a second curing unit of lens forming apparatus 2000. Inaddition. controller computer 2002 may be configured to alter aparameter of an instrument coupled to the second curing unit of lensforming apparatus 2000 to alter an intensity of light or a temperatureof heat generated by the second curing unit. As such, the intensity oflight or the temperature of heat which may be provided to an assembledeyeglass lens mold by a second curing unit may vary depending on theeyeglass lens being formed.

[0448] As described above, controller computer 2002 may be configured tomonitor a parameter of at least one instrument coupled to the secondcuring unit during curing of a lens forming composition in the secondcuring unit. For example, the controller computer may be configured tomonitor a temperature of a second curing unit. In addition, thecontroller computer may be configured to a speed of the conveyor systemin response to the monitored temperature. In this manner, the controllercomputer may be configured to prevent a mold assembly holder from beingintroduced into the second curing unit until the temperature in withinan acceptable range for curing a lens forming composition disposedwithin the mold assembly holder. In addition, the controller computermay be configured to compare the monitored parameter to an acceptablerange for the parameter and to display an error message if the monitoredparameter is outside of the acceptable range. In this manner, thecontroller computer may be configured to monitor a curing process insitu and to provide real-time information to a user of the lens formingapparatus.

[0449] Lens forming apparatus 2000 may also be configured such that aneyeglass lens may be transported from the apparatus subsequent to beingtreated in the second curing unit. For example, lens forming apparatus2000 may include a conveyor system configured to transport mold assemblyholders which may contain at least partially cured lens formingcompositions through a second curing unit as described in aboveembodiments. Therefore, subsequent to treatment in a second curing unit,a user may remove the mold assembly holder from a conveyor system andthe eyeglass lens contained within the mold assembly holder. A user mayalso disassemble the eyeglass lens mold assembly and may remove the atleast partially cured lens forming composition from the eyeglass lensmold assembly. In addition, the user may place the at least partiallycured lens forming composition into the mold assembly holder from whichthe at least partially cured lens forming composition was removed.

[0450] The user may place the at least partially cured lens formingcomposition contained within the mold assembly holder into an annealunit. At least one barcode reader may be disposed within the anneal unitas described in any of the above embodiments. In addition, at least theone barcode reader within the anneal unit may be configured as describedin any of the above embodiments. Each of the barcode reader within theanneal unit may also be coupled to a controller computer. The controllercomputer may also be configured as described in any of the aboveembodiments.

[0451] In addition, the controller computer may be configured to alteroperation of the lens forming apparatus in response to a predeterminedsignal. A predetermined signal may include login by an operator or anengineer, a predetermined time, or reception of an eyeglass lens order.For example, an operator or an engineer may login at the beginning of awork shift. Upon receiving the login data, the controller computer mayalter an operation of the lens forming apparatus. In this manner, uponreceiving login data, a controller computer may supply power to lamps ofa curing unit and may supply power to a monomer heating unit. Similarly,a controller computer may be configured to supply power to lamps of acuring unit or a monomer heating unit at a predetermined time at which awork shift may begin. The predetermined time may be set by an operatoror an engineer using the controller computer. Alternatively, acontroller computer may be configured to supply power to lamps of acuring unit or a monomer heating unit upon reception of an eyeglass lensorder. In this manner, the supplied power may vary depending on theeyeglass lens which may be formed in response to the order. As such, thecontroller computer may be configured to “warm up” a lens formingapparatus which may increase throughput and decrease cost.

[0452] Lens forming apparatus 2000 may also include mold reader 2020.Mold reader 2020 may be configured to scan a mold member and todetermine a mold member identity. For example, a user may disassemble aneyeglass lens mold subsequent to removing the eyeglass lens mold fromthe second curing unit as described above. In addition, a user may usemold reader 2020 to scan a front mold member and a back mold member ofthe disassembled eyeglass lens mold. For example, mold reader 2020 mayinclude a light source and a detector. The light source may beconfigured to scan a beam of light across an eyeglass lens mold. Thedetector may be configured to detect light reflected from the eyeglasslens mold.

[0453] Mold reader 2020 may be coupled to controller computer 2002 andmay configured to send information representative of a mold memberidentity such as detected light to controller computer 2002 over aserial line connection. Controller computer 2002 may be configured todetermine an identity of the front mold member and the back mold memberfrom the sent information. Alternatively, controller computer 2002 maybe configured to send information generated by mold reader 2020 toreceiver computer 2006 over a computer network. Receiver computer 2006may be configured to determine an identity of the front mold member andthe back mold member and to send the determined identities to thecontroller computer over the computer network. Alternatively, moldreader 2020 may be configured to determine an identity of a front moldmember and an identity of a back mold member. In this manner, moldreader 2020 may also be configured to send determined identities of thefront and back mold members to the controller computer.

[0454] Controller computer 2002 may be coupled to mold member storagearray 2014 as described above. Controller computer 2002 may beconfigured to send the determined front mold member identity and thedetermined back mold member identity to mold member storage array 2014.In addition, the mold member storage array may be configured todetermine an appropriate location for a mold member within the moldmember storage array from a mold member identity and to generate asignal to indicate the determined location. The mold member storagearray may also be configured to display the generated signal to a user.The signal may be visual and/or audible such that the signal may bedetected by a user. The mold member storage array may also be configuredto generate and/or display the signal sequentially as described in aboveembodiments. As such, a generated signal may indicate, to a user, anappropriate location for an eyeglass mold member having the determinedidentity. In this manner, a user may place a mold member into anappropriate location in a mold member storage array until an eyeglasslens order is received which requires use of the mold member.

[0455] Various embodiments further include receiving or storinginstructions and/or data implemented in accordance with the foregoingdescription upon a carrier medium. Suitable carrier media include memorymedia or storage media such as magnetic or optical media, e.g., disk orCD-ROM, as well as signals such as electrical, electromagnetic, ordigital signals, conveyed via a communication medium such as networksand/or a wireless link.

[0456] In an alternate embodiment, the receiver computer may be operableto upload eyeglass lens data directly to the controller computer, forexample, by a communications link such as a serial data connection,wireless data link, modem, floppy drive, etc. The controller computermay be connected to a computer network, as may be the client computersystem. In addition, the controller computer may have softwareexecutable to transmit eyeglass lens information to the client computersystem and to receive response information back from the client computersystem, and the client computer system may have software executable toreceive eyeglass lens information and to transmit a response back to thecontroller computer or to one or more receiver computers.

[0457] In a further embodiment, the receiver computer may connect to aserver (not shown), either directly, as with a communication link, orremotely, via a computer network. The server may be operable to receiveand store eyeglass lens information and to make the eyeglass lensinformation available to client computer systems also connected to anetwork. The server may be any of a variety of servers. For example, theserver may be a web server such that the server may be operable tomaintain a web site accessible by the client computer systems withbrowser software. A use of the client computer system may includeviewing and/or downloading eyeglass lens information from a server usingthe browser software. As another example, the server may be an FTPserver, in which case a user of a client computer system may be able totransfer the eyeglass lens information from the server to the clientcomputer system using an FTP software program. As yet another example, aserver may allow remote login to an account by a client computer system.The account may have been established for use by a user of the clientcomputer system. The user of the client computer system may then view,edit, or transfer eyeglass lens information as needed. The clientcomputer system may also optionally transmit a response back to theserver, which may then be accessed by the receiver computer. A clientcomputer system may also transmit the response information to one ormore additional client computer systems. In all of these embodiments,security measures may be employed to protect the identity of the users,as well as the privacy and integrity of the information. Such securitymeasures may include secure login, encryption, private communicationlines, and other security measures.

[0458] In one embodiment, a server may be a web server operable tomaintain a web site. When a client computer system accesses the web siteof the web server, the web server may provide various data andinformation to a client browser on a client computer system, possiblyincluding a graphical user interface (GUI) that displays theinformation, descriptions of the information, and/or other informationthat might be useful to the users of the system.

[0459] In some embodiments, the receiver computer may include anelectronic controller, as described herein. The electronic controllermay allow the receiver computer to be operated by a client computersystem that is coupled to the electronic controller. The client computersystem may include software that provides the user information regardingthe operation of the receiver computer. The software may allow the userof the client computer to issue commands that allow operation of thereceiver computer from the electronic controller. The issued commandsmay be converted to control signals. The control signals may be receivedby the electronic controller. The electronic controller may operatecomponents of the receiver computer in response to the received controlsignals.

[0460] The client computer system may be coupled directly to thereceiver computer. Alternatively, the client computer system may becoupled to the receiver computer via a computer network. In thisembodiment, an operator may be in a different location than the locationof the receiver system. By sending control signals over the computernetwork, the operator may remotely control the operation of the receiversystem. The receiver system may also be configured to transmit theobtained eyeglass lens information back to the client computer systemvia the computer network.

[0461] As illustrated in FIG. 43, an embodiment of acomputer-implemented method for forming an eyeglass lens may includereceiving an eyeglass lens order with a receiver computer as shown instep 2100. The eyeglass lens order may include eyeglass lens informationas described above. A receiver computer may be configured as describedin any of the above embodiments. Receiving an eyeglass lens order mayinclude receiving an eyeglass lens order from a user. For example, auser may enter an eyeglass lens order by using an user input device suchas a keyboard coupled to a receiver computer. Alternatively, receivingan eyeglass lens order may include receiving an eyeglass lens order froma client such as a doctor, an optician, an optometrist, anophthalmologist, a retailer of eyeglass lenses, an optical lab, or awholesaler of eyeglass lenses, a franchise of a national or local retailchain, or another enterprise which supplies eyeglass lenses. Therefore,receiving an eyeglass lens order may include receiving the eyeglass lensorder with a computer system located remotely at a client site andsending the eyeglass lens order to the receiver computer.

[0462] A computer system located remotely at a client site may becoupled to a receiver computer via a server as described above. Theclient computer system may be configured to receive and/or transmitinformation to the receiver computer. In one embodiment, the receivercomputer may be configured to receive control signals from the clientcomputer system via the server. The operation of the receiver system andsubsequently the controller computer and the lens forming apparatus may,therefore, be controlled via a client computer through a server. Asdiscussed before, the receiver computer may also transmit eyeglass lensinformation back to the client computer system via the server. Theeyeglass lens information may be encrypted as described in aboveembodiments.

[0463] The method may also include storing the received eyeglass lensorder in a database. The database may be stored by a receiver computeras described in above embodiments. Alternatively, the database may bestored by the controller computer as described above. The database mayinclude a plurality of eyeglass lens orders. Each eyeglass lens ordermay include eyeglass lens information as described above. The method mayalso include sorting the plurality of eyeglass lens orders such that thedatabase may include a sorted list of the plurality of eyeglass lensorders.

[0464] The method may also include generating a job ticket in responseto the received eyeglass lens information as shown in step 2102. A jobticket may include a barcode representative of the received eyeglasslens information as described in above embodiments. The barcode may begenerated by a receiver computer or a controller computer. The methodmay also include storing the barcode in the database as a fieldassociated with the received eyeglass lens information. In this manner,the database may include a look-up-table that may be searched by barcodeor by any of the eyeglass lens information as described above. Inaddition, the method may include printing the generated job ticket. Aprinted job ticket may be attached to a mold assembly holder by a user.The mold assembly holder may be configured as described in any of theabove embodiments.

[0465] As shown in step 2104, the method may include scanning a barcodeprinted on a job ticket. The method may also include sending informationresulting from scanning the barcode to a controller computer over aserial line connection. The controller computer may be configured asdescribed in any of the above embodiments. The method may furtherinclude sending the information representative of the barcode to areceiver computer.

[0466] In addition, the method may include determining informationassociated an eyeglass lens order associated with the scanned bar code.For example, the method may include searching a database of eyeglasslens orders using the information representative of the barcode.Alternatively, the method may include processing the informationrepresentative of the barcode to determine information representative ofan eyeglass lens order. For example, the method may include searching afirst database with the barcode to determine information representativeof an eyeglass lens order associated with the barcode. In addition, themethod may include searching a second database with the determinedinformation representative of an eyeglass order. Furthermore, the methodmay include sending results of searching the database from a receivercomputer to a controller computer over a computer network. Results ofsearching the database may include any of the information representativeof an eyeglass lens order as described above and a barcode associatedwith the eyeglass lens order.

[0467] The method may also include determining a front mold memberidentity and a back mold member identity from the informationrepresentative of the eyeglass lens order, as shown in step 2106. Inaddition, the method may include sending the determined front moldmember identity and the determined back mold member identity to acontroller computer. The method may further include sending thedetermined front mold member identity and the determined back moldmember identity to a mold member storage array. A mold member storagearray may be configured as described in any of the above embodiments. Inaddition, the method may include generating a signal to indicatelocations of mold members having the determined mold member identities.The method may also include displaying the generated signal to a user.For example, the generated signal may be displayed as a visual and/oraudible signal suitable for detection by a user. Furthermore, the methodmay include generating and/or displaying the signal sequentially toindicate a location of a front mold member and a location of a secondmold member. As such, a generated signal may indicate a location of anappropriate mold member to a user. The user may remove the appropriatemold member from the mold member storage array and may assemble aneyeglass lens mold containing a lens forming composition in a moldassembly holder as described above. The lens forming composition mayinclude any of the lens forming compositions as described in aboveembodiments.

[0468] The method may further include scanning a bar code on a jobticket subsequent to placing a mold assembly holder including anassembled eyeglass lens mold in a first curing unit of a lens formingapparatus, as shown in step 2108. Scanning the bar code may includescanning the barcode with a second barcode reader, which may beconfigured as described in above embodiments. For example, the secondbarcode reader may be disposed within a first curing unit proximate to alocation at which the mold assembly holder may be placed into the firstcuring unit by a user. The second barcode reader, however, may also bedisposed within the first curing unit proximate to a location at whichthe mold assembly holder may be removed from the first curing unit orthroughout the first curing unit. As such, step 2108 may includescanning a barcode of job ticket on a mold assembly holder containing anassembled eyeglass lens mold prior to, during, or subsequent to curingat least a portion of a lens forming composition disposed within theassembled eyeglass lens mold. In addition, the method may includesending information representative of the barcode to a controllercomputer over a serial line connection.

[0469] As shown in step 2110, the method may include determiningparameters of an instrument of the first curing unit from informationrepresentative of the barcode. The parameters of the instrument of thefirst curing unit may define operating conditions for at least partialcuring of a lens forming composition. In addition, the method mayinclude altering a parameter of an instrument coupled to a first curingunit in response to the determined parameters. For example, altering aparameter of an instrument may include altering a duration of a lightpulse generated by the first curing unit. In this manner, the durationof the light pulse, which may be provided to an assembled eyeglass lensmold by a first curing unit, may vary depending on the eyeglass lensbeing formed.

[0470] Subsequent to treatment in a first curing unit, a user may removethe mold assembly holder and the assembled eyeglass lens mold containedwithin the mold assembly holder from a conveyor system. Furthermore, theuser may place the mold assembly holder into a second curing unit of alens forming apparatus.

[0471] In addition, the method may include scanning a barcode on a jobticket with a third barcode reader subsequent to placing a mold assemblyholder in a second curing unit, as shown in step 212. The job ticket maybe attached to a mold assembly holder as described in above embodiments.The second curing unit and a third barcode reader may be configured asdescribed in any of the above embodiments. In addition, the thirdbarcode reader may be disposed within the second curing unit proximateto a location at which the mold assembly holder may be placed into,moved through, or removed from the second curing unit by a user. Assuch, the method may include scanning a barcode on a job ticket attachedto a mold assembly holder containing an at least partially cured lensforming composition prior to, during, or subsequent to curing of a lensforming composition. In addition, the method may include sendinginformation representative of the barcode such as detected light to acontroller computer over a serial line connection.

[0472] In addition, the method may include determining an eyeglass lensorder and/or eyeglass lens information from the information receivedfrom the third barcode reader with a controller computer. In addition,the method may include sending the information received from the thirdbarcode reader to a receiver computer over a computer network. Themethod may include determining an eyeglass lens order and/or eyeglasslens information from the information received from the third barcodereader with a receiver computer. As such, the method may include sendingthe determined eyeglass lens order and/or the determined eyeglass lensinformation from the receiver computer to a controller computer.

[0473] In addition, the method may include determining a parameter of aninstrument coupled to a second curing unit in response to the determinedeyeglass lens order and/or the determined eyeglass lens information, asshown in step 2114. For example, the method may include determiningparameters of an instrument coupled to a second curing unit, which maydefine operating conditions for post curing of a lens formingcomposition. In addition, the method may include altering a parameter ofan instrument coupled to a second curing unit in response to thedetermined eyeglass lens order and/or the determined eyeglass lensinformation. For example, altering a parameter of an instrument coupledto a second curing unit may include altering a temperature of heatgenerated by the second curing unit. As such, the temperature of heat,which may be provided to an at least partially cured lens formingcomposition by a second curing unit may vary depending on the eyeglasslens being formed.

[0474] A user may disassemble the eyeglass lens mold and may remove theat least partially cured lens forming composition. In addition, the usermay place the at least partially cured lens forming composition into themold assembly holder from which the at least partially cured lensforming composition was removed. The user may also place the at leastpartially cured lens forming composition disposed within the moldassembly holder into an anneal unit. At least one barcode reader mayalso be coupled to the anneal unit as described in any of the aboveembodiments. In addition, at least the one barcode reader may beconfigured as described in any of the above embodiments. Furthermore, acontroller computer may be coupled to at least the one barcode readercoupled to the anneal unit. The controller computer may be configured asdescribed in any of the above embodiments.

[0475] The method may also include scanning a mold member as shown instep 2116. The mold member may include a mold member which may have beendisassembled by a user subsequent to removing the eyeglass lens moldfrom the second curing unit as described above. In addition, the methodmay include scanning a front mold member and a back mold member of adisassembled eyeglass lens mold. For example, a mold member may bescanned with a mold reader.

[0476] In an alternative embodiment, the method may also includedetermining a mold member identity with the mold reader. The method mayalso include sending information representative of a mold memberidentity from a mold reader to a controller computer over a serial lineconnection. In addition, the method may include determining an identityof the front mold member and the back mold member with the controllercomputer. Alternatively, the method may include sending informationrepresentative of a mold member identity from a controller computer to areceiver; computer over a computer network. In this manner, the methodmay include determining an identity of the front mold member and theback mold member with the receiver computer and sending the determinedidentities from the receiver computer to a controller computer over acomputer network. The method may also include determining an identity ofa front mold member and an identity of a back mold member.

[0477] In addition, the method may include sending the determined frontmold member identity and the determined back mold member identity to amold member storage array. A controller computer may be coupled to amold member storage array as described above. A mold member storagearray may be configured as described in any of the above embodiments.For example, the mold member storage array may include a plurality ofdrawers or locations configured to hold a mold member. In addition, themethod may include determining an appropriate location for a mold memberin a mold member storage array, as shown in step 2118. The method mayfurther include generating a signal to indicate the determined location.In addition, the method may include displaying the generated signal to auser. The signal may be visual and/or audible such that the signal maybe detected by a user. The method may also include generating and/ormultiple signals sequentially as described in above embodiments. Assuch, a generated signal may indicate, to a user, an appropriatelocation for an eyeglass mold member having the determined identity. Inthis manner, a user may place a mold member into an appropriate locationin a mold member storage array until an eyeglass lens order is receivedwhich requires use of the mold member.

[0478]FIG. 44 shows an embodiment of graphical user interface (“GUI”)2200 which may display eyeglass lens forming-related information on afront panel of controller computer 2002. GUI 2200, as illustrated inFIG. 44, may also be displayed on a front panel of receiver computer2006. The controller computer and the receiver computer may beconfigured as described in any of the above embodiments. The controllercomputer and/or the receiver computer may include an output device andat least one input device. A variety of input devices may be used. Someinput devices include pressure sensitive devices (e.g., buttons orscreens), movable data entry devices (e.g., rotatable knobs, a mouse, atrackball, or moving switches), voice data entry devices (e.g., amicrophone), light pens, or a computer coupled to the controllercomputer and/or the receiver computer. The GUI preferably displayscontroller and/or receiver computer data requests and responses. Theoutput device may be a monitor cathode ray tube, an LCD panel, a plasmadisplay screen, or a touch-sensitive screen.

[0479] GUI 2200 may include a main menu and may be displayed by acontroller computer or a receiver computer when initially powered. Ifthe main menu is not displayed, a user may access the main menu byclicking a button, which may be labeled Main Menu, on a displayed GUIwith a mouse. In response to activating the Main Menu button, thecontroller and/or receiver computer may cause the main menu screen to bedisplayed. As depicted in FIG. 44, a GUI may offer a number of initialoptions on the main menu. The options may include Job Entry 2202, JobViewer 2204, Alarm Log 2206, Start 2208, Stop 2210, and Exit 2212.Selection of some of the options such as Job Entry 2202, Job Viewer 2204and Alarm Log 2206 may cause the display screen to change to a differentGUI. Selection of other options such as Start 2008 and Stop 2210 mayalter an operation of the lens forming apparatus. For example, selectingStart 2208 may cause the lens forming apparatus to begin a process suchas curing a lens forming composition. The main menu may also offer otheroptions which allow the user to access machine status information andinstrument setup menus such as Maintenance 2214, Machine Setup 2216, andConfiguration 2218. Any one of the options may be selected by a user byclicking an appropriate button with a mouse.

[0480] GUI 2200 may also display machine status-related information onthe main menu. For example, GUI 2200 may include a graphical icon or adisplay listing properties of a lens forming apparatus in graphic and/oralphanumeric format. A graphical icon or a display may appear or may bealtered on GUI 2200 in response to a change in status of lens formingapparatus 2000. For example, as shown in FIG. 45. icon 2220representative of a mold assembly holder, as described in aboveembodiments, may appear on GUI 2200 when a mold assembly holder isplaced in a first curing unit or a second curing unit of lens formingapparatus 2000. A position of icon 2220 on the GUI may also indicate aunit within which the mold assembly holder is disposed and a position ofthe mold assembly holder within the unit. For example, a position of themold assembly holder within the unit may be determined from a time ofinitial detection and a speed of the conveyor system. In this manner,the position of icon 2220 on the GUI may correspond to the determinedposition of the mold assembly holder within the unit.

[0481] In addition, an icon may be altered in color to indicate a changein status of a lens forming apparatus. For example, an icon, which mayrepresent a signal tower of a lens forming apparatus, may include seriesof icons 2222 of different colors. Upon a change in status of theapparatus or in an alarm coupled to the apparatus, a color of one ofseries of icons 2222 may be altered on GUI 2200. For example, in FIG.44, a color intensity of two of series of icons 2222 of signal tower maybe altered to indicate 1) that an alarm may be present and 2) that themachine may be running. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 45, a color ofonly one of series of icons 2222 may be altered to indicate only 2) thatthe machine may be running. In addition, alphanumeric characters 2224may appear on GUI 2200 proximate one of the series of icons representingthe signal tower to indicate a change in status of the machinecorresponding to a change in color of one of the series of icons.

[0482] As shown in FIG. 44, upon activation of an alarm, display 2226 ofGCU 2200 may display machine-status information in alphanumeric format.Display 2226 of GUI 2200 may include a list of properties to indicatethat, for example, “Lower Left Init Filter Not In Place” and “Job NotFound in Database” in addition to any other status-related information.GUI 2200 may also include an option such as Acknowledge 2228 arrangedproximate text block 2226. A user may select Acknowledge 2228 to accessand/or remove machine-status information from text block 2226.

[0483]FIG. 46 shows an alternate embodiment of graphical user interface(“GUT”) 2228 which may display eyeglass lens forming-related informationon a front panel of controller computer 2002. GUI 2228, as illustratedin FIG. 46, may also be displayed on a front panel of receiver computer2006 or on a front panel of client computer system 2008. The controllercomputer, the receiver computer, and the client computer system may beconfigured as described in above embodiments. GUI 2228 may displaycontroller and/or receiver computer data requests and responses. GUI2228 may include a main menu and may be displayed by a controllercomputer or a receiver computer when initially powered. GUI 2228 mayalso be displayed by a client computer system upon request from a user.

[0484] As depicted in FIG. 46, GUI 2228 may offer a subset of theinitial options displayed on GUI 2200. For example, GUI 2228 may bedisplayed to a user who may have limited access to information and/orcontrol of lens forming apparatus 2200. A user may be required to obtaina user id to access the system. Access granted to a user may varydepending on the user. For example, access granted to a user may bedetermined from information provided by a user upon request for a userid. For example, an operator or an engineer, who may operate and/ormaintain a lens forming apparatus, may be granted more access toinformation and control of the apparatus than a client. Therefore, theoptions which may be displayed either on GUI 2200 or GUI 2228 may bedetermined by a user id provided by a user during a login routine. Alogin routine may also require a user to enter a password. In thismanner, access to the system through either GUI 2200 or GUI 2228 may becontrolled and/or monitored to protect the identity of the users, aswell as the privacy and integrity of the information. A user may also berequired to enter a password upon selecting Exit 2212 from either GUI2200 or GUI 2228 for privacy and integrity purposes.

[0485] For example, upon login by an operator, GUI 2200 may be displayedon a controller computer or on a receiver computer. Upon login by aclient, however, GUI 2228 may be displayed on a client computer systemto provide a limited number of options such as Job Entry 2202, View Jobs2204, Configure 2218, and Exit 2212. As described above, any one of theoptions may be selected by a user by clicking an appropriate button witha mouse. In addition, selection of a similar option from either GUI 2200or GUI 2228 may cause the display screen to change to substantially thesame GUI. Therefore, regardless of whether Job Entry or View Jobs isselected from GUI 2200 or GUI 2228, respectively, the display screen maybe changed to a prescription input menu.

[0486] Selection of Job Entry 2202 may cause the display screen tochange to prescription input GUI 2230, an embodiment of which is shownin FIG. 47. GUI 2230 may be displayed on a controller computer, areceiver computer, and/or a client computer system. The controllercomputer, the receiver computer, and the client computer system may beconfigured as described in any of the above embodiments. Prescriptioninput GUI 2230 may preferably allow a user to enter data pertaining to anew lens order. The prescription input menu may include a number of menuitems which may be configured to collect information from a user. Forexample, the prescription input menu may include a number of inputwindows 2232 which may be configured to receive alphanumeric input froma user. In addition, the system may be configured to generate anddisplay a signal to the user upon an invalid entry in an input window.

[0487] In addition, the prescription input menu may include a number ofselection menus which may include radio buttons 2234 and/or pull-downmenus 2236. A radio button may be an item that may be selected ordeselected, and which displays its state to a user. In addition, in amenu of radio buttons, typically only one radio button may be selectedat a time. For example, upon selection of one radio button in a menu,each of the other radio buttons in the menu may be shaded to indicatethat these selections are unavailable. Furthermore, additional menuitems displayed on a GUI may be altered upon selection of a radiobutton. For example, if a user selects a radio button to indicate that anew lens order includes a right lens and a left lens, then pull downmenus may appear on the GUI to accept prescription information for boththe right and the left lens. A pull down menu may include a number ofoptions which may be viewed by selecting the pull down menu. Inaddition, a user may select one of the number of options from the pulldown menu. A selected option may appear in a text box of the pull-downmenu subsequent to selection by a user. Additional pull down menus maybe altered upon a selection from a pull down menu. For example, uponselection of zero cylindrical power, a pull down menu for a cylinderaxis power may be removed from GUI 2230 or may be shaded to indicatethat the pull down menu is currently inactive (i.e., the menu may notaccept input from a user).

[0488] Each of the menu items allows entry of a portion of the lensprescription. The lens prescription information may include, but is notlimited to, job number, patient name, mold assembly holder number,priority, bin location, lens location (i.e., left lens or right lens),lens type, monomer type and/or tint, spherical power, cylindrical power,axis, and add power. The monomer selection may include choices forexample, either clear or photochromic lenses. The lens type item mayallow selection between spheric single vision, aspheric single visionlenses, flattop bifocal lenses, and asymmetrical progressive lenses. Thesphere item allows the sphere power of the lens to be entered. Thecylinder item allows the cylinder power to be entered. The axis itemallows the cylinder axis to be entered. The add item allows the addpower for multifocal prescriptions to be added. Since the sphere power,cylinder power, cylinder axis, and add power may differ for each eye,and since the molds and gaskets may be specific for the location of thelens (i.e., right lens or left lens), the GUI preferably allows separateentries for right and left lenses.

[0489] A user may cancel a new lens order at any time by selecting anoption such as Cancel Entry 2238 which may be displayed on prescriptioninput GUI 2230. In addition, a user may submit a new lens order byselecting an option such as Create Job 2240 which may also be displayedon prescription input GUI 2230. Upon selection of Create Job 2240. thenew lens order submitted by the user may be sent to a receiver computeror a controller computer. In addition, the new lens order may be storedin a database of eyeglass lens orders as described in above embodiments.Furthermore, each entry of the new lens order may be compared to validentries for an eyeglass lens order. If any of the entries do not matchvalid entries, GUI 2230 may display an error message to the user. Forexample, a new lens order submitted by a user may not be filled by alens forming apparatus if the lens forming apparatus does not includeappropriate molds to form the ordered lens. In this manner, GUI 2230 maydisplay an error message to the user such as “Prescription NotAvailable”. In addition, an entry may be determined to be invalid if theentry may have been left blank by a user. An appearance of an invalidentry may be altered on GUI 2230 to indicate the invalid entry to auser. For example, if a mold is not available for the left lens, pulldown menus for prescription information for this lens may behighlighted, may be indicated with a graphical icon, or may be indicatedby alphanumeric characters. GUI 2230 may also be configured to allow auser to alter the invalid entry and to provide a user with additionaloptions such as Cancel Entry 2238 and Create Job 2240.

[0490] After the data relating to the prescription has been added, thecontroller computer, the receiver computer, or the client computersystem may prompt the user to enter a job number to save theprescription type. The job number preferably allows the user to recall aprescription type without having to reenter the prescription data. Thejob number may also be used by the controller computer to control thecuring conditions for the lens. The curing conditions typically varydepending on the type and prescription of the lens. By allowing thecontroller computer access to the prescription and type of lens beingformed, the controller computer may automatically set up the curingconditions without further input from the user.

[0491] Selection of Job Viewer or View Jobs 2204 may cause the displayscreen to change to an embodiment of prescription viewer GUI 2242, anembodiment of which is shown in FIG. 48. GUI 2242 may be displayed on acontroller computer, a receiver computer, and/or a client computersystem. The controller computer, the receiver computer, and the clientcomputer system may be configured as described in any of the aboveembodiments. Prescription viewer GUI 2242 may preferably allow a user toselect an eyeglass lens order and to view data pertaining to theselected eyeglass lens order. For example, GUI 2242 may include inputwindows, radio buttons, and/or pull down menus as described in aboveembodiments to allow a user to enter information which may be associatedwith an eyeglass lens order. For example, GUI 2242 may include pull downmenu 2244. The pull down menu may include a list of job numbers whichmay be viewed by selecting the pull down menu. In addition, a user mayselect one of the job numbers from the pull down menu. A selected jobnumber may appear in a text box on of the pull-down menu subsequent toselection by a user. In addition, GUI 2242 may include input window 2246which may be configured to receive alphanumeric charactersrepresentative of an eyeglass lens order. For example, a user may entera patient's name into an input window on GUI 2242. GUI 2242 may also beconfigured such that additional information related to an eyeglass lensorder may be entered by a user.

[0492] The information entered by the user may be used to determineadditional information related to the eyeglass lens order. Theadditional information may be determined by a client computer system, areceiver computer, or a controller computer, all of which may beconfigured as described in above embodiments. For example, theadditional information may be determined by processing the input fromthe user and searching a database of information stored on the clientcomputer system, the receiver computer, or the controller computer. Theadditional information may be displayed on GUI 2242 such that a user mayview the additional information. In addition, GUI 2242 may include anumber of options which may be available to the user. For example, GUI2242 may include options such as Re-Print 2248 and Close 2250. In thismanner, the user may select to print the information displayed in GUI2242 or to close GUI 2242 and return to the previous menu displayed onthe user's computer.

[0493] Selection of Alarm Log 2206 may cause the display screen tochange to an embodiment of alarm viewer GUI 2252, an embodiment of whichis shown in FIG. 49. GUI 2252 may be displayed on a controller computerand/or a receiver computer. The controller computer and the receivercomputer may be configured as described in any of the above embodiments.Alarm viewer GUI 2252 may preferably allow a user to view informationrelated to alarms which may have occurred during operation of a lenscuring apparatus. Information related to alarms may be presented intabular format and may include several columns. For example, as shown inFIG. 49, GUI 2252 may include column 2254 which may include alphanumericcharacters representative of a date and a time at which an alarmoccurred. In addition, GUI 2252 may include column 2256 which mayinclude alphanumeric characters representative of a description of analarm. GUI 2252 may also include additional columns which may includeadditional information related to an alarm such as a classification anda priority of the alarm.

[0494] A user may also select one of the alarms displayed in GUI 2252.Selection of one of the displayed alarms may cause the GUI to displayadditional information related to the alarm or to display additionaloptions related to the alarm and/or operation of the lens formingapparatus. For example, upon selection of a displayed alarm, a user mayfurther select to delete the selected alarm or to restart the lensforming apparatus. GUI 2252 may also include a number of options whichmay be available to the user. For example, GUI 2252 may include optionssuch as Purge Log 2258 and Close 2260. In this manner, the user mayselect to delete all of the information displayed in GLCU 2252 or toclose GUI 2252 and return to the previous menu displayed on the user'scomputer.

[0495] Selection of Maintenance 2214 may cause the display screen tochange to an embodiment of maintenance viewer GUI 2262, an embodiment ofwhich is shown in FIG. 50. GUI 2262 may be displayed on a controllercomputer and/or a receiver computer. The controller computer and thereceiver computer may be configured as described in any of the aboveembodiments. Maintenance viewer GUI 2262 may preferably allow a user toview information related to operational status of a lens curingapparatus. Operational status of a lens curing apparatus may bedetermined by parameters of a number of instruments coupled to the lenscuring apparatus. For example, instruments coupled to the lens curingapparatus may include, but are not limited to, thermocouples, timingdevices, light detection devices such as photodiodes, and electricalmeasurement devices. Therefore, parameters of an instrument may include,for example, output of a thermocouple, a timing device, a lightdetection device, or an electrical measurement device. In this manner,information related to operational status of lens curing apparatus mayinclude, but may not be limited to, temperatures of a post-cure chamber,time, light intensity, and electrical currents being drawn by lampscoupled to the lens curing apparatus. As such, information which may bedisplayed on the maintenance viewer may include lamp current draws,current upper and lower limits for the current draw, and lamp liferemaining.

[0496] Information related to operational status of a lens curingapparatus may be displayed in alphanumeric and graphical format. Forexample, as shown in FIG. 49, GUI 2262 may include output windows 2264which may include alphanumeric characters representative of informationrelated to operational status of a lens curing apparatus as describedabove. In addition, GUI 2252 may include a plurality of digital inputs2266 which may include alphanumeric characters describing an operationalstatus of a lens curing apparatus and a corresponding graphical icon.For example, alphanumeric characters may be used to describe anoperation or a process which may be performed by a lens formingapparatus. A graphical icon corresponding to the alphanumeric charactersmay indicate if the operation or process is currently being performed bythe lens forming apparatus or if the operation or process is beingperformed satisfactorily. For example, if the air pressure within a lensforming apparatus is within operational limits, a graphical iconcorresponding to alphanumeric characters such as “Air Pressure OK” mayappear as a solid shape such as a circle. Alternatively, if the airpressure within a lens forming apparatus is outside of operationallimits, a graphical icon corresponding to alphanumeric characters suchas “Air Pressure OK” may appear as an outlined shape such as a circle.The graphical icons may also be altered depending if various equipmentof the lens forming apparatus is on or off. In an additional example,the maintenance viewer may also include digital inputs which mayindicate if a lamp current draw is too high or too low and if an alarmis currently activated for the lamp current draw, thereby indicatinglamp failure. As such, the maintenance viewer may provide comprehensiveinformation related to the current operational status and setpoints forequipment of a lens forming apparatus.

[0497] GUI 2262 may also include a number of options which may beavailable to the user. For example, GUI 2262 may include options such asMore . . . 2268 and Close 2270. In this manner, the user may select toview more digital inputs as described above by selecting More . . . 2268or to close GUI 2262 and return to the previous menu displayed on theuser's computer by selecting Close 2270.

[0498] Selection of Machine Setup 2216 may cause the display screen tochange to an embodiment of machine setup menu GUI 2272, an embodiment ofwhich is shown in FIG. 51. GUI 2272 may be displayed on a controllercomputer and/or a receiver computer. The controller computer and thereceiver computer may be configured as described in any of the aboveembodiments. Machine Setup GUI 2272 may preferably allow a user to viewinformation related to setpoints and upper and lower limits forparameters of a number of instruments coupled to the lens curingapparatus. As described above, instruments coupled to the lens curingapparatus may include, but are not limited to, thermocouples, timingdevices, light detection devices such as photodiodes, and electricalmeasurement devices. A thermocouple may be configured to measure atemperature of a curing unit or an anneal unit. For example, athermocouple may be disposed in an air intake vent of a curing unit oran anneal unit. Therefore, parameters of an instrument may include, forexample, output of a thermocouple, a timing device, a light detectiondevice, and an electrical measurement device. In this manner,information related to setpoints and limits for parameters of a numberof instruments coupled to the lens curing apparatus may include, but maynot be limited to, a temperature of a cure unit, a temperature of ananneal unit, time, light intensity, and electrical currents being drawnby lamps coupled to the lens curing apparatus. For example, a user mayuser the machine setup menu to enter a setpoint and upper and loweralarm limits for lamp current draws. A temperature of a curing unit mayhave upper and lower alarm limits of, for example, approximately 150° F.and approximately 150° F., respectively. A temperature of an anneal unitmay have upper and lower alarm limits of, for example, approximately200° F. and approximately 250° F., respectively.

[0499] The machine setup menu may include a number of menu items whichmay be configured to collect information from a user. For example, themachine setup menu may include a number of input windows 2274 which maybe configured to receive alphanumeric input from a user. In addition,the system may be configured to generate and display a signal to theuser upon an invalid entry in an input window. As such, a user may viewand alter setpoints and upper and lower limits for a number ofinstruments coupled to the lens curing apparatus.

[0500] In addition, the machine setup menu may include a number of inputboxes 2276 which may selected by the user. Upon selection of an inputbox, a “check” may appear in the input box to indicate to a user thatthe input box has been selected. The input boxes may include a number ofmaintenance operations which may be performed by an operator. In thismanner, after performing a maintenance operation such as replacing topinitialization lamps, replacing bottom initialization lamps, and/orreplacing post-cure lamps, a user may access the machine setup menu andmay select an appropriate input box. In addition, the system may beconfigured to store a date and a time at which an input box is selectedand the maintenance operation corresponding to the selected input box ina memory. The stored information may also be stored in a database suchas a maintenance log, which may also be viewed by a user through anappropriate GUI.

[0501] GUI 2272 may also include a number of options which may beavailable to the user. For example, GUI 2272 may include options such asSave Changes 2278 and Cancel Changes 2280. A user may submit changes tosetpoints and upper and lower limits by selecting an option such as SaveChanges 2278. Upon selection of Save Changes 2278, the changes to thesetpoints and upper and lower limits may be sent to a receiver computeror a controller computer. In addition, the changes to the setpoints andupper and lower limits may be stored in a database as described in aboveembodiments. Furthermore, each change to a setpoint or an upper andlower limit may be compared to valid entries for the setpoint or theupper and lower limit. If any of the entries do not match valid entries,GUI 2272 may display an error message to the user. In this manner, GUI2272 may display an error message to the user such as “Setpoint Out OfRange”. In addition, an appearance of an invalid entry may be altered onGUI 2272 to indicate the invalid entry to a user. For example, if atemperature setpoint for an anneal conveyor is out of range, anappearance of an input window for this information may be altered, maybe indicated with a graphical icon, or may be indicated withalphanumeric characters. GUI 2272 may also be configured to allow a userto alter the invalid entry and to provide a user with additional optionssuch as Cancel Changes 2280 and Save Changes 2278. A user may cancelchanges to setpoints and upper and lower limits at any time by selectingthe Cancel Changes option.

[0502] Selection of Configuration or Configure 2218 may cause thedisplay screen to change to an embodiment of configuration setup menuGUI 2282, an embodiment of which is shown in FIG. 52. GUI 2282 may bedisplayed on a controller computer and/or a receiver computer. Thecontroller computer and the receiver computer may be configured asdescribed in any of the above embodiments. Configuration GUI 2282 maypreferably allow a user to view information related to filepath names ofvarious databases and/or directories of information. For example, theGUI may include various windows which may include filepath names ofRecipe DB (database) 2284. Job DB (database) 2286, and Ticket Dir(directory) 2288. Each of the filepath names may be used by a computersystem, such as a controller computer or a receiver computer, to find,open, and/or use a database or a directory. The Recipe DB may include aplurality of program instructions which may be computer-executable toimplement a method for forming an eyeglass lens. The Job DB may includeinformation related to lens forming processes which may have beenperformed by a lens forming apparatus. In addition, the Ticket Dir mayinclude information related to job tickets which may have been enteredby a plurality of users. In addition, the GUI may include an option suchas Browse . . . 2290, which a user may select to search for additionalavailable files which may be used for each database or directory. Forexample, a user may browse through a memory medium coupled to a computerto search for an alternate file that may be used as a database ordirectory. Alternatively, a user may enter a filepath name into an inputwindow.

[0503] The GUI may also include additional windows which may include anumeric characters which may define a Ticket Poll Rate 2292, a TicketPrint Scale 2294, and a frequency for archiving jobs. Ticket Poll Rate2292 may serve to define a frequency at which a system may be checkedfor new files such as job tickets. Ticket Print Scale 2294 may serve todefine a size of a printed job ticket. In this manner, a size of aprinted job ticket may be defined as a percentage of a page on which thejob ticket may be printed.

[0504] As depicted in FIG. 53, GUI 2296 may offer a subset of theinitial options displayed on GUI 2282. For example, GUI 2296 may bedisplayed to a user who may have limited access to information and/orcontrol of lens forming apparatus 2200. As defined above, a user may berequired to obtain a user id to access the system. Access granted to auser may vary depending on the user. For example, access granted to auser may be determined from information provided by a user upon requestfor a user id. For example, an operator or an engineer, who may operateand/or maintain a lens forming apparatus, may be granted more access toinformation and control of the apparatus than a client. Therefore, theoptions which may be displayed either on GUI 2282 or GUI 2296 may bedetermined by a user id provided by a user during a login routine. Forexample, upon login by an operator, GUI 2282 may be displayed on acontroller computer or on a receiver computer. Upon login by a client,however, GUI 2296 may be displayed on a client computer system toprovide a limited number of options such as Job DB (database) 2286, andTicket Dir (directory) 2288. GUI 2296, however, may also be displayed ona controller computer and/or a receiver computer depending on the userid entered by a user. In addition, GUI 2296 may include an option suchas Browse . . . 2290, which a user may select to search for additionalavailable files.

[0505] Antireflective Coatings for Plastic Eyeglass Lenses

[0506] For plastic eyeglass lenses, formed from the materials describedabove, a portion of the light incident upon the lenses may be reflectedfrom the eyeglass lens rather than transmitted through the eyeglasslens. For plastic eyeglass lenses up to about 15% of the incident lightmay be reflected off the eyeglass lens surfaces. To reduce thereflection of light from a plastic eyeglass lens, a thin film may beapplied to the lens. Such films may be referred to as antireflectivecoating films. Antireflective coatings may reduce the reflectance oflight from a surface (i.e., increase light transmittance through thefilm/substrate interface).

[0507] While numerous approaches to reducing the reflective losses forglass materials have been developed, few techniques are available forproducing antireflective coatings on plastics. Vapor depositiontechniques have been used commercially to form antireflective coatingson plastic materials, however these techniques suffer from a number ofdrawbacks. Some of the disadvantages of using vapor deposition includerelatively large capital expenditure for deposition equipment,significant space requirements and relatively long cycle times.

[0508] Reactive liquid compositions for forming antireflective coatingson lenses have been previously studied. Many of the previously disclosedsolutions require heating of the antireflective film to a hightemperature after its application to a substrate. In some instances thetemperature to cure such solutions may be greater than about 200° C.Such temperatures may be suitable for the coating of glass substrates,but are higher than most plastic lens substrates are capable ofwithstanding.

[0509] U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,929,278 and 4,966,812 describe a process fordepositing antireflective films on a plastic substrate by firstsynthesizing an ethanol gel in a SiO₂—B₂O₃—Al₂O₃—BaO system followed byreliquifying the gel. This material may be applied to a plasticsubstrate and thermally dried to form a porous film having a lowrefractive index. Such films, however, may exhibit poor abrasionresistance and can take weeks to form.

[0510] U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,580,819 and 5,744,243 disclose a composition forproducing coatings and a process for preparing single-layer broad bandantireflective coatings on a solid substrate, such as glass, ceramics,metals and organic polymeric materials. The process involves applying anacid-catalyzed sol-gel coating composition and a water soluble metalsalt to the surface of a solid substrate and curing the applied coatingwith an aqueous electrolyte solution for a time sufficient to produce acoating. The two step preparation of the coating composition, however,may be time consuming since the treatment with the aqueous electrolytemay take several days.

[0511] The use of ultraviolet light curable liquid compositions forforming antireflective coatings on substrates offers a number ofadvantages over the deposition techniques described above. Inparticular, the equipment cost tends to be minimal and the applicationtechniques tend to minimize alterations to the shape or clarity of theplastic item being coated. Additionally, the liquid compositions of thepresent invention, may be cured in a time of less than about 10 minutes.Finally, the liquid compositions, of the present invention, may beapplied to a variety of visible light transmitting substrates. Suchsubstrates may be composed of glass or plastic. It should be understoodthat the liquid compositions for forming an antireflective coatingdescribed herein may be applied to a number of visible lighttransmitting substrates including windows and the outer glass surface oftelevision screens and computer monitors. The liquid composition may beused to form an antireflective coating on a lens, preferably on plasticlenses, and more preferably on plastic eyeglass lenses.

[0512] In an embodiment, a single layer coating may be formed on aplastic lens by coating the substrate with an ultraviolet light curableliquid composition and curing the composition. While the below describedprocedures refer to the coating of plastic lenses, it should beunderstood that the procedures may be adapted to coat any of the abovedescribed substrates. The cured composition may form a thin layer (e.g.,less than about 500 nm) on the substrate. The cured composition layermay have antireflective properties if the thin layer has an index ofrefraction that is less than the index of refraction of the substrate.This may be sufficient for many applications where a limited increase invisible light transmission is acceptable. Single layer antireflectivecoatings, however, may exhibit poor adhesion to the plastic lens.Attempts to increase the adhesion to the plastic lens by altering thecomposition, may cause the index of refraction of the single layerantireflective coating to increase and reduce the effectiveness of suchlayers.

[0513] Better antireflective properties and adhesion may be achieved byuse of multi-layer antireflective coatings. In one embodiment, a twolayer stack of coating layers may be used as an anti-reflective coating.A first coating layer may be formed on the surface of a plastic lens.The first coating layer may be formed by dispensing a first compositionon the surface of the lens and subsequently curing the firstcomposition. The first coating layer may be formed from a material thathas an index of refraction that is greater than the index of refractionof the plastic lens. A second coating layer may be formed upon the firstcoating layer. The second coating layer may be formed by dispensing asecond composition onto the first coating layer and curing the secondcomposition. The second coating layer may be formed from a material thathas an index of refraction that is less than the index of refraction ofthe first coating layer. Together the first coating layer and the secondcoating layer form a stack that may act as an antireflective coating.The first and second coating layers, together, may form a stack having athickness of less than about 500 nm.

[0514] In one embodiment, the first coating layer may be formed from acoating composition that includes a metal alkoxide or a mixture of metalalkoxides. Metal alkoxides have the general formula M (Y)_(p) wherein Mis titanium, aluminum, zirconium, boron, tin, indium, antimony, or zinc,Y is a C₁-C₁₀ alkoxy or acetylacetonate, and p is an integer equivalentto the valence of M. In some embodiments, M is titanium, aluminum,boron, or zirconium, and Y is C₁-C₅ alkoxy (e.g., methoxy or ethoxy).Examples of metal alkoxides include, but are not limited to aluminumtri-sec-butoxide, titanium (IV) isopropoxide, titanium (IV) butoxide,zirconium (IV) propoxide, titanium allylacetoacetate triisopropoxide,and trimethyl borate. The first coating layer may be formed by using asol-gel (i.e., solution-gelation) process. Metal alkoxides, when reactedwith water or an alcohol, undergo hydrolysis and condensation reactionsto form a polymer network. As the polymer network is formed the solventmay be expelled. The polymer network will continue to grow until a gelis formed. Upon heating or the application of ultraviolet light, themetal alkoxide gel densifies to become a hardened coating on the plasticlens.

[0515] The hardened first coating layer, when formed from a sol-gelreaction of a metal alkoxide may have an index of refraction that isgreater than the plastic lens. For example, most plastic lenses have anindex of refraction from about 1.5 to about 1.7. The first coating layermay have an index of refraction that is greater than 1.7 when formedfrom a metal alkoxide. The use of metal alkoxides has the advantage ofallowing a high index of refraction coating on the surface of the lens.Another advantage attained from the use of metal alkoxides is increasedadhesion to the underlying substrate. A general problem for manyantireflective coatings is poor adhesion to the underlying substrate.This is particularly true for coatings formed on plastic substrates,although adhesion may also be a problem for glass substrates. The use ofmetal alkoxides increases the adhesion of the coating material to bothplastic and glass substrates. The use of metal alkoxides, therefore,increases the durability of the antireflective coating.

[0516] The metal alkoxide may be dissolved or suspended in an organicsolvent and subsequently applied to a plastic lens. The coatingcomposition may include a metal alkoxide dissolved or suspended in anorganic solvent. The coating composition may include up to about 10% byweight of a metal alkoxide with the remainder of the composition beingcomposed of the organic solvent and other additive compounds describedbelow. In one embodiment, suitable organic solvents are capable ofmixing with water and are substantially unreactive toward the metalalkoxide. Examples of such solvents include, but are not limited toethyl acetate, ethers (e.g., tetrahydrofuran and dioxane), C₁-C₆ alkanol(e.g., methanol, ethanol, 1-propanol, and 2-propanol), alkoxyalcohols(e.g., 2-ethoxyethanol-2-(2-methoxyethoxy) ethanol, 2-methoxyethanol,2-(2-ethoxymethoxy) ethanol, and 1-methoxy-2-propanol), ketones (e.g.,acetone, methyl ethyl ketone, and methyl isobutyl ketones, or mixturesof any of these compounds.

[0517] In another embodiment, the first composition may include a silanemonomer. Silane monomers have the general structure R_(m)SiX_(4−m),where R may be C₁-C₂₀ alkyl, C₁-C₂₀ haloalkyl, C₂-C₂₀ alkenyl, C₂-C₂₀haloalkenyl, phenyl, phenyl(C₁-C₂₀)alkyl, C₁-C₂₀ alkylphenyl, phenyl(C₂-C₂₀)alkenyl, C₂-C₂₀ alkenylphenyl, glycidoxy (C₁-C₂₀) alkyl,epoxycyclohexyl(C₁-C₂₀)alkyl, morpholino, amino(C₁-C₂₀)alkyl,amino(C₂-C₂₀)alkenyl, mercapto(C₁-C₂₀)alkyl, mercapto(C₂-C₂₀)alkenyl,cyano(C₁-C₂₀) alkyl, cyano(C₂-C₂₀)alkenyl, acryloxy, methacryloxy, orhalogen. The halo or halogen substituents may be bromo, chloro, orfluoro. Preferably, R¹ is a C₁-C₁₀ alkyl, C₁-C₁₀ haloalkyl, C₂-C₁₀alkenyl, phenyl, phenyl(C₁-C₁₀)alkyl, C₁-C₁₀ alkylphenyl,glycidoxy(C₁-C₁₀)alkyl, epoxycyclohexyl(C₁-C₁₀)alkyl, morpholino,amino(C₁-C₁₀) alkyl, amino(C₂-C₁₀) alkenyl, mercapto(C₁-C₁₀)alkyl,mercapto(C₂-C₁₀) alkenyl, cyano(C₁-C₁₀) alkyl, cyano(C₂-C₁₀)alkenyl, orhalogen and the halo or halogen is chloro or fluoro. X may be hydrogen,halogen, hydroxy, C₁-C₅ alkoxy, (C₁-C₅)alkoxy(C₁-C₅)alkoxy, C₁-C₄acyloxy, phenoxy, C₁-C₃ alkylphenoxy, or C₁-C₃ alkoxyphenoxy, said haloor halogen being bromo, chloro or fluoro; m is an integer from 0 to 3.The first coating composition may include up to about 5% by weight of asilane monomer.

[0518] Examples of silane monomers include, but are not limited toglycidoxymethyltriethoxysilane, α-glycidoxyethyltrimethoxysilane,α-glycidoxyethyltriethoxysilane, β-glycidoxyethyltrimethoxysilane,β-glycidoxyethyltriethoxysilane, α-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane,α-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, β-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane,β-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, γ-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane,γ-glycidoxypropylmethyldimethoxysilane,γ-glycidoxypropyldimethylethoxysilane, methyltrimethoxysilane,methyltriethoxysilane, methyltrimethoxyethoxysilane,methyltriacetoxysilane, methyltripropoxysilane, methyltributoxysilane,ethyltrimethoxysilane, ethyltriethoxysilane,γ-methacryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane, γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane,γ-aminopropyltriethoxysilane, γ-mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane,chloromethyltrimethoxysilane, chloromethytriethoxysilane,dimethyldiethoxysilane, γ-chloropropylmethyldimethoxysilane,γ-chloropropyl methyldiethoxysilane, tetramethylorthosilicate,tetraethylorthosilicate, hytrolyzates of such silane monomers, andmixtures of such silane monomers and hydrolyzates thereof.

[0519] Silane monomers, along with colloidal silica, may form low indexof refraction silicon-based coatings. In some instances, silane monomersand colloidal silica may be used to form a single layer low index ofrefraction coating layer on a lens. The use of silicon monomers andcolloidal silica, however, tends to produce silicon-based coatings thathave poor adhesion to the underlying substrate. The addition of a metalalkoxide to a composition that also contains a silane monomer orcolloidal silica may improve the adhesion of the layer. In anotherembodiment, the adhesion of a silicon-based coating may be improved bythe formation of a multi-layer stack. The stack may include a firstcoating layer which is formed from a metal alkoxide. A second layer maybe formed upon the first layer, the second layer being formed from asilane monomer or colloidal silicon. The metal alkoxide based firstlayer acts as an adhesion layer that helps keep the stack bound to theunderlying lens.

[0520] In addition the silane monomers and colloidal silica may be mixedwith metal alkoxides to alter the index of refraction of the coatingcomposition. Typically, a mixture of a silane monomer with a metalalkoxide when cured onto a lens, will have a lower index of refractionthan a coating formed from a metal alkoxide.

[0521] In some embodiments, one or more ethylenically substitutedmonomers may be added to the first composition. The ethylenicallysubstituted group of monomers include, but are not limited to, C₁-C₂₀alkyl acrylates, C₁-C₂₀ alkyl methacrylates, C₂-C₂₀ alkenyl acrylates,C₂-C₂₀ alkenyl methacrylates, C₅-C₈ cycloalkyl acrylates, C₅-C₈cycloalkyl methacrylates, phenyl acrylates, phenyl methacrylates,phenyl(C₁-C₉)alkyl acrylates, phenyl(C₁-C₉)alkyl methacrylates,substituted phenyl (C₁-C₉)alkyl acrylates, substitutedphenyl(C₁-C₉)alkyl methacrylates, phenoxy(C₁-C₉)alkyl acrylates,phenoxy(C₁-C₉)alkyl methacrylates, substituted phenoxy(C₁-C₉)alkylacrylates, substituted phenoxy(C₁-C₉)alkyl methacrylates, C₁-C₄alkoxy(C₂-C₄)alkyl acrylates, C₁-C₄ alkoxy (C₂-C₄)alkyl methacrylates,C₁-C₄ alkoxy(C₁-C₄)alkoxy(C₂-C₄)alkyl acrylates, C₁-C₄alkoxy(C₁-C₄)alkoxy(C₂-C₄)alkyl methacrylates, C₂-C₄ oxiranyl acrylates,C₂-C₄ oxiranyl methacrylates, copolymerizable di-, tri- ortetra-acrylate monomers, copolymerizable di-, tri-, ortetra-methacrylate monomers. The first composition may include up toabout 5% by weight of an ethylenically substituted monomer.

[0522] Examples of such monomers include methyl methacrylate, ethylmethacrylate, propyl methacrylate, isopropyl methacrylate, butylmethacrylate, isobutyl methacrylate, hexyl methacrylate, 2-ethylhexylmethacrylate, nonyl methacrylate, lauryl methacrylate, stearylmethacrylate, isodecyl methacrylate, ethyl acrylate, methyl acrylate,propyl acrylate, isopropyl acrylate, butyl acrylate, isobutyl acrylate,hexyl acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl acrylate, nonyl acrylate, lauryl acrylate,stearyl acrylate, isodecyl acrylate, ethylene methacrylate, propylenemethacrylate, isopropylene methacrylate, butane methacrylate,isobutylene methacrylate, hexene methacrylate, 2-ethylhexenemethacrylate, nonene methacrylate, isodecene methacrylate, ethyleneacrylate, propylene acrylate, isopropylene, hexene acrylate,2-ethylhexene acrylate, nonene acrylate, isodecene acrylate, cyclopentylmethacrylate, 4-methyl cyclohexyl acrylate, benzyl methacrylate,o-bromobenzyl methacrylate, phenyl methacrylate, nonylphenylmethacrylate, benzyl acrylate, o-bromobenzyl phenyl acrylate,nonylphenyl acrylate, phenethyl methacrylate, phenoxy methacrylate,phenylpropyl methacrylate, nonylphenylethyl methacrylate, phenethylacrylate, phenoxy acrylate, phenylpropyl acrylate, nonylphenylethylacrylate, 2-ethoxyethoxymethyl acrylate, ethoxyethoxyethyl methacrylate,2-ethoxyethoxymethyl acrylate, ethoxyethoxyethyl acrylate, glycidylmethacrylate, glycidyl acrylate, 2,3-epoxybutyl methacrylate,2,3-epoxybutyl acrylate, 3,4-epoxybutyl acrylate, 3,4-epoxybutylmethacrylate, 2,3-epoxypropyl methacrylate, 2,3-epoxypropyl acrylate2-methoxyethyl methacrylate, 2-ethoxyethyl methacrylate, 2-butoxyethylmethacrylate, 2-methoxyethyl acrylate, 2-ethoxyethyl acrylate,2-butoxyethyl acrylate, tetrahydrofurfuryl acrylate, tetrahydrofurfurylmethacrylate, ethoxylated bisphenol-A-dimethacrylate, ethylene glycoldiacrylate, 1,2-propane diol diacrylate, 1,3-propane diol diacrylate,1,2-propane diol dimethacrylate, 1,3-propane diol dimethacrylate,1,4-butane diol diacrylate, 1,3-butane diol dimethacrylate, 1,4-butanediol dimethacrylate, 1,5 pentane diol diacrylate,2,5-dimethyl-1,6-hexane diol dimethacrylate, diethylene glycoldiacrylate, diethylene glycol dimethacrylate, trimethylolpropanetrimethacrylate, tetraethylene glycol diacrylate, tetraethylene glycoldimethacrylate, dipropylene glycol dimethacrylate, trimethylolpropanetriacrylate, glycerol triacrylate, glycerol trimethacrylate,pentaerythritol triacrylate, pentaerythritol dimethacrylate,pentaerythritol tetracrylate, pentaerythritol tetramethacrylate.

[0523] The first composition may also include amines. Examples of aminessuitable for incorporation into an antireflective coating compositioninclude tertiary amines and acrylated amines. The presence of an aminetends to stabilize the antireflective coating composition. Theantireflective coating composition may be prepared and stored prior tousing. In some embodiments, the antireflective coating composition mayslowly gel due to the interaction of the various components in thecomposition. The addition of amines tends to slow down the rate ofgelation without significantly affecting the antireflective propertiesof subsequently formed coatings. The first composition may include up toabout 5% by weight of amines.

[0524] The first composition may also include colloidal silica.Colloidal silica is a suspension of silica particles in a solvent. Thesilica particles may have a particle size of about 1 nanometer to about100 nanometers in diameter. Amorphous silica particles may be dispersedin water, a polar solvent, or combinations of water and a polar solvent.Some polar solvents that may be used include, but are not limited tomethanol, ethanol, isopropanol, butanol, ethylene glycol, and mixturesof these solvents. One example of colloidal silica is commerciallyavailable from Nissan Chemical Houston Corp., Houston, Tex., and soldunder the trade name Snowtex. The first composition may include up toabout 5% by weight of colloidal silica.

[0525] The first composition may also include a photoinitiator and/or aco-initiator. Examples of photoinitiators and co-initiators have beenpreviously described. Up to about 1% by weight of the first coatingcomposition may include a photoinitiator or a combination of aphotoinitiator and a co-initiator.

[0526] The first composition may also include a fluorinatedethylenically substituted monomer. Fluorinated ethylenically substitutedmonomers have the general structure:

CH₂═CR¹CO—O—(CH₂)_(p)—C_(n)F_(2n+1)

[0527] Where R¹ is H or —CH₃; p is 1 or 2; and n is an integer from 1 to40. Examples of fluorinated ethylenically substituted monomer include,but are not limited to, trihydroperfluoroheptyl acrylate andtrihydroperfluoroheptyl acrylate. The addition of a fluorinatedethylenically substituted monomer to a composition to be applied to aplastic lens may increase the hydrophobicity of the coating.Hydrophobicity refers to the ability of a substrate to repel water. Theaddition of a fluorinated ethylenically substituted monomer to thecomposition may increase the ability of the coated substrate to resistdegradation due to exposure to water.

[0528] The first composition may be applied to one or both surfaces of aplastic lens. The antireflective coating composition may be appliedusing a coating unit such as the one described previously. Theantireflective coating composition may be applied to the eyeglass lensas the lens is rotated within the coating unit. The plastic lens may berotated at speeds up to about 2000 rpm as the first composition is addedto the plastic lens. Less than 1 mL of the antireflective coatingcomposition may be applied to the eyeglass lens. More than 1 ml may alsobe applied, however, this amount may be excessive and much of theantireflective coating composition may be flung from the surface of thelens.

[0529] The thickness of the applied antireflective coating compositionmay also depend on the speed of rotation of the eyeglass lens, theviscosity of the antireflective coating composition, the amount ofcomposition added to the eyeglass lens, and the volatility of thesolvent used to dissolve the components of the composition. As anantireflective coating composition is added to a rotating eyeglass lens,the antireflective coating is spread evenly across the surface of theeyeglass lens. The solvent used to dissolve the components of theantireflective coating composition may evaporate as the composition isapplied to the eyeglass lens surface, leaving a thin film of theantireflective coating components. As additional antireflective coatingmaterial is added, the thickness of the antireflective coating layerwill gradually be increased. The rate at which the thickness increasesis related to the speed of rotation of the eyeglass lens, the viscosityof the antireflective coating composition, and the volatility of thesolvent used to form the composition.

[0530] When the composition is applied to a surface of the lens by ahuman operator, the thickness of the first coating composition may varydue to the operators inability to consistently add the composition tothe lens at the same rate each time. To overcome this variability, thecomposition may be added to the plastic lens with an automateddispensing system. The automated dispensing system may include a syringefor holding the composition and a controller drive system forautomatically moving the plunger of the syringe. Such systems arecommercially available as syringe pumps. A syringe pump may be coupledto a syringe that includes the composition to be added to the lens. Thesyringe pump may be configured to dispense the composition at apreselected rate. In this manner the rate at which the composition isadded to the surface may be accurately controlled. In anotherembodiment, the dispenser system may include a conveyor for drawing thesyringe and syringe pump across the surface of the lens. As thecomposition is dispensed by the syringe, the conveyor system may drawthe syringe across the surface of the lens. In this manner the rate ofapplication and the distribution path of the composition may beperformed in a consistent manner.

[0531] Assuming a constant speed of rotation of the eyeglass and aconstant dispensing rate, as the viscosity of the antireflective coatingcomposition is increased, the rate at which the thickness of the appliedantireflective coating composition increases may increase.Alternatively, the rate at which the thickness of the antireflectivecoating composition increases may be altered by adjusting the rotationspeed of the eyeglass lens. Assuming a constant viscosity of theantireflective coating composition, as the rotational speed of theeyeglass lens is increased, less of the antireflective coatingcomposition will remain on the eyeglass lens as the composition isapplied. By slowing down the rotational speed of the eyeglass lens, thethickness of the antireflective coating layer may be increased.

[0532] Alternatively, the viscosity of the first composition may bechanged by altering the amount of metal alkoxide and other componentspresent in the first composition. For example, a first composition thatincludes a metal alkoxide at a concentration of about 5% by weight, willhave a greater viscosity than a composition that has a metal alkoxideconcentration of about 2.5%. The more viscous composition will leave athicker film on the surface of the lens than the less viscouscomposition. When the composition is cured a thicker first coating layermay be obtained. The viscosity may also be altered by changing theorganic solvent that the metal alkoxide is dissolved or suspended in.Each solvent may have an inherent viscosity that may effect the overallviscosity of the first composition. By changing the solvent thisinherent viscosity may be altered, thus altering the viscosity of theoverall composition.

[0533] As an antireflective coating composition is added to a rotatingeyeglass lens, the antireflective coating is spread evenly across thesurface of the eyeglass lens. If a solvent used to dissolve thecomponents of the antireflective coating composition has a relativelylow boiling point (e.g., below about 80° C.) the solvent will evaporateand allow the more viscous components of the antireflective coatingcomposition (e.g., the silane, organic monomers, metal alkoxide, etc.)to form a coating on the lens. As more composition is added to theeyeglass lens, the thickness of the antireflective coating may increase.By changing solvent used in the antireflective coating composition to amore volatile solvent, the rate at which the thickness of theantireflective coating grows may increase. Generally, a low boilingpoint solvent will give a thicker coating layer than a higher boilingpoint solvent.

[0534] In general, the ability to control the thickness of the appliedfirst composition may be important for achieving antireflectiveproperties. In some embodiments, a low viscosity and/or lowconcentration composition may be used to form the first coating layer.Such compositions may form relatively thin films on the surface of theplastic lens. In some embodiments, the thickness of the formed film maybe too thin for the desired application. In an alternate procedure, thefirst coating layer may be formed by repeatedly applying the firstcomposition to the plastic lens and curing the deposited composition.Each iteration of this process will create a thicker first coatinglayer. When the first coating layer reaches a preselected thickness theprocedure may be stopped and the second coating layer may be formed.

[0535] After applying the first composition to the plastic lens, thefirst composition may be cured to form the first coating layer. Curingof the first composition may be accomplished by a variety of methods. Inone embodiment, the first composition may cured by spinning the lensuntil the composition forms a gel. Alternatively, the composition may beallowed to sit at room temperature for a time sufficient to allow thecomposition to gel. The gelled composition has a higher index ofrefraction than the underlying plastic lens, and may therefore serve asthe first coating layer. Additionally, at least a portion of the gelledcomposition may be sufficiently adhered to the plastic lens such that aportion of the gelled composition may remain on the lens during theapplication of the second composition, thus providing antireflectiveproperties to the lens subsequent to formation of the second coatinglayer.

[0536] Alternatively, the first composition may be cured by theapplication of heat to the composition. After the first composition isdeposited on the lens and spin dried, the first composition may be in agelled state. The gelled composition may be heated for a period of about1-10 minutes at a temperature in the range from about 40° C. to about120° C., preferably about 100° C. Heating of the gelled composition inthis matter may cause the composition to be converted from a gelledstate to a hardened state. The heat cured first coating layer mayexhibit good adhesion to the underlying lens. In some cases, however,the flow characteristics of the second composition when applied to aheat cured first composition may exhibit a non-uniform distributionacross the surface of the cured first composition. Furthermore, thefirst coating layer may have an index of refraction that is greater thanthe index of refraction of the plastic lens.

[0537] In another embodiment, the first composition may be cured by theapplication of ultraviolet light. As described above, the firstcomposition is applied to the lens and dried to form a gelledcomposition. The gelled composition may be treated with ultravioletlight for a time sufficient to convert the gelled composition to ahardened state. In some embodiments, the gelled composition is treatedwith ultraviolet light for a time of about 60 seconds or less. In oneembodiment, the ultraviolet light source may be a germicidal lamp, asdescribed above in the spin coating unit (See FIGS. 2 and 3). It shouldbe noted that germicidal lamps produce no significant heat energy. Thus,it is believed that the accelerated curing of the first composition isdue to the presence of the ultraviolet light, rather than from any heatproduced by the lamps. Advantageously, it has been found that the use ofultraviolet light to cure the first composition may provide a surfacethat allows a uniform distribution of a subsequently appliedcomposition. In comparison, the use of heating to cure the firstcomposition may provide a surface that causes a subsequently appliedcomposition to be unevenly dispersed. Thus the use of ultraviolet lightmay offer an advantage over heat curing with regard to formingmultilayer antireflective coatings.

[0538] It is believed that the ultraviolet light accelerates thecondensation reaction of the metal alkoxide. The ultraviolet light mayinteract with the metal alkoxide and excite the electrons of the metalalkoxide, which in turn may accelerate the polymerization of the metalalkoxide. It is believed that most metal alkoxides have a strongabsorbance in the ultraviolet region, specifically at wavelengths belowabout 300 nm. For example, titanium isopropoxide has a maximumabsorbance at 254 nm. In some embodiments, the application ofultraviolet light to the metal alkoxide may be directed toward thecoated surface rather than through the substrate. Many visible lighttransmitting media e.g., borosilicate glasses and plastics, may notallow sufficient amounts of light to pass through to the coatingcomposition at the appropriate wavelength.

[0539] After the first coating layer has been applied and cured, asecond coating layer may be formed upon the first coating layer. Thesecond coating layer may be formed by applying a second composition tothe exposed surface of the first coating layer. In some embodiments, thesecond coating layer, after curing, is composed of a material that hasan index of refraction that is substantially less than the first coatinglayer.

[0540] The second composition, in an embodiment, may be composed of aninitiator and an ethylenically substituted monomer. The ethylenicallysubstituted monomers that may be used have been described previously.The initiator may be a photoinitiator, such as was described earlier.Alternatively, the initiator may be a metal alkoxide. It is believedthat both photoinitiators and metal alkoxides interact with ultravioletlight and this interaction causes the initiation of polymerization ofthe ethylenically substituted monomer. The second composition may beapplied to the first coating layer in a manner similar to thosedescribed earlier. The second composition may include other monomerssuch as silane monomers, colloidal silica, coinitiators, and fluorinatedethylenically substituted monomer.

[0541] The combination of a second low index of refraction coating layerformed upon a first high index of refraction coating material mayprovide improved light transmission through the underlying substrate.The use of metal alkoxides in one or both layers tends to improve theadhesion of the coating material to the underlying substrate.

[0542] Antireflective coatings are thin films that are formed upon thesurface of the eyeglass lens. Such films have an optical thickness thatis herein defined as the index of refraction of the film times themechanical thickness of the film. The most effective films typicallyhave an optical thickness that is a fraction of a wavelength of incidentlight. Typically the optical thickness is one-quarter to one-half thewavelength. Thus for visible light (having a wavelengths approximatelybetween 400 nm and 700 nm) an ideal antireflective coating layer shouldhave a thickness between about 100 and 200 nm. Thicknesses that are lessthan 100 nm or greater than 200 nm may also be used, although suchthickness may not provide an optimal transmittance. In the embodimentscited herein, the combined optical thickness of the coating material maybe up to about 1000 nm, more particularly up to about 500 nm.

[0543] The ideal thickness of an antireflective coating should be aboutone-quarter the wavelength of the incident light. For light entering thefilm at normal incidence, the wave reflected from the second surface ofthe film will be exactly one-half wavelength out of phase with the lightreflected from the first surface, resulting in destructive interference.If the amount of light reflected from each surface is the same, acomplete cancellation will occur and no light will be reflected. This isthe basis of the “quarter-wave” low-reflectance coatings which are usedto increase transmission of optical components. Such coatings also tendto eliminate ghost images as well as the stray reflected light.

[0544] Because visible light includes a range of wavelengths from about400 nm to about 700 nm, a quarter-wave coating will only be optimizedfor one wavelength of light. For the other wavelengths of light theantireflective coating may be either too thick or too thin. Thus, moreof the light having these wavelengths may be reflected. For example, anantireflective coating that is designed for interior lights (e.g.,yellow light) will have a minimum reflectance for yellow light, whilethe reflectance for blue or red light will be significantly higher. Thisis believed to be the cause of the characteristic purple color of singlelayer low-reflectance coatings for many camera and video lenses. In oneembodiment, the thickness of the antireflective coating layers of aneyeglass lens may be varied or the indices of refraction may be alteredto produce lenses which have different visible light reflectivecharacteristics. Both of these variations will alter the opticalthickness of the coating layers and change the optimal effectivewavelength of light that is transmitted. As the optical thickness of thecoating layers is altered the reflected color of the lens will also bealtered. In an iterative manner, the optimal reflected color of theeyeglass lens may be controlled by the manufacturer.

[0545] While two layer antireflective coatings have been described, itshould be understood that multi-layer systems that include more than twolayers may also be used. In a two-layer system, a substrate is coatedwith a high index of refraction layer. The high index of refractionlayer is then coated with a low index of refraction layer. In anembodiment, a third high index of refraction (e.g., at least higher thanthe underlying second coating layer) may be formed on the second coatinglayer. A fourth low index of refraction layer (e.g., at least lower thanthe index of refraction of the third coating layer) may also be formed.The four layer stack may exhibit antireflective properties. The fourlayer stack may have an optical thickness of less than about 1000 nm,and more particularly less than about 500 nm. Additional layers may beformed upon the stack in a similar manner with the layers alternatingbetween high and low index of refraction materials.

[0546] In another embodiment, the second coating layer may be formed asa combination of two chemically distinct compositions. The secondcoating layer may be formed by forming a silicon layer upon the firstcoating layer. The silicon layer may be formed from colloidal silica ora silane monomer. The silicon layer is applied to the first coatinglayer and at least partially cured. The silicon layer may be cured bydrying, heating, or the application of ultraviolet light.

[0547] To complete formation of the second coating layer, a secondcomposition is deposited onto the silicon layer. The second compositionmay include an ethylenically substituted monomer and an initiator. Theethylenically substituted monomers that may be used have been describedpreviously. The initiator may be a photoinitiator, such as was describedearlier. Alternatively, the initiator may be a metal alkoxide. Thesecond composition may be applied to the silicon layer in a mannersimilar to those described earlier. The second composition may includeother monomers such as silane monomers, colloidal silica, coinitiators,and fluorinated ethylenically substituted monomers. The secondcomposition may be cured by the application of ultraviolet light.

[0548] The silicon layer, when partially cured or fully cured, tends toexhibit a porous structure. It is believed that the addition of thesecond composition to a substantially porous silicon layer may allowbetter chemical interaction between the second composition and thesilicon layer. In general, good antireflective properties are seen whena silicon layer is placed upon a first coating layer, when the firstcoating layer includes a metal alkoxide. The silicon layer, however, mayexhibit poor adhesion to a metal alkoxide containing underlying layer.The adhesion of the silicon layer may be improved by the addition of ametal alkoxide to the composition used to form the silicon layer.Silicon containing compositions, such as compositions that includecolloidal silica or silane monomers, tend to be unstable in the presenceof a metal alkoxide. Generally, it was observed that the mixture ofsilicon containing compounds with metal alkoxides produces a cloudycomposition, and in some cases gelation, prior to the application of thecomposition to the first coating layer. Such gelation tends to increasethe haze observed in the coated lens. The reactivity of metal alkoxideswith silicon containing compositions tends to reduce the shelf life ofsuch compositions, making it difficult to store the composition forextended periods of time.

[0549] By separating the metal alkoxide from the silicon containingcompositions and applying the compositions in a sequential manner, manyof the above-described problems may be reduced. It is believed that theaddition of a metal alkoxide containing composition to an at leastpartially cured silicon layer, causes the second composition to interactwith the underlying silicon composition such that a composite layer isformed. This composite layer may exhibit properties that are similar tothe properties found for single layers formed from compositions thatinclude silicon compounds and metal alkoxides. Since the siliconcontaining composition and metal alkoxide containing compounds areapplied at different times, the compositions may be stored separately,effectively overcoming the shelf life problems.

[0550] In one embodiment, a hardcoat composition may be applied to theplastic lens prior to the application of the antireflective coatingstack. Curing of the hardcoat composition may create a protective layeron the outer surface of the plastic lens. Typically, hardcoatcompositions are formed from acrylate polymers that, when cured, may beresistant to abrasive forces and also may provide additional adhesionfor the antireflective coating material to the plastic lens.

[0551] In another embodiment, a hydrophobic coating may be placed ontothe antireflective coating. Hydrophobic coatings may include fluorinatedethylenically substituted monomers. Curing of the hydrophobic coatingmay create a water protective layer on the outer surface of theantireflective coating. The hydrophobic layer may help preventdegradation of the lens due to the interaction of atmospheric water withthe lens.

[0552] In the above described procedures, the antireflective coating maybe formed onto a preformed lens. Such a method may be referred to as anout-of-mold process. An alternative to this out-of-mold process is anin-mold process for forming antireflective coatings. The “in-mold”process involves forming an antireflective coating over an eyeglass lensby placing a liquid lens forming composition in a coated mold andsubsequently curing the lens forming composition. The in-mold method isadvantageous to “out-of-mold” methods since the in-mold method exhibitsless occurrences of coating defects manifested as irregularities on theanterior surface of the coating. Using the in-mold method produces anantireflective coating that replicates the topography and smoothness ofthe mold casting face.

[0553] The application of an antireflective coating to a plastic lensrequires that the first and second coating layers (or more if a multilayer stack is used) be formed onto the mold. In particular, the secondcoating layer is placed onto the mold prior to forming the first coatinglayer. In this manner the stack is built backwards. The top of the stackon the casting surface of the mold may be the first coating layer whichis to contact the underlying lens in the in-mold process.

[0554] In an embodiment, a second coating layer may be formed byapplying a second composition upon a casting surface of a mold andcuring the second composition. The second composition, in an embodiment,includes a photoinitiator and an ethylenically substituted monomer. Theethylenically substituted monomers that may be used have been describedpreviously. The initiator may be a photoinitiator, such as was describedearlier. The second composition may include other additives such ascoinitiators and fluorinated ethylenically substituted monomer. Thesecond composition may, in some embodiments, be substantially free ofmetal alkoxides. It is believed that metal alkoxides disposed within acomposition may interact with the glass and inhibit the removal of thelens from the molds. The second monomers and other additives of thesecond composition may be dissolved or suspended in an organic solvent.The organic solvent may be used to aid in the application of the monomerto the mold surface.

[0555] To apply the second composition to the mold member, the moldmember may be spun so that the second composition becomes distributedover the casting face. The mold member is preferably rotated about asubstantially vertical axis at a speed up to about 2000 revolutions perminute, preferably at about 850 revolutions per minute. Further, adispensing device may be used to direct the composition onto the castingface while the mold member is spinning. The dispensing device may movefrom the center of the mold member to an edge of the mold member.

[0556] After applying the second composition to the mold member,ultraviolet light may be directed at the mold member to cure at least aportion of the second composition. The ultraviolet light may be directedtoward either surface (i.e., the casting or non-casting faces) of themold to cure the second composition.

[0557] After the second composition is at least partially cured, a firstcoating layer may be formed on the second composition by applying afirst composition to the second composition. The first composition mayinclude a metal alkoxide. The first composition may also include otheradditives such as photoinitiators, coinitiators, silane monomers,colloidal silica, ethylenically substituted monomers, and fluorinatedethylenically substituted monomers. The metal alkoxide and otheradditives may be dissolved in an organic solvent. All of these compoundshave been described previously.

[0558] The first composition may be cured by a variety of methods. Inone embodiment, the first composition may be cured by spinning the lensuntil the composition forms a gel. Alternatively, the composition may beallowed to sit at room temperature for a time sufficient to allow thecomposition to gel. In another embodiment, the first composition may becured by the application of heat to the composition. After the firstcomposition is deposited on the lens and spin dried, the firstcomposition may be in a gelled state. The gelled composition may beheated for a period of about 1-10 minutes at a temperature in the rangefrom about 40° C. to about 120° C. Heating of the gelled composition inthis matter may cause the composition to be converted from a gelledstate to a hardened state. In another embodiment, the first compositionmay be cured by the application of ultraviolet light. As describedabove, the first composition is applied to the lens and dried to form agelled composition. The gelled composition may be treated withultraviolet light for a time sufficient to convert the gelledcomposition to a hardened state. In some embodiments, the gelledcomposition is treated with ultraviolet light for a time of about 60seconds or less. In one embodiment, the ultraviolet light source may bea germicidal lamp.

[0559] After the formation of the first and second coating layers on thecasting surface of the mold member, the mold member may be assembledwith a second mold member by positioning a gasket between the members toseal them. The second mold member may also include an antireflectivecoating on the second molds casting surface. The antireflective coatingon the second mold may have an identical composition as theantireflective coating on the first mold. Alternatively, theantireflective coatings may have different compositions. The combinationof the two molds and gasket form a mold assembly having a cavity definedby the two mold members. The casting surfaces, and therefore theantireflective coatings, may be disposed on the surface of the formedmold cavity.

[0560] After the mold assembly has been constructed, a lens formingcomposition may be disposed within the mold assembly. An edge of thegasket may be displaced to insert the lens forming composition into themold cavity. Alternatively, the gasket may include a fill port that willallow the introduction of the lens forming composition without having todisplace the gasket. This lens forming composition includes aphotoinitiator and a monomer that may be cured using ultraviolet light.Examples of lens forming compositions that may be used include, but arenot limited to, OMB-99 and PhasesII monomers, as described above. Whendisposed within the mold cavity, the lens forming composition, in someembodiments, is in contact with the antireflective coating formed on thecasting surfaces of the molds.

[0561] In some embodiments, an adhesion coating layer may be formed onthe partially cured first composition. The coating adhesion layer may beformed from an adhesion composition that is applied to the first coatinglayer and cured. The adhesion composition may include an ethylenicallysubstituted monomer and a photoinitiator. It is believed that curing ofthe first composition may reduce the adhesion of the first coating layerto a subsequently formed plastic lens. The adhesion coating layer maytherefore improve the adhesion between the first coating composition andthe subsequently formed lens. The adhesion layer composition, in someembodiments, includes monomers similar to the monomers included in thelens forming composition. This may improve the adhesion between theadhesion layer and a lens formed from the lens forming composition. Theadhesion layer may have an index of refraction that is similar, or lessthan, the index of refraction of the formed lens. Thus, the adhesionlayer may have little, if any, affect on the antireflective propertiesof the first and second coating layers.

[0562] While two layer antireflective coatings have been described foran in-mold process, it should be understood that multi-layer systemsthat include more than two layers may also be used. In a two layersystem, a mold is coated with a low index of refraction layer. The lowindex of refraction layer is then coated with a high index of refractionlayer. In an embodiment, a third low index of refraction layer (e.g., atleast lower than the underlying first coating layer) may be formed onthe first coating layer. A fourth high index of refraction layer (e.g.,at least higher than the index of refraction of the third coating layer)may also be formed. The four layer stack may exhibit antireflectiveproperties. The four layer stack may have an optical thickness of lessthan about 1000 nm, and more particularly less than about 500 nm.Additional layers may be formed upon the stack in a similar manner withthe layers alternating between high and low index of refractionmaterials.

[0563] In another embodiment, the second coating layer may be formed asa combination of two chemically distinct compositions. The secondcoating layer may be formed by forming an organic containing layer uponthe casting surface of the mold. The organic containing layer includesan ethylenically substituted monomer and an initiator. The ethylenicallysubstituted monomers that may be used have been described previously.The initiator may be a photoinitiator, such as was described earlier.Alternatively, the initiator may be a metal alkoxide. The organiccontaining layer may be applied to the casting surface in a mannersimilar to those described earlier. The organic containing layer mayinclude other monomers such as silane monomers, colloidal silica,coinitiators, and fluorinated ethylenically substituted monomers. Theorganic containing layer may be cured by the application of ultravioletlight.

[0564] The second coating layer may be completed by applying a siliconlayer upon the organic containing layer. The silicon layer may be formedfrom colloidal silica or a silane monomer. The silicon layer is appliedto the organic containing layer and at least partially cured. Thesilicon layer may be cured by drying, heating, or the application ofultraviolet light.

[0565] Additional coating materials may be placed onto theantireflective coating. In one embodiment, a hardcoat composition may beapplied to the antireflective coating formed on the casting surface of amold. Curing of the hardcoat composition may create a protective layeron the outer surface of a subsequently formed plastic eyeglass lens.Typically hardcoat compositions are formed from acrylate polymers that,when cured, are resistant to abrasive forces. The subsequently formedhardcoat layer may help to prevent abrasions to the plastic lens. Othercoatings that may be formed include hydrophobic coatings and tintedcoatings. Such coatings may be formed on the casting surface of themold, prior to the formation of the antireflective coatings. Thesecoatings, in some embodiments, may allow the formed lens to be removedmore easily from the mold assembly. As discussed above, theantireflective coatings may adhere to the molds, making removal of thelens form the mold assembly difficult. The use of hydrophobic coatingsmay reduce the adhesion between the mold assemblies and theantireflective coating layer.

EXAMPLES

[0566] A plastic eyeglass lens was made according to the processdescribed above from the OMB-99 monomer solution. The lens was thencoated with two antireflective coating compositions. In all of theexamples, the following abbreviations are used:

[0567] “AC” is acetone, commercially available from Aldrich;

[0568] “AA” is an acrylic amine commercially available as CN384 fromSartomer;

[0569] “Al” is aluminum tri-sec-butoxide (98%) commercially availablefrom Avocado;

[0570] “AS” is 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane (97%) commerciallyavailable from Aldrich;

[0571] “BDK”, “BDM”, and “BDMK” are Photomer 51 and2,2-dimethoxy-2-phenylacetophenone commercially available from Henkel;

[0572] “BYK300” is a solution of polyether modified dimethylpolysiloxanecopolymer commercially available from BYK Chemie;

[0573] “CD1012” is diaryl iodonium hexafluoroantimonate commerciallyavailable from Sartomer;

[0574] “CD540” is ethoxylated bisphenol A dimethacrylate commerciallyavailable from Sartomer;

[0575] “CN124” is epoxy acrylate commercially available from Sartomer;

[0576] “Cynox 1790” istris(4-t-butyl-3-hydroxy-2,6-dimethylbenzyl)-s-triazine-2,4,6-(1H,3H,5H)-trionecommercially available from Sartomer;

[0577] “D1173” is 2-hydroxy-2-methyl-1-phenyl-propan-1-one (HMPP)commercially available from Ciba;

[0578] “DC193” is a surfactant commercially available from Dow Corning;

[0579] “ECHMCHC” is 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl-3,4-epoxycyclohexanecarboxylate;

[0580] “Eosin” is the dye Eosin Y commercially available from Aldrich;

[0581] “EtOH” is ethanol, commercially available from Fisher;

[0582] “FC40” and “FC430” are surfactants commercially available from3M;

[0583] “FC-171” is a fluorochemical surfactant commercially availablefrom 3M;

[0584] “FC-725” also known as FLUORAD, a fluorochemical surfactantcommercially available from 3M;

[0585] “GPTMS” is 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane commerciallyavailable from Aldrich;

[0586] “HC-8” is a hard coat forming composition commercially availablefrom Fastcast Co. and includes a mixture of SR399, SR601, Irg184, andMP;

[0587] “HC8558” is commercially available from GE;

[0588] “HC-900” is commercially available from Coburn OpticalIndustries;

[0589] “HEMA” is hydroxyethyl methacrylate commercially available fromCoburn Optical Industries;

[0590] “HR-200” is a hydrophobic coating commercially available fromGroup Couget;

[0591] “IPA” is isopropyl alcohol commercially available from Fisher;

[0592] “Irg184” is Irgacure 184 or 1-Hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketonecommercially available from Ciba;

[0593] “Irg 261” is Irgacure 261 or iron(.eta.5-2,4-cyclopentadien-1-yl)[1,2,3,4,5,6-.eta.)-(1-methylethyl)benzene]-hexafluorophosphate)commercially available from Ciba;

[0594] “Irg 819” is Irgacure 819 or Phosphine oxide,phenylbis(2,4,6-trimethyl benzoyl) commercially available from Ciba;

[0595] “MP” is 1-methoxy-2-propanol commercially available from Arcos;

[0596] “Nalco Si2326” is a colloidal silica commercially available fromNalco Chemical Company;

[0597] “NNDMEA” is N,N-dimethylethanolamine commercially available fromAldrich;

[0598] “PerenolS-5” is a modified polysiloxane commercially availablefrom Henkel;

[0599] “PFOA” is 1H,1H-perfluorooctyl acrylate commercially availablefrom Lancaster;

[0600] “PFOFCS” is 1H,1H,2H,2H-perfluorooctyltrichlorosilanecommercially available from Lancaster;

[0601] “PFOMA” is perfluorooctyl methacrylate commercially availablefrom Lancaster;

[0602] “Q4DC” is an organic functional silicone fluid commerciallyavailable from Dow Corning;

[0603] “Si” is MA-ST-S (30% colloidal silica in 70% methanol)commercially available from Nissan Chemical;

[0604] “SR123” is an acrylate monomer commercially available fromSartomer;

[0605] “SR306” is tripropylene glycol diacrylate commercially availablefrom Sartomer;

[0606] “SR313” is lauryl methacrylate commercially available fromSartomer;

[0607] “SR368” is tris(2-hydroxy ethyl) isocyanurate triacrylatecommercially available from Sartomer;

[0608] “SR399” is dipentacrythritol tetraacrylate commercially availablefrom Sartomer;

[0609] “SR423” is isobornyl methacrylate commercially available fromSartomer;

[0610] “SR444” is Pentaerythritol triacrylate commercially availablefrom Sartomer;

[0611] “SR640” is tetrabromo bisphenol A diacrylate commerciallyavailable from Sartomer;

[0612] “SR9003” is propoxylated neopentyl glycol diacrylate commerciallyavailable from Sartomer;

[0613] “T770” is bis(2,2,6,6-tetramethyl-4-piperidinyl sebacatecommercially available from Ciba;

[0614] “TEA” is triethylamine commercially available from Aldrich;

[0615] “TFEMA” is trifluoroethyl methacrylate commercially availablefrom Cornelius Chemical;

[0616] “Ti” is titanium (IV) isoproxide commercially available fromAldrich;

[0617] “Ti—Bu” is titanium (IV) butoxide commercially available fromAldrich;

[0618] “TMSPMA” is 3-(trimethoxysilyl)propyl methacrylate commerciallyavailable from Aldrich;

[0619] “TPB” is thermoplast blue 684;

[0620] “TPR” is thermoplast red 454;

[0621] “TX-100” is a surfactant commercially available from Aldrich;

[0622] “ZelecUN” is a lubricant commercially available from Stepan; and

[0623] “Zr” is zirconium (IV) propoxide commercially available fromAldrich.

[0624] In Table 1, Layer 1 refers to the first antireflective coatinglayer, Layer 2 refers to the second antireflective coating layer.Solutions of each of the components were prepared and used to form theantireflective coatings. For all of the compositions listed in Table 1,the remainder of the composition is made up of 1-methoxy-2-propanol. Forexample. a listing of 5% Ti, should be understood to mean 5% by weightof Ti and 95% by weight of 1-methoxy-2-propanol.

[0625] The plastic eyeglass lens was coated using two different coatingcompositions. The “Layer 1” composition was added to a surface of theeyeglass lens and the eyeglass lens was rotated on a lens spin-coatingapparatus. After the L1 composition was spread onto the eyeglass lenssurface the solvent was allowed to substantially evaporate and theremaining composition was subjected to ultraviolet light from thegermicidal lamp from the previously described coating unit for about 60seconds. In some instances, more or less UV light was applied. Alternatetimes are noted in parenthesis. The “Layer 2” composition was added tothe eyeglass lens after the Layer 1 composition was cured. The eyeglasslens was spun on a lens spin-coating apparatus until the solvent wassubstantially evaporated. Layer 2 was then cured by the application ofultraviolet light from the germicidal lamp from the previously describedcoating unit. Curing time of the second layer is 60 seconds, unlessotherwise noted. The % transmittance refers to the amount of lighttransmitted through the lens after the Layer 2 composition was cured.The transmittance was measured in a BYK Gardner Haze Guard Plus Meter,available from BYK Gardner, Silver Springs, Md. Transmission readingswere taken of an uncoated lens to use as a control standard. The visiblelight transmittance of an uncoated lens measured with the convex face ofthe lens positioned against the haze port of the BYK Gardner Haze GuardPlus Meter is about 92%. Color refers to the color of the lightreflected from the coated lens. TABLE 1 Visible Light Trans- Ex. # Layer1 Layer 2 mittance % Color 1 5% Ti 5.1% Si 99.0% RED 1.04% Ti 1.04%GPTMS 0.144% HC-900 (Heat 20 Min.) 2 5% Ti 4.25% Si 99.0% 0.87% GPTMS0.17 HC-900 (heat 20 Min.) 3 5% Ti 4.5% Si 96.0% PURPLE 1.8% Ti 1.8%GPTMS 0.17% HC-900 (Heat 20 Min.) 4 5% Ti 4.25% Si 99.0% 1.04% Ti 0.87%GPTMS 0.17% HC-900 (Heat 20 Min.) 5 5% Ti 4.5% Si 97.4% BLUE 1.8% Ti1.8% GPTMS 0.17% HC-900 6 3% Ti 4.5% Si 97.0% PURPLE 1.8% Ti 1.8% GPTMS0.17% HC-900 7 3% Ti 3% Si 93.0% 1.2% Ti 1.2% GPTMS 0.11% HC-900 8 3% Ti5.4% Si 97.7% RED 1.17% Ti 1.17% GPTMS 0.107% HC-900 9 5% Ti 5.4% Si99.0% PURPLE 1.17% Ti 1.17% GPTMS 0.107% HC-900 10 5.2% Ti 5.4% Si 96.0%1.33% Si 1.17% Ti 1.33% GPTMS 1.17% GPTMS 0.107% HC-900 11 4.13% Ti 5.4%Si >97%   0.66% Si 1.17% Ti 0.66% GPTMS 1.17% GPTMS 0.107% HC-900 (Heat5 Min.) 12 5.4% Ti 5.4% Si 98.0% 0.32% Si 1.17% T1 0.32% GPTMS 1.17%GPTMS 0.053% HC- 0.107% HC-900 900 (UV 90 s) 13 3% Ti 0.45% Al 97.0%0.445% Ti 3.5% GPTMS 3.5% TMSPMA 14 3% Ti 0.3% Al 97.7% 0.36% Ti 2%GPTMS 2% TMSPMA 0.01% TBPO 0.08% FC-430 15 3% Ti 0.62% Al >97%   0.17%Ti 1.2% GPTMS 1.2% TMSPMA 3.87% HC-8 16 2.8% Ti 0.62% Al >96%   0.49% Al0.17% Ti 2.79% HC-8 1.2% GPTMS 1.2% TMSPMA 3.87% HC-8 17 3% Ti 0.54% Al94.4% 0.5% Ti 0.82% GPTMS 0.9% TMSPMA 1.27% HC-8 18 3% Ti 0.9% Al 97.3%0.46% Ti 0.75% GPTMS 0.83% TMSPMA 3.43% HC-8 19 3% Ti 0.8% Al 97.0% 0.1%Ti 0.42% GPTMS 0.42% TMSPMA 6% HC-8 20 3% Ti 0.62% Al 97.0% 0.17% Ti1.2% GPTMS 1.2% TMSPMA 3.9% HC-8 21 10% Ti 0.19% Ti >97%   0.05% AA0.19% GPTMS 22.7% MP 0.19% TMSPMA 67.25% IPA 1.9% HC-8 3.9% Si 22 10% Ti0.46% Ti 96.2% 0.05% AA 0.9% Al 22.7% MP 0.8% GPTMS 67.25% IPA .75%TMSPMA 3.4% HC-8 23 2% Ti 0.3% Al 92.5% 100 ppm AA 18.5% HC-8 25.2% MP(UV 60 s) 72.8% IPA (UV 60 s) 24 2% Ti 0.11% Al 92.8% 100 ppm AA 3.35%SR368 25.2% MP (UV 200 s) 72.8% IPA (UV 60 s) 25 1.54% Ti 0.24% Ti 96.3%77 ppm AA 0.048% Al 42.3% MP 1.94% SR368 56.2% IPA 1.47% TMSPMA (UV 86s) 96.3% MP (UV 180 s) 26 154% Ti 0.186% Ti 97.2% 77 ppm AA 0.036% Al42.3% MP 1.48% SR368 56.2% IPA 1.13% TMSPMA (UV 40 s) 0.02% DC193 97.17%MP (UV 180 s) 27 1.54% Ti 0.36% Ti 96.8% 77 ppm AA 0.033% Al 42.3% MP1.39% SR368 56.2% IPA 1.06% TMSPMA (UV 40 s) 0.0187% DC193 97.16% MP (UV10 s) 28 2.8% Ti 2% SR399 96.8% 2.8% Irg 184 (UV 20 s) 29 2.99% Ti 1.86%SR399 95.7% 0.294% Irg 184 0.31% Ti (UV 20 s) (UV 30 s) 30 2.99% Ti 2%SR399 95.7% GOLD 0.28% Irg 184 0.349% Ti (UV 40 s) (UV 30 s) 31 2.99% Ti0.34 Ti 95.7% DEEP BLUE 0.28% Irg 184 0.5% SR308 2% SR399 (UV 120 s) 322.99% Ti 2% SR399 95.8% 0.28% Irg 184 0.5% SR306 (UV 40 s) 0.349% Ti (UV100 s) 33 2% Ti 2% SR399 95.2% GOLD 0.2 Irg 184 0.4% Ti (UV 30 s) 004%Irg 184 (UV 30 s) 34 2% Ti 2% SR399 97.1% 0.2% Irg 184 0.4% Ti (X3)0.04% Irg 184 (UV 20s each) (UV 60 s) 35 2% Ti 2% SR399 95.6% 0.2 Irg184 0.4% Ti (UV 30 s) 0.04% Irg 184 0.1% BYK300 (UV 30 s) 36 3.25% Ti 2%SR399 97.2% GOLD 0.1% Irg 184 0.4% Ti (UV 30 s) 0.04% Irg 184 0.1%BYK300 (UV 30 s) 37 3.25% Ti 2% SR399 97.9% 0.1% Irg 184 0.4% Ti (350rpm) 0.04% Irg 184 0.1% BYK300 (UV 30 s) 38 3.25% Ti 2% SR399 97.5% GOLD0.1% Irg 184 0.4% Ti (UV 60 s) 0.04% Irg 184 0.1% BYK300 (UV 60 s) 39 2%Ti 2% SR399 96.0% 0.2% Irg 184 0.4% Ti (UV 60 s) 0.04% Irg 184 0.12%Zelecun (UV 60 s) 40 2% Ti 2% SR399 96.0% 0.2% Irg 184 0.4% Ti (UV 60 s)0.04% Irg 184 0.1% Q4DC 41 3.25% Ti 2% SR399 97.4% 0.1% Irg 184 0.4% Ti(UV 70 s) 0.04% Irg 184 0.1% Q4DC (UV 70 s) 42 3.25% Ti 2% SR399 97.4%0.1% Irg 819 0.4% Ti (UV 60 s) 0.04% Irg 184 0.1% Q4DC (UV 70 s) 433.03% Ti 2% SR399 96.9% 0.4% Irg 819 0.4% Ti (UV 60 s) 0.04% Irg 1840.1% Q4DC (UV 70 s) 44 2.5% Ti 2% SR399 96.5% 0.16% Irg 184 0.4% Ti (UV60 s) 0.04% Irg 184 0.13% FC430 (UV 60 s) 45 3.5% Ti 2% SR399 97.5%0.08% Irg 184 0.4% Ti (UV 60 s) 0.04% Irg 184 (UV 60 s) 46 3.5% Ti 2%SR399 98.1% 0.08% Irg 184 0.4% Ti (UV 60 s) 0.04% Irg 184 0.1% FC4300.1% BYK300 (UV 60 s) 47 3.5% Ti 2% SR399 98.3% 0.08% Irg 184 0.4% Ti(UV 20 s) 0.04% Irg 184 0.13% FC430 0.1% BYK300 (UV 60 s) 48 2.5% Ti0.2% Ti 95.2% 0.2% Irg 184 0.2% SR239 44.8% AC 0.8% SR399 52.5% MP 492.46% Ti 0.5% Ti 97.5% 0.197 Irg 184 0.1% Irg 184 0.157% SR313 0.55%SR313 44.3% AC 1.75% SR399 (UV 60 s) 50 3.47% Ti 0.5% Ti 96.9% 0.294%Irg 184 0.1% Irg 184 (UV 30 s) 0.55% SR313 1.75% SR399 51 2.5% Ti 0.5%Ti 97.5% 0.2% Irg 184 0.1% Irg 184 45% AC 0.55% SR313 52.3% MP 1.75%SR399 (UV 60 s) 52 2.47% Ti 0.53% Ti 97.0% 0.197% Irg 184 0.1% Irg 1840.12% SR313 0.85% SR313 44.47% AC 1.38% SR399 (UV 60 s) (UV 60 s) 532.47% Ti 0.57% Ti 95.0% 0.197% Irg 184 0.087% Irg 184 0.12% SR313 1.74%CN124 44.47% AC (UV 60 s) (UV 60 s) 54 2.47% Ti 0.5% Ti 96.8% 0.197% Irg184 0.19% Irg 184 0.12% SR313 0.6% CN124 44.47% AC 0.4% SR313 1.07%SR399 (UV 60 s) 55 2.47% Ti 0.167% Ti 96.7% 0.197% Irg 184 0.083% Irg184 0.12% SR313 0.167% Al 44.47% AC 1.555% SR399 56 2.47% Ti 0.35% Ti97.1% 0.197% Irg 184 0.076% Irg 184 0.12% SR313 0.15% Al 44.47% AC 1.43%SR399 0.414% SR313 57 5% Ti 2% CD540 97.6% 0.5% Ti 3.4 ppm TPB 0.2 ppmTPR 12 ppm Cynox-1790 58 5% Ti 0.21% Irg 184 97.4% 1.93% CD540 0.48% Ti3.3 ppm TPB 0.19 ppm TPR 11.6 ppm Cynox-1790 59 5% Ti 0.084% Irg 18498.5% 0.77% CD540 0.192% Ti 1.3 ppm TPB 0.075 ppm TPR 4.6 ppm-Cynox-179060 5% Ti 2% ECHMCHC 97.6% (UV 60 s) 0.5% Ti 61 5% Ti 0.12% CD1012 98.1%(UV 40 s) 1.88% ECHMCHC 0.47% Ti (UV 90 s) 62 5% Ti 0.22% CD1012 95.0%(UV 30 s) 2% ECHMCHC 0.43% Ti (UV 90 s) 63 5% Ti 0.22% CD1012 94.0% (UV60 s) 2% ECHMCHC 0.43% Ti (UV 90 s) 64 5% Ti 0.356 Ti 98.4% 0.073 CD10120.67% ECHMCHC 1 33% SR399 65 5% Ti 0.14% Irg 184 98.3% (UV 50 s) 0.348%Ti 0.07% CD1012 0.65% ECHMCHC 1.3% SR399 (Heat) 66 5% Ti 0.133% Irg 18496.4% (UV 45 s) 0 33% Ti 0.066% CD1012 0.62% ECHMCHC 1.24% SR399 0.1%PerenolS-5 (Heat) 67 3% Ti 2.6% SR399 96.7% (UV 60 s) 0.3% Ti (UV 60 s)68 5% Ti 2.6% SR399 94.4% (UV 60 s) 0 3% Ti (UV 60 s) 69 3% Ti 2.6%SR399 96.2% (UV 60 s) 0.3% Ti (UV 60 s) 70 3% Ti 2.0% SR399 97.2% (UV 60s) 0.3% Ti (UV 60 s) 71 2.5% Ti 2% SR399 96.2% 2.5% HEMA 0.06% Irg 18472 1.5% Ti 2% SR399 95.3% 1.5% HEMA 0.06% Irg 184 73 1.5% Ti 2% SR39997.0% 1.5% HEMA 0.06% Irg 184 9.3 ppm AA 13.3% IPA 74 3% Ti 0.0525%PFOFCS 95.6% (UV 60 s) 0.144% CD1012 1.955% ECHMCHC (UV 60 s) 75 3% Ti0.0256% PFOFCS 97.0% (UV 60 s) 0.145% CD1012 1.976% ECHMCHC (UV 60 s) 763% Ti 0.0232% PFOFCS 96.8% (UV 60 s) 0.476% Ti 0.131% CD1012 1.79%ECHMCHC (UV 60 s) 77 3% Ti 0.051% PFOFCS 97.3% (UV 60 s) 0.139% CD10121.89% ECHMCHC 0.49% HEMA (UV 60 s) 78 3% Ti 0.0477% PFOFCS 96.9% (UV 60s) 0.13% CD1012 1.767% ECHMCHC 0.78% HEMA 0.32% Ti (UV 60 s) 79 3% Ti0.0457% PFOFCS 97.5% (UV 60 s) 0.124% CD1012 0.26% Irg 184 1.685%ECHMCHC 0.746% HEMA 0.306% Ti (UV 60 s) 80 3% Ti 0.11% Irg 184 97.1% (UV60 s) 0.44% Ti 2% SR399 (UV 60 s) 81 5% Si 0.05% Irg 184 93.8% (UV 60 s)5% Ti 0.19% SR399 (UV 60 s) 82 5% Si 0.08% Irg 184 92.6% 0.32% Ti 1.44%SR399 0.005% PFOTCS (UV 60 s) 83 3.1% Ti-Bu 2% SR399 96.3% 1.1% HEMA0.08% Irg 184 13.3% IPA 84 3.1% Ti-Bu 2% SR399 96.3% 1.1% HEMA 0.08% Irg184 13.3% IPA 85 4% Ti 2% SR399 97.7% 0.08% Irg 184 0.32% Ti-Bu

[0626] In Table 2, Layer 1 refers to the first antireflective coatinglayer, Layer 2 refers to the second antireflective coating layer. HR-200refers to a hydrophobic coating layer formed upon Layer 2. Solutions ofeach of the components were prepared and used to form the antireflectivecoatings. For all of the compositions listed in Table 2, the remainderof the composition is made up of 1-methoxy-2-propanol. For example, alisting of 5% Ti, should be understood to mean 5% by weight of Ti and95% by weight of 1-methoxy-2-propanol.

[0627] The application of the compositions to the lenses, and themeasurement of the transmittance was performed in substantially the samemanner as recited above for Table 1. Curing times are 60 seconds, unlessotherwise noted. TABLE 2 Visible Light Transmittance Color Ex. # Layer 1Layer 2 Layer 3 % 86 3% Ti 4.65% Si HR-200 >98%  0.7% Ti 0.05% HC-900 871 50% Ti 0.46% Ti HR-200 97.3% 454 ppm AA 0.75% GPTMS 300 ppm AS 0.83TMSPMA 92.8% MP 3.4% HC-8 5.6% IPA 0.9% AI (UV 40 s) 88 0.75% Ti 0.46%Ti HR-200 96.0% 38 ppm AA 0.75% GPTMS 14.2% MP 0.83% TMSPMA 85% IPA 3.4%HC-8 0.9% AI 89 2% Ti 0.24% AI HR-200 94.7% 100 ppm AA 9.80% HC-8 25.2%MP (UV 60 s) 72.8% IPA (UV 60 s) 90 2% Ti 0.09% AI HR-200 93.5% 100 ppmAA 2.8% SR368 25.2% MP 0.32% Ti 72.8% IPA 16 ppm AA (UV 60 s) 11.7% IPA(UV 90 s) 91 2% Ti 0.41% Ti HR-200 94.6% 100 ppm AA 0.045% AI 25.2% MP1.4% SR368 72.8% IPA 0.88% SR123 0.78% TFEMA 8 ppm AA 5.8% IPA (UV 90 s)92 1% Ti 0.13% Ti HR-200 94.8% 50 ppm AA 0.031% AI 12.6% MP 1.52% SR36886.4% IPA 0.467% SR123 (UV 30 s) 0.417% TFEMA (UV 60 s) 93 1% Ti 0.21%Ti HR-200 96.7% 50 ppm AA 0.35% AI 12.6% MP 2.4% SR368 86.4% IPA 0.74%SR123 (UV 40 s) 0.66% TFEMA (UV 60 s) 94 1.54% Ti 0.19% Ti HR-200 96.9%77 ppm AA 0.037% AI 42.3% MP 1.5% SR368 56.2 IPA 1.14% TMSPMA (UV 30 s)97.16% MP (UV 180 s)

[0628] In Table 3, multiple coating layers are formed on the plasticlens. For all of the compositions listed in Table 3, the remainder ofthe composition is made up of 1-methoxy-2-propanol. For example, alisting of 5% Ti, should be understood to mean 5% by weight of Ti and95% by weight of 1-methoxy-2-propanol.

[0629] The application of the compositions to the lenses, and themeasurement of the transmittance was performed in substantially the samemanner as recited above for Table 1. Curing times are 60 seconds, unlessotherwise noted. TABLE 3 Visible Light Ex. # Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3Layer 4 Layer 5 Layer 6 Layer 7 Transmittance % Color  95 2.5% Ti 10% Ti0.7% Ti HR200 96.8% BLUE 2.5% Si 4.6% Si 0.05% HC900  96 2% Ti 0.368% Al26.8% HC-8 HR200 96.0% 57 ppmNNDMEA (UV 40 s) 73.2% IPA (UV 30 s)  97 3%Ti 0.055% Irg184 3% Si 0.055% Irg184 97.2% (UV 70 s) 0.22% Ti (UV 20 s)0.22% Ti 1% SR399 1% SR399 0.0125 PFOMA 0.0125% PFOMA (UV 20 s) (UV 70s)  98 3% Ti (UV 70 s) 0.055% Irg184 3.7% NatcO Si 0.055% Irg184 97.9%0.22% Ti (UV 20 s) 0.22% Ti 1% SR399 1% SR399 0.0125PFOMA 0.0125% PFOMA(UV 20 s)  99 3% Ti (UV 60 s) 0.54% SR399 0.54% SR399 0.54% SR399 97.5%0.12% Ti 0.12% Ti 0.12% Ti 0.3% Irg164 0.3% Irg1S4 0.3% Irg184 0.07%PFOMA 0.07% PFOMA 0.07% PFOMA 45.4% AC 45.4% AC 45 4% AC (UV 20 s) (UV20 s) (UV 20 s) 100 30% Ti 0.527% SR399 0.527% SR399 0.54% SR399 96.1%0.235% Ti 0.235% Ti 0.12% Ti 0.029% Irg184 0.029% Irg184 0.03% Irg1840.066% PFOMA 0.066% PFOMA 0.07% PFOMA 4.43% AC 44.3% AC 45.4% AC (UV 20s) (UV 60 s) 101 1.5% Ti 0.525% SR399 3% Si 0.527% SR399 97.0% 0.235% Ti0.23% Ti 0.029% Irg184 0.024% Irg184 0.066% PFOMA 0.066% PFOMA 102 3.5%Ti—Bu 0.033% BDKK 0.086% BDKK 0.026% BDKK 97.5% 0.095% Ti—Bu 0.173%Ti—Bu 0.3% SR399 0.375% SR399 1% SR399 0.0037% PFOTCS 2.5% Si 0.0037%FC430 0.0037% BYK300 103 5% Ti—Bu 0.086% BDKK 0.086% BDKK 0.026% BDKK98.1% (UV 60s) 0.17% Ti—Bu 0.17% Ti—Bu 0.3% SR399 1% SR399 1% SR3990.0037% PFOTCS (UV 40 s) (UV 50 s) 0.0037% FC430 0.0037% BYK300 (UV 60s) 104 5% Ti—Bu 0.033% BDKK 0.086% BDKK 0. 026% BDKK 97.9% (UV 60 s)0.095% Ti—Bu 0.17% Ti—Bu 0.3% SR399 0.375% SR399 1% SR399 0.0037% PFOTCS2.5% Si (UV 50 s) 0.0037% FC430 (UV 40 s) 0.0037% BYK300 (UV 60 s) 1055% Ti—Bu 0.033% BDKK 0.033% BDKK 0.026% BDKK 98.2% (UV 60 s) 0.95% Ti—Bu0.095% Ti—Bu 0.3% SR399 0.375% S8399 0.375% SR399 0.0037% PFOTCS 2.5% Si25% Si 0.0037% FC430 (UV 40 s) (UV 50 s) 0.0037% BYK300 (UV 60 s) 106 5%Ti—Bu 0.086% BDKK 0.033% BDKK 0.026% BDKK 97.9% (UV 60s) 0.17% Ti—Bu0.095% Ti—Bu 0.3% SR399 1% S8399 0.375% SR399 0.0037% PFOTCS (UV 50 s)2.5% Si 0.0037% FC430 (UV 60 s) 0.0037% BYK300 107 2% Ti 5% Si 5% Ti 5%Si 1% SR399 97.5% (UV 60 s) 0.4% SR399 0.4% Ti 0.17% Ti 0.067% Ti 0.06%Irg184 0.0416% Irg184 108 2% Ti 5% Si 5% Ti 2% Si 0.2% SR399 97.7% (UV503) 0.4% S8399 0.0346% Ti 0.067% Ti 0.2% 5R399 0.0346% Ti 0.0085%Irg184 109 2% Ti 1% SR399 2% Ti 2% Ti 0.1% SR399 96.8% (UV 50 s) 0.17%Ti (UV 30 s) (UV 40 s) 0.0416% Irg184 (UV 50 s) 110 1.5% Ti 2% SR3992.75% Ti 1% SR399 1% Si 1.4% SR399 96.4% (UV 60 s) 0.5% Si 0.05% Irg1840.062% Irg184 0.1% Irg184 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti (UV 60 s) (UV 60 s)111 1.5% Ti 1% SR399 2.75% Ti 1% SR399 1% Si 1% SR399 95.1% (UV 60 s) 1%Si 0.05% Irg184 0.05% Irg184 0.5% Irg184 0.3% Ti 0.21% Ti 0.3% Ti (UV 603) (UV 60 s) 112 1.5% Ti 2% SR399 2.75% Ti 1% SR399 1% Si 1% SR399 0.4%SR399 96.1% (UV 60 s) 0.5% Si 0.05% Irg184 0.05% Irg184 0.017% Irg1840.1% Irg184 0.3% Ti 0.21% Ti 0.085% Ti 0.3% Ti (UV 60 s) 113 1.5% Ti0.33% SR399 2.75% Ti 1% SR399 1% Si 1% SR399 0.4% SR399 94.7% (UV 60 s)3% Si 0.05% Irg184 0.05% Irg184 0.017% Irg184 0.017% Irg184 0.3% Ti0.21% Ti 0.085% Ti 0.3% Ti 114 1.5% Ti 0.33% SR399 2.75% Ti 1% SR399 1%Si 0.8% SR399 97.5% 3% Si 0.05% Irg184 0.035% Irg184 0.017% Irg184 0.3%Ti 0.17% Ti 0.3% Ti 115 1.5% Ti 0.33% SR399 2.75% Ti 0.33% SR399 0.8%SR399 97.5% 3% Si 3% Si 0.035% Irg184 0.017% Irg184 0.017% Irg184 0.17%Ti 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti 116 2.75% Ti 0.596% SR399 2.75% Ti 2.75% Ti 0.596%SR399 1.3% SR399 95.6% (UV 50 s) 0.03% Irg184 (UV 50 s) 0.03% Irg1840.065% Irg184 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.245% Ti 2.2% Si 2.2% Si 0.58% Si (UV 50s) 117 2.75% Ti 1.3% SR399 2.75% Ti 2.75% Ti 0.596% SR399 1.3% SR39995.4% (UV 50 s) 0.065% Irg184 (UV 50 s) 0.03% Irg184 0.065% Irg1840.245% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.245% Ti 0.58% Si 2.2% Si 0.58% Si (UV 50.5) 118 1.5%Ti 0.596% SR399 2.75% Ti 1.5% Ti 1.3% SR399 0.596% SR399 96.7% 0.03%Irg184 0.065% Irg184 0.03% Irg184 0.3% Ti 0.245% Ti 0.3% Ti 2.2% Si0.58% Si 2.2% Si 119 1.5% Ti 0.596% SR399 2.75% Ti 1.5% Ti 1.4% SR3990.596% SR399 97.2% 0.03% Irg184 0.062% Irg184 0.03% Irg184 0.3% Ti 0.3%Ti 0.3% Ti 2 2% Si 2.2% Si 120 1.5% Ti 0.8% SR399 4% Ti 0.596% SR3991.4% SR399 97.6% (UV 50 s) 0.035% Irg184 (UV 50 s) 0.03% Irg184 0.062%Irg184 0.17% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti (UV 50 s) 2.2% Si (UV 50 s) 121 1.5% Ti1% SR399 4% Ti 0.596% SR399 1.4% SR399 97.2% (UV 50 s) 0.05% Irg184 (UV50 s) 0.03% Irg184 0.062% Irg184 0.21 % Ti 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti (UV 50 s)2.2% Si (UV 50 s) 122 1.5% Ti 1.4% SR399 4% Ti 0.596% SR399 1.4% SR3990.4% SR399 96.9% 0.062% Irg184 0.03% Irg184 0.062% Irg184 0.017% Irg1840.3% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.085% Ti 2.2% Si (UV 70 s) 123 1.5% Ti 0.4%SR399 4% Ti 0.596% SR399 1.4% SR399 98.2% 0.017% Irg184 0.03% Irg1840.062% Irg184 0.085% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti 2.2% Si (UV 70 s) 124 2% Ti 1.4%SR399 4% Ti 0.596% SR399 0.596% SR399 1.4% SR399 96.4% (UV 60 s) 0.062%Irg184 0.03% Irg184 0.03% Irg184 0.062% Irg184 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti0.3% Ti (UV 60.5) 2.2% Si 2.2% Si 125 2% Ti 1% SR399 4% Ti 0.596% SR3990.596% SR399 1.4% SR399 96.5% (UV 60 s) 0.05% Irg184 0.03% Irg184 0.03%Irg184 0.062% Irg184 0.21% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti (UV 50 s) 2.2% Si2.2% Si 126 2% Ti 0.596% SR399 4% Ti 0.596% SR399 0.596% SR399 1.4%SR399 95.3% 0.03% Irg184 0.03% Irg184 003% Irg184 0.062% Irg184 0.3% Ti0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti 2.2% Si 2.2% Si 2.2% Si (UV 60 s) 127 2% Ti0.596% SR399 4% T 0.596% SR399 0.596% SR399 0.4% SR399 96.1% 0.03%Irg184 0.03% Irg184 0.03% Irg184 0.017% Irg184 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti0.085% Ti 2.2% Si 2.2% Si 2 2% Si (UV 60 s) (UV 60 s) 128 2.75% Ti 0.6%SR399 4% Ti 0.6% SR399 1.3% SR399 1% SR399 0.1% Ti 97.0% RED 0.03%Irg184 0.03% Irg184 0.065% Irg184 0.05% Irg184 0.21% Ti 0.1% PFOTCS 0.3%Ti 0.3% Ti 0.245% Ti EtOH 4.4% Si 4.4% Si 0.58% Si (UV 60 s) 129 2.75%Ti 1.4% SR399 5% T 0.4% SR399 0.6% SR399 1.4% SR399 0.1% Ti 96.9% BLUE0.062% Irg184 0.017% Irg184 0.03% Irg184 0.062% Irg184 0.1% PFOTCS 0.31%Ti 0.085% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.31% Ti ETOH 4.4% Si 130 1.75% Ti 0.9% SR399 4% Ti0.6% SR399 0.9% SR399 0.01% PFOA 96.6% BLUE (UV 60 s) 0.042% Irg184 (UV60 s) 0.03% Irg184 0.042% Irg184 0.01% PFOMA 0.19% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.19% Ti0.005% PFOTCS (UV 60 s) 3.3% Si (UV 60 s) 0.1% Ti (UV 60 s) 0.007% TBPO4% MP 95.9% IPA (UV 50 s) 131 1.75% Ti 0.6% SR399 4% Ti 0.6% SR399 0.9%SR399 0.01% PFOA 96.9% YELLOW-RED (UV60 s) 0.3% Irg164 (UV 60 s) 0.03%Irg184 0.042% Irg184 0.01% PPOMA 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.19% Ti 0.005% PFOTCS3 3% Si 3.3% Si (UV 60 s) 0.1% Ti (UV 60 s) (UV 60 s) 0.007% TBPO 4% MP95.9% IPA 132 1.75% Ti 0.9% SR399 1.75% Ti 1.75% Ti 0.6% SR399 0.9%SR399 96.1% 0.42% Irg184 (UV 6o s) (UV 60 s) 0.03% Irg184 0.042% Irg1840.19% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.19% Ti 3.3% Si (UV 60 s) (UV 30 s) 133 1.75% Ti 0.9%SR399 1.75% Ti 1.75% Ti 0.6% SR399 0.9% SR399 96.5% 0.042% Irg184 (UV 60s) (UV 60 s) 0.03% Irg184 0.042% Irg184 0.19% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.19% Ti 3.3%Si (UV 60 s) (UV 30 s) 134 1.75% Ti 1.4% SR399 5% Ti 0.6% SR399 1.4%SR399 97.6% 0.3% Ti 0.03% Irg184 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti (UV 60 s) 3 3% Si 1351.75% Ti 1.4% SR399 5% Ti 0.6% SR399 0.9% SR399 96.8% 0.3% Ti 0.03%Irg184 0.042% Irg184 0.3% Ti 0.19% Ti 3.3% Si (UV 60 s) 136 1.15% Ti—Bu1.15% Ti—Bu 3.85% Ti—Bu 1.5% SR399 95.4% 0.84% Ti 0.84% Ti 0.25% SR3990.1% Irg184 0.55% SR399 0.55% SR399 0.017% Irg184 50 ppmBYK300 0.068%Irg184 0.068% Irg184 8 ppmBYK300 50 ppmPFOMA 18.5 ppmBYK300 18.5ppmBYK300 8 ppmPFOMA 18.5 ppmPFOMA 18.5 ppmPFOMA 137 1.15% Ti—Bu 2.5% Si1.15% Ti—Bu 3.85% Ti—Bu 1.5% SR399 0.085% Ti—Bu 96.4% RED-GREEN 0.84% Ti(UV 60 s) 0.84% Ti 0.25% SR399 0.1% IrglB4 0.4% SR399 0.55% SR399 0.55%SR399 0.017% Irg184 50 ppmBYK300 0.017% Irg184 0.068% Irg184 0.068%Irg184 8 ppmBYK300 50 ppmPFOMA 18.5 ppmBYK300 18.5 ppmBYK300 8 ppmPROMA18.5 ppmPFOMA 18.5 ppmPFOMA

[0630] In Table 4, three coating layers are formed on the plastic lens.For all of the compositions listed in Table 4, the remainder of thecomposition is made up of 1-methoxy-2-propanol. For example, a listingof 5% Ti, should be understood to mean 5% by weight of Ti and 95% byweight of 1-methoxy-2-propanol.

[0631] The application of the compositions to the plastic lens, and themeasurement of the transmittance was performed in substantially the samemanner as recited above for Table 1. Curing times are 60 seconds, unlessotherwise noted. TABLE 4 Visible Light Transmittance Ex. # Layer 1 Layer2 Layer 3 % Color 138 2% Ti 0.186% Al 26.8% HC-8 94.0% 0.02% NNDMEA (UV40 s) 73.2% IPA (UV 30 s) 139 1.54% Ti 0.24% Ti 0.3% Al 93.0% 77 ppmAA0.048% Al (UV 50 s) 42.3% MP 1.94% SR368 56.2% IPA 1.47% TMSPMA 96.3% MP(UV 180 s) 140 2.99% Ti 2.99% Ti 2% SR399 97.3% 0.28% Irg184 0.28%Irg184 0.349% Ti (UV 20 s) (UV 20 s) (UV 30 s) 141 0.3% Al 2.99% Ti 2%SR399 95.5% (UV 20 s) 0.28% Irg184 0.5% SR306 (UV 40 s) 0.349% Ti (UV100 s) 142 2.97% Ti 2.99% Ti 2% SR399 93.6% 0.29% Irg184 0.28% Irg1840.5% SR306 1% SR368 0.349% Ti (UV 30 s) 143 1.69% Ti 2.99% Ti 2% SR39994.5% 0.168% Irg184 0.28% Irg184 0.5% SR306 0.58% SR368 0.349% Ti 1443.25% Ti 3.25% Ti 2% SR399 93.0% GREENISH 0.1% Irg184 0.1% Irg184 0.4%Ti BLUE (UV 30 s, 350 rpm) (UV 30 + 60 s) 0.04% Irg184 0.1% BYK300 (UV60 s) 145 0.5% Ti 2.46% Ti 0.53% Ti 97.3% 0.25% Irg184 0.5% Al 0.197%Irg184 0.1% Irg184 4.67% SR399 0.157% SR313 0.85% SR313 44.3% AC 1.38%SR399 146 3% Ti 3% HEMA 0.06% Irg184 97.4% (UV 60 s) 0.25% Ti 0.32% Ti0.33% TEA 2% SR399 0.02% Eiosin (UV 60 s) (UV 60 s) 147 3% HEMA 0.25% Ti3% Ti 0.06% Irg184 97.5% 0.33% TEA (UV 60 s) 0.32% Ti 0.02% Eiosin 2%SR399 (UV 60 s) (UV 60 s) 148 3% Ti 2.5% HEMA 0.06% Irg184 97.4% (UV 60s) 0.25% T770 0.32% Ti 0.5% Ti 2% SR399 (UV 60 s) 149 3% Ti 2.5% HEMA0.06% Irg184 97.8% (UV 60 s) 0.25% T770 0.32% Ti 0.5% Ti 2% SR399 (UV 60s) 150 3% Ti 0.037% PFOFCS 2% SR399 94.4% 0.1% CD1012 0.32% Ti 0.21%Irg184 0.06% Irg184 1.35% ECHMCHC (UV 60 s) 0.6% HEMA 0.246% Ti 1% SR399151 1.3% HEMA 0.05% BDKK 0.164% HEMA 98.5% 0.96% SR640 0.57% SR399 0.05%PFOTCS 3.576% Ti—Bu 0.43% HEMA 97.86% IPA 5.66% Si 1.93% MP 152 3.5%Ti—Bu 0.087% BDKK 0.035% BDKK 97.0% 0.095% Ti—Bu 0.4% SR399 1% SR3990.005% PFOTCS 2.9% Si 0.005% FC430 0.005% BYK300 153 3.5% Ti—Bu 0.043%BDKK 0.174% BDKK 94.0% BLUE 0.047% Ti—Bu 0.173% Ti—Bu 0.5% SR399 2%SR399 1.45% Si 154 5% Ti—Bu/5% Ti—Bu 0.033% BDKK 0.026% BDKK 97.2%0.095% Ti—Bu 0.3% SR399 0.375% SR399 0.0037% PFOTCS 2.5% Si 0.0037%FC430 0.0037% BYK300 155 1.15% Ti—Bu 1.15% Ti—Bu 1.5% SR399 95.7% YELLOW0.84% Ti 0.84% Ti 0.1% Irg184 0.55% SR399 0.55% SR399 50 ppmBYK3000.068% Irg184 0.068% Irg184 50 ppmPFOMA 18.5 ppmBYK300 18.5 ppmBYK30018.5 ppmPFOMA 18.5 ppmPFOMA

[0632] In Table 5, Layer 1 refers to the first antireflective coatinglayer, Layer 2 refers to an intermediate silicon layer, and Layer 3refers to the second antireflective coating layer. Solutions of each ofthe components were prepared and used to form the antireflectivecoatings. For all of the compositions listed in Table 5, the remainderof the composition is made up of 1-methoxy-2-propanol. For example, alisting of 5% Ti, should be understood to mean 5% by weight of Ti and95% by weight of 1-methoxy-2-propanol.

[0633] The plastic eyeglass lens was coated using different coatingcompositions. The “Layer 1” composition was added to a surface of theeyeglass lens and the eyeglass lens was rotated on a lens spin-coatingapparatus. After the Layer 1 composition was spread onto the eyeglasslens surface the solvent was allowed to substantially evaporate and theremaining composition was subjected to ultraviolet light from thegermicidal lamp from the previously described coating unit for about 60seconds, unless otherwise noted. Layer 2 (the silicon layer) was addedto the eyeglass lens after the Layer 1 composition was cured. Curingtime of the second layer is 60 seconds, unless otherwise noted. TheLayer 2 composition was spread onto the eyeglass lens surface and theeyeglass lens was spun until the solvent was substantially evaporated.The Layer 3 composition was added to the eyeglass lens after the Layer 2composition was dried. The eyeglass lens was spun on a lens spin-coatingapparatus until the solvent was substantially evaporated. Layer 3 wasthen cured by the application of ultraviolet light from the germicidallamp from the previously described coating unit. Curing time for thethird layer is 60 seconds, unless otherwise noted. From one to fouradditional layers were added to the top of the antireflective stack. The% transmittance refers to the amount of light transmitted through thelens after the final layer was cured. The transmittance was measured asdescribed above. TABLE 5 Visible Light Transmittance Ex. # Layer 1 Layer2 Layer 3 Layer 4 Layer 5 Layer 6 Layer 7 % Color 156 1.5% Ti 1.5% Si0.257% Ti HR200 96.0% BROWN 454 ppmAA 98.5% IPA 0.257% GPTMS GOLD 300ppmAS (UV 40 s) 2.85% HC-8 92.8% MP 0.5% Al 5.6% IPA 0.26% TMSPMA (UV 40s) (UV 120 s) 157 1.5% Si 1.5% Si 0.46% Ti HR200 94.4% 76 ppmM 98.5% IPA0.75% GPTMS 28.4% MP (UV 40 s) 0.83% TMSPMA 70.1% IPA 3.4% HC-8 (UV 60s) 0.9% Al (UV 120 s) 158 3% Ti 1.5% Si 0.055% Irg184 0.055% Irg18497.4% (UV 70 s) 0.22% Ti 0.22% Ti 1% SR399 1% SR399 0.0125% PFOMA0.0125% PFOMA (UV 70 s) (UV 60 s) 159 3% Ti 1.5% Si 0.025% Irg184 1.5%Si 0.025% Irg184 94.5% YELLOW (UV 60 s) (UV 20 s) 0.14% Ti 0.14% Ti0.96% SR399 0.96% SR399 (UV 20 s) (UV 60 s) 160 3% Ti 1.5% Si 1.5% Si0.08% Irg184 97.4 RED (UV 60 s) 0.32% Ti 1.44% SR399 0.005% PFOTCS (UV60 s) 161 3% Ti 1.5% Si 1.5% Si 0.08% Irg184 97.3 (UV 60 s) (UV 60 s)0.32% Ti 1.44% SR399 0.005% PFOTCS (UV 60 s) 162 3% Ti 1.5% Si 1.5% Si0.11% Irg184 93 (UV 60 s) (UV 60 s) 0.44% Ti 2% SR399 0.005% PFOTCS (UV60 s) 163 3% Ti 1.5% Si 1.5% Si 0.055% Irg184 95.3% 0.22% Ti 1% SR3990.0125% PFOTCS 164 3% Ti 1.5% Si 1.5% Si 0.055% Irg184 0.055% Irg18494.6% 0.22% Ti 0.22% Ti 1% SR399 1% SR399 0.0125% PFOTCS 0.0125% PFOTCS165 3% Ti 2.4% Si 2.4% Si 0.08% Irg184 97.6% 0.53% SR640 0.97% SR6400.97% SR640 0.32% Ti 70 ppmFC430 70 ppmFC430 70 ppmFC430 1.44% SR399 (UV60 s) 0.005% PFOTCS 166 3% Ti 5% Si 0.33% SR399 0.527% SR399 97.3% 0.07%Ti 0.23% Ti 0.018% Irg184 0.029% Irg184 0.07% PFOMA 0.066% PFOMA 1673.85% Ti—Bu 1% SR399 1% SR399 1.15% Ti—Bu 1.739% SR399 96.7% 0.25% SR3992.4% Si 2.4% Si 0.84% Ti 0.12% Irg184 0.017% Irg184 0.55% SR399 60ppmBYK300 8 ppmBYK300 0.068% Irg184 60 ppmPFOMA 8 ppmPFOMA 18.5ppmBYK300 18.5 ppmPFOMA (UB 60 s)

[0634] In Table 6, Layer 1 refers to the first antireflective coatinglayer, Layer 2 refers to an intermediate silicon layer, and Layer 3refers to the second antireflective coating layer. Solutions of each ofthe components were prepared and used to form the antireflectivecoatings. For all of the compositions listed in Table 6, the remainderof the composition is made up of 1-methoxy-2-propanol. For example, alisting of 5% Ti, should be understood to mean 5% by weight of Ti and95% by weight of 1-methoxy-2-propanol.

[0635] The plastic eyeglass lens was coated using different coatingcompositions. The “Layer 1” composition was added to a surface of theeyeglass lens and the eyeglass lens was rotated on a lens spin-coatingapparatus. The first coating layer was formed by a two step procedure.In the first step, a solution of Ti was added to the plastic lens andallowed to dry. In the second step, an additional solution of Ti wasadded to the plastic lens and allowed to dry. The % of Ti used for thefirst and second steps are respectively listed in the “Layer 1” column.The Layer 1 composition was allowed to substantially evaporate and theremaining composition was subjected to ultraviolet light from thegermicidal lamp from the previously described coating unit for about 60seconds, unless otherwise noted. Layer 2 (the silicon layer) was addedto the eyeglass lens after the Layer 1 composition was cured. The Layer2 composition was spread onto the eyeglass lens surface and the eyeglasslens was spun until the solvent was substantially evaporated. The Layer3 composition was added to the eyeglass lens after the Layer 2composition was dried. The eyeglass lens was spun on a lens spin-coatingapparatus until the solvent was substantially evaporated. Layer 3 wasthen cured by the application of ultraviolet light from the germicidallamp from the previously described coating unit. Curing time was 60seconds, unless otherwise noted. From one to four additional layers wereadded to the top of the antireflective stack. The % transmittance refersto the amount of light transmitted through the lens after the finallayer was cured. The transmittance was measured as described above.TABLE 6 Visible Light Trans- mittance Ex. # Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 %Color 168 1.5% Ti/3% Ti 3% Si 0.08% Irg184 97.6% BLUE (UV 40 s/40 s)0.32% Ti 1.45% SR399 (UV 60 s) 169 3% Ti/1.5% Ti 3% Si 0.08% Irg18498.3% PUR- (UV 40 s/40 s) 0.32% Ti PLE 1.45% SR399 (UV 60 s) 170 5%Ti/3% Ti 3% Si 0.08% Irg184 92.2% (UV 40 s/40 s) 0.32% Ti 1.45% SR399(UV 90 s) 171 3% Ti/5% Ti 3% Si 0.08% Irg184 94.1% (UV 40 s/40 s) 0.32%Ti 1.45% SR399 (UV 90 s) 172 1.5% Ti/ 3% Si 0.08% Irg184 97.6% 1.5% Ti0.32% Ti (UV 60 s/60 s) 1.45% SR399 173 3% Ti/3% Ti 3% Si 0.08% Irg18497.6% (UV 60 s/60 s) (UV 30 s) 0.32% Ti 1.45% SR399

[0636] In Table 7, Layer 1 refers to the first antireflective coatinglayer, Layer 2 refers to an immediate silicon layer, and Layer 3 refersto the second antireflective coating layer. Solutions of each of thecomponents were prepared and used to form the antireflective coatings.For all of the compositions listed in Table 7, the remainder of thecomposition is made up of 1-methoxy-2-propanol. For example, a listingof 5% Ti, should be understood to mean 5% by weight of Ti and 95% byweight of 1-methoxy-2-propanol.

[0637] The application of the compositions to the plastic lens, and themeasurement of the transmittance was performed in substantially the samemanner as recited above for Table 1. Curing time was 60 seconds, unlessotherwise noted. TABLE 7 Visible Light Ex. # Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3Transmittance % Color 174 3% Ti 6% Si 0.8% Ti 96.0% 0.8% GPTMS 0.8%TMSPMA 175 52% Ti 5% Si 0.75% Ti 96.6% 0.97% HC8558 0.75% HC8558 1763.75% Ti 3% Si 0.257% Ti 98.3% RED 0.019% AA 97% IPA 0.257% GPTMS 71% MP2.85% HC-8 25.25% IPA 0.5% Al 177 3.75% Ti 1.5% Si 0.257% Ti 95.6% RED0.019% AA 98.5% IPA 0.257% GPTMS 71% MP 2.85% HC-8 25.25% IPA 0.5% Al178 7.5% Ti 1.5% Si 0.257% Ti 96.0% RED 0.038 AA 98.5% IPA 0.257% GPTMS45.3% MP 2.85% HC-8 47.2% IPA 0.5% Al 179 3% Ti 5% Si 0.16% Ti 98.1% 1%SR399 50 ppmPFOFCS 180 3% Ti 6.94% Nalco Si 0.16% Ti 95.7% 1% SR399 50ppmPFOFCS 181 3% Ti 6.94% Nalco Si 0.317% Ti 93.0% 2% SR399 0.08% Irg1840.06% PFOFCS 182 3% Ti 3% Si 0.11% Irg184 93.0% BLUE 0.44% Ti 2% SR399183 3% Ti 3% Si 0.05% Irg184 94.3% GOLD 0.02% Ti 0.9% SR399 184 3% Ti 4%Si 0.05% Irg184 96.4% 0.2% Ti 0.9% SR399 185 3% Ti 5% Si 0.05% Irg18497.9% 0.2% Ti 0.9% SR399 186 3% Ti 4% Si 0.079% Irg184 97.0% 0.322% Ti1.45% SR399 187 3% Ti 4% Si 0.079% Irg184 96.8% 0.322% Ti 1.45% SR399188 3% Ti 3% Si 0.079% Irg184 97.3% 0.322% Ti 1.45% SR399 189 3% Ti 3%Si 0.08% Irg184 97.7% 0.32% Ti 1.44% SR399 0.005% PFOA 190 3% Ti 3% Si0.08% Irg184 97.6% 0.32% Ti 1.44% SR399 0.047% PFOMA 191 3% Ti 3% Si0.08% Irg184 97.8% 0.32% Ti 1.44% SR399 0.005% PFOTCS 192 3% Ti 5% Si0.08% Irg184 95.7% 0.32% Ti 1.44% SR399 0.005% PFOTCS 193 1.5% Ti 5% Si0.08% Irg184 94.6% 0.32% Ti 1.45% SR399 194 1.5% Ti 3% Si 0.08% Irg18495.1% 0.32% Ti 1.45% SR399 195 2% Ti 3% Si 0.08% Irg184 95.6% 0.32% Ti1.45% SR399 196 2% Ti 3% Si 0.08% Irg184 96.0% 0.03% BYK300 0.32% Ti1.45% SR399 197 3% Ti 1.5% Si 0.11% Irg184 97.2% 0.44% Ti 2% SR3990.005% PFOMA 198 3% Ti 1.5% Si 0.08% Irg184 95.0% 0.32% Ti 1.44% SR3990.005% PFOMA 199 3% Ti 1.5% Si 0.11% Irg184 96.7% 0.44% Ti 2% SR3990.005% PFOMA 200 3% Ti 3% Si 0.08% Irg184 97.5% 0.53% SR640 0.32% Ti1.44% SR399 0.005% PFOTCS 201 3% Ti 3% Si 0.08% Irg184 97.1% 0.32% Ti1.44% SR399 0.005% PFOTCS 202 3% Ti 3% Si 0.08% Irg184 97.8% 0.5% SR6400.32% Ti 1.44% SR399 0.005% PFOTCS 203 3% Ti 3% Si 0.08% Irg184 97.8%0.53% SR640 0.53% SR640 0.32% Ti 70 ppmFC430 70 ppmFC430 1.44% SR3990.005% PFOTCS 204 3% Ti 5% Si 1.44% SR399 97.4% 0.32% Ti 0.08% Irg1840.005% PFOTCS 205 3.85% Ti—Bu 5% Si 1.56% Ti—Bu 95.8% YELLOW 0.25% SR3990.5% SR399 0.017% Irg184 0.033% Irg184 8 ppmBYK300 16 ppmBYK300 8ppmPFOMA 16 ppmPFOMA

[0638] Table 8 refers to a series of experiments using an in-mold curingprocess. In the in-mold process the layers are built in the oppositemanner than they are built upon the plastic lens. Layer 1, thus, refersto the second antireflective coating layer, Layer 2 refers to the firstantireflective coating layer, and Layer 3 refers to an adhesion layer.Solutions of each of the components were prepared and used to form theantireflective coatings. For all of the compositions listed in Table 8,the remainder of the composition is made up of 1-methoxy-2-propanol. Forexample, a listing of 5% Ti, should be understood to mean 5% by weightof Ti and 95% by weight of 1-methoxy-2-propanol.

[0639] A casting face of a mold was coated using the different coatingcompositions. The “Layer 1” composition was added to a surface of themold and the mold was rotated on a lens spin-coating apparatus. TheLayer 1 composition was allowed to substantially evaporate and theremaining composition was subjected to ultraviolet light from thegermicidal lamp from the previously described coating unit for about 60seconds, unless otherwise noted. Layer 2 was added to the eyeglass lensafter the Layer 1 composition was cured. The Layer 2 composition wasspread onto the eyeglass lens surface and the eyeglass lens was spununtil the solvent was substantially evaporated. Layer 2 was then curedby the application of ultraviolet light from the germicidal lamp fromthe previously described coating unit. Curing time was 60 seconds,unless otherwise noted. Layer 3 was then added to the antireflectivestack. Layer 3 was added to the mold, spun dried and cured. Curing timewas 60 seconds, unless otherwise noted.

[0640] A pair of coated molds was then used to in a mold assembly toform a plastic lens. After the lens was formed, the lens was removedfrom mold assembly and the % transmittance of the plastic lens measured.The transmittance was measured as described above. TABLE 8 Visible LightEx. # Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Transmittance % Color 206 1% SR399 92.5%0.059% Irg184 0.007% PFOMA 207 1% SR399 92.5% 0.059% Irg184 0.007% PFOMA0.0062% Q4DC 208 1% SR399 1.44% SR399 3% Ti 97.0% GOLD 0.059% Irg1840.08% Irg184 0.007% PFOMA 0.32% Ti 0.0062% Q4DC 0.005% PFOTCS 209 2.58%SR399 4% Ti—Bu 2.58% SR399 94.5% 0.147% Irg184 1.2% HEMA 0.147% Irg1840.32% Ti—Bu 14% IPA 0.32% Ti—Bu (UV 60 s) (UV 60 s) (UV 60 s) 210 2.2%SR399 2.2% SR399 2.2% SR399 97.7% BLUISH RED 0.126% Irg184 0.126% Irg1840.126% Irg184 0.003% PFOMA 0.003% PFOMA 0.003% PFOMA 211 2.2% SR399 4%Ti—Bu 97.7% 0.126% Irg184 1.2% HEMA 0.0031% PFOMA 14% IPA 212 2.2% SR3994% Ti—Bu 97.1% 0.14% D1173 1.2% HEMA 14% IPA 213 2.2% SR399 2.022% Ti—Bu1% Si >95.5 0.14% D1173 2.026% HEMA 2.2% SR399 (UV 70 s) (UV 70 s)0.165% Ti—Bu 0.14% D1173 (UV 70 s) 214 2.06% SR399 3.62% Ti—Bu 2.06%SR399 97.0% RED GOLD 0.136% D1173 1.5% HEMA 0.136% D1173 0.95% HEMA (UV90 s) 0.95% HEMA (UV 90 s) (UV 90 s) 215 2% SR399 3.62% Ti—Bu 2.12%SR399 97.0% 0.145% D1173 1.5% HEMA 0.14% D1173 (UV 90 s) (UV 90 s) 0.5%HEMA (UV 90 s) 216 2.2% SR399 3.6% Ti—Bu 2.2% SR399 94.7% 0.117% BDK1.5% HEMA 0.117% BDK (UV 90 s) 217 2.66% SR399 3.6% Ti—Bu 2.66% SR39995.0% 0.114% BDK 1.5% HEMA 0.114% BDK (UV 90 s) 218 2.886% SR399 3.6%Ti—Bu 2.886% SR399 94.5% 0.124% BDK 1.5% HEMA 0.124% BDK 219 2.2% SR3993.46% Ti—Bu 2.2% SR399 97.7% 0.19% BDK (UV 60 s) 0.19% BDK (UV 60 s) (UV60 s) 220 2.2% SR399 3.7% Ti—Bu 2.2% SR399 97.6% 0.19% BDK 0.005% PFOMA0.19% BDK (UV 60 s) 0.003% BDK (UV 60 s) 221 2.2% SR399 3.7% Ti—Bu 2.2%SR399 98.0% 0.19% BDK 0.0247% BDK 0.19% BDK 0.028% PFOTCS 0.091% HEMA222 2.2% SR399 3.7% Ti—Bu 2.2% SR399 98.2% 0.19% BDK 0.0123% BDK 0.19%BDK (UV 60 s) 0.014% PFOTCS 0.045% HEMA 223 0.028% BDK 1.3% HEMA 0.19%BDK 95.2% 0.32% SR399 0.96% SR640 2.2% SR399 0.24% HEMA 3.576% Ti—Bu0.01% HEMA 3.2% Si 0.03% PFOTCS 5.9% IPA 91.7% MP 224 1.5% SR399 3.849%Ti 1.04% Ti 94.7% 0.1% Irg184 0.25% SR399 0.5% SR399 0.005% BYK3000.0016% Irg184 0.033% Irg184 0.005% PFOMA 8 ppmBYK300 16 ppmBYK300 8ppmPFOMA 16 ppmPFOMA

[0641] In Table 9, multiple coating layers are formed on the castingsurface of the molds prior to use. For all of the compositions listed inTable 9, the remainder of the composition is made up of1-methoxy-2-propanol. For example, a listing of 5% Ti, should beunderstood to mean 5% by weight of Ti and 95% by weight of1-methoxy-2-propanol.

[0642] The application of the compositions to the lenses, and themeasurement of the transmitance was performed in substantially the samemanner as recited above for Table 8. Curing times were 60 seconds,unless otherwise noted. TABLE 9 Visible Light Trans- Layer mittance Ex.# Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4 Layer 5 Layer 6 7 % Color 225 0.5%SR399 1.44% SR399 3% Ti HC-8 96.7% 0.02% Irg184 0.32% Ti 0.02% PFOMA0.08% Irg184 0.005% PFOTCS 226 0.05% BDKK 1.3% HEMA 0.19% BDKK 0.164%HEMA 94.7% 0.57% SR399 0.96% SR640 2.2% SR399 0.05% PFOTCS 0.43% HEMA3.576% Ti—Buu 0.01% HEMA 97.86% IPA 5.66% Si 0.03% PFOTCS 1.93% MP 5.9%IPA 91.7% MP 227 0.01% FC725 0.0134% Irg184 0.6% SR399 0.9% SR399 4% Ti0.01% FC725 97.7% 40% IPA 0.033% D1173 0.03% Irg184 0.04% Irg184 40% IPA0.015% FC171 0.527% SR399 0.3% Ti 0.19% Ti 0.015% FC171 50% AC 0.178%SR423 3.3% Si (UV 60 s) 50% AC 0.088% SR9003 0.008% CD540 0.06% ppmTPB(UV 60 s) 228 0.01% FC725 0.0134% Irg184 1.4% SR399 4% Ti 0.6% SR3990.0134% Irg184 97.5% 0.015% FC171 0.033% D1173 0.1% Irg184 0.04% TX-1000.03% Irg184 0.033% D1173 50% IPA 0.527% SR399 0.3% Ti 0.3% Ti 0.527%SR399 50% AC 0.178% SR423 3.3% Si 0.178% SR423 0.088% SR9003 0.088%SR9003 0.008% CD540 0.008% CD540 0.06 ppmTPB 0.06 ppmTPB 229 0.01% FC7251% SR399 0.9% SR399 4% Ti 0.9% SR399 1% SR399 98.0% 50% IPA 0.5% SR3680.042% Irg184 0.04% TX-100 0.042% Irg184 0.5% SR368 0.015% FC171 0.01%Irg184 0.19% Ti 0.19% Ti 0.01% Irg184 50% AC 0.05% TPB 0.05% TPB 2301.5% SR399 1.04% Ti 3.849% Ti 1.5% SR399 97.5% 0.1% Irg184 0.5% SR3990.25% SR399 0.1% Irg184 0.005% BYK300 0.033% Irg184 0.0016% Irg1840.005% BYK300 0.005% PFOMA 16 ppmBYK300 8 ppmBYK300 0.005% PFOMA 16ppmPFOMA 8 ppmPFOMA 231 1.5% SR399 2.5% Si/2.5% Si 1.04% Ti 1.04% Ti3.849% Ti 1.04% Ti 95.5% 0.1% Irg184 0.5% SR399 0.5% SR399 0.25% SR3990.5% SR399 0.005% BYK300 0.033% Irg184 0.033% Irg184 0.0016% Irg1840.033% Irg184 0.005% PFOMA 16 ppmBYK300 16 ppmBYK300 8 ppmBYK300 16ppmBYK300 16 ppmPFOMA 16 ppmPFOMA 8 ppmPFOMA 16 ppmPFOMA 232 1.5% SR3991.04% Ti 3.849% Ti 0.3% Ti 2.5% Si 1.04% Ti 97.0% 0.1% Irg184 0.5% SR3990.25% SR399 1.4% SR399 0.5% SR399 0.005% BYK300 0.033% Irg184 0.0016%Irg184 0.06% Irg184 0.033% Irg184 0.005% PFOMA 16 ppmBYK300 8 ppmBYK30016 ppmBYK300 16 ppmPFOMA 8 ppmPFOMA 16 ppmPFOMA

[0643] Further modifications and alternative embodiments of variousaspects of the invention will be apparent to those skilled in the art inview of this description. Accordingly, this description is to beconstrued as illustrative only and is for the purpose of teaching thoseskilled in the art the general manner of carrying out the invention. Itis to be understood that the forms of the invention shown and describedherein are to be taken as the presently preferred embodiments. Elementsand materials may be substituted for those illustrated and describedherein, parts and processes may be reversed, and certain features of theinvention may be utilized independently, all as would be apparent to oneskilled in the art after having the benefit of this description of theinvention. Changes may be made in the elements described herein withoutdeparting from the spirit and scope of the invention as described in thefollowing claims.

What is claimed is:
 1. An apparatus for preparing an eyeglass lens,comprising: a first lens curing unit comprising a first activating lightsource, wherein the first lens curing unit is configured to produceactivating light directed toward a mold assembly during use; a secondlens curing unit comprising a second activating light source and heatingsystem, wherein the activating light source is configured to directactivating light toward a mold assembly during use; and wherein the heatsystem is configured to heat the interior of the second lens curingunit; and a conveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly fromthe first lens curing unit into and through the second lens curing unit;wherein the apparatus is configured such that a substantially cleareyeglass lens is formed in a time period of less than 1 hour.
 2. Theapparatus of claim 1, wherein the first activating light source is anultraviolet light source.
 3. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein thesecond activating light source is an ultraviolet light.
 4. The apparatusof claim 1, wherein the first and second activating light sources areultraviolet lights.
 5. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the first andsecond activating light sources have substantially the same spectraloutput.
 6. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the first and secondactivating light sources have a peak light intensity at a range of about385 nm to about 490 nm.
 7. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the firstactivating light source comprises a first set of lamps and a second setof lamps, wherein the first and second set of lamps are positioned onopposite sides of the first curing unit.
 8. The apparatus of claim Iwherein the first activating light source is configured to generatepulses of activating light.
 9. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein thesecond activating light source is configured to generate pulses ofactivating light.
 10. The apparatus of claim 1 wherein the first andsecond activating light sources are configured to generate pulses ofactivating light.
 11. The apparatus of claim 1, further comprising afilter disposed directly adjacent to the first activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the first activating light source.
 12. Theapparatus of claim 1, further comprising a filter disposed directlyadjacent to the second activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the second activating light source.
 13. The apparatus of claim 1,further comprising a first filter disposed directly adjacent to thefirst activating light source, the filter being configured to manipulatean intensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source, and further comprising a second filter disposed directlyadjacent to the second activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the second activating light source.
 14. The apparatus of claim 11,wherein the filter comprises a plate defining an aperture, wherein theplate is formed from a material that is opaque to the activating light.15. The apparatus of claim 12, wherein the filter comprises a platedefining an aperture, wherein the plate is formed from a material thatis opaque to the activating light.
 16. The apparatus of claim 13,wherein the first and second filters comprise plates defining apertures,wherein the plates are formed from a material that is opaque to theactivating light.
 17. The apparatus of claim 1, further comprising anair distributor positioned within the second curing unit, the airdistributor being configured to circulate air within the second curingunit during use.
 18. The apparatus of claim 1, further comprising ananneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system,wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit.
 19. The apparatus of claim 18, wherein theanneal unit heating system is configured to heat the interior of theanneal unit to a temperature of up to about 250° F.
 20. The apparatus ofclaim 18, wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unitconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly through theanneal unit.
 21. The apparatus of claim 1, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to substantially simultaneouslycontrol operation of the first curing unit and the second curing unitduring use.
 22. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the first activatinglight source comprises a first set of lamps and a second set of lamps,and further comprising a programmable controller configured toindividually control the first and second sets of lamps.
 23. Theapparatus of claim 1, further comprising a programmable controllerconfigured to control operation of the first curing unit as a functionof the eyeglass lens prescription.
 24. The apparatus of claim 1, whereinthe first activating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp, andwherein the first activating light source further comprises a flasherballast system coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 25. The apparatus ofclaim 1, wherein the second activating light source comprises afluorescent lamp, and wherein the second activating light source furthercomprises a flasher ballast system coupled to the fluorescent lamp. 26.The apparatus of claim 1, wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises a first fluorescent lamp, and wherein the first activatinglight source further comprises a first flasher ballast system coupled tothe first fluorescent lamp, and wherein the second activating lightsource comprises a second fluorescent lamp, and wherein the secondactivating light source further comprises a second flasher ballastsystem coupled to the second fluorescent lamp.
 27. The apparatus ofclaim 24, wherein the flasher ballast system comprises an instant startballast and a transformer.
 28. The apparatus of claim 25, wherein theflasher ballast system comprises an instant start ballast and atransformer.
 29. The apparatus of claim 26, wherein the first flasherballast system comprises an instant start ballast and a transformer, andwherein the second flasher ballast system comprises an instant startballast and a transformer.
 30. The apparatus of claim 1, wherein thefirst activating light source comprises two or more lamps, and whereinthe lamps are independently operable.
 31. The apparatus of claim 1,wherein the conveyor system comprises a continuous flexible memberextending from the first curing unit through the second curing unit,wherein the flexible member is configured to interact with a moldassembly to convey the mold assembly through the first curing unit, tothe second curing unit, and through the second curing unit.
 32. Theapparatus of claim 1, wherein the conveyor system comprises two discreteconveyors, wherein the first conveyor is configured to convey the moldassembly from the first curing unit to the second curing unit, andwherein the second conveyor is configured to convey the mold assembliesthrough the second curing unit.
 33. The apparatus of claim 1, whereinthe conveyor system comprises a flexible member configured to interactwith a mold assembly, and wherein the flexible member is coupled to amotor configured to move the flexible member through the conveyorsystem.
 34. An apparatus for preparing an eyeglass lens, comprising: afirst lens curing unit comprising a first activating light source,wherein the first lens curing unit is configured to produce activatinglight directed toward a mold assembly during use; a second lens curingunit comprising a second activating light source and heating system,wherein the activating light source is configured to direct activatinglight toward a mold assembly during use; and wherein the heat system isconfigured to heat the interior of the second lens curing unit; ananneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system,wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit; and a conveyor system configured to conveythe mold assembly from the first lens curing unit into and through thesecond lens curing unit; wherein the apparatus is configured such that asubstantially clear eyeglass lens is formed in a time period of lessthan 1 hour.
 35. An apparatus for dispensing a heated polymerizable lensforming composition comprising: a body, the body being configured tohold the lens forming composition, the body comprising an opening forreceiving a fluid container and an outlet; a heating system positionedwithin the body for heating the lens forming composition; a valvepositioned proximate the outlet, wherein the valve comprises anelongated member, wherein the elongated member is positionable withinthe outlet in a closed position, wherein the elongated member in theclosed position inhibits flow of the lens forming composition throughthe outlet, and wherein the elongated member is positionable within theoutlet in an open position, wherein the elongated member in an openposition allows flow of the lens forming composition flows through theoutlet during use.
 36. The apparatus of claim 35, wherein the valvecomprises a movable member coupled to the elongated member, wherein theelongated member contacts the movable member at a first position suchthat the elongated member is in the closed position, and wherein theelongated member contacts the movable member at a second position suchthat the elongated member is in the open position, and wherein themovable member is movable such that the position elongated member can bevaried from the first position to the second position.
 37. The apparatusof claim 35, wherein the body further comprises a chamber positionedwithin the body, and wherein the heating system is positioned within thechamber, and wherein the chamber inhibits the lens forming compositionfrom contacting the heating system.
 38. The apparatus of claim 35,wherein the heating system comprises a resistive heating system.
 39. Theapparatus of claim 35, wherein the elongated member extendssubstantially completely through the outlet when the elongated member isin the closed position.
 40. The apparatus of claim 35, wherein theelongated member extends partially into the outlet when the elongatedmember is an open position.
 41. The apparatus of claim 35, furthercomprising a thermostat coupled to the body, the thermostat beingconfigured to measure a temperature of the lens forming compositionwithin the body, and wherein the thermostat is further configured tocontrol the heating system in response to the measured temperature. 42.The apparatus of claim 35, further comprising a thermocouple coupled tothe body, the thermocouple being configured to measure a temperature ofthe lens forming composition and a controller coupled to thethermocouple and the heating system, the controller configured tocontrol the heating system in response to the temperature measured bythe thermocouple.
 43. The apparatus of claim 35 further comprising afluid level monitor disposed within the body, wherein the fluid levelmonitor is configured to measure the level of the lens formingcomposition disposed within the body.
 44. The apparatus of claim 35further comprising a fluid level monitor disposed within the body and acontroller coupled to the fluid level monitor and the heating system,wherein the fluid level monitor is configured to measure the level ofthe lens forming composition disposed within the body, and wherein thecontroller configured to control the heating, system in response to thelevel of fluid measured by the fluid level monitor.
 45. The apparatus ofclaim 35, where in the apparatus is electrically coupleable to acontroller of a lens forming apparatus.
 46. The apparatus of claim 35,further comprising a mold assembly holder coupled to the body, whereinthe mold assembly holder is configured to hold a mold assembly in aposition such that the outlet of the body is positioned proximate aninlet of the mold assembly.
 47. A system for dispensing a heatedpolymerizable lens forming composition comprising: a heating apparatus,the heating apparatus comprising: a heating apparatus body, the heatingapparatus body being configured to hold the lens forming composition,the heating apparatus body comprising an opening for receiving a fluidcontainer and an outlet; a heating system positioned within the heatingapparatus body for heating the lens forming composition; and a valvepositioned proximate the outlet, wherein the valve comprises anelongated member, wherein the elongated member is positionable withinthe outlet in a closed position, wherein the elongated member in theclosed position inhibits flow of the lens forming composition throughthe outlet, and wherein the elongated member is positionable within theoutlet in an open position, wherein the elongated member in an openposition allows flow of the lens forming composition flows through theoutlet during use; and a fluid container configured to hold a lensforming composition, the fluid container comprising: a fluid containerbody and a cap, wherein the cap comprises a fluid control member and anelastic member, wherein the elastic member is coupled to the fluidcontrol member such that the elastic member exerts a force on the fluidcontrol member such that the fluid control member is forced against atop inner surface of the cap; wherein the fluid container is insertableinto the opening of the heating apparatus, and wherein insertion of thefluid container into the opening causes the fluid control member to bemoved to a position such that the lens forming composition flows fromthe fluid container into the heating apparatus body.
 48. The system ofclaim 47, wherein the valve comprises a movable member coupled to theelongated member, wherein the elongated member contacts the movablemember at a first position such that the elongated member is in theclosed position, and wherein the elongated member contacts the movablemember at a second position such that the elongated member is in theopen position, and wherein the movable member is movable such that theposition elongated member can be varied from the first position to thesecond position.
 49. The system of claim 47, wherein the heatingapparatus body further comprises a chamber positioned within the heatingapparatus body, and wherein the heating system is positioned within thechamber, and wherein the chamber inhibits the lens forming compositionfrom contacting the heating system.
 50. The system of claim 47, whereinthe heating system comprises a resistive heating system.
 51. The systemof claim 47, wherein the elongated member extends substantiallycompletely through the outlet when the elongated member is in the closedposition.
 52. The system of claim 47, wherein the elongated memberextends partially into the outlet when the elongated member is an openposition.
 53. The system of claim 47, wherein the heating apparatusfurther comprises a thermostat coupled to the heating apparatus body,the thermostat being configured to measure a temperature of the lensforming composition within the heating apparatus body, and wherein thethermostat is further configured to control the heating system inresponse to the measured temperature.
 54. The system of claim 47,wherein the heating apparatus further comprising a thermocouple coupledto the heating apparatus body, the thermocouple being configured tomeasure a temperature of the lens forming composition, and wherein thesystem further comprises a controller coupled to the thermocouple andthe heating system, the controller configured to control the heatingsystem in response to the temperature measured by the thermocouple. 55.The system of claim 47, wherein the heating apparatus further comprisesa fluid level monitor disposed within the heating apparatus body,wherein the fluid level monitor is configured to measure the level ofthe lens forming composition disposed within the heating apparatus body.56. The system of claim 47, wherein the heating apparatus furthercomprises a fluid level monitor disposed within the heating apparatusbody and a controller coupled to the fluid level monitor and the heatingsystem, wherein the fluid level monitor is configured to measure thelevel of the lens forming composition disposed within the heatingapparatus body, and wherein the controller configured to control theheating system in response to the level of fluid measured by the fluidlevel monitor.
 57. The system of claim 47, wherein the heating apparatusis electrically coupleable to a controller of a lens forming apparatus.58. The system of claim 47, wherein the heating apparatus furthercomprises a mold assembly holder coupled to the heating apparatus body,wherein the mold assembly holder is configured to hold a mold assemblyin a position such that the outlet of the heating apparatus body ispositioned proximate an inlet of the mold assembly.
 59. The system ofclaim 47, wherein the fluid control member is substantially spherical.60. The system of claim 47, wherein the fluid control member issubstantially spherical, and wherein the elastic member is a spring. 61.The system of claim 47, wherein the h eating apparatus body furthercomprises a projection extending toward the opening, and wherein theprojection is positioned such that the projection forces the fluidcontrol member away from the top inner surface of the cap when thebottle is inserted into the opening.
 62. The system of claim 47, whereinthe cap of the fluid container is removable from the fluid containerbody.
 63. The system of claim 47, wherein the cap of the fluid containeris coupled to the fluid container body with an adhesive.
 64. A methodfor making a plastic eyeglass lens, comprising heating a lens formingcomposition in a heating apparatus comprising: a body, the body beingconfigured to hold the lens forming composition, the body comprising anopening for receiving a fluid container and an outlet; a heating systempositioned within the body for heating the lens forming composition; avalve positioned proximate the outlet, wherein the valve comprises anelongated member, wherein the elongated member is positionable withinthe outlet in a closed position, wherein the elongated member in theclosed position inhibits flow of the lens forming composition throughthe outlet, and wherein the elongated member is positionable within theoutlet in an open position, wherein the elongated member in an openposition allows flow of the lens forming composition flows through theoutlet during use. placing the liquid lens forming composition in a moldcavity of a mold assembly, wherein the mold assembly comprises a frontmold member and a back mold member, the lens forming compositioncomprising a monomer composition and a photoinitiator; directingactivating light toward at least one of the mold members to initiatecuring of the lens forming composition; and directing activating lightand heat toward at least one of the mold members subsequent toinitiating curing of the lens to form the eyeglass lens.
 65. The methodof claim 64, wherein the valve comprises a movable member coupled to theelongated member, wherein the elongated member contacts the movablemember at a first position such that the elongated member is in theclosed position, and wherein the elongated member contacts the movablemember at a second position such that the elongated member is in theopen position, and wherein the movable member is movable such that theposition elongated member can be varied from the first position to thesecond position.
 66. The method of claim 64, wherein the body furthercomprises a chamber positioned within the body, and wherein the heatingsystem is positioned within the chamber, and wherein the chamberinhibits the lens forming composition from contacting the heatingsystem.
 67. The method of claim 64, wherein the heating system comprisesa resistive heating system.
 68. The method of claim 64, wherein theelongated member extends substantially completely through the outletwhen the elongated member is in the closed position.
 69. The method ofclaim 64, wherein the elongated member extends partially into the outletwhen the elongated member is an open position.
 70. The method of claim64, further comprising measuring a temperature of the lens formingcomposition with a thermostat coupled to the body of the heatingapparatus, and further comprising operating the heating system inresponse to the temperature measured by the thermostat.
 71. The methodof claim 64, further comprising measuring a temperature of the lensforming composition with a thermocouple coupled to the body of theheating apparatus, wherein the heating apparatus further comprises acontroller coupled to the thermocouple and the heating system, andwherein the controller is configured to control the heating system inresponse to the temperature measured by the thermocouple.
 72. The methodof claim 64 further comprising measuring the level of the lens formingcomposition disposed with the body with a fluid level monitor disposedwithin the body.
 73. The method of claim 64 further comprising measuringthe level of the lens forming composition disposed with the body with afluid level monitor disposed within the body, wherein the heatingapparatus further comprises a controller coupled to the fluid monitorand the heating system, wherein the controller configured to control theheating system in response to the level of fluid measured by the fluidlevel monitor.
 74. The method of claim 64, wherein the apparatus iselectrically coupleable to a controller of a lens forming apparatus. 75.The method of claim 64, further comprising introducing the lens formingcomposition into the body of the heating apparatus.
 76. The method ofclaim 75, wherein the lens forming composition is stored in a fluidcontainer the fluid container comprising a fluid container body and acap, wherein the cap comprises a fluid control member and an elasticmember, wherein the elastic member is coupled to the fluid controlmember such that the elastic member exerts a force on the fluid controlmember such that the fluid control member is forced against a top innersurface of the cap, wherein the introducing the lens forming compositioninto the body comprises inserting the cap of the fluid container intothe opening of the heating apparatus
 77. The method of claim 64, whereinthe heating apparatus further comprises a mold assembly holder coupledto the heating apparatus body, wherein the mold assembly holder isconfigured to hold the mold assembly in a position such that the outletof the heating apparatus body is positioned proximate an inlet of themold assembly, and wherein the method further comprises placing the moldassembly on the mold assembly holder prior to placing the lens formingcomposition in the mold cavity.
 78. The method of claim 64, whereincuring of the lens forming composition is initiated by directingactivating light toward at least one of the mold members for less than100 seconds.
 79. The method of claim 64, wherein treating the lensforming composition with activating light and heat comprises directingactivating light toward at least one of the mold members and applyingheat to both mold members.
 80. The method of claim 64, furthercomprising applying heat to the lens in the absence of activating light,subsequent to directing activating light and heat toward at least one ofthe mold members.
 81. The method of claim 64, further comprising heatingthe lens forming composition prior to placing the lens formingcomposition in a mold cavity.
 82. The method of claim 64, whereindirecting activating light toward at least one of the mold members toinitiate curing is performed in a first lens curing unit, and whereindirecting activating light and heat toward at least one of the moldmembers subsequent to initiating curing is performed in a second lenscuring unit, and wherein the mold assembly holder is configured to fitwithin the first and second curing units.
 83. The method of claim 64,wherein the first lens curing unit is coupled to the second lens curingunit by a conveyor system and further comprising transferring the moldassembly holder from the first curing unit to the second curing unitalong the conveyor system subsequent to initiating curing of the lensforming composition.
 84. An eyeglass lens made by the method, comprisingheating a lens forming composition in a heating apparatus comprising: abody, the body being configured to hold the lens forming composition,the body comprising an opening for receiving a fluid container and anoutlet; a heating system positioned within the body for heating the lensforming composition; a valve positioned proximate the outlet, whereinthe valve comprises an elongated member, wherein the elongated member ispositionable within the outlet in a closed position, wherein theelongated member in the closed position inhibits flow of the lensforming composition through the outlet, and wherein the elongated memberis positionable within the outlet in an open position, wherein theelongated member in an open position allows flow of the lens formingcomposition flows through the outlet during use. placing the liquid lensforming composition in a mold cavity of a mold assembly, wherein themold assembly comprises a front mold member and a back mold member, thelens forming composition comprising a monomer composition and aphotoinitiator; directing activating light toward at least one of themold members to initiate curing of the lens forming composition; anddirecting activating light and heat toward at least one of the moldmembers subsequent to initiating curing of the lens to form the eyeglasslens.
 85. The eyeglass lens of claim 84, wherein the valve comprises amovable member coupled to the elongated member, wherein the elongatedmember contacts the movable member at a first position such that theelongated member is in the closed position, and wherein the elongatedmember contacts the movable member at a second position such that theelongated member is in the open position, and wherein the movable memberis movable such that the position elongated member can be varied fromthe first position to the second position.
 86. The eyeglass lens ofclaim 84, wherein the body further comprises a chamber positioned withinthe body, and wherein the heating system is positioned within thechamber, and wherein the chamber inhibits the lens forming compositionfrom contacting the heating system.
 87. The eyeglass lens of claim 84,wherein the heating system comprises a resistive heating system.
 88. Theeyeglass lens of claim 84, wherein the elongated member extendssubstantially completely through the outlet when the elongated member isin the closed position.
 89. The eyeglass lens of claim 84, wherein theelongated member extends partially into the outlet when the elongatedmember is an open position.
 90. The eyeglass lens of claim 84, whereinthe method further comprises measuring a temperature of the lens formingcomposition with a thermostat coupled to the body of the heatingapparatus, and wherein the method further comprises operating theheating system in response to the temperature measured by thethermostat.
 91. The eyeglass lens of claim 84, wherein the methodfurther comprises measuring a temperature of the lens formingcomposition with a thermocouple coupled to the body of the heatingapparatus, and wherein the heating apparatus further comprises acontroller coupled to the thermocouple and the heating system, andwherein the controller is configured to control the heating system inresponse to the temperature measured by the thermocouple.
 92. Theeyeglass lens of claim 84, wherein the method further comprisesmeasuring the level of the lens forming composition disposed with thebody with a fluid level monitor disposed within the body.
 93. Theeyeglass lens of claim 84 wherein the method further comprisingmeasuring the level of the lens forming composition disposed with thebody with a fluid level monitor disposed within the body, wherein theheating apparatus further comprises a controller coupled to the fluidmonitor and the heating system, wherein the controller is configured tocontrol the heating system in response to the level of fluid measured bythe fluid level monitor.
 94. The eyeglass lens of claim 84, wherein theapparatus is electrically coupleable to a controller of a lens formingapparatus.
 95. The eyeglass lens of claim 84, wherein the method furthercomprises introducing the lens forming composition into the body of theheating apparatus.
 96. The eyeglass lens of claim 95, wherein the lensforming composition is stored in a fluid container the fluid containercomprising a fluid container body and a cap, wherein the cap comprises afluid control member and an elastic member, wherein the elastic memberis coupled to the fluid control member such that the elastic memberexerts a force on the fluid control member such that the fluid controlmember is forced against a top inner surface of the cap, wherein theintroducing the lens forming composition into the body comprisesinserting the cap of the fluid container into the opening of the heatingapparatus
 97. The eyeglass lens of claim 84, wherein the heatingapparatus further comprises a mold assembly holder coupled to theheating apparatus body, wherein the mold assembly holder is configuredto hold the mold assembly in a position such that the outlet of theheating apparatus body is positioned proximate an inlet of the moldassembly, and wherein the method further comprises placing the moldassembly on the mold assembly holder prior to placing the lens formingcomposition in the mold cavity.
 98. The eyeglass lens of claim 84,wherein curing of the lens forming composition is initiated by directingactivating light toward at least one of the mold members for less than100 seconds.
 99. The eyeglass lens of claim 84, wherein treating thelens forming composition with activating light and heat comprisesdirecting activating light toward at least one of the mold members andapplying heat to both mold members.
 100. The eyeglass lens of claim 84,wherein the method further comprises applying heat to the lens in theabsence of activating light, subsequent to directing activating lightand heat toward at least one of the mold members.
 101. The eyeglass lensof claim 84, wherein the method further comprises heating the lensforming composition prior to placing the lens forming composition in amold cavity.
 102. The eyeglass lens of claim 84, wherein directingactivating light toward at least one of the mold members to initiatecuring is performed in a first lens curing unit, and wherein directingactivating light and heat toward at least one of the mold memberssubsequent to initiating curing is performed in a second lens curingunit, and wherein the mold assembly holder is configured to fit withinthe first and second curing units.
 103. The eyeglass lens of claim 84,wherein the first lens curing unit is coupled to the second lens curingunit by a conveyor system, and wherein the method further comprisestransferring the mold assembly holder from the first curing unit to thesecond curing unit along the conveyor system subsequent to initiatingcuring of the lens forming composition.
 104. A gasket configured toengage a first mold set for forming a first lens of a first power, thegasket comprising at least four discrete projections for spacing moldmembers of a mold set, and wherein the projections are arranged on aninterior surface of the gasket and further comprising a fifth projectionpositioned such that the projection contacts one of a mold member of thefirst mold set during use.
 105. The gasket of claim 104, wherein the atleast four discrete projections are evenly spaced around the interiorsurface of the gasket.
 106. The gasket of claim 104, wherein the atleast four discrete projections are spaced at about 90 degree incrementsaround the interior surface of the gasket.
 107. The gasket of claim 104,wherein the gasket is configured to engage a second mold set for forminga second lens of a second power.
 108. The gasket of claim 104, furthercomprising a fill port for receiving a lens forming composition whilethe gasket is fully engaged to a mold set.
 109. The gasket of claim 108,wherein the gasket comprises an interior surface and an exteriorsurface, and wherein the fill port extends from the interior surface ofthe gasket to the exterior surface.
 110. The gasket of claim 108,wherein the fifth projection is positioned such that the projectioncontacts a first mold member of the first mold set during use, andwherein the gasket further comprises a fill port for receiving a lensforming composition while the gasket is engaged to a mold set, andwherein the fill port is positioned near a second mold member of thefirst mold set during use.
 111. An assembly for making plasticprescription lenses, comprising: a first mold set for forming a firstlens of a first power, the first mold set comprising a front mold memberand a back mold member; a gasket for engaging the first mold set, thegasket comprising at least four discrete projections for spacing thefront mold member from the back mold member and a fifth projectionpositioned such that the projection contacts a mold member of the firstmold set during use; and wherein the front mold member, the back moldmember, and the gasket at least partially define a mold cavity forretaining a lens forming composition.
 112. The assembly of claim 111,wherein the back mold member comprises a steep axis and a flat axis, andwherein each of the at least four discrete projections forms an obliqueangle with the steep axis and the flat axis of the back mold member.113. The assembly of claim 111, wherein the back mold member comprises asteep axis and a flat axis, and wherein each of the at least fourdiscrete projections forms an about 45 degree angle with the steep axisand the flat axis of the back mold member.
 114. The assembly of claim111, wherein the gasket is configured to engage a second mold set forforming a second lens of a second power.
 115. The assembly of claim 111,wherein the gasket further comprises a fill port for receiving a lensforming composition while the gasket is fully engaged to the mold set.116. The assembly of claim 111, wherein the fifth projection ispositioned such that the projection contacts a first mold member of thefirst mold set during use, and wherein the gasket further comprises afill port for receiving a lens forming composition while the gasket isengaged to a mold set, and wherein the fill port is positioned near asecond mold member of the first mold set during use.
 117. A moldassembly holder configured to support a mold assembly, comprising: abody, wherein the body is configured to allow activating light to reachthe mold assembly; an indentation formed in the body, wherein theindentation is complementary to the shape of the mold assembly.
 118. Themold assembly holder of claim 117, wherein the indentation defines anopening, and wherein the opening is positioned such that activatinglight passes through the opening and onto the mold assembly during use.119. The mold assembly holder of claim 118, wherein the opening issubstantially centered within the indentation.
 120. The mold assemblyholder of claim 118, wherein a diameter of the opening is less than thediameter of a mold of the mold assembly.
 121. The mold assembly holderof claim 117, further comprising additional indentations for holding amold or a gasket of the mold assembly.
 122. The mold assembly holder ofclaim 117, further comprising a ridge disposed on the bottom surface,wherein the ridge is configured to interact with a conveyor system. 123.The mold assembly holder of claim 117, further comprising an additionalindentation for holding an additional mold assembly, wherein theadditional indentation has a shape that is complementary with theadditional mold assembly.
 124. The mold assembly holder of claim 117,wherein a portion of the mold assembly holder is configured to hold ajob ticket.
 125. The mold assembly holder of claim 117, wherein theindentation extends into the body to a depth such that an upper surfaceof the mold assembly is positioned at or below the upper surface of thebody.
 126. A method for making a plastic eyeglass lens, comprising:placing a liquid lens forming composition in a mold cavity of a moldassembly, wherein the mold assembly comprises a front mold member and aback mold member, the lens forming composition comprising a monomercomposition and a photoinitiator; placing the mold assembly in a moldassembly holder, the mold assembly holder comprising: a body, whereinthe body is configured to allow activating light to reach the moldassembly; an indentation formed in the body, wherein the indentation iscomplementary to the shape of the mold assembly. directing activatinglight toward at least one of the mold members to initiate curing of thelens forming composition; and directing activating light and heat towardat least one of the mold members subsequent to initiating curing of thelens to form the eyeglass lens.
 127. The method of claim 126, whereinthe indentation defines an opening, and wherein the opening ispositioned such that activating light passes through the opening andonto the mold assembly during use.
 128. The method of claim 127, whereinthe opening is substantially centered within the indentation.
 129. Themethod of claim 127, wherein a diameter of the opening is less than thediameter of a mold of the mold assembly.
 130. The method of claim 126,further comprising additional indentations for holding a mold or agasket of the mold assembly.
 131. The method of claim 126, furthercomprising a ridge disposed on the bottom surface, wherein the ridge isconfigured to interact with a conveyor system.
 132. The method of claim126, further comprising an additional indentation for holding anadditional mold assembly, wherein the additional indentation has a shapethat is complementary with the additional mold assembly.
 133. The methodof claim 126, wherein a portion of the mold assembly holder isconfigured to hold a job ticket.
 134. The method of claim 126, whereinthe indentation extends into the body to a depth such that an uppersurface of the mold assembly is positioned at or below the upper surfaceof the body.
 135. The method of claim 126, wherein curing of the lensforming composition is initiated by directing activating light toward atleast one of the mold members for less than 100 seconds.
 136. The methodof claim 126, wherein treating the lens forming composition withactivating light and heat comprises directing activating light toward atleast one of the mold members and applying heat to both mold members.137. The method of claim 126, further comprising applying heat to thelens in the absence of activating light, subsequent to directingactivating light and heat toward at least one of the mold members. 138.The method of claim 126, further comprising heating the lens formingcomposition prior to placing the lens forming composition in a moldcavity.
 139. The method of claim 126, wherein directing activating lighttoward at least one of the mold members to initiate curing is performedin a first lens curing unit, and wherein directing activating light andheat toward at least one of the mold members subsequent to initiatingcuring is performed in a second lens curing unit, and wherein the moldassembly holder is configured to fit within the first and second curingunits.
 140. The method of claim 139, wherein the first lens curing unitis coupled to the second lens curing unit by a conveyor system andfurther comprising transferring the mold assembly holder from the firstcuring unit to the second curing unit along the conveyor systemsubsequent to initiating curing of the lens forming composition.
 141. Aneyeglass lens made by the method, comprising: placing a liquid lensforming composition in a mold cavity of a mold assembly, wherein themold assembly comprises a front mold member and a back mold member, thelens forming composition comprising a monomer composition and aphotoinitiator; placing the mold assembly in a mold assembly holder, themold assembly holder comprising: a body, wherein the body is configuredto allow activating light to reach the mold assembly; an indentationformed in the body, wherein the indentation is complementary to theshape of the mold assembly. directing activating light toward at leastone of the mold members to initiate curing of the lens formingcomposition; and directing activating light and heat toward at least oneof the mold members subsequent to initiating curing of the lens to formthe eyeglass lens.
 142. The method of claim 141, wherein the indentationdefines an opening, and wherein the opening is positioned such thatactivating light passes through the opening and onto the mold assemblyduring use.
 143. The method of claim 142, wherein the opening issubstantially centered within the indentation.
 144. The method of claim142, wherein a diameter of the opening is less than the diameter of amold of the mold assembly.
 145. The method of claim 141, furthercomprising additional indentations for holding a mold or a gasket of themold assembly.
 146. The method of claim 141, further comprising a ridgedisposed on the bottom surface, wherein the ridge is configured tointeract with a conveyor system.
 147. The method of claim 141, furthercomprising an additional indentation for holding an additional moldassembly, wherein the additional indentation has a shape that iscomplementary with the additional mold assembly.
 148. The method ofclaim 141, wherein a portion of the mold assembly holder is configuredto hold a job ticket.
 149. The method of claim 141, wherein theindentation extends into the body to a depth such that an upper surfaceof the mold assembly is positioned at or below the upper surface of thebody.
 150. The method of claim 141, wherein curing of the lens formingcomposition is initiated by directing activating light toward at leastone of the mold members for less than 100 seconds.
 151. The method ofclaim 141, wherein treating the lens forming composition with activatinglight and heat comprises directing activating light toward at least oneof the mold members and applying heat to both mold members.
 152. Themethod of claim 141, further comprising applying heat to the lens in theabsence of activating light, subsequent to directing activating lightand heat toward at least one of the mold members.
 153. The method ofclaim 141, further comprising heating the lens forming composition priorto placing the lens forming composition in a mold cavity.
 154. Themethod of claim 141, wherein directing activating light toward at leastone of the mold members to initiate curing is performed in a first lenscuring unit, and wherein directing activating light and heat toward atleast one of the mold members subsequent to initiating curing isperformed in a second lens curing unit, and wherein the mold assemblyholder is configured to fit within the first and second curing units.155. The method of claim 154, wherein the first lens curing unit iscoupled to the second lens curing unit by a conveyor system and furthercomprising transferring the mold assembly holder from the first curingunit to the second curing unit along the conveyor system subsequent toinitiating curing of the lens forming composition.
 156. A ballast systemfor controlling the operation of a fluorescent lamp, comprising: aninstant start ballast, wherein the instant start ballast is configuredto deliver a striking voltage to the fluorescent lamp, and wherein theinstant start ballast is further configured to regulate the current tothe fluorescent lamp when the fluorescent lamp is on; and a transformer,wherein the transformer is configured to deliver voltage to a filamentof the fluorescent lamp when the fluorescent lamp is off.
 157. Theballast system of claim 156, wherein the instant start ballast isconfigured to apply a striking voltage of between about 250 to about 400V.
 158. The ballast system of claim 156, wherein the voltage supplied bythe transformer is sufficient to keep the filament of the fluorescentlamp at a temperature proximate the optimal operating temperature of thefilament.
 159. The ballast system of claim 156, wherein the voltagesupplied by the transformer is sufficient to keep the and thefluorescent lamp at a temperature proximate the optimal operatingtemperature of the fluorescent lamp.
 160. The ballast system of claim156, wherein the transformer is a toroidal transformer.
 161. The ballastsystem of claim 156, wherein the transformer and the instant startballast are independently operable.
 162. The ballast system of claim156, further comprising a controller coupled to the instant startballast and the transformer, wherein the controller is configured toindependently operate the instant start ballast and the transformer.163. The ballast system of claim 156, further comprising a controllercoupled to the instant start ballast and the transformer, wherein thecontroller is configured to independently operate the instant startballast and the transformer, and wherein the controller is furtherconfigured to turn the transformer off before turning the instant startballast on.
 164. The ballast system of claim 156, further comprising acontroller coupled to the instant start ballast and the transformer,wherein the controller is configured to independently operate theinstant start ballast and the transformer, and wherein the controller isfurther configured to turn the transformer on when the lamp is turnedoff.
 165. The ballast system of claim 156, further comprising acontroller coupled to the instant start ballast and the transformer,wherein the controller is configured to turn the transformer off after apredetermined amount of time has passed without receiving a signal toturn the fluorescent lamp on.
 166. The ballast system of claim 156,wherein the transformer is configured to apply less than about 5 V tothe filament.
 167. The ballast system of claim 156, wherein the instantstart ballast is a high frequency ballast.
 168. A method of operating afluorescent lamp, comprising: coupling the fluorescent lamp to a ballastsystem, the ballast system comprising: an instant start ballast, whereinthe instant start ballast is configured to deliver a striking voltage tothe fluorescent lamp, and wherein the instant start ballast is furtherconfigured to regulate the current to the fluorescent lamp when thefluorescent lamp is on; and a transformer, wherein the transformer isconfigured to deliver voltage to a filament of the fluorescent lamp whenthe fluorescent lamp is off; operating the transformer such that voltageis delivered to the filament of the fluorescent lamp; operating theinstant start ballast such that a striking voltage is applied to thefluorescent lamp casing the fluorescent lamp to produce light.
 169. Themethod of claim 168, wherein the instant start ballast is configured toapply a striking voltage of between about 250 to about 400 V.
 170. Themethod of claim 168, wherein the voltage supplied by the transformer issufficient to keep the filament of the fluorescent lamp at a temperatureproximate the optimal operating temperature of the filament.
 171. Themethod of claim 168, wherein the voltage supplied by the transformer issufficient to keep the and the fluorescent lamp at a temperatureproximate the optimal operating temperature of the fluorescent lamp.172. The method of claim 168, wherein the transformer is a toroidaltransformer.
 173. The method of claim 168, wherein the transformer andthe instant start ballast are independently operable.
 174. The method ofclaim 168, wherein the ballast system further comprises a controllercoupled to the instant start ballast and the transformer, wherein thecontroller is configured to independently operate the instant startballast and the transformer.
 175. The method of claim 168, furthercomprising turning off the transformer prior to operating the instantstart ballast.
 176. The method of claim 168, wherein the transformer isconfigured to apply less than about 5 V to the filament.
 177. The methodof claim 168, wherein the instant start ballast is a high frequencyballast.
 178. A system for preparing an eyeglass lens, comprising: amold assembly comprising: a first mold member having a casting face anda non-casting face; a second mold member having a casting face and anon-casting face, the second mold member being configured to be spacedapart from the first mold member during use such that the casting facesof the first mold member and the second mold member at least partiallydefine a mold cavity; an apparatus for curing a lens formingcomposition, comprising: a first lens curing unit comprising a firstactivating light source, wherein the first lens curing unit isconfigured to produce activating light toward a mold assembly duringuse; a second lens curing unit comprising a second activating lightsource and heating system, wherein the activating light source isconfigured to direct activating light toward a mold assembly during use;and wherein the heat system is configured to heat the interior of thesecond lens curing unit; and a conveyor system configured to convey themold assembly from the first lens curing unit into and through thesecond lens curing unit.
 179. The system of claim 178, wherein the firstactivating light source is an ultraviolet light source.
 180. The systemof claim 178, wherein the second activating light source is anultraviolet light.
 181. The system of claim 178, wherein the first andsecond activating light sources are ultraviolet lights.
 182. The systemof claim 178, wherein the first and second activating light sources havesubstantially the same spectral output.
 183. The system of claim 178,wherein the first and second activating light sources have a peak lightintensity at a range of about 385 nm to about 490 nm.
 184. The system ofclaim 178, wherein the first activating light source comprises a firstset of lamps and a second set of lamps, wherein the first and second setof lamps are positioned on opposite sides of the first curing unit. 185.The system of claim 178, wherein the first activating light source isconfigured to generate pulses of activating light.
 186. The system ofclaim 178, wherein the second activating light source is configured togenerate pulses of activating light.
 187. The system of claim 178,wherein the first and second activating light sources are configured togenerate pulses of activating light.
 188. The system of claim 178,further comprising a filter disposed directly adjacent to the firstactivating light source, the filter being configured to manipulate anintensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source.
 189. The system of claim 178, further comprising a filterdisposed directly adjacent to the second activating light source, thefilter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the second activating light source.
 190. The systemof claim 178, further comprising a first filter disposed directlyadjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source, and further comprising a secondfilter disposed directly adjacent to the second activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the second activating light source.
 191. The systemof claim 188, wherein the filter is comprises a metal plate defining anaperture.
 192. The system of claim 189, wherein the filter is comprisesa metal plate defining an aperture.
 193. The system of claim 190,wherein the first and second filters comprise a metal plate defining anaperture.
 194. The system of claim 178, further comprising an airdistributor positioned within the second curing unit, the airdistributor being configured to circulate air within the second curingunit during use.
 195. The system of claim 178, further comprising ananneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system,wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit.
 196. The system of 195, wherein the annealunit heating system is configured to heat the interior of the annealunit to a temperature of up to about 250° F.
 197. The system of claim195, wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unit conveyorsystem configured to convey the mold assembly through the anneal unit.198. The system of claim 178, further comprising a programmablecontroller configured to substantially simultaneously control operationof the first curing unit and the second curing unit during use.
 199. Thesystem of claim 178, wherein the first activating light source comprisesa first set of lamps and a second set of lamps, and further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to individually control the first andsecond sets of lamps.
 200. The system of claim 178, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to control operation of the firstcuring unit as a function of the eyeglass lens prescription.
 201. Thesystem of claim 178, wherein the first activating light source comprisesa fluorescent lamp, and wherein the first activating light sourcefurther comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to the fluorescentlamp.
 202. The system of claim 178, wherein the second activating lightsource comprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the second activatinglight source further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 203. The system of claim 178, wherein the firstactivating light source comprises a first fluorescent lamp, and whereinthe first activating light source further comprises a first flasherballast system coupled to the first fluorescent lamp, and wherein thesecond activating light source comprises a second fluorescent lamp, andwherein the second activating light source further comprises a secondflasher ballast system coupled to the second fluorescent lamp.
 204. Thesystem of claim 201, wherein the flasher ballast system comprises aninstant start ballast and a transformer.
 205. The system of claim 202,wherein the flasher ballast system comprises an instant start ballastand a transformer.
 206. The system of claim 203, wherein the firstflasher ballast system comprises an instant start ballast and atransformer, and wherein the second flasher ballast system comprises aninstant start ballast and a transformer.
 207. The system of claim 178,wherein the first activating light source comprises two or more lamps,and wherein the lamps are independently operable.
 208. The system ofclaim 178, wherein the conveyor system comprises a continuous flexiblemember extending from the first curing unit through the second curingunit, wherein the flexible member is configured to interact with a moldassembly to convey the mold assembly through the first curing unit, tothe second curing unit, and through the second curing unit.
 209. Thesystem of claim 178, wherein the conveyor system comprises two discreteconveyors, wherein the first conveyor is configured to convey the moldassembly from the first curing unit to the second curing unit, andwherein the second conveyor is configured to convey the mold assembliesthrough the second curing unit.
 210. The system of claim 178, whereinthe conveyor system comprises a flexible member configured to interactwith a mold assembly, and wherein the flexible member is coupled to amotor configured to move the flexible member through the conveyorsystem.
 211. The system of claim 178 wherein the mold assembly furthercomprises a gasket configured to engage the first mold member and thesecond mold member, the gasket comprising at least four discreteprojections for spacing the mold members, and wherein the projectionsare arranged on an interior surface of the gasket, and wherein thegasket further comprises a fifth projection positioned such that theprojection contacts one of the mold members during use.
 212. The systemof claim 211, wherein the at least four discrete projections of thegasket are evenly spaced around the interior surface of the gasket. 213.The system of claim 211, wherein the at least four discrete projectionsof the gasket are spaced at about 90 degree increments around theinterior surface of the gasket.
 214. The system of claim 211, whereinthe gasket further comprises a fill port for receiving a lens formingcomposition while the gasket is fully engaged to a mold set.
 215. Thesystem of claim 214, wherein the fill port extends from an interiorsurface of the gasket to an exterior surface of the gasket.
 216. Thesystem of claim 211, wherein the fifth projection is positioned suchthat the projection contacts the first mold member, and wherein thegasket further comprises a fill port for receiving a lens formingcomposition while the gasket is engaged to the molds, and wherein thefill port is positioned near the second mold member during use.
 217. Thesystem of claim 178, further comprising a mold assembly holderconfigured to support the mold assembly, comprising: a body, wherein thebody is configured to allow activating light to reach the mold assembly;an indentation formed in the body, wherein the indentation iscomplementary to the shape of the mold assembly.
 218. The system ofclaim 217, wherein the indentation defines an opening, and wherein theopening is positioned such that activating light from the firstactivating light source passes through the opening and onto the moldassembly when the mold assembly is positioned within the first lenscuring unit.
 219. The system of claim 217, wherein the indentationdefines an opening, and wherein the opening is positioned such thatactivating light from the second activating light source passes throughthe opening and onto the mold assembly when the mold assembly ispositioned within the second lens curing unit.
 220. The system of claim217, wherein the indentation defines an opening, and wherein the openingis positioned such that activating light from the first activating lightsource passes through the opening and onto the mold assembly when themold assembly is positioned within the first lens curing unit, andwherein the opening is positioned such that activating light from thesecond activating light source passes through the opening and onto themold assembly when the mold assembly is positioned within the secondlens curing unit.
 221. The system of claim 217, wherein the moldassembly holder further comprises additional indentations for holding amold or a gasket of the mold assembly.
 222. The system of claim 217,wherein the mold assembly holder further comprises a ridge disposed onthe bottom surface, wherein the ridge is configured to interact with aconveyor system.
 223. The system of claim 178, further comprising amonomer heating apparatus for dispensing a heated polymerizable lensforming composition comprising: a body, the body being configured tohold the lens forming composition, the body comprising an opening forreceiving a fluid container and an outlet; a heating system positionedwithin the body for heating the lens forming composition; a valvepositioned proximate the outlet, wherein the valve comprises anelongated member, wherein the elongated member is positionable withinthe outlet in a closed position, wherein the elongated member in theclosed position inhibits flow of the lens forming composition throughthe outlet, and wherein the elongated member is positionable within theoutlet in an open position, wherein the elongated member in an openposition allows flow of the lens forming composition flows through theoutlet during use.
 224. The system of claim 223, further comprising aprogrammable controller, wherein the programmable controller isconfigured to control the operation of the first curing unit, the secondcuring unit, and the monomer heating apparatus.
 225. A system forpreparing an eyeglass lens, comprising: a mold assembly comprising: afirst mold member having a casting face and a non-casting face; a secondmold member having a casting face and a non-casting face, the secondmold member being configured to be spaced apart from the first moldmember during use such that the casting faces of the first mold memberand the second mold member at least partially define a mold cavity; anapparatus for curing a lens forming composition, comprising: a firstlens curing unit comprising a first activating light source, wherein thefirst lens curing unit is configured to produce activating light towarda mold assembly during use; a second lens curing unit comprising asecond activating light source and heating system, wherein theactivating light source is configured to direct activating light towarda mold assembly during use; and wherein the heat system is configured toheat the interior of the second lens curing unit; and a conveyor systemconfigured to convey the mold assembly from the first lens curing unitinto and through the second lens curing unit; and a lens formingcomposition configured to be disposed within the mold cavity during use,comprising: a monomer that cures by exposure to activating light to formthe eyeglass lens during use; and a photoinitiator that initiates curingof the monomer in response to being exposed to activating light duringuse.
 226. The system of claim 225, wherein the lens forming compositionfurther comprises a photochromic compound.
 227. The system of claim 225,wherein the lens forming composition further comprises anultraviolet/visible light absorbing compound.
 228. The system of claim225, wherein the monomer comprises an aromatic containing bis(allylcarbonate)-functional monomer.
 229. The system of claim 225, wherein themonomer comprises an aromatic containing polyethylenic polyetherfunctional monomer.
 230. The system of claim 225, wherein the monomercomposition comprises a polyethylenic functional monomer.
 231. Thesystem of claim 225, wherein the lens forming composition furthercomprises a co-initiator composition, wherein the co-initiatorcomposition comprises an amine.
 232. The system of claim 225, whereinthe lens forming composition further comprises a co-initiatorcomposition, wherein the co-initiator composition comprises an acrylylamine.
 233. The system of claim 225, wherein the lens formingcomposition further comprises a co-initiator composition, wherein theco-initiator composition comprises an acrylyl amine, the acrylyl aminecomprising monoacrylated amines, diacrylated amines, or mixturesthereof.
 234. The system of claim 225 wherein the photoinitiatorcomprises bis(2,6-dimethoxybenzoyl)-(2,4,4-trimethylphenyl)phosphineoxide.
 235. The system of claim 225, wherein the lens formingcomposition further comprises a dye to form a background color withinthe lens.
 236. The system of claim 225 wherein the lens formingcomposition is curable to a substantially aberration free lens in lessthan about 30 minutes.
 237. The system of claim 225, wherein the firstactivating light source is an ultraviolet light source.
 238. The systemof claim 225, wherein the second activating light source is anultraviolet light.
 239. The system of claim 225, wherein the first andsecond activating light sources are ultraviolet lights.
 240. The systemof claim 225, wherein the first and second activating light sources havesubstantially the same spectral output.
 241. The system of claim 225,wherein the first and second activating light sources have a peak lightintensity at a range of about 385 nm to about 490 nm.
 242. The system ofclaim 225, wherein the first activating light source comprises a firstset of lamps and a second set of lamps, wherein the first and second setof lamps are positioned on opposite sides of the first curing unit. 243.The system of claim 225 wherein the first activating light source isconfigured to generate pulses of activating light.
 244. The system ofclaim 225 wherein the second activating light source is configured togenerate pulses of activating light.
 245. The system of claim 225wherein the first and second activating light sources are configured togenerate pulses of activating light.
 246. The system of claim 225,further comprising a filter disposed directly adjacent to the firstactivating light source, the filter being configured to manipulate anintensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source.
 247. The system of claim 225, further comprising a filterdisposed directly adjacent to the second activating light source, thefilter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the second activating light source.
 248. The systemof claim 225, further comprising a first filter disposed directlyadjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source, and further comprising a secondfilter disposed directly adjacent to the second activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the second activating light source.
 249. The systemof claim 246, wherein the filter is comprises a metal plate defining anaperture.
 250. The system of claim 247, wherein the filter is comprisesa metal plate defining, an aperture.
 251. The system of claim 248,wherein the first and second filters comprise a metal plate defining anaperture.
 252. The system of claim 225, further comprising an airdistributor positioned within the second curing unit, the airdistributor being configured to circulate air within the second curingunit during use.
 253. The system of claim 225, further comprising ananneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system,wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit.
 254. The system of claim 253, wherein theanneal unit heating system is configured to heat the interior of theanneal unit to a temperature of up to about 250° F.
 255. The system ofclaim 253, wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unitconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly through theanneal unit.
 256. The system of claim 225, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to substantially simultaneouslycontrol operation of the first curing unit and the second curing unitduring use.
 257. The system of claim 225, wherein the first activatinglight source comprises a first set of lamps and a second set of lamps,and further comprising a programmable controller configured toindividually control the first and second sets of lamps.
 258. The systemof claim 225, further comprising a programmable controller configured tocontrol operation of the first curing unit as a function of the eyeglasslens prescription.
 259. The system of claim 225, wherein the firstactivating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein thefirst activating light source further comprises a flasher ballast systemcoupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 260. The system of claim 225, whereinthe second activating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp, andwherein the second activating light source further comprises a flasherballast system coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 261. The system of claim225, wherein the first activating light source comprises a firstfluorescent lamp, and wherein the first activating light source furthercomprises a first flasher ballast system coupled to the firstfluorescent lamp, and wherein the second activating light sourcecomprises a second fluorescent lamp, and wherein the second activatinglight source further comprises a second flasher ballast system coupledto the second fluorescent lamp.
 262. The system of claim 259, whereinthe flasher ballast system comprises an instant start ballast and atransformer.
 263. The system of claim 260, wherein the flasher ballastsystem comprises an instant start ballast and a transformer.
 264. Thesystem of claim 261, wherein the first flasher ballast system comprisesan instant start ballast and a transformer, and wherein the secondflasher ballast system comprises an instant start ballast and atransformer.
 265. The system of claim 225, wherein the first activatinglight source comprises two or more lamps, and wherein the lamps areindependently operable.
 266. The system of claim 225, wherein theconveyor system comprises a continuous flexible member extending fromthe first curing unit through the second curing unit, wherein theflexible member is configured to interact with a mold assembly to conveythe mold assembly through the first curing unit, to the second curingunit, and through the second curing unit.
 267. The system of claim 225,wherein the conveyor system comprises two discrete conveyors, whereinthe first conveyor is configured to convey the mold assembly from thefirst curing unit to the second curing unit, and wherein the secondconveyor is configured to convey the mold assemblies through the secondcuring unit.
 268. The system of claim 225, wherein the conveyor systemcomprises a flexible member configured to interact with a mold assembly,and wherein the flexible member is coupled to a motor configured to movethe flexible member through the conveyor system.
 269. The system ofclaim 225 wherein the mold assembly further comprises a gasketconfigured to engage the first mold member and the second mold member,the gasket comprising at least four discrete projections for spacing themold members, and wherein the projections are arranged on an interiorsurface of the gasket, and wherein the gasket further comprises a fifthprojection positioned such that the projection contacts one of the moldmembers during use.
 270. The system of claim 269, wherein the at leastfour discrete projections of the gasket are evenly spaced around theinterior surface of the gasket.
 271. The system of claim 269, whereinthe at least four discrete projections of the gasket are spaced at about90 degree increments around the interior surface of the gasket.
 272. Thesystem of claim 269, wherein the gasket further comprises a fill portfor receiving a lens forming composition while the gasket is fullyengaged to a mold set.
 273. The system of claim 272, wherein the fillport extends from an interior surface of the gasket to an exteriorsurface of the gasket.
 274. The system of claim 269, wherein the fifthprojection is positioned such that the projection contacts the firstmold member, and wherein the gasket further comprises a fill port forreceiving a lens forming composition while the gasket is engaged to themolds, and wherein the fill port is positioned near the second moldmember during use.
 275. The system of claim 225, further comprising amold assembly holder configured to support the mold assembly,comprising: a body, wherein the body is configured to allow activatinglight to reach the mold assembly; an indentation formed in the body,wherein the indentation is complementary to the shape of the moldassembly.
 276. The system of claim 275, wherein the indentation definesan opening, and wherein the opening is positioned such that activatinglight from the first activating light source passes through the openingand onto the mold assembly when the mold assembly is positioned withinthe first lens curing unit.
 277. The system of claim 275, wherein theindentation defines an opening, and wherein the opening is positionedsuch that activating light from the second activating light sourcepasses through the opening and onto the mold assembly when the moldassembly is positioned within the second lens curing unit.
 278. Thesystem of claim 275, wherein the indentation defines an opening, andwherein the opening is positioned such that activating light from thefirst activating light source passes through the opening and onto themold assembly when the mold assembly is positioned within the first lenscuring unit, and wherein the opening is positioned such that activatinglight from the second activating light source passes through the openingand onto the mold assembly when the mold assembly is positioned withinthe second lens curing unit.
 279. The system of claim 275, wherein themold assembly holder further comprises additional indentations forholding a mold or a gasket of the mold assembly.
 280. The system ofclaim 275, wherein the mold assembly holder further comprises a ridgedisposed on the bottom surface, wherein the ridge is configured tointeract with a conveyor system.
 281. The system of claim 225, furthercomprising a monomer heating apparatus for dispensing a heatedpolymerizable lens forming composition comprising: a body, the bodybeing configured to hold the lens forming composition, the bodycomprising an opening for receiving a fluid container and an outlet; aheating system positioned with the body for heating the monomersolution; a valve positioned proximate the outlet, wherein the valvecomprises an elongated member, wherein the elongated member ispositionable within the in a closed position, wherein the elongatedmember in the closed position inhibits flow of the lens formingcomposition through the outlet, and wherein the elongated member ispositionable within the conduit in an open position, wherein theelongated member in an open position allows flow of the lens formingcomposition flows through the outlet during use.
 282. The system ofclaim 281, further comprising a programmable controller, wherein theprogrammable controller is configured to control the operation of thefirst curing unit, the second curing unit, and the monomer heatingapparatus.
 283. A computer-implemented method for controlling formationof an eyeglass lens, the method comprising: receiving prescriptioninformation, wherein the prescription information defines an eyeglassprescription; analyzing the prescription information; and determining afront mold identification marking, a back mold identification marking,and a gasket identification marking of an appropriate front mold, backmold and gasket for producing the eyeglass lens in response to analyzingthe prescription information; wherein the front mold, the back mold andthe gasket together are operable to produce a mold cavity, the moldcavity being configured to hold a lens forming composition which iscurable to produce the eyeglass lens from the prescription, the frontmold member comprising the front mold identification marking, the backmold member comprising the back mold identification marking, and thegasket member comprising the gasket identification marking.
 284. Themethod of claim 283, wherein receiving the prescription informationcomprises reading the prescription information from a barcode.
 285. Themethod of claim 283, wherein receiving the prescription informationcomprises receiving the prescription information from an input device,wherein the input device is operable by a user to enter prescriptioninformation.
 286. The method of claim 283, wherein the prescriptioninformation comprises a sphere power, a cylinder power, and a lenslocation.
 287. The method of claim 286, wherein analyzing theprescription information comprises: correlating the sphere power, thecylinder power and the lens location to a record in an informationdatabase.
 288. The method of claim 287, wherein determining the frontmold identification marking, the back mold identification marking, andthe gasket identification marking comprises: reading the front moldidentification marking, the back mold identification marking, and thegasket identification marking from the record in the informationdatabase correlated with the sphere power, the cylinder power and thelens location.
 289. The method of claim 286, wherein the prescriptioninformation further comprises a monomer type and a lens type.
 290. Themethod of claim 283, wherein the prescription information comprises asphere power, a cylinder power, an add power and a lens location. 291.The method of claim 290, wherein analyzing the prescription informationcomprises: correlating the sphere power, the cylinder power, the addpower, and the lens location to a record in an information database.292. The method of claim 291, wherein determining the front moldidentification marking, the back mold identification marking, and thegasket identification marking comprises: reading the front moldidentification marking, the back mold identification marking, and thegasket identification marking from the record in the informationdatabase correlated with the sphere power, the cylinder power, the addpower, and the lens location.
 293. The method of claim 290, wherein theprescription information further comprises a monomer type and a lenstype.
 294. The method of claim 283, wherein the front moldidentification marking comprises an alphanumeric sequence, and whereinthe back mold identification marking comprises an alphanumeric sequence,and wherein the gasket identification marking comprises an alphanumericsequence.
 295. The method of claim 283, further comprising: displayingthe front mold identification marking, the back mold identificationmarking, and the gasket identification marking on a display devicesubsequent to determining the front mold identification marking, theback mold identification marking, and the gasket identification marking.296. The method of claim 283, further comprising: determining a specificlens forming composition for producing the eyeglass lens in response toanalyzing the prescription information.
 297. The method of claim 296,further comprising: displaying the specific lens forming composition ona display device subsequent to determining the specific lens formingcomposition.
 298. The method of claim 283, further comprising:determining curing conditions for the eyeglass lens in response toanalyzing the prescription information.
 299. The method of claim 283,further comprising: determining a second front mold identificationmarking, a second back mold identification marking, and second a gasketidentification marking of an appropriate second front mold, second backmold and second gasket for producing a second eyeglass lens in responseto analyzing the prescription information
 300. The method of claim 283,further comprising: controlling a curing unit, the curing unit beingconfigured to cure at least a portion of the lens forming composition.301. The method of claim 300, further comprising: determining curingconditions for the eyeglass lens in response to analyzing theprescription information; and wherein controlling the curing unitcomprises controlling the curing unit such that the curing conditionsfor the eyeglass lens are produced.
 302. The method of claim 301,wherein the curing unit comprises a plurality of light sources, andwherein controlling the curing unit comprises controlling the pluralityof activating light sources to produce the curing conditions for theeyeglass lens.
 303. The method of claim 300, wherein the curing unit isconfigured to cure at least a portion of the lens forming compositioninto the eyeglass lens by directing activating light toward the lensforming composition during use.
 304. The method of claim 300, whereincontrolling the curing unit comprises controlling activating lightdirected toward the lens forming composition, wherein the directing ofthe activating light toward the lens forming composition in the curingunit is effective to cure at least a portion of the lens formingcomposition into the eyeglass lens.
 305. The method of claim 300,wherein controlling the curing unit comprises: monitoring a dose ofactivating light transmitted to the lens forming composition; andvarying the intensity or duration of the activating light transmitted tothe lens forming composition such that a predetermined dose istransmitted to the lens forming composition.
 306. The method of claim300, wherein the curing unit comprises a plurality of light sources, andwherein controlling the curing unit comprises controlling each of theplurality of light sources independently.
 307. The method of claim 300,wherein the curing unit comprises a plurality of light sources, andwherein one or more of the plurality of light sources are above the moldmembers and one or more of the plurality of light sources are below themold members, and wherein controlling the curing unit comprisescontrolling the directing of activating light from the plurality oflight sources toward at least one of the mold members.
 308. The methodof claim 300, wherein the curing unit comprises one or more lightsources and one or more access doors, and wherein controlling the curingunit comprises: preventing the one or more light sources from emittinglight when one or more of the access doors is opened.
 309. The method ofclaim 300, further comprising: determining curing conditions for aplurality of eyeglass lenses in response to analyzing the prescriptioninformation; and wherein controlling the curing unit comprisescontrolling the curing unit such that the curing conditions for theplurality of eyeglass lenses are produced.
 310. The method of claim 309,wherein controlling the curing unit is performed substantiallyconcurrently for the plurality of eyeglass lenses.
 311. The method ofclaim 283, further comprising: controlling a post-cure unit, thepost-cure unit being configured to substantially complete curing of theeyeglass lens.
 312. The method of claim 311, further comprising:determining curing conditions for the eyeglass lens in response toanalyzing the prescription information; and wherein controlling thepost-cure unit comprises operating the post-cure unit such that thecuring conditions are produced.
 313. The method of claim 312, whereinthe post-cure unit comprises a plurality of light sources and aplurality of heat sources, and wherein controlling the post-cure unitcomprises controlling the plurality of activating light sources and theplurality of heat sources to produce the curing conditions for theeyeglass lens.
 314. The method of claim 311, wherein the post-cure unitis configured to apply heat and activating light to the lens formingcomposition disposed in a mold assembly or a demolded lens tosubstantially complete curing of the eyeglass lens during use.
 315. Themethod of claim 311, wherein controlling the post-cure unit comprisescontrolling the application of heat and activating light to the lensforming composition disposed in a mold assembly or a demolded lens,wherein the application of heat and activating light in the post-cureunit is effective to substantially complete curing of the eyeglass lens.316. The method of claim 311, wherein the post-cure unit comprises aplurality of light sources and a plurality of heat sources, whereincontrolling the post-cure unit comprises controlling each of theplurality of light sources and each of the plurality of heat sourcesindependently.
 317. The method of claim 311, wherein the post-cure unitcomprises a plurality of light sources and a plurality of heat sources,wherein one or more of the plurality of light sources are above the moldmembers and one or more of the plurality of light sources are below themold members, wherein one or more of the plurality of heat sources areabove the mold members and one or more of the plurality of heat sourcesare below the mold members, wherein controlling the post-cure unitcomprises: controlling the directing of activating light from theplurality of light sources toward at least one of the mold members; andcontrolling the application of heat from the plurality of light sourcestoward at least one of the mold members.
 318. The method of claim 311,wherein the post-cure unit comprises one or more light sources and oneor more access doors, and wherein controlling the post-cure unitcomprises: preventing the one or more light sources from emitting lightwhen one or more of the access doors is opened.
 319. The method of claim311, further comprising: determining curing conditions for a pluralityof eyeglass lenses in response to analyzing the prescriptioninformation; and wherein controlling the post-cure unit comprisescontrolling the post-cure unit such that the curing conditions for theplurality of eyeglass lenses are produced.
 320. The method of claim 318,wherein controlling the post-cure unit is performed substantiallyconcurrently for the plurality of eyeglass lenses.
 321. The method ofclaim 283, further comprising: controlling a coating unit, the coatingunit being configured to produce a coating on at least one of the moldmembers or the eyeglass lens during use.
 322. The method of claim 321,further comprising: determining coating requirements for the eyeglasslens in response to user input; and wherein controlling the coating unitcomprises operating the coating unit such that the coating requirementsare produced.
 323. The method of claim 321, wherein the coating unit isa spin coating unit, and wherein controlling the coating unit comprisescontrolling the rotation of a lens holder, wherein the lens holder isconfigured to substantially secure the eyeglass lens during use. 324.The method of claim 323, wherein controlling the rotation of the lensholder comprises controlling a rotational speed of the lens holder. 325.The method of claim 321, wherein the coating unit comprises a lightsource, and wherein controlling the coating unit comprises controllingthe light source.
 326. The method of claim 325, wherein controlling thelight source comprises controlling a duration of the light source. 327.The method of claim 321, wherein the coating unit comprises a lightsource and one or more access doors, and wherein controlling the coatingunit comprises: preventing the light source from emitting light when oneor more of the access doors is opened.
 328. The method of claim 283,further comprising: controlling a curing unit, the curing unit beingconfigured to cure the lens forming composition; and controlling apost-cure unit, the post-cure unit being configured to substantiallycomplete curing of the eyeglass lens.
 329. The method of claim 327,further comprising: determining curing conditions for the eyeglass lensin response to analyzing the prescription information; and whereincontrolling the curing unit and controlling the post-cure unit comprisescontrolling the curing unit and controlling the post-cure unit such thatthe curing conditions are produced.
 330. The method of claim 327,wherein controlling the curing unit and controlling the post-cure unitare performed substantially concurrently.
 331. The method of claim 327,further comprising: controlling a coating unit, the coating unit beingconfigured to produce a coating on at least one of the mold members orthe eyeglass lens during use.
 332. The method of claim 331, furthercomprising: determining coating requirements for the eyeglass lens inresponse to analyzing the prescription information; and whereincontrolling the coating unit comprises operating the coating unit suchthat the coating requirements are produced.
 333. The method of claim331, wherein controlling the curing unit, controlling the post-cureunit, and controlling the coating unit are performed substantiallyconcurrently.
 334. The method of claim 283, further comprising: alteringthe eyeglass prescription after receiving the prescription information.335. The method of claim 283, further comprising: storing the eyeglassprescription on a computer readable media.
 336. The method of claim 283,further comprising: displaying operating instructions on a displaydevice for a user during a lens forming process.
 337. Acomputer-implemented method for controlling formation of an eyeglasslens, the method comprising: receiving prescription information, whereinthe prescription information defines an eyeglass prescription; analyzingthe prescription information; determining curing conditions for theeyeglass lens in response to analyzing the prescription information;controlling a curing unit, the curing unit being configured to cure atleast a portion of a lens forming composition in a mold; and controllinga post-cure unit, the post-cure unit being configured to substantiallycomplete curing of the eyeglass lens.
 338. The method of claim 337,wherein controlling the curing unit and controlling the post-cure unitcomprise controlling the curing unit and controlling the post-cure unitsuch that the curing conditions are produced to cure the lens formingcomposition to produce the eyeglass lens from the prescription.
 339. Themethod of claim 337, wherein receiving the prescription informationcomprises reading the prescription information from a barcode.
 340. Themethod of claim 337, wherein receiving the prescription informationcomprises receiving the prescription information from an input device,wherein the input device is operable by a user to enter prescriptioninformation.
 341. The method of claim 337, wherein the prescriptioninformation comprises a sphere power, a cylinder power, and a lenslocation.
 342. The method of claim 341, wherein analyzing theprescription information comprises: correlating the sphere power, thecylinder power and the lens location to a record in an informationdatabase.
 343. The method of claim 342, further comprising: reading afront mold identification marking, a back mold identification marking,and a gasket identification marking from the record in the informationdatabase correlated with the sphere power, the cylinder power and thelens location.
 344. The method of claim 341, wherein the prescriptioninformation further comprises a monomer type and a lens type.
 345. Themethod of claim 337, wherein the prescription information comprises asphere power, a cylinder power, an add power and a lens location. 346.The method of claim 345, wherein analyzing the prescription informationcomprises: correlating the sphere power, the cylinder power, the addpower, and the lens location to a record in an information database.347. The method of claim 346, further comprising: reading a front moldidentification marking, a back mold identification marking, and a gasketidentification marking from the record in the information databasecorrelated with the sphere power, the cylinder power, the add power, andthe lens location.
 348. The method of claim 345, wherein theprescription information further comprises a monomer type and a lenstype.
 349. The method of claim 337, wherein the curing unit isconfigured to cure at least a portion of the lens forming compositioninto the eyeglass lens by directing activating light toward the eyeglasslens during use.
 350. The method of claim 337, wherein controlling thecuring unit comprises controlling activating light directed toward thelens forming composition, wherein the directing of the activating lighttoward the lens forming composition in the curing unit is effective tocure at least a portion of the lens forming composition into theeyeglass lens.
 351. The method of claim 337, wherein controlling thecuring unit comprises: monitoring a dose of activating light transmittedto the lens forming composition; and varying the intensity or durationof the activating light transmitted to the lens forming composition suchthat a predetermined dose is transmitted to the lens formingcomposition.
 352. The method of claim 337, wherein the curing unitcomprises a plurality of light sources, and wherein controlling thecuring unit comprises controlling each of the plurality of light sourcesindependently.
 353. The method of claim 337, wherein the curing unitcomprises a plurality of light sources, and wherein one or more of theplurality of light sources are above the mold members and one or more ofthe plurality of light sources are below the mold members, and whereincontrolling the curing unit comprises controlling the directing ofactivating light from the plurality of light sources toward at least oneof the mold members.
 354. The method of claim 337, wherein the curingunit comprises a plurality of light sources, and wherein controlling thecuring unit comprises controlling the activating light sources toproduce the curing conditions for the eyeglass lens.
 355. The method ofclaim 337, wherein the curing unit comprises one or more light sourcesand one or more access doors, and wherein controlling the curing unitcomprises: preventing the one or more light sources from emitting lightwhen one or more of the access doors is opened.
 356. The method of claim337, further comprising: determining curing conditions for a pluralityof eyeglass lenses in response to analyzing the prescriptioninformation; and wherein controlling the curing unit comprisescontrolling the curing unit such that the curing conditions for theplurality of eyeglass lenses are produced.
 357. The method of claim 356,wherein controlling the curing unit is performed substantiallyconcurrently for the plurality of eyeglass lenses.
 358. The method ofclaim 337, wherein the post-cure unit is configured to apply heat andactivating light to the lens forming composition disposed in a moldassembly or a demolded lens to substantially complete curing of theeyeglass lens during use.
 359. The method of claim 337, whereincontrolling the post-cure unit comprises controlling the application ofheat and activating light to the lens forming composition disposed in amold assembly or a demolded lens, wherein the application of heat andactivating light in the post-cure unit is effective to substantiallycomplete curing of the eyeglass lens.
 360. The method of claim 337,wherein the post-cure unit comprises a plurality of light sources and aplurality of heat sources, wherein controlling the post-cure unitcomprises controlling each of the plurality of light sources and each ofthe plurality of heat sources independently.
 361. The method of claim337, wherein the post-cure unit comprises a plurality of light sourcesand a plurality of heat sources, wherein one or more of the plurality oflight sources are above the mold members and one or more of theplurality of light sources are below the mold members, wherein one ormore of the plurality of heat sources are above the mold members and oneor more of the plurality of heat sources are below the mold members,wherein controlling the post-cure unit comprises: controlling thedirecting of activating light from the plurality of light sources towardat least one of the mold members; and controlling the application ofheat from the plurality of light sources toward at least one of the moldmembers.
 362. The method of claim 337, wherein the post-cure unitcomprises a plurality of light sources and a plurality of heat sources,and wherein controlling the post-cure unit comprises controlling theplurality of activating light sources and the plurality of heat sourcesto produce the curing conditions for the eyeglass lens.
 363. The methodof claim 337, wherein the post-cure unit comprises one or more lightsources and one or more access doors, and wherein controlling thepost-cure unit comprises: preventing the one or more light sources fromemitting light when one or more of the access doors is opened.
 364. Themethod of claim 337, further comprising: determining curing conditionsfor a plurality of eyeglass lenses in response to analyzing theprescription information; and wherein controlling the post-cure unitcomprises controlling the post-cure unit such that the curing conditionsfor the plurality of eyeglass lenses are produced.
 365. The method ofclaim 364, wherein controlling the post-cure unit is performedsubstantially concurrently for the plurality of eyeglass lenses. 366.The method of claim 337, further comprising: controlling a coating unit,the coating unit being configured to produce a coating on at least oneof the mold members or the eyeglass lens during use.
 367. The method ofclaim 366, further comprising: determining coating requirements for theeyeglass lens in response to user input; and wherein controlling thecoating unit comprises operating the coating unit such that the coatingrequirements are produced.
 368. The method of claim 366, wherein thecoating unit is a spin coating unit, and wherein controlling the coatingunit comprises controlling the rotation of a lens holder, wherein thelens holder is configured to substantially secure the eyeglass lensduring use.
 369. The method of claim 368, wherein controlling therotation of the lens holder comprises controlling a rotational speed ofthe lens holder.
 370. The method of claim 366, wherein the coating unitcomprises a light source, and wherein controlling the coating unitcomprises controlling the light source.
 371. The method of claim 370,wherein controlling the light source comprises controlling a duration ofthe light source.
 372. The method of claim 366, wherein the coating unitcomprises a light source and one or more access doors, and whereincontrolling the coating unit comprises: preventing the light source fromemitting light when one or more of the access doors is opened.
 373. Themethod of claim 366, wherein controlling the curing unit, controllingthe post-cure unit, and controlling the coating unit are performedsubstantially concurrently.
 374. The method of claim 337, whereincontrolling the curing unit and controlling the post-cure unit areperformed substantially concurrently.
 375. The method of claim 337,further comprising: altering the eyeglass prescription after receivingthe prescription information.
 376. The method of claim 337, furthercomprising: storing the eyeglass prescription on a computer readablemedia.
 377. The method of claim 337, further comprising: displayingoperating instructions on a display device for a user during a lensforming process.
 378. A computer-implemented method for monitoring adevice configured to cure a lens forming composition disposed in a moldassembly to produce an eyeglass lens from a prescription, the methodcomprising: monitoring operating conditions for one or more componentsof the device; detecting an operating error for one or more of the oneor more components of the device; and displaying a message on a displaydevice coupled to the device, the message describing the operating errorfor the one or more of the one or more components of the device. 379.The method of claim 378, wherein the one or more components comprise acuring unit configured to cure at least a portion of the lens formingcomposition.
 380. The method of claim 379, wherein the curing unitcomprises one or more lamps configured to produce activating light forcuring the lens forming composition; wherein monitoring the operatingconditions for the one or more components of the device comprisesmonitoring a time of use for the one or more lamps comprised in thecuring unit; and wherein detecting the operating error comprisesdetecting that the time of use for one or more of the one or more lampshas exceeded a maximum time of use.
 381. The method of claim 379,wherein the curing unit comprises one or more lamps configured toproduce activating light for curing the lens forming composition;wherein monitoring the operating conditions for the one or morecomponents of the device comprises monitoring an intensity of the lightproduced by the one or more lamps comprised in the curing unit; andwherein detecting the operating error comprises detecting that theintensity of the light of one or more of the one or more lamps isoutside an optimal light intensity range for the lamps.
 382. The methodof claim 379, wherein the curing unit comprises one or more lampsconfigured to produce activating light for curing the lens formingcomposition; wherein monitoring the operating conditions for the one ormore components of the device comprises monitoring a current through theone or more lamps comprised in the curing unit; and wherein detectingthe operating error comprises detecting that the current through the oneor more of the one or more lamps is outside an optimal current range forthe lamps.
 383. The method of claim 378, wherein the one or morecomponents comprise a post-cure unit configured to substantiallycomplete curing of the lens forming composition disposed in the moldassembly or a demolded lens.
 384. The method of claim 383, wherein thepost-cure unit comprises one or more lamps configured to produceactivating light for curing the lens forming composition disposed in themold assembly or the demolded lens; wherein monitoring the operatingconditions for the one or more components of the device comprisesmonitoring a time of use for the one or more lamps comprised in thepost-cure unit; and wherein detecting the operating error comprisesdetecting that the time of use for one or more of the one or more lampshas exceeded a maximum time of use.
 385. The method of claim 383,wherein the post-cure unit comprises one or more lamps configured toproduce activating light for curing the lens forming compositiondisposed in the mold assembly or the demolded lens; wherein monitoringthe operating conditions for the one or more components of the devicecomprises monitoring an intensity of the light produced by the one ormore lamps comprised in the post-cure unit; and wherein detecting theoperating error comprises detecting that the intensity of the light ofone or more of the one or more lamps is outside an optimal lightintensity range for the lamps.
 386. The method of claim 383, wherein thepost-cure unit comprises one or more lamps configured to produceactivating light for curing the lens forming composition disposed in themold assembly or the demolded lens; wherein monitoring the operatingconditions for the one or more components of the device comprisesmonitoring a current through the one or more lamps comprised in thepost-cure unit; and wherein detecting the operating error comprisesdetecting that the current through the one or more of the one or morelamps is outside an optimal current range for the lamps.
 387. The methodof claim 383, wherein the post-cure unit comprises one or more heatingunits configured to produce heat for curing the lens forming compositiondisposed in the mold assembly or the demolded lens; wherein monitoringthe operating conditions for the one or more components of the devicecomprises monitoring a current through the one or more heating unitscomprised in the post-cure unit; and wherein detecting the operatingerror comprises detecting that the current through the one or more ofthe one or more heating units is outside an optimal current range forthe heating units.
 388. The method of claim 378, wherein the one or morecomponents comprise a coating unit configured to produce a coating on atleast one of the mold or the eyeglass lens during use.
 389. The methodof claim 388, wherein the coating unit comprises one or more lamps;wherein monitoring the operating conditions for the one or morecomponents of the device comprises monitoring a time of use for the oneor more lamps comprised in the coating unit; and wherein detecting theoperating error comprises detecting that the time of use for one or moreof the one or more lamps has exceeded a maximum time of use.
 390. Themethod of claim 388, wherein the coating unit comprises one or morelamps; wherein monitoring the operating conditions for the one or morecomponents of the device comprises monitoring an intensity of the lightproduced by the one or more lamps comprised in the coating unit; andwherein detecting the operating error comprises detecting that theintensity of the light of one or more of the one or more lamps isoutside an optimal light intensity range for the lamps.
 391. The methodof claim 388, wherein the coating unit comprises one or more lamps;wherein monitoring the operating conditions for the one or morecomponents of the device comprises monitoring a current through the oneor more lamps comprised in the coating unit; and wherein detecting theoperating error comprises detecting that the current through the one ormore of the one or more lamps is outside an optimal current range forthe lamps.
 392. The method of claim 378, wherein the one or morecomponents comprise: a curing unit configured to cure at least a portionof the lens forming composition; a post-cure unit configured tosubstantially complete curing of the eyeglass lens; and a coating unitconfigured to produce a coating on at least one of the mold or theeyeglass lens during use.
 393. The method of claim 378, furthercomprising: monitoring maintenance schedules for one or more componentsof the device; detecting that one or more of the one or more componentsare due for maintenance; and displaying a message on a display devicecoupled to the device, the message describing the required maintenancefor the one or more of the one or more components of the device. 394.The method of claim 378, wherein monitoring the operating conditions fora component comprises monitoring an operating parameter to determine ifthe operating parameter is within an optimal operating range for thecomponent, and wherein an operating range error occurs when theoperating parameter for the component is outside the optimal operatingrange for the component.
 395. The method of claim 378, wherein detectingan operating error comprises detecting an operating range error for oneor more of the one or more components of the device, and wherein anoperating range error occurs when an operating parameter for a componentis outside an optimal operating range for the component.
 396. The methodof claim 378, wherein the message displayed on the display devicedescribes an operating range error for one or more of the one or morecomponents of the device, and wherein an operating range error occurswhen an operating parameter for a component is outside an optimaloperating range for the component.
 397. A system comprising: a deviceconfigured to cure a lens forming composition in a mold to produce aneyeglass lens from a prescription; a controller computer coupled to thedevice; and controller software executable on the controller computer,wherein the controller software is operable to: receive prescriptioninformation, wherein the prescription information defines an eyeglassprescription; analyze the prescription information; and determine afront mold identification marking, a back mold identification marking,and a gasket identification marking of an appropriate front mold, backmold and gasket for producing the eyeglass lens in response to analyzingthe prescription information; wherein the front mold, the back mold andthe gasket together are operable to produce a mold cavity, the moldcavity being configured to hold a lens forming composition which iscurable to produce the eyeglass lens from the prescription, the frontmold member comprising the front mold identification marking, the backmold member comprising the back mold identification marking, and thegasket member comprising the gasket identification marking.
 398. Thesystem of claim 397, wherein, in receiving the prescription information,the controller software is further operable to read the prescriptioninformation from a barcode.
 399. The system of claim 397, furthercomprising: an input device operable by a user to enter prescriptioninformation; wherein, in receiving the prescription information, thecontroller software is further operable to: receive the prescriptioninformation from the input device.
 400. The system of claim 397, whereinthe prescription information comprises a sphere power, a cylinder power,and a lens location.
 401. The system of claim 400, further comprising:an information database; wherein, in analyzing the prescriptioninformation, the controller software is further operable to: correlatethe sphere power, the cylinder power and the lens location to a recordin the information database.
 402. The system of claim 401, wherein, indetermining the front mold identification marking, the back moldidentification marking, and the gasket identification marking, thecontroller software is further operable to: read the front moldidentification marking, the back mold identification marking, and thegasket identification marking from the record in the informationdatabase correlated with the sphere power, the cylinder power and thelens location.
 403. The system of claim 400, wherein the prescriptioninformation further comprises a monomer type and a lens type.
 404. Thesystem of claim 397, wherein the prescription information comprises asphere power, a cylinder power, an add power and a lens location. 405.The system of claim 404, further comprising: an information database;wherein, in analyzing the prescription information, the controllersoftware is further operable to: correlate the sphere power, thecylinder power, the add power, and the lens location to a record in theinformation database.
 406. The system of claim 405, wherein, indetermining the front mold identification marking, the back moldidentification marking, and the gasket identification marking, thecontroller software is further operable to: read the front moldidentification marking, the back mold identification marking, and thegasket identification marking from the record in the informationdatabase correlated with the sphere power, the cylinder power, the addpower, and the lens location.
 407. The system of claim 404, wherein theprescription information further comprises a monomer type and a lenstype.
 408. The system of claim 397, wherein the front moldidentification marking comprises an alphanumeric sequence, and whereinthe back mold identification marking comprises an alphanumeric sequence,and wherein the gasket identification marking comprises an alphanumericsequence.
 409. The system of claim 397, further comprising: a displaydevice coupled to the device; wherein the controller software is furtheroperable to: display the front mold identification marking, the backmold identification marking, and the gasket identification marking onthe display device subsequent to determining the front moldidentification marking, the back mold identification marking, and thegasket identification marking.
 410. The system of claim 397, wherein thecontroller software is further operable to: determine a specific lensforming composition for producing the eyeglass lens in response toanalyzing the prescription information.
 411. The system of claim 410,further comprising: a display device coupled to the device; wherein thecontroller software is further operable to: display the specific lensforming composition on a display device subsequent to determining thespecific lens forming composition.
 412. The system of claim 397, whereinthe controller software is further operable to: determine curingconditions for the eyeglass lens in response to analyzing theprescription information.
 413. The system of claim 397, wherein thecontroller software is further operable to: determine a second frontmold identification marking, a second back mold identification marking,and second a gasket identification marking of an appropriate secondfront mold, second back mold and second gasket for producing a secondeyeglass lens in response to analyzing the prescription information 414.The system of claim 397, wherein the device comprises: a curing unitconfigured to cure at least a portion of the lens forming composition;wherein the controller software is further operable to: control thecuring unit during the curing of at least a portion of the lens formingcomposition.
 415. The system of claim 414, wherein the controllersoftware is further operable to: determine curing conditions for theeyeglass lens in response to analyzing the prescription information; andwherein, in controlling the curing unit, the controller software isfurther operable to: control the curing unit such that the curingconditions for the eyeglass lens are produced.
 416. The system of claim415, wherein the curing unit comprises a plurality of light sources, andwherein, in controlling the curing unit, the controller software isfurther operable to: control the plurality of activating light sourcesto produce the curing conditions for the eyeglass lens.
 417. The systemof claim 414, wherein the curing unit is configured to cure at least aportion of the lens forming composition into the eyeglass lens bydirecting activating light toward the lens forming composition duringuse.
 418. The system of claim 414, wherein, in controlling the curingunit, the controller software is further operable to: control activatinglight directed toward the lens forming composition; wherein thedirecting of the activating light toward the lens forming composition inthe curing unit is effective to cure at least a portion of the lensforming composition into the eyeglass lens.
 419. The system of claim414, wherein, in controlling the curing unit, the controller software isfurther operable to: monitor a dose of activating light transmitted tothe lens forming composition; and vary the intensity or duration of theactivating light transmitted to the lens forming composition such that apredetermined dose is transmitted to the lens forming composition. 420.The system of claim 414, wherein the curing unit comprises a pluralityof light sources, and wherein, in controlling the curing unit, thecontroller software is further operable to: control each of theplurality of light sources independently.
 421. The system of claim 414,wherein the curing unit comprises a plurality of light sources, andwherein one or more of the plurality of light sources are above the moldmembers and one or more of the plurality of light sources are below themold members, and wherein, in controlling the curing unit, thecontroller software is further operable to: control the directing ofactivating light from the plurality of light sources toward at least oneof the mold members.
 422. The system of claim 414, wherein the curingunit comprises one or more light sources and one or more access doors,and wherein, in controlling the curing unit, the controller software isfurther operable to: prevent the one or more light sources from emittinglight when one or more of the access doors is opened.
 423. The system ofclaim 414, wherein the controller software is further operable to:determine curing conditions for a plurality of eyeglass lenses inresponse to analyzing the prescription information; and wherein, incontrolling the curing unit, the controller software is further operableto: control the curing unit such that the curing conditions for theplurality of eyeglass lenses are produced.
 424. The system of claim 423,wherein the controller software is further operable to: control thecuring unit substantially concurrently for the plurality of eyeglasslenses.
 425. The system of claim 397, further comprising: a post-cureunit configured to substantially complete curing of the eyeglass lens;wherein the controller software is further operable to: control thepost-cure unit during the substantially completing of the curing of theeyeglass lens.
 426. The system of claim 425, wherein the controllersoftware is further operable to: determine curing conditions for theeyeglass lens in response to analyzing the prescription information; andwherein, in controlling the post-cure unit, wherein the controllersoftware is further operable to: operate the post-cure unit such thatthe curing conditions are produced.
 427. The system of claim 426,wherein the post-cure unit comprises a plurality of light sources and aplurality of heat sources, and wherein, in controlling the post-cureunit, the controller software is further operable to: control theplurality of activating light sources and the plurality of heat sourcesto produce the curing conditions for the eyeglass lens.
 428. The systemof claim 425, wherein the post-cure unit is configured to apply heat andactivating light to the lens forming composition disposed in a moldassembly or a demolded lens to substantially complete curing of theeyeglass lens during use.
 429. The system of claim 425, wherein, incontrolling the post-cure unit, the controller software is furtheroperable to: control the application of heat and activating light to thelens forming composition disposed in a mold assembly or a demolded lens;wherein the application of heat and activating light in the post-cureunit is effective to substantially complete curing of the eyeglass lens.430. The system of claim 425, wherein the post-cure unit comprises aplurality of light sources and a plurality of heat sources, and wherein,in controlling the post-cure unit, the controller software is furtheroperable to: control each of the plurality of light sources and each ofthe plurality of heat sources independently.
 431. The system of claim425, wherein the post-cure unit comprises a plurality of light sourcesand a plurality of heat sources, and wherein one or more of theplurality of light sources are above the mold members and one or more ofthe plurality of light sources are below the mold members, and whereinone or more of the plurality of heat sources are above the mold membersand one or more of the plurality of heat sources are below the moldmembers, and wherein, in controlling the post-cure unit, the controllersoftware is further operable to: control the directing of activatinglight from the plurality of light sources toward at least one of themold members; and control the application of heat from the plurality oflight sources toward at least one of the mold members.
 432. The systemof claim 397, wherein the post-cure unit comprises one or more lightsources and one or more access doors, and wherein, in controlling thepost-cure unit, the controller software is further operable to: preventthe one or more light sources from emitting light when one or more ofthe access doors is opened.
 433. The system of claim 425, wherein thecontroller software is further operable to: determine curing conditionsfor a plurality of eyeglass lenses in response to analyzing theprescription information; and wherein, in controlling the post-cureunit, the controller software is further operable to: control thepost-cure unit such that the curing conditions for the plurality ofeyeglass lenses are produced.
 434. The system of claim 433, wherein thecontroller software is further operable to: control the post-cure unitsubstantially concurrently for the plurality of eyeglass lenses. 435.The system of claim 397, further comprising: a coating unit configuredto produce a coating on at least one of the mold members or the eyeglasslens during use; wherein the controller software is further operable to:control the coating unit when producing the coating on the at least oneof the mold or the eyeglass lens during use.
 436. The system of claim435, wherein the controller software is further operable to: determinecoating requirements for the eyeglass lens in response to user input;and wherein, in controlling the coating unit, the controller software isfurther operable to: operate the coating unit such that the coatingrequirements are produced.
 437. The system of claim 435, wherein thecoating unit is a spin coating unit, and wherein, in controlling thecoating unit, the controller software is further operable to: controlthe rotation of a lens holder, wherein the lens holder is configured tosubstantially secure the eyeglass lens during use.
 438. The system ofclaim 437, wherein, in controlling the rotation of the lens holder, thecontroller software is further operable to: control a rotational speedof the lens holder.
 439. The system of claim 435, wherein the coatingunit comprises a light source, and wherein, in controlling the coatingunit, the controller software is further operable to: control the lightsource.
 440. The system of claim 439, wherein, in controlling the lightsource, the controller software is further operable to: control aduration of the light source.
 441. The system of claim 435, wherein thecoating unit comprises a light source and one or more access doors, andwherein, in controlling the coating unit, the controller software isfurther operable to: prevent the light source from emitting light whenone or more of the access doors is opened.
 442. The system of claim 397,further comprising: a curing unit configured to cure the lens formingcomposition; and a post-cure unit configured to substantially completecuring of the eyeglass lens; wherein the controller software is furtheroperable to: control the curing unit during the curing of at least aportion of the lens forming composition; and control the post-cure unitduring the substantially completing of the curing of the eyeglass lens.443. The system of claim 442, wherein the controller software is furtheroperable to: determine curing conditions for the eyeglass lens inresponse to analyzing the prescription information; and wherein, incontrolling the curing unit and the post-cure unit, the controllersoftware is further operable to: control the curing unit and thepost-cure unit such that the curing conditions are produced.
 444. Thesystem of claim 442, wherein the controller software is further operableto: control the curing unit and the post-cure unit substantiallyconcurrently.
 445. The system of claim 442, further comprising: acoating unit configured to produce a coating on at least one of the moldmembers or the eyeglass lens during use. wherein the controller softwareis further operable to: control the coating unit when producing thecoating on the at least one of the mold members or the eyeglass lensduring use.
 446. The system of claim 445, wherein the controllersoftware is further operable to: determine coating requirements for theeyeglass lens in response to analyzing the prescription information; andwherein, in controlling the coating unit, the controller software isfurther operable to: operate the coating unit such that the coatingrequirements are produced.
 447. The system of claim 445, wherein, incontrolling the curing unit, controlling the post-cure unit, andcontrolling the coating unit, the controller software is furtheroperable to: control the curing unit, control the post-cure unit, andcontrol the coating unit substantially concurrently.
 448. The system ofclaim 397, wherein the controller software is further operable to: alterthe eyeglass prescription after receiving the prescription information.449. The system of claim 397, further comprising: a computer readablemedia coupled to the device; wherein the controller software is furtheroperable to: store the eyeglass prescription on the computer readablemedia.
 450. The system of claim 397, further comprising: a displaydevice coupled to the device; wherein the controller software is furtheroperable to: display operating instructions for a user of the device onthe display device during a lens forming process.
 451. A systemcomprising: a device configured to cure a lens forming composition in amold to produce an eyeglass lens from a prescription, the devicecomprising: a curing unit configured to cure the lens formingcomposition; and a post-cure unit configured to substantially completecuring of the eyeglass lens; a controller computer coupled to thedevice; and controller software executable on the controller computer,wherein the controller software is operable to: receive prescriptioninformation, wherein the prescription information defines an eyeglassprescription; analyze the prescription information; determine curingconditions for the eyeglass lens in response to analyzing theprescription information; control the curing unit during the curing ofat least a portion of the lens forming composition; and control thepost-cure unit during the substantially completing of the curing of theeyeglass lens.
 452. The system of claim 451, wherein, in controlling thecuring unit and the post-cure unit, the controller software is furtheroperable to control the curing unit and the post-cure unit such that thecuring conditions are produced to cure the lens forming composition toproduce the eyeglass lens from the prescription.
 453. The system ofclaim 451, wherein, in receiving the prescription information, thecontroller software is further operable to read the prescriptioninformation from a barcode.
 454. The system of claim 451, furthercomprising: an input device operable by a user to enter prescriptioninformation; wherein, in receiving the prescription information, thecontroller software is further operable to: receive the prescriptioninformation from the input device.
 455. The system of claim 451, whereinthe prescription information comprises a sphere power, a cylinder power,and a lens location.
 456. The system of claim 455, further comprising:an information database; wherein, in analyzing the prescriptioninformation, the controller software is further operable to: correlatethe sphere power, the cylinder power and the lens location to a recordin the information database.
 457. The system of claim 456, wherein, indetermining the front mold identification marking, the back moldidentification marking, and the gasket identification marking, thecontroller software is further operable to: read the front moldidentification marking, the back mold identification marking, and thegasket identification marking from the record in the informationdatabase correlated with the sphere power, the cylinder power and thelens location.
 458. The system of claim 455, wherein the prescriptioninformation further comprises a monomer type and a lens type.
 459. Thesystem of claim 451, wherein the prescription information comprises asphere power, a cylinder power, an add power and a lens location. 460.The system of claim 459, further comprising: an information database;wherein, in analyzing the prescription information, the controllersoftware is further operable to: correlate the sphere power, thecylinder power, the add power, and the lens location to a record in theinformation database.
 461. The system of claim 460, wherein, indetermining the front mold identification marking, the back moldidentification marking, and the gasket identification marking, thecontroller software is further operable to: read the front moldidentification marking, the back mold identification marking, and thegasket identification marking from the record in the informationdatabase correlated with the sphere power, the cylinder power, the addpower, and the lens location.
 462. The system of claim 459, wherein theprescription information further comprises a monomer type and a lenstype.
 463. The system of claim 451, wherein the curing unit isconfigured to cure at least a portion of the lens forming compositioninto the eyeglass lens by directing activating light toward the lensforming composition during use.
 464. The system of claim 451, wherein,in controlling the curing unit, the controller software is furtheroperable to: control activating light directed toward the lens formingcomposition; wherein the directing of the activating light toward thelens forming composition in the curing unit is effective to cure atleast a portion of the lens forming composition into the eyeglass lens.465. The system of claim 451, wherein the prescription informationcomprises a cylinder power, and wherein the controller software isfurther operable to: transpose a positive cylinder power to a negativecylinder power.
 466. The system of claim 451, wherein, in controllingthe curing unit, the controller software is further operable to: monitora dose of activating light transmitted to the lens forming composition;and vary the intensity or duration of the activating light transmittedto the lens forming composition such that a predetermined dose istransmitted to the lens forming composition.
 467. The system of claim451, wherein the curing unit comprises a plurality of light sources, andwherein, in controlling the curing unit, the controller software isfurther operable to: control each of the plurality of light sourcesindependently.
 468. The system of claim 451, wherein the curing unitcomprises a plurality of light sources, and wherein one or more of theplurality of light sources are above the mold members and one or more ofthe plurality of light sources are below the mold members, and wherein,in controlling the curing unit, the controller software is furtheroperable to: control the directing of activating light from theplurality of light sources toward at least one of the mold members. 469.The system of claim 451, wherein the curing unit comprises a pluralityof light sources, and wherein, in controlling the curing unit, thecontroller software is further operable to: control the activating lightsources to produce the curing conditions for the eyeglass lens.
 470. Thesystem of claim 451, wherein the curing unit comprises one or more lightsources and one or more access doors, and wherein, in controlling thecuring unit, the controller software is further operable to: prevent theone or more light sources from emitting light when one or more of theaccess doors is opened.
 471. The system of claim 451, wherein thecontroller software is further operable to: determine curing conditionsfor a plurality of eyeglass lenses in response to analyzing theprescription information; and wherein, in controlling the curing unit,the controller software is further operable to: control the curing unitsuch that the curing conditions for the plurality of eyeglass lenses areproduced.
 472. The system of claim 471, wherein the controller softwareis further operable to: control the curing unit substantiallyconcurrently for the plurality of eyeglass lenses.
 473. The system ofclaim 451, wherein the post-cure unit is configured to apply heat andactivating light to the lens forming composition disposed in a moldassembly or a demolded lens to substantially complete curing of theeyeglass lens during use.
 474. The system of claim 451, wherein, incontrolling the post-cure unit, the controller software is furtheroperable to: control the application of heat and activating light to thelens forming composition disposed in a mold assembly or a demolded lens;wherein the application of heat and activating light in the post-cureunit is effective to substantially complete curing of the eyeglass lens.475. The system of claim 451, wherein the post-cure unit comprises aplurality of light sources and a plurality of heat sources, and wherein,in controlling the post-cure unit, the controller software is furtheroperable to: control each of the plurality of light sources and each ofthe plurality of heat sources independently.
 476. The system of claim451, wherein the post-cure unit comprises a plurality of light sourcesand a plurality of heat sources, and wherein one or more of theplurality of light sources are above the mold members and one or more ofthe plurality of light sources are below the mold members, and whereinone or more of the plurality of heat sources are above the mold membersand one or more of the plurality of heat sources are below the moldmembers, and wherein, in controlling the post-cure unit, the controllersoftware is further operable to: control the directing of activatinglight from the plurality of light sources toward at least one of themold members; and control the application of heat from the plurality oflight sources toward at least one of the mold members.
 477. The systemof claim 451, wherein the post-cure unit comprises a plurality of lightsources and a plurality of heat sources, and wherein, in controlling thepost-cure unit, the controller software is further operable to: controlthe plurality of activating light sources and the plurality of heatsources to produce the curing conditions for the eyeglass lens.
 478. Thesystem of claim 451, wherein the post-cure unit comprises one or morelight sources and one or more access doors, and wherein, in controllingthe post-cure unit, the controller software is further operable to:prevent the one or more light sources from emitting light when one ormore of the access doors is opened.
 479. The system of claim 451,wherein the controller software is further operable to: determine curingconditions for a plurality of eyeglass lenses in response to analyzingthe prescription information; and wherein, in controlling the post-cureunit, the controller software is further operable to: control thepost-cure unit such that the curing conditions for the plurality ofeyeglass lenses are produced.
 480. The system of claim 479, wherein thecontroller software is further operable to: control the post-cure unitsubstantially concurrently for the plurality of eyeglass lenses. 481.The system of claim 451, further comprising: a coating unit configuredto produce a coating on at least one of the mold members or the eyeglasslens during use; wherein the controller software is further operable to:control the coating unit when producing the coating on the at least oneof the mold or the eyeglass lens during use.
 482. The system of claim481, wherein the controller software is further operable to: determinecoating requirements for the eyeglass lens in response to user input;and wherein, in controlling the coating unit, the controller software isfurther operable to: operate the coating unit such that the coatingrequirements are produced.
 483. The system of claim 481, wherein thecoating unit is a spin coating unit, and wherein, in controlling thecoating unit, the controller software is further operable to: controlthe rotation of a lens holder, wherein the lens holder is configured tosubstantially secure the eyeglass lens during use.
 484. The system ofclaim 483, wherein, in controlling the rotation of the lens holder, thecontroller software is further operable to: control a rotational speedof the lens holder.
 485. The system of claim 481, wherein the coatingunit comprises a light source, and wherein, in controlling the coatingunit, the controller software is further operable to: control the lightsource.
 486. The system of claim 485, wherein, in controlling the lightsource, the controller software is further operable to: control aduration of the light source.
 487. The system of claim 481, wherein thecoating unit comprises a light source and one or more access doors, andwherein, in controlling the coating unit, the controller software isfurther operable to: prevent the light source from emitting light whenone or more of the access doors is opened.
 488. The system of claim 481,wherein, in controlling the curing unit, controlling the post-cure unit,and controlling the coating unit, the controller software is furtheroperable to: control the curing unit, control the post-cure unit, andcontrol the coating unit substantially concurrently.
 489. The system ofclaim 451, wherein the controller software is further operable to:control the curing unit and the post-cure unit substantiallyconcurrently.
 490. The system of claim 451, further comprising: adisplay device coupled to the device; wherein the controller software isfurther operable to: display operating instructions for a user of thedevice on the display device during a lens forming process.
 491. Asystem comprising: a device configured to cure a lens formingcomposition disposed in a mold assembly to produce an eyeglass lens froma prescription, wherein the device comprises one or more components; adisplay device coupled to the device; a controller computer coupled tothe device; and controller software executable on the controllercomputer, wherein the controller software is operable to: monitoroperating conditions for the one or more components of the device;detect an operating error for one or more of the one or more componentsof the device; and display a message on the display device, the messagedescribing the operating error for the one or more of the one or morecomponents of the device.
 492. The method of claim 491, wherein the oneor more components comprise a curing unit configured to cure at least aportion of the lens forming composition.
 493. The system of claim 492,wherein the curing unit comprises one or more lamps configured toproduce activating light for curing the lens forming composition;wherein, in monitoring the operating conditions for the one or morecomponents of the device, the controller software is further operableto: monitor a time of use for the one or more lamps comprised in thecuring unit; and wherein, in detecting the operating error, thecontroller software is further operable to: detect that the time of usefor one or more of the one or more lamps has exceeded a maximum time ofuse.
 494. The system of claim 492, wherein the curing unit comprises oneor more lamps configured to produce activating light for curing the lensforming composition; wherein, in monitoring the operating conditions forthe one or more components of the device, the controller software isfurther operable to: monitor an intensity of the light produced by theone or more lamps comprised in the curing unit; and wherein, indetecting the operating error, the controller software is furtheroperable to: detect that the intensity of the light of one or more ofthe one or more lamps is outside an optimal light intensity range forthe lamps.
 495. The system of claim 492, wherein the curing unitcomprises one or more lamps configured to produce activating light forcuring the lens forming composition; wherein, in monitoring theoperating conditions for the one or more components of the device, thecontroller software is further operable to: monitor a current throughthe one or more lamps comprised in the curing unit; and wherein, indetecting the operating error, the controller software is furtheroperable to: detect that the current through the one or more of the oneor more lamps is outside an optimal current range for the lamps. 496.The system of claim 491, wherein the one or more components comprise apost-cure unit configured to substantially complete curing of the lensforming composition disposed in the mold assembly or a demolded lens.497. The system of claim 496, wherein the post-cure unit comprises oneor more lamps configured to produce activating light for curing the lensforming composition disposed in the mold assembly or the demolded lens;wherein, in monitoring the operating conditions for the one or morecomponents of the device, the controller software is further operableto: monitor a time of use for the one or more lamps comprised in thepost-cure unit; and wherein, in detecting the operating error, thecontroller software is further operable to: detect that the time of usefor one or more of the one or more lamps has exceeded a maximum time ofuse.
 498. The system of claim 496, wherein the post-cure unit comprisesone or more lamps configured to produce activating light for curing thelens forming composition disposed in the mold assembly or the demoldedlens; wherein, in monitoring the operating conditions for the one ormore components of the device, the controller software is furtheroperable to: monitor an intensity of the light produced by the one ormore lamps comprised in the post-cure unit; and wherein, in detectingthe operating error, the controller software is further operable to:detect that the intensity of the light of one or more of the one or morelamps is outside an optimal light intensity range for the lamps. 499.The system of claim 496, wherein the post-cure unit comprises one ormore lamps configured to produce activating light for curing the lensforming composition disposed in the mold assembly or the demolded lens;wherein, in monitoring the operating conditions for the one or morecomponents of the device, the controller software is further operableto: monitor a current through the one or more lamps comprised in thepost-cure unit; and wherein, in detecting the operating error, thecontroller software is further operable to: detect that the currentthrough the one or more of the one or more lamps is outside an optimalcurrent range for the lamps.
 500. The system of claim 496, wherein thepost-cure unit comprises one or more heating units configured to produceheat for curing the lens forming composition disposed in the moldassembly or the demolded lens; wherein, in monitoring the operatingconditions for the one or more components of the device, the controllersoftware is further operable to: monitor a current through the one ormore heating units comprised in the post-cure unit; and wherein, indetecting the operating error, the controller software is furtheroperable to: detect that the current through the one or more of the oneor more heating units is outside an optimal current range for theheating units.
 501. The system of claim 491, wherein the one or morecomponents comprise a coating unit configured to produce a coating on atleast one of the mold or the eyeglass lens during use.
 502. The systemof claim 501, wherein the coating unit comprises one or more lamps;wherein, in monitoring the operating conditions for the one or morecomponents of the device, the controller software is further operableto: monitor a time of use for the one or more lamps comprised in thecoating unit; and wherein, in detecting the operating error, thecontroller software is further operable to: detect that the time of usefor one or more of the one or more lamps has exceeded a maximum time ofuse.
 503. The system of claim 501, wherein the coating unit comprisesone or more lamps; wherein, in monitoring the operating conditions forthe one or more components of the device, the controller software isfurther operable to: monitor an intensity of the light produced by theone or more lamps comprised in the coating unit; and wherein, indetecting the operating error, the controller software is furtheroperable to: detect that the intensity of the light of one or more ofthe one or more lamps is outside an optimal light intensity range forthe lamps.
 504. The system of claim 501, wherein the coating unitcomprises one or more lamps; wherein, in monitoring the operatingconditions for the one or more components of the device, the controllersoftware is further operable to: monitor a current through the one ormore lamps comprised in the coating unit; and wherein, in detecting theoperating error, the controller software is further operable to: detectthat the current through the one or more of the one or more lamps isoutside an optimal current range for the lamps.
 505. The system of claim491, wherein the one or more components comprise: a curing unitconfigured to cure at least a portion of the lens forming composition; apost-cure unit configured to substantially complete curing of theeyeglass lens; and a coating unit configured to produce a coating on atleast one of the mold or the eyeglass lens during use.
 506. The systemof claim 491, wherein the controller software is further operable to:monitoring maintenance schedules for one or more components of thedevice; detecting that one or more of the one or more components are duefor maintenance; and displaying a message on a display device coupled tothe device, the message describing the required maintenance for the oneor more of the one or more components of the device.
 507. The system ofclaim 491, wherein, in monitoring the operating conditions for acomponent, the controller software is further operable to: monitor anoperating parameter to determine if the operating parameter is within anoptimal operating range for the component; and wherein an operatingrange error occurs when the operating parameter for the component isoutside the optimal operating range for the component.
 508. The systemof claim 491, wherein, in detecting an operating error, the controllersoftware is further operable to: detect an operating range error for oneor more of the one or more components of the device; and wherein anoperating range error occurs when an operating parameter for a componentis outside an optimal operating range for the component.
 509. The systemof claim 491, wherein the message displayed on the display devicedescribes an operating range error for one or more of the one or morecomponents of the device, and wherein an operating range error occurswhen an operating parameter for a component is outside an optimaloperating range for the component.
 510. A method for forming an at leastpartially antireflective coating on a visible light-transmittingsubstrate, comprising: applying a first composition to at least onesurface of the visible light-transmitting substrate to form a firstcoating layer, the first composition comprising a first metal alkoxide;applying a second composition to the first coating layer, the secondcomposition comprising an initiator and an ethylenically substitutedmonomer, wherein the second composition is curable by the application ofultraviolet light; and directing ultraviolet light toward the secondcomposition, wherein the ultraviolet light initiates curing of thesecond composition to form a second coating layer.
 511. The method ofclaim 510, wherein the first composition is curable by the applicationof ultraviolet light.
 512. The method of claim 510, further comprisingdirecting ultraviolet light toward the first composition, wherein theultraviolet light initiates curing of the first composition to form thefirst coating layer.
 513. The method of claim 510, further comprisingheating the first composition, wherein heating the first compositioninitiates curing of the first composition to form the first coatinglayer.
 514. The method of claim 510, wherein the first coating layer hasan index of refraction that is greater than an index of refraction ofthe visible light-transmitting substrate.
 515. The method of claim 510,wherein the second coating layer has an index of refraction that is lessthan an index of refraction of the first coating layer.
 516. The methodof claim 510, wherein the first coating layer has an index of refractionthat is greater than an index of refraction of the visiblelight-transmitting substrate, and wherein the second coating layer hasan index of refraction that is less than an index of refraction of thefirst coating layer.
 517. The method of claim 510, wherein the initiatorcomprises a second metal alkoxide.
 518. The method of claim 517, whereinthe first and second metal alkoxides have the general formula M(Y)_(p)wherein M is titanium, aluminum, zirconium, boron, tin, indium,antimony, or zinc, Y is a C₁-C₁₀ alkoxy or acetylacetonate, and p is aninteger equivalent to the valence of M.
 519. The method of claim 517,wherein the first and second metal alkoxides have the general formulaTi(OR)₄, where R is a C₁-C₁₀ alkyl.
 520. The method of claim 517,wherein the first and second metal alkoxides comprise titaniummethoxide, titanium ethoxide, titanium isopropoxide, titanium butoxide,or titanium allylacetoacetate triisopropoxide.
 521. The method of claim517, wherein the first composition further comprises a photoinitiator.522. The method of claim 510, wherein the first composition furthercomprises colloidal silica.
 523. The method of claim 510, wherein thevisible light-transmitting substrate is a plastic lens.
 524. The methodof claim 510, wherein the visible light transmitting substrate is aglass lens.
 525. The method of claim 510, wherein the first compositionfurther comprises a coinitiator.
 526. The method of claim 510, whereinthe first composition further comprises an ethylenically substitutedmonomer.
 527. The method of claim 510, wherein the first compositionfurther comprises an organic solvent.
 528. The method of claim 510,wherein the second composition comprises a silane monomer.
 529. Themethod of claim 510, wherein the second composition comprises afluoroacrylate.
 530. The method of claim 510, wherein the initiatorcomprises a second metal alkoxide, and wherein the second metal alkoxidecomprises a titanium alkoxide and an aluminum alkoxide.
 531. The methodof claim 510, wherein the second composition further comprises aphotoinitiator.
 532. The method of claim 510, wherein the ethylenicallysubstituted monomer comprises dipentaerythritol tetracrylate.
 533. Themethod of claim 510, wherein the second composition further comprises anorganic solvent.
 534. The method of claim 510, further comprisingforming a hardcoat layer on the surface of the visiblelight-transmitting substrate prior to applying the first composition tothe surface of the visible light-transmitting substrate.
 535. The methodof claim 534, wherein forming a hardcoat layer on the surface of thevisible light-transmitting substrate comprises: applying an ultravioletlight curable hardcoat composition to the surface of the visiblelight-transmitting substrate; and directing ultraviolet light toward thehardcoat composition, wherein the ultraviolet light initiates curing ofthe hardcoat composition to form the hardcoat layer.
 536. The method ofclaim 535, wherein applying the hardcoat composition to the surface ofthe visible light-transmitting substrate comprises rotating the visiblelight-transmitting substrate while directing the hardcoat compositiontoward the lens.
 537. The method of claim 510, wherein applying thefirst composition comprises directing the first composition toward thevisible light-transmitting substrate while rotating the visiblelight-transmitting substrate.
 538. The method of claim 510, whereinapplying the second composition comprises directing the secondcomposition toward the visible light-transmitting substrate whilerotating the visible light-transmitting substrate.
 539. The method ofclaim 510, wherein ultraviolet light is directed toward the secondcomposition for a time of less than about 90 seconds.
 540. The method ofclaim 510, wherein ultraviolet light is directed toward the secondcomposition for a time of less than about 90 seconds.
 541. The method ofclaim 510, further comprising heating the visible light-transmittingsubstrate at a temperature of between about 40° C. and about 140° C. fora time of less than about 10 minutes.
 542. The method of claim 510,wherein applying the first composition to the visible light-transmittingsubstrate comprises: applying a first portion of the first compositionto the visible light-transmitting substrate; drying the first portion ofthe first composition; applying a second portion of the firstcomposition to the dried first portion; and drying the second portion ofthe first composition.
 543. The method of claim 510, wherein theultraviolet light is produced by a germicidal lamp.
 544. The method ofclaim 510, wherein the ultraviolet light is produced by a flash lamp.545. The method of claim 510, further comprising forming a hardcoatlayer upon the surface of the visible light transmitting substrate priorto forming the first coating layer.
 546. The method of claim 510,wherein the first composition is applied to a front surface of thevisible light-transmitting substrate.
 547. The method of claim 510,wherein the first composition is applied to a back surface of thevisible light-transmitting substrate.
 548. The method of claim 510,wherein the first composition is applied to a front surface and a backsurface of the visible light-transmitting substrate.
 549. The method ofclaim 510, wherein a thickness of the first coating layer and the secondcoating layer, combined, is less than about 500 nm.
 550. The method ofclaim 510, wherein the antireflective coating is formed in less thanabout 10 min.
 551. A method for forming a plastic lens, comprising:applying a second composition to a casting face of a first mold member,the second composition comprising a first photoinitiator and anethylenically substituted monomer, wherein the second composition iscurable by the application of ultraviolet light; directing ultravioletlight toward the second composition, wherein the ultraviolet lightinitiates curing of the second composition to form a second coatinglayer; applying a first composition to the second coating layer to forma first coating layer, the first composition comprising a metalalkoxide; assembling a mold assembly, the mold assembly comprising thefirst mold member and a second mold member, wherein the first moldmember and the second mold member together define a mold cavity; placinga liquid lens forming composition in the mold cavity, the liquid lensforming composition comprising a monomer composition and a secondphotoinitiator; directing activating light toward the mold cavity; anddemolding the formed lens from the mold cavity, wherein the first andsecond coating layers are transferred to an outer surface of the formedlens.
 552. The method of claim 551, wherein the first composition iscurable by the application of ultraviolet light.
 553. The method ofclaim 551, further comprising directing ultraviolet light toward thefirst composition, wherein the ultraviolet light initiates curing of thefirst composition to form the first coating layer.
 554. The method ofclaim 551, further comprising heating the first composition, whereinheating the first composition initiates curing of the first compositionto form the first coating layer.
 555. The method of claim 551, whereinthe first coating layer has an index of refraction that is greater thanan index of refraction of the plastic eyeglass lens.
 556. The method ofclaim 551, wherein the second coating layer has an index of refractionthat is less than an index of refraction of the first coating layer.557. The method of claim 551, wherein the first coating layer has anindex of refraction that is greater than an index of refraction of theplastic eyeglass lens, and wherein the second coating layer has an indexof refraction that is less than an index of refraction of the firstcoating layer.
 558. The method of claim 551, wherein the metal alkoxidehas the general formula M(Y)_(p) wherein M is titanium, aluminum,zirconium, boron, tin, indium, antimony, or zinc, Y is a C₁-C₁₀ alkoxyor acetylacetonate, and p is an integer equivalent to the valence of M.559. The method of claim 551, wherein the metal alkoxide has the generalformula Ti(OR)₄, where R is a C₁-C₁₀ alkyl.
 560. The method of claim551, wherein the metal alkoxide comprises titanium methoxide, titaniumethoxide, titanium isopropoxide, titanium allylacetoacetatetriisopropoxide, or titanium butoxide.
 561. The method of claim 551,wherein the first composition further comprises a photoinitiator. 562.The method of claim 551, wherein the first composition further comprisescolloidal silica.
 563. The method of claim 551, wherein the metalalkoxide comprises a mixture of a titanium alkoxide and a zirconiumalkoxide.
 564. The method of claim 551, wherein the metal alkoxidecomprises a mixture of a titanium alkoxide and an aluminum alkoxide.565. The method of claim 551, wherein the first composition furthercomprises a coinitiator.
 566. The method of claim 551, wherein the firstcomposition further comprises an ethylenically substituted monomer. 567.The method of claim 551, wherein the first composition further comprisesan organic solvent.
 568. The method of claim 551, wherein the secondcomposition further comprises an organic solvent.
 569. The method ofclaim 551, wherein the second composition comprises a fluoroacrylate.570. The method of claim 551, wherein the ethylenically substitutedmonomer comprises dipentaerythritol tetracrylate.
 571. The method ofclaim 551, further comprising forming an adhesion layer on the surfaceof the first coating layer prior to placing the polymerizable lensforming composition into the mold cavity.
 572. The method of claim 551,wherein applying the first composition comprises directing the firstcomposition toward the first mold while rotating the first mold. 573.The method of claim 551, wherein applying the second compositioncomprises directing the second composition toward the first mold whilerotating the first mold.
 574. The method of claim 551, wherein applyingthe first composition to the second coating layer comprises: applying afirst portion of the first composition to the second coating layer;drying the first portion of the first composition; applying a secondportion of the first composition to the dried first portion; and dryingthe second portion of the first composition.
 575. The method of claim551, wherein the first mold is used to cast a front surface of theplastic lens.
 576. The method of claim 551, wherein the first mold isused to cast a back surface of the plastic lens.
 577. The method ofclaim 551, further comprising: applying the second composition to acasting face of the second mold member; directing ultraviolet lighttoward the second composition on the second mold member, wherein theultraviolet light initiates curing of the second composition to form asecond coating layer on the second mold member; applying a firstcomposition to the second coating layer of the second mold member toform a first coating layer, the first composition comprising a metalalkoxide;
 578. The method of claim 551, wherein the monomer compositioncomprises at least one polyethylenic-functional monomer containing twoethylenically unsaturated groups selected from acrylyl and methacrylyl.579. The method of claim 551, wherein the monomer composition comprisesan aromatic containing polyethylenic polyether functional monomer. 580.The method of claim 551, wherein the lens forming composition furthercomprises a co-initiator composition, wherein the co-initiatorcomposition comprises an amine.
 581. The method of claim 551, whereinthe lens forming composition further comprises a co-initiatorcomposition, wherein the co-initiator composition comprises an acrylatedamine.
 582. The method of claim 551, wherein the second photoinitiatorcomprises bis(2,6-dimethoxybenzoyl)-(2,4,4-trimethylphenyl)phosphineoxide.
 583. The method of claim 551, wherein the lens formingcomposition further comprises an activating light absorbing compound.584. The method of claim 551, wherein the lens forming compositionfurther comprises a photochromic compound.
 585. The method of claim 551,wherein the lens forming composition further comprises an ultravioletlight absorbing compound.
 586. The method of claim 551, wherein thefirst coating layer and the second coating layer, combined, have athickness of less than about 500 nm.
 587. The method of claim 551,wherein the first and second coating layers are formed in a time of lessthan about 10 minutes.
 588. A plastic eyeglass lens comprising an atleast partially antireflective coating, formed by the method,comprising: applying a first composition to at least one surface of anon-coated plastic eyeglass lens to form a first coating layer, thefirst composition comprising a first metal alkoxide; applying a secondcomposition to the first coating layer, the second compositioncomprising an initiator and an ethylenically substituted monomer,wherein the second composition is curable by the application ofultraviolet light; and directing ultraviolet light toward the secondcomposition, wherein the ultraviolet light initiates curing of thesecond composition to form a second coating layer.
 589. The eyeglasslens of claim 588, wherein the first composition is curable by theapplication of ultraviolet light.
 590. The eyeglass lens of claim 588,wherein the method further comprises directing ultraviolet light towardthe first composition, wherein the ultraviolet light initiates curing ofthe first composition to form the first coating layer.
 591. The eyeglasslens of claim 588, wherein the method further comprises heating thefirst composition, wherein heating the first composition initiatescuring of the first composition to form the first coating layer. 592.The eyeglass lens of claim 588, wherein the first coating layer has anindex of refraction that is greater than an index of refraction of theplastic eyeglass lens.
 593. The eyeglass lens of claim 588, wherein thesecond coating layer has an index of refraction that is less than anindex of refraction of the first coating layer.
 594. The eyeglass lensof claim 588, wherein the first coating layer has an index of refractionthat is greater than an index of refraction of the plastic eyeglasslens, and wherein the second coating layer has an index of refractionthat is less than an index of refraction of the first coating layer.595. The eyeglass lens of claim 588, wherein the initiator comprises asecond metal alkoxide.
 596. The eyeglass lens of claim 595, wherein thefirst and second metal alkoxides have the general formula M(Y)_(p)wherein M is titanium, aluminum, zirconium, boron, tin, indium,antimony, or zinc, Y is a C₁-C₁₀ alkoxy or acetylacetonate, and p is aninteger equivalent to the valence of M.
 597. The eyeglass lens of claim596, wherein the first and second metal alkoxides have the generalformula Ti(OR)₄, where R is a C₁-C₁₀ alkyl.
 598. The eyeglass lens ofclaim 596, wherein the first and second metal alkoxides comprisetitanium methoxide, titanium ethoxide, titanium isopropoxide, titaniumallylacetoacetate triisopropoxide, or titanium butoxide.
 599. Theeyeglass lens of claim 588, wherein the first composition furthercomprises a photoinitiator.
 600. The eyeglass lens of claim 588, whereinthe first composition further comprises colloidal silica.
 601. Theeyeglass lens of claim 588, wherein the first metal alkoxide comprises amixture of a titanium alkoxide and a zirconium alkoxide.
 602. Theeyeglass lens of claim 588, wherein the first metal alkoxide comprises amixture of a titanium alkoxide and a n aluminum alkoxide.
 603. Theeyeglass lens of claim 588, wherein the first composition furthercomprises a coinitiator.
 604. The eyeglass lens of claim 588, whereinthe first composition further comprises an ethylenically substitutedmonomer.
 605. The eyeglass lens of claim 588, wherein the secondcomposition comprises a silane monomer.
 606. The eyeglass lens of claim588, wherein the second composition comprises a fluoroacrylate.
 607. Theeyeglass lens of claim 588, wherein the initiator comprises a secondmetal alkoxide, and wherein the second metal alkoxide comprises atitanium alkoxide and an aluminum alkoxide.
 608. The eyeglass lens ofclaim 588, wherein the second composition further comprises aphotoinitiator.
 609. The eyeglass lens of claim 588, wherein theethylenically substituted monomer comprises dipentaerythritoltetracrylate.
 610. The eyeglass lens of claim 588, wherein the methodfurther comprises forming a hardcoat layer on the surface of the plasticlens prior to applying the first composition to the surface of theplastic lens.
 611. The eyeglass lens of claim 610, wherein forming ahardcoat layer on the surface of the plastic lens comprises: applying anultraviolet light curable hardcoat composition to the surface of theplastic lens; and directing ultraviolet light toward the hardcoatcomposition, wherein the ultraviolet light initiates curing of thehardcoat composition to form the hardcoat layer.
 612. The eyeglass lensof claim 611, wherein applying the hardcoat composition to the surfaceof the plastic lens comprises rotating the plastic lens while directingthe hardcoat composition toward the lens.
 613. The eyeglass lens ofclaim 588, wherein applying the first composition comprises directingthe first composition toward the plastic lens while rotating the plasticlens.
 614. The eyeglass lens of claim 588, wherein applying the secondcomposition to comprises directing the second composition toward theplastic lens while rotating the plastic lens.
 615. The eyeglass lens ofclaim 588, wherein ultraviolet light is directed toward the firstcomposition for a time of less than about 90 seconds.
 616. The eyeglasslens of claim 588, wherein ultraviolet light is directed toward thesecond composition for a time of less than about 90 seconds.
 617. Theeyeglass lens of claim 588, the method further comprises heating theplastic lens at a temperature of greater than about 100° C. for a timeof less than about 10 minutes.
 618. The eyeglass lens of claim 588,wherein applying the first composition to the plastic lens comprises:applying a first portion of the first composition to the plastic lens;drying the first portion of the first composition; applying a secondportion of the first composition to the dried first portion; and dryingthe second portion of the first composition.
 619. The eyeglass lens ofclaim 588, wherein the ultraviolet light is produced by a germicidallamp.
 620. The eyeglass lens of claim 588, wherein the ultraviolet lightis produced by a flash lamp.
 621. The eyeglass lens of claim 588,wherein the first composition is applied to a front surface of theplastic lens.
 622. The eyeglass lens of claim 588, wherein the firstcomposition is applied to a back surface of the plastic lens.
 623. Theeyeglass lens of claim 588, wherein the first composition is applied toa front surface and a back surface of the plastic lens.
 624. An eyeglasslens made by the method, comprising: applying a second composition to acasting face of a first mold member, the second composition comprising afirst photoinitiator and an ethylenically substituted monomer, whereinthe second composition is curable by the application of ultravioletlight; directing ultraviolet light toward the second composition,wherein the ultraviolet light initiates curing of the second compositionto form a second coating layer; applying a first composition to thesecond coating layer to form a first coating layer, the firstcomposition comprising a metal alkoxide; assembling a mold assembly, themold assembly comprising the first mold member and a second mold member,wherein the first mold member and the second mold member together definea mold cavity; placing a liquid lens forming composition in the moldcavity, the liquid lens forming composition comprising a monomercomposition and a second photoinitiator; directing activating lighttoward the mold cavity; and demolding the formed lens from the moldcavity, wherein the first and second coating layers are transferred toan outer surface of the formed lens.
 625. The eyeglass lens of claim624, wherein the first composition is curable by the application ofultraviolet light.
 626. The eyeglass lens of claim 624, wherein themethod further comprises directing ultraviolet light toward the firstcomposition, wherein the ultraviolet light initiates curing of the firstcomposition to form the first coating layer.
 627. The eyeglass lens ofclaim 624, wherein the method further comprises heating the firstcomposition, wherein heating the first composition initiates curing ofthe first composition to form the first coating layer.
 628. The eyeglasslens of claim 624, wherein the first coating layer has an index ofrefraction that is greater than an index of refraction of the plasticeyeglass lens.
 629. The eyeglass lens of claim 624, wherein the secondcoating layer has an index of refraction that is less than an index ofrefraction of the first coating layer.
 630. The eyeglass lens of claim624, wherein the first coating layer has an index of refraction that isgreater than an index of refraction of the plastic eyeglass lens, andwherein the second coating layer has an index of refraction that is lessthan an index of refraction of the first coating layer.
 631. Theeyeglass lens of claim 624, wherein the metal alkoxide has the generalformula M(Y)_(p) wherein M is titanium, aluminum, zirconium, boron, tin,indium, antimony, or zinc, Y is a C₁-C₁₀ alkoxy or acetylacetonate, andp is an integer equivalent to the valence of M.
 632. The eyeglass lensof claim 624, wherein the metal alkoxide has the general formulaTi(OR)₄, where R is a C₁-C₁₀ alkyl.
 633. The eyeglass lens of claim 624,wherein the metal alkoxide comprises titanium methoxide, titaniumethoxide, titanium isopropoxide, titanium allylacetoacetatetriisopropoxide, or titanium butoxide.
 634. The eyeglass lens of claim624, wherein the first composition further comprises a photoinitiator.635. The eyeglass lens of claim 624, wherein the first compositionfurther comprises colloidal silica.
 636. The eyeglass lens of claim 624,wherein the metal alkoxide comprises a mixture of a titanium alkoxideand a zirconium alkoxide.
 637. The eyeglass lens of claim 624, whereinthe metal alkoxide comprises a mixture of a titanium alkoxide and analuminum alkoxide.
 638. The eyeglass lens of claim 624, wherein thefirst composition further comprises a coinitiator.
 639. The eyeglasslens of claim 624, wherein the first composition further comprises anethylenically substituted monomer.
 640. The eyeglass lens of claim 624,wherein the second composition comprises a fluoroacrylate.
 641. Theeyeglass lens of claim 624, wherein the ethylenically substitutedmonomer comprises dipentacrylthritol tetracrylate.
 642. The eyeglasslens of claim 624, further comprising forming an adhesion layer on thesurface of the first coating layer prior to placing the polymerizablelens forming composition into the mold cavity.
 643. The eyeglass lens ofclaim 624, wherein applying the first composition comprises directingthe first composition toward the first mold while rotating the firstmold.
 644. The eyeglass lens of claim 624, wherein applying the secondcomposition comprises directing the second composition toward the firstmold while rotating the first mold.
 645. The eyeglass lens of claim 624,wherein applying the first composition to the second coating layercomprises: applying a first portion of the first composition to thesecond coating layer; drying the first portion of the first composition;applying a second portion of the first composition to the dried firstportion; and drying the second portion of the first composition. 646.The eyeglass lens of claim 624, wherein the first mold is used to cast afront surface of the plastic lens.
 647. The eyeglass lens of claim 624,wherein the first mold is used to cast a back surface of the plasticlens.
 648. The eyeglass lens of claim 624, further comprising: applyingthe second composition to a casting face of the second mold member;directing ultraviolet light toward the second composition on the secondmold member, wherein the ultraviolet light initiates curing of thesecond composition to form a second coating layer on the second moldmember; applying a first composition to the second coating layer of thesecond mold member to form a first coating layer, the first compositioncomprising a metal alkoxide;
 649. The eyeglass lens of claim 624,wherein the monomer composition comprises at least onepolyethylenic-functional monomer containing two ethylenicallyunsaturated groups selected from acrylyl and methacrylyl.
 650. Theeyeglass lens of claim 624, wherein the monomer composition comprises anaromatic containing polyethylenic polyether functional monomer.
 651. Theeyeglass lens of claim 624, wherein the lens forming composition furthercomprises a co-initiator composition, wherein the co-initiatorcomposition comprises an amine.
 652. The eyeglass lens of claim 624,wherein the lens forming composition further comprises a co-initiatorcomposition, wherein the co-initiator composition comprises an acrylatedamine.
 653. The eyeglass lens of claim 624, wherein the secondphotoinitiator comprisesbis(2,6-dimethoxybenzoyl)-(2,4,4-trimethylphenyl)phosphine oxide. 654.The eyeglass lens of claim 624, wherein the lens forming compositionfurther comprises an activating light absorbing compound.
 655. Theeyeglass lens of claim 624, wherein the lens forming composition furthercomprises a photochromic compound.
 656. The eyeglass lens of claim 624,wherein the lens forming composition further comprises an ultravioletlight absorbing compound.
 657. A method for forming an at leastpartially antireflective coating on a lens, comprising: applying a firstcomposition to at least one surface of the lens to form a first coatinglayer, the first composition comprising a first metal alkoxide; applyinga silicon containing composition to the first composition to form asilicon layer, the silicon containing composition comprising colloidalsilicon or a silane monomer; applying a second composition to thesilicon layer, the second composition comprising an initiator and anethylenically substituted monomer, wherein the second composition iscurable by the application of ultraviolet light; and directingultraviolet light toward the second composition, wherein the ultravioletlight initiates curing of the second composition to form a secondcoating layer.
 658. A method for forming a plastic lens, comprising:applying a second composition to a casting face of a first mold member,the second composition comprising a first photoinitiator and anethylenically substituted monomer, wherein the second composition iscurable by the application of ultraviolet light; directing ultravioletlight toward the second composition, wherein the ultraviolet lightinitiates curing of the second composition to form a second coatinglayer; applying a silicon containing composition to the secondcomposition to form a silicon layer, the silicon containing compositioncomprising colloidal silicon or a silane monomer; applying a firstcomposition to the silicon layer to form a first coating layer, thefirst composition comprising a metal alkoxide; assembling a moldassembly, the mold assembly comprising the first mold member and asecond mold member, wherein the first mold member and the second moldmember together define a mold cavity; placing a liquid lens formingcomposition in the mold cavity, the liquid lens forming compositioncomprising a monomer composition and a second photoinitiator; directingactivating light toward the mold cavity; and demolding the formed lensfrom the mold cavity, wherein the first and second coating layers aretransferred to an outer surface of the formed lens.
 659. A plasticeyeglass lens comprising an at least partially antireflective coating,formed by the method, comprising: applying a first composition to atleast one surface of a non-coated plastic eyeglass lens to form a firstcoating layer, the first composition comprising a first metal alkoxide;applying a silicon containing composition to the first composition toform a silicon layer, the silicon containing composition comprisingcolloidal silicon or a silane monomer; applying a second composition tothe first coating layer, the second composition comprising an initiatorand an ethylenically substituted monomer, wherein the second compositionis curable by the application of ultraviolet light; and directingultraviolet light toward the second composition, wherein the ultravioletlight initiates curing of the second composition to form a secondcoating layer.
 660. An eyeglass lens made by the method, comprising:applying a second composition to a casting face of a first mold member,the second composition comprising a first photoinitiator and anethylenically substituted monomer, wherein the second composition iscurable by the application of ultraviolet light; directing ultravioletlight toward the second composition, wherein the ultraviolet lightinitiates curing of the second composition to form a second coatinglayer; applying a silicon containing composition to the secondcomposition to form a silicon layer, the silicon containing compositioncomprising colloidal silicon or a silane monomer; applying a firstcomposition to the silicon layer to form a first coating layer, thefirst composition comprising a metal alkoxide; assembling a moldassembly, the mold assembly comprising the first mold member and asecond mold member, wherein the first mold member and the second moldmember together define a mold cavity; placing a liquid lens formingcomposition in the mold cavity, the liquid lens forming compositioncomprising a monomer composition and a second photoinitiator; directingactivating light toward the mold cavity; and demolding the formed lensfrom the mold cavity, wherein the first and second coating layers aretransferred to an outer surface of the formed lens.
 661. An eyeglasslens comprising an at least partially antireflective coating formed uponan outer surface of the eyeglass lens, wherein the at least partiallyantireflective coating comprises a first coating layer and a secondcoating layer; and wherein the first coating layer comprises a reactionproduct of the components of a first composition with water or analcohol, the first composition comprising a metal alkoxide; and whereinthe second coating layer comprises a reaction product of the componentsof a second composition, the second composition comprising an initiatorand an ethylenically substituted monomer, wherein the second compositionis curable by the application of ultraviolet light.
 662. The eyeglasslens of claim 661, wherein the first composition is curable by theapplication of ultraviolet light.
 663. The eyeglass lens of claim 661,wherein the first coating layer has an index of refraction that isgreater than an index of refraction of the plastic eyeglass lens. 664.The eyeglass lens of claim 661, wherein the second coating layer has anindex of refraction that is less than an index of refraction of thefirst coating layer.
 665. The eyeglass lens of claim 661, wherein thefirst coating layer has an index of refraction that is greater than anindex of refraction of the plastic eyeglass lens, and wherein the secondcoating layer has an index of refraction that is less than an index ofrefraction of the first coating layer.
 666. The eyeglass lens of claim661, wherein the initiator comprises a second metal alkoxide.
 667. Theeyeglass lens of claim 666, wherein the first and second metal alkoxideshave the general formula M(Y)_(p) wherein M is titanium, aluminum,zirconium, boron, tin, indium, antimony, or zinc, Y is a C₁-C₁₀ alkoxyor acetylacetonate, and p is an integer equivalent to the valence of M.668. The eyeglass lens of claim 666, wherein the first and second metalalkoxides have the general formula Ti(OR)₄, where R is a C₁-C₁₀ alkyl.669. The eyeglass lens of claim 666, wherein the first and second metalalkoxides comprise titanium methoxide, titanium ethoxide, titaniumisopropoxide, titanium butoxide, or titanium allylacetoacetatetriisopropoxide.
 670. The eyeglass lens of claim 661, wherein the firstcomposition further comprises a photoinitiator.
 671. The eyeglass lensof claim 661, wherein the first composition further comprises colloidalsilica.
 672. The eyeglass lens of claim 661, wherein the firstcomposition further comprises a coinitiator.
 673. The eyeglass lens ofclaim 661, wherein the first composition further comprises anethylenically substituted monomer.
 674. The eyeglass lens of claim 661,wherein the first composition further comprises an organic solvent. 675.The eyeglass lens of claim 661, wherein the second composition comprisesa silane monomer.
 676. The eyeglass lens of claim 661, wherein thesecond composition comprises a fluoroacrylate.
 677. The eyeglass lens ofclaim 661, wherein the initiator comprises a second metal alkoxide, andwherein the second metal alkoxide comprises a titanium alkoxide and analuminum alkoxide.
 678. The eyeglass lens of claim 661, wherein thesecond composition further comprises a photoinitiator.
 679. The eyeglasslens of claim 661, wherein the ethylenically substituted monomercomprises dipentaerythritol tetracrylate.
 680. The eyeglass lens ofclaim 661, wherein the second composition further comprises an organicsolvent.
 681. The eyeglass lens of claim 661, wherein the antireflectivecoating is formed on a front surface of the eyeglass lens.
 682. Theeyeglass lens of claim 661, wherein the antireflective coating is formedon a back surface of the plastic eyeglass lens.
 683. The eyeglass lensof claim 661, wherein the antireflective coating is applied to a frontsurface and a back surface of the plastic eyeglass lens.
 684. Theeyeglass lens of claim 661, wherein a thickness of the first coatinglayer and the second coating layer, combined, is less than about 500 nm.685. A system for applying an at least partially antireflective coatingto a plastic lens, comprising: a coating unit for applying a coating toat least one of the mold members or the eyeglass lens during use; and acoating composition comprising a metal alkoxide.
 686. A mold assemblyholder configured to support a mold assembly for forming an eyeglasslens, comprising: a body; an indentation formed in the body, wherein theindentation is complementary to the shape of the mold assembly; whereinthe body comprises indicia, wherein the indicia is representative of thetype of lens being formed by the mold assembly.
 687. The mold assemblyholder of claim 1, wherein the indicia comprises a colored body. 688.The mold assembly holder of claim 1, wherein the indicia comprisesalphanumeric characters.
 689. The mold assembly holder of claim 1,wherein the indicia comprises a label having alphanumeric informationcoupled to the body.
 690. The mold assembly holder of claim 1, whereinthe indicia comprises alphanumeric information molded into the body.691. The mold assembly holder of claim 1, wherein the indicia comprisesa colored body, and wherein the lens type comprises clear orphotochromic, and wherein the body has a first color to designate usefor forming photochromic lenses, and a second color, different from thefirst color, to designate use for forming clear lenses.
 692. The moldassembly holder of claim 1, wherein the indicia comprises a coloredbody, and wherein the lens type comprises clear or photochromic, andwherein the color of the body is indicative of the type of lens beingformed.
 693. The mold assembly of claim 1, wherein the indicia comprisesa colored body, and wherein the lens type comprises spheric singlevision, aspheric single vision, flattop bifocal, asymmetricalprogressive, and wherein the body has a first color to designate use forforming photochromic lenses, and a second color, different from thefirst color, to designate use for forming clear lenses.
 694. The moldassembly holder of claim 1, wherein the body is configured to allowactivating light to reach the mold assembly.
 695. The mold assemblyholder of claim 1, wherein the indentation defines an opening, andwherein the opening is positioned such that activating light passesthrough the opening and onto the mold assembly during use.
 696. The moldassembly holder of claim 1, further comprising additional indentationsfor holding a mold or a gasket of the mold assembly.
 697. The moldassembly holder of claim 1, further comprising an additional indentationfor holding an additional mold assembly, wherein the additionalindentation has a shape that is complementary with the additional moldassembly.
 698. The mold assembly holder of claim 1, wherein a portion ofthe mold assembly holder is configured to hold a job ticket.
 699. Themold assembly holder of claim 1, wherein the indentation extends intothe body to a depth such that an upper surface of the mold assembly ispositioned at or below the upper surface of the body.
 700. A moldassembly holder configured to support a mold assembly for forming aneyeglass lens, comprising: a body; a first indentation formed in thebody, wherein the second indentation is complementary to the shape ofthe mold assembly; a second and third indentation formed in the body,wherein the second and third indentations are complementary to the shapeof a mold member.
 701. The mold assembly holder of claim 700, whereinthe body includes indicia, wherein the indicia is representative of thetype of lens being formed by the mold assembly.
 702. The mold assemblyholder of claim 700, wherein the body includes indicia, wherein theindicia is representative of the type of lens being formed by the moldassembly, and wherein the indicia comprises a colored body.
 703. Themold assembly holder of claim 700, wherein the body includes indicia,wherein the indicia is representative of the type of lens being formedby the mold assembly, and wherein the indicia comprises alphanumericcharacters.
 704. The mold assembly holder of claim 700, wherein the bodyincludes indicia, wherein the indicia is representative of the type oflens being formed by the mold assembly, and wherein the indiciacomprises a label having alphanumeric information coupled to the body.705. The mold assembly holder of claim 700, wherein the body includesindicia, wherein the indicia is representative of the type of lens beingformed by the mold assembly, and wherein the indicia comprisesalphanumeric information molded into the body.
 706. The mold assemblyholder of claim 700, wherein the body includes indicia, wherein theindicia is representative of the type of lens being formed by the moldassembly, and wherein the indicia comprises a colored body, and whereinthe lens type comprises clear or photochromic, and wherein the body hasa first color to designate use for forming photochromic lenses, and asecond color, different from the first color, to designate use forforming clear lenses.
 707. The mold assembly holder of claim 700,wherein the body includes indicia, wherein the indicia is representativeof the type of lens being formed by the mold assembly, and wherein theindicia comprises a colored body, and wherein the lens type comprisesclear or photochromic, and wherein the color of the body is indicativeof the type of lens being formed.
 708. The mold assembly holder of claim700, wherein the body includes indicia, wherein the indicia isrepresentative of the type of lens being formed by the mold assembly,and wherein the indicia comprises a colored body, and wherein the lenstype comprises spheric single vision, aspheric single vision, flattopbifocal, asymmetrical progressive, and wherein the body has a firstcolor to designate use for forming photochromic lenses, and a secondcolor, different from the first color, to designate use for formingclear lenses.
 709. The mold assembly holder of claim 700, wherein thebody is configured to allow activating light to reach the mold assembly.710. The mold assembly holder of claim 700, wherein the indentationdefines an opening, and wherein the opening is positioned such thatactivating light passes through the opening and onto the mold assemblyduring use.
 711. The mold assembly holder of claim 700, wherein aportion of the mold assembly holder is configured to hold a job ticket.712. The mold assembly holder of claim 700, wherein the indentationextends into the body to a depth such that an upper surface of the moldassembly is positioned at or below the upper surface of the body. 713.The mold assembly holder of claim 700, further comprising a fourthindentation formed in the body, wherein the fourth indentation iscomplementary to the shape of a mold assembly, and wherein the moldassembly holder is configured to hold two mold assemblies.
 714. The moldassembly holder of claim 700, further comprising a fourth indentationformed in the body, wherein the fourth indentation is complementary tothe shape of a mold assembly, and further comprising fifth and sixthindentations formed in the body, wherein the fifth and sixthindentations are complementary to the shape of a mold member, andwherein the mold assembly holder is configured to simultaneously hold upto two mold assemblies and up to four mold members.
 715. The moldassembly holder of claim 700, wherein the second and third indentationshave a shape that is complementary to both a mold member and a demoldedcured eyeglass lens.
 716. The mold assembly holder of claim 700, furthercomprising a fourth indentation formed in the body, wherein the fourthindentation is complementary to the shape of a mold assembly, andfurther comprising fifth and sixth indentations formed in the body,wherein the fifth and sixth indentations are complementary to the shapeof a mold member and a demolded cured eyeglass lens, and wherein themold assembly holder is configured to simultaneously hold up to two moldassemblies and up to four mold members or two demolded cured eyeglasslenses.
 717. A system for preparing an eyeglass lens, comprising: afirst lens curing unit comprising a first activating light source,wherein the first lens curing unit is configured to produce activatinglight directed toward a mold assembly during use; a second lens curingunit comprising a second activating light source and heating system,wherein the activating light source is configured to direct activatinglight toward a mold assembly during use; and wherein the heat system isconfigured to heat the interior of the second lens curing unit; a moldassembly holder configured to support a mold assembly, the mold assemblyholder comprising a body and an indentation formed in the body, whereinthe indentation is complementary to the shape of the mold assembly; anda conveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly holder from thefirst lens curing unit into and through the second lens curing unit.718. The system of claim 717, wherein the body comprises indicia,wherein the indicia is representative of the type of lens being formedby the mold assembly.
 719. The system of claim 717, wherein the bodycomprises indicia, wherein the indicia is representative of the type oflens being formed by the mold assembly, and wherein the indiciacomprises a colored body.
 720. The system of claim 717, wherein the bodycomprises indicia, wherein the indicia is representative of the type oflens being formed by the mold assembly, and wherein the indiciacomprises alphanumeric characters.
 721. The system of claim 717, whereinthe body comprises indicia, wherein the indicia is representative of thetype of lens being formed by the mold assembly, and wherein the indiciacomprises a label having alphanumeric information coupled to the body.722. The system of claim 717, wherein the body comprises indicia,wherein the indicia is representative of the type of lens being formedby the mold assembly, and wherein the indicia comprises alphanumericinformation molded into the body.
 723. The system of claim 717, whereinthe body comprises indicia, wherein the indicia is representative of thetype of lens being formed by the mold assembly, and wherein the indiciacomprises a colored body, and wherein the lens type comprises clear orphotochromic, and wherein the body has a first color to designate usefor forming photochromic lenses, and a second color, different from thefirst color, to designate use for forming clear lenses.
 724. The systemof claim 717, wherein the body comprises indicia, wherein the indicia isrepresentative of the type of lens being formed by the mold assembly,and wherein the indicia comprises a colored body, and wherein the lenstype comprises clear or photochromic, and wherein the color of the bodyis indicative of the type of lens being formed.
 725. The system of claim717, wherein the body comprises indicia, wherein the indicia isrepresentative of the type of lens being formed by the mold assembly,and wherein the indicia comprises a colored body, and wherein the lenstype comprises spheric single vision, aspheric single vision, flattopbifocal, asymmetrical progressive, and wherein the body has a firstcolor to designate use for forming photochromic lenses, and a secondcolor, different from the first color, to designate use for formingclear lenses.
 726. The system of claim 717, wherein the body comprisesindicia, wherein the indicia is representative of the type of lens beingformed by the mold assembly, and wherein the body is configured to allowactivating light to reach the mold assembly.
 727. The system of claim717, wherein an opening is positioned in the body such that activatinglight passes through the opening and onto the mold assembly during use.728. The system of claim 717, further comprising additional indentationsfor holding a mold or a gasket of the mold assembly.
 729. The system ofclaim 717, further comprising an additional indentation for holding anadditional mold assembly, wherein the additional indentation has a shapethat is complementary with the additional mold assembly.
 730. The systemof claim 717, wherein a portion of the mold assembly holder isconfigured to hold a job ticket.
 731. The system of claim 717, whereinthe indentation extends into the body to a depth such that an uppersurface of the mold assembly is positioned at or below the upper surfaceof the body.
 732. The system of claim 717, wherein the first activatinglight source is an ultraviolet light source.
 733. The system of claim717, wherein the second activating light source is an ultraviolet light.734. The system of claim 717, wherein the first and second activatinglight sources are ultraviolet lights.
 735. The system of claim 717,wherein the first and second activating light sources have substantiallythe same spectral output.
 736. The system of claim 717, wherein thefirst and second activating light sources have a peak light intensity ata range of about 385 nm to about 490 nm.
 737. The system of claim 717,wherein the first activating light source comprises a first set of lampsand a second set of lamps, wherein the first and second set of lamps arepositioned on opposite sides of the first curing unit.
 738. The systemof claim 717, further comprising a filter disposed directly adjacent tothe first activating light source, the filter being configured tomanipulate an intensity of the activating light emanating from the firstactivating light source.
 739. The system of claim 717, furthercomprising a filter disposed directly adjacent to the second activatinglight source, the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity ofthe activating light emanating from the second activating light source.740. The system of claim 717, further comprising a first filter disposeddirectly adjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source, and further comprising a secondfilter disposed directly adjacent to the second activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the second activating light source.
 741. The systemof claim 717, further comprising an air distributor positioned withinthe second curing unit, the air distributor being configured tocirculate air within the second curing unit during use.
 742. The systemof claim 717, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unitcomprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit.743. The system of claim 717, further comprising an anneal unit, theanneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the annealunit heating system is configured to heat the interior of the annealunit, and wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heatthe interior of the anneal unit to a temperature of up to about 250° F.744. The system of claim 717, further comprising an anneal unit, theanneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the annealunit heating system is configured to heat the interior of the annealunit, and wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unitconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly through theanneal unit.
 745. The system of claim 717, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to substantially simultaneouslycontrol operation of the first curing unit and the second curing unitduring use.
 746. The system of claim 717, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to control operation of the firstcuring unit as a function of the eyeglass lens prescription.
 747. Thesystem of claim 717, wherein the first activating light source comprisesa fluorescent lamp, and wherein the first activating light sourcefurther comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to the fluorescentlamp.
 748. The system of claim 717, wherein the second activating lightsource comprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the second activatinglight source further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 749. The system of claim 717, wherein the firstactivating light source comprises two or more lamps, and wherein thelamps are independently operable.
 750. The system of claim 717, whereinthe conveyor system comprises a continuous flexible member extendingfrom the first curing unit through the second curing unit, wherein theflexible member is configured to interact with a mold assembly to conveythe mold assembly through the first curing unit, to the second curingunit, and through the second curing unit.
 751. The system of claim 717,wherein the conveyor system comprises two discrete conveyors, whereinthe first conveyor is configured to convey the mold assembly from thefirst curing unit to the second curing unit, and wherein the secondconveyor is configured to convey the mold assemblies through the secondcuring unit.
 752. The system of claim 717, wherein the conveyor systemcomprises a flexible member configured to interact with a mold assembly,and wherein the flexible member is coupled to a motor configured to movethe flexible member through the conveyor system.
 753. A system forpreparing an eyeglass lens, comprising: a first lens curing unitcomprising a first activating light source, wherein the first lenscuring unit is configured to produce activating light directed toward amold assembly during use; a second lens curing unit comprising a secondactivating light source and heating system, wherein the activating lightsource is configured to direct activating light toward a mold assemblyduring use; and wherein the heat system is configured to heat theinterior of the second lens curing unit; first and second mold assemblyholders, each mold assembly holder configured to support a moldassembly, each of the mold assembly holders comprising a body and anindentation formed in the body, wherein the indentation is complementaryto the shape of the mold assembly, and wherein the body of the firstmold assembly holder is formed of a first color, and wherein the body ofthe second mold assembly holder is formed of a second color, wherein thefirst and second colors are different from each other, and wherein thefirst and second colors are indicative of the type of lens being formed;and a conveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly holder fromthe first lens curing unit into and through the second lens curing unit.754. The system of claim 753, wherein the body is configured to allowactivating light to reach the mold assembly.
 755. The system of claim753, wherein the indentation defines an opening, and wherein the openingis positioned such that activating light passes through the opening andonto the mold assembly during use.
 756. The system of claim 753, furthercomprising additional indentations for holding a mold or a gasket of themold assembly.
 757. The system of claim 753, further comprising anadditional indentation for holding an additional mold assembly, whereinthe additional indentation has a shape that is complementary with theadditional mold assembly.
 758. The system of claim 753, wherein aportion of the mold assembly holder is configured to hold a job ticket.759. The system of claim 753, wherein the indentation extends into thebody to a depth such that an upper surface of the mold assembly ispositioned at or below the upper surface of the body.
 760. The system ofclaim 753, wherein the first activating light source is an ultravioletlight source.
 761. The system of claim 753, wherein the secondactivating light source is an ultraviolet light.
 762. The system ofclaim 753, wherein the first and second activating light sources areultraviolet lights.
 763. The system of claim 753, wherein the first andsecond activating light sources have substantially the same spectraloutput.
 764. The system of claim 753, wherein the first and secondactivating light sources have a peak light intensity at a range of about385 nm to about 490 nm.
 765. The system of claim 753, wherein the firstactivating light source comprises a first set of lamps and a second setof lamps, wherein the first and second set of lamps are positioned onopposite sides of the first curing unit.
 766. The system of claim 753,further comprising a filter disposed directly adjacent to the firstactivating light source, the filter being configured to manipulate anintensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source.
 767. The system of claim 753, further comprising a filterdisposed directly adjacent to the second activating light source, thefilter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the second activating light source.
 768. The systemof claim 753, further comprising a first filter disposed directlyadjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source, and further comprising a secondfilter disposed directly adjacent to the second activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the second activating light source.
 769. The systemof claim 753, further comprising an air distributor positioned withinthe second curing unit, the air distributor being configured tocirculate air within the second curing unit during use.
 770. The systemof claim 753, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unitcomprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit.771. The system of claim 753, further comprising an anneal unit, theanneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the annealunit heating system is configured to heat the interior of the annealunit, and wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heatthe interior of the anneal unit to a temperature of up to about 250° F.772. The system of claim 753, further comprising an anneal unit, theanneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the annealunit heating system is configured to heat the interior of the annealunit, and wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unitconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly through theanneal unit.
 773. The system of claim 753, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to substantially simultaneouslycontrol operation of the first curing unit and the second curing unitduring use.
 774. The system of claim 753, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to control operation of the firstcuring unit as a function of the eyeglass lens prescription.
 775. Thesystem of claim 753, wherein the first activating light source comprisesa fluorescent lamp, and wherein the first activating light sourcefurther comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to the fluorescentlamp.
 776. The system of claim 753, wherein the second activating lightsource comprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the second activatinglight source further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 777. The system of claim 753, wherein the firstactivating light source comprises two or more lamps, and wherein thelamps are independently operable.
 778. The system of claim 753, whereinthe conveyor system comprises a continuous flexible member extendingfrom the first curing unit through the second curing unit, wherein theflexible member is configured to interact with a mold assembly to conveythe mold assembly through the first curing unit, to the second curingunit, and through the second curing unit.
 779. The system of claim 753,wherein the conveyor system comprises two discrete conveyors, whereinthe first conveyor is configured to convey the mold assembly from thefirst curing unit to the second curing unit, and wherein the secondconveyor is configured to convey the mold assemblies through the secondcuring unit.
 780. The system of claim 753, wherein the conveyor systemcomprises a flexible member configured to interact with a mold assembly,and wherein the flexible member is coupled to a motor configured to movethe flexible member through the conveyor system.
 781. An apparatus forpreparing an eyeglass lens, comprising: a first lens curing unitcomprising a first activating light source, wherein the first lenscuring unit is configured to produce activating light directed toward amold assembly during use; a second lens curing unit comprising a secondactivating light source and heating system, wherein the activating lightsource is configured to direct activating light toward a mold assemblyduring use; and wherein the heat system is configured to heat theinterior of the second lens curing unit; a conveyor system configured toconvey the mold assembly from the first lens curing unit into andthrough the second lens curing unit; a controller coupled to theconveyor system, the controller being configured to control the movementof the conveyor system; and a sensor disposed in the first lens curingunit, wherein the sensor is configured to sense when a mold assemblyenters the first curing unit, and wherein the sensor produces a controlsignal to the controller, and wherein the controller controls themovement of the conveyor system in response to receiving the controlsignal.
 782. The apparatus of claim 781, wherein the sensor comprises aphotoelectric sensing device.
 783. The apparatus of claim 781, whereinthe controller is configured to increase the speed of the conveyorsystem in response to receiving the control signal.
 784. The apparatusof claim 781, wherein the first activating light source is anultraviolet light source.
 785. The apparatus of claim 781, wherein thesecond activating light source is an ultraviolet light.
 786. Theapparatus of claim 781, wherein the first and second activating lightsources are ultraviolet lights.
 787. The apparatus of claim 781, whereinthe first and second activating light sources have substantially thesame spectral output.
 788. The apparatus of claim 781, wherein the firstand second activating light sources have a peak light intensity at arange of about 385 nm to about 490 nm.
 789. The apparatus of claim 781,wherein the first activating light source comprises a first set of lampsand a second set of lamps, wherein the first and second set of lamps arepositioned on opposite sides of the first curing unit.
 790. Theapparatus of claim 781, further comprising a filter disposed directlyadjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source.
 791. The apparatus of claim 781,further comprising a filter disposed directly adjacent to the secondactivating light source, the filter being configured to manipulate anintensity of the activating light emanating from the second activatinglight source.
 792. The apparatus of claim 781, further comprising afirst filter disposed directly adjacent to the first activating lightsource, the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of theactivating light emanating from the first activating light source, andfurther comprising a second filter disposed directly adjacent to thesecond activating light source, the filter being configured tomanipulate an intensity of the activating light emanating from thesecond activating light source.
 793. The apparatus of claim 781, furthercomprising an air distributor positioned within the second curing unit,the air distributor being configured to circulate air within the secondcuring unit during use.
 794. The apparatus of claim 781, furthercomprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unitheating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured toheat the interior of the anneal unit.
 795. The apparatus of claim 781,further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an annealunit heating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system isconfigured to heat the interior of the anneal unit, and wherein theanneal unit heating system is configured to heat the interior of theanneal unit to a temperature of up to about 250° F.
 796. The apparatusof claim 781, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unitcomprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit,and wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unit conveyorsystem configured to convey the mold assembly through the anneal unit.797. The apparatus of claim 781, further comprising a programmablecontroller configured to substantially simultaneously control operationof the first curing unit and the second curing unit during use.
 798. Theapparatus of claim 781, further comprising a programmable controllerconfigured to control operation of the first curing unit as a functionof the eyeglass lens prescription.
 799. The apparatus of claim 781,wherein the first activating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp,and wherein the first activating light source further comprises aflasher ballast system coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 800. Theapparatus of claim 781, wherein the second activating light sourcecomprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the second activating lightsource further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 801. The apparatus of claim 781, wherein the firstactivating light source comprises two or more lamps, and wherein thelamps are independently operable.
 802. The apparatus of claim 781,wherein the conveyor system comprises a continuous flexible memberextending from the first curing unit through the second curing unit,wherein the flexible member is configured to interact with a moldassembly to convey the mold assembly through the first curing unit, tothe second curing unit, and through the second curing unit.
 803. Theapparatus of claim 781, wherein the conveyor system comprises twodiscrete conveyors, wherein the first conveyor is configured to conveythe mold assembly from the first curing unit to the second curing unit,and wherein the second conveyor is configured to convey the moldassemblies through the second curing unit.
 804. The apparatus of claim781, wherein the conveyor system comprises a flexible member configuredto interact with a mold assembly, and wherein the flexible member iscoupled to a motor configured to move the flexible member through theconveyor system.
 805. The apparatus of claim 781, wherein the moldassembly resides on a mold assembly holder, the mold assembly holdercomprising a body and an indentation formed in the body, wherein theindentation is complementary to the shape of the mold assembly.
 806. Anapparatus for preparing an eyeglass lens, comprising: a first lenscuring unit comprising a first activating light source, wherein thefirst lens curing unit is configured to produce activating lightdirected toward a mold assembly during use; a second lens curing unitcomprising a second activating light source and heating system, whereinthe activating light source is configured to direct activating lighttoward a mold assembly during use; and wherein the heat system isconfigured to heat the interior of the second lens curing unit; aconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly from the firstlens curing unit into and through the second lens curing unit; a gatingdevice coupled to the conveyor system, wherein the gating device isconfigured to inhibit movement of the mold assembly from the firstcuring unit to the second curing unit during use; and a controllercoupled to the gating device, the controller being configured to controlthe operation of the gating device, and wherein the controller isconfigured to operate the gating device to control the flow of moldassemblies from the first curing unit to the second curing unit duringuse.
 807. The apparatus of claim 806, wherein the gating devicecomprises an air actuated elongated member, wherein the elongated memberinhibits movement of the mold assembly in an extended position duringuse.
 808. The apparatus of claim 806, further comprising a sensorcoupled to the first curing unit, wherein the sensor is configured tosense the location of a mold assembly, and wherein the controller isconfigured to operate the gating device in response to the position ofthe mold assembly.
 809. The apparatus of claim 806, wherein the gatingdevice comprises an elongated member, wherein the elongated memberinhibits movement of the mold assembly in an extended position duringuse, and wherein the elongated member is retracted in response to acontrol signal from the controller to release the mold assembly into thesecond curing unit during use.
 810. The apparatus of claim 806, whereinthe mold assembly resides on a mold assembly holder, the mold assemblyholder comprising a body and an indentation formed in the body, whereinthe indentation is complementary to the shape of the mold assembly. 811.The apparatus of claim 806, wherein the first activating light source isan ultraviolet light source.
 812. The apparatus of claim 806, whereinthe second activating light source is an ultraviolet light.
 813. Theapparatus of claim 806, wherein the first and second activating lightsources are ultraviolet lights.
 814. The apparatus of claim 806, whereinthe first and second activating light sources have substantially thesame spectral output.
 815. The apparatus of claim 806, wherein the firstand second activating light sources have a peak light intensity at arange of about 385 nm to about 490 nm.
 816. The apparatus of claim 806,wherein the first activating light source comprises a first set of lampsand a second set of lamps, wherein the first and second set of lamps arepositioned on opposite sides of the first curing unit.
 817. Theapparatus of claim 806, further comprising a filter disposed directlyadjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source.
 818. The apparatus of claim 806,further comprising a filter disposed directly adjacent to the secondactivating light source, the filter being configured to manipulate anintensity of the activating light emanating from the second activatinglight source.
 819. The apparatus of claim 806, further comprising afirst filter disposed directly adjacent to the first activating lightsource, the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of theactivating light emanating from the first activating light source, andfurther comprising a second filter disposed directly adjacent to thesecond activating light source, the filter being configured tomanipulate an intensity of the activating light emanating from thesecond activating light source.
 820. The apparatus of claim 806, furthercomprising an air distributor positioned within the second curing unit,the air distributor being configured to circulate air within the secondcuring unit during use.
 821. The apparatus of claim 806, furthercomprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unitheating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured toheat the interior of the anneal unit.
 822. The apparatus of claim 806,further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an annealunit heating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system isconfigured to heat the interior of the anneal unit, and wherein theanneal unit heating system is configured to heat the interior of theanneal unit to a temperature of up to about 250° F.
 823. The apparatusof claim 806, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unitcomprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit,and wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unit conveyorsystem configured to convey the mold assembly through the anneal unit.824. The apparatus of claim 806, further comprising a programmablecontroller configured to substantially simultaneously control operationof the first curing unit and the second curing unit during use.
 825. Theapparatus of claim 806, further comprising a programmable controllerconfigured to control operation of the first curing unit as a functionof the eyeglass lens prescription.
 826. The apparatus of claim 806,wherein the first activating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp,and wherein the first activating light source further comprises aflasher ballast system coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 827. Theapparatus of claim 806, wherein the second activating light sourcecomprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the second activating lightsource further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 828. The apparatus of claim 806, wherein the firstactivating light source comprises two or more lamps, and wherein thelamps are independently operable.
 829. The apparatus of claim 806,wherein the conveyor system comprises a continuous flexible memberextending from the first curing unit through the second curing unit,wherein the flexible member is configured to interact with a moldassembly to convey the mold assembly through the first curing unit, tothe second curing unit, and through the second curing unit.
 830. Theapparatus of claim 806, wherein the conveyor system comprises twodiscrete conveyors, wherein the first conveyor is configured to conveythe mold assembly from the first curing unit to the second curing unit,and wherein the second conveyor is configured to convey the moldassemblies through the second curing unit.
 831. The apparatus of claim806, wherein the conveyor system comprises a flexible member configuredto interact with a mold assembly, and wherein the flexible member iscoupled to a motor configured to move the flexible member through theconveyor system.
 832. An apparatus for preparing an eyeglass lens,comprising a first lens curing unit comprising a first activating lightsource, wherein the first lens curing unit is configured to produceactivating light directed toward a mold assembly during use; a secondlens curing unit comprising a second activating light source and heatingsystem, wherein the activating light source is configured to directactivating light toward a mold assembly during use; and wherein the heatsystem is configured to heat the interior of the second lens curingunit; a reader coupled to the first curing unit, the reader beingconfigured to read eyeglass lens prescription information from a moldassembly holder placed proximate to the first curing unit; and acontroller coupled to the first curing unit and the reader, wherein thecontroller is configured to control the operation of the first curingunit in response to the eyeglass lens prescription information read bythe reader.
 833. The apparatus of claim 832, wherein the controller isconfigured to adjust the time activating light is directed to the moldassembly in the first curing unit in response to the eyeglass lensprescription information.
 834. The apparatus of claim 832, furthercomprising a movable aperture disposed within the first curing unit,wherein the movable aperture is positionable in front of the firstactivating light source during use, and wherein the controller isconfigured to adjust the position of the movable aperture in response tothe eyeglass lens prescription information.
 835. The apparatus of claim832, wherein the controller is a computer system.
 836. The apparatus ofclaim 832, wherein the reader is a bar code reader.
 837. The apparatusof claim 832, wherein the mold assembly resides on a mold assemblyholder, the mold assembly holder comprising a body and an indentationformed in the body, wherein the indentation is complementary to theshape of the mold assembly.
 838. The apparatus of claim 832, wherein thefirst activating light source is an ultraviolet light source.
 839. Theapparatus of claim 832, wherein the second activating light source is anultraviolet light.
 840. The apparatus of claim 832, wherein the firstand second activating light sources are ultraviolet lights.
 841. Theapparatus of claim 832, wherein the first and second activating lightsources have substantially the same spectral output.
 842. The apparatusof claim 832, wherein the first and second activating light sources havea peak light intensity at a range of about 385 nm to about 490 nm. 843.The apparatus of claim 832, wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises a first set of lamps and a second set of lamps, wherein thefirst and second set of lamps are positioned on opposite sides of thefirst curing unit.
 844. The apparatus of claim 832, further comprising afilter disposed directly adjacent to the first activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the first activating light source.
 845. Theapparatus of claim 832, further comprising a filter disposed directlyadjacent to the second activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the second activating light source.
 846. The apparatus of claim832, further comprising a first filter disposed directly adjacent to thefirst activating light source, the filter being configured to manipulatean intensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source, and further comprising a second filter disposed directlyadjacent to the second activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the second activating light source.
 847. The apparatus of claim832, further comprising an air distributor positioned within the secondcuring unit, the air distributor being configured to circulate airwithin the second curing unit during use.
 848. The apparatus of claim832, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising ananneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system isconfigured to heat the interior of the anneal unit.
 849. The apparatusof claim 832, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unitcomprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit,and wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit to a temperature of up to about 250° F. 850.The apparatus of claim 832, further comprising an anneal unit, theanneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the annealunit heating system is configured to heat the interior of the annealunit, and wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unitconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly through theanneal unit.
 851. The apparatus of claim 832, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to substantially simultaneouslycontrol operation of the first curing unit and the second curing unitduring use.
 852. The apparatus of claim 832, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to control operation of the firstcuring unit as a function of the eyeglass lens prescription.
 853. Theapparatus of claim 832, wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the first activating lightsource further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 854. The apparatus of claim 832, wherein the secondactivating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein thesecond activating light source further comprises a flasher ballastsystem coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 855. The apparatus of claim 832,wherein the first activating light source comprises two or more lamps,and wherein the lamps are independently operable.
 856. The apparatus ofclaim 832, wherein the conveyor system comprises a continuous flexiblemember extending from the first curing unit through the second curingunit, wherein the flexible member is configured to interact with a moldassembly to convey the mold assembly through the first curing unit, tothe second curing unit, and through the second curing unit.
 857. Theapparatus of claim 832, wherein the conveyor system comprises twodiscrete conveyors, wherein the first conveyor is configured to conveythe mold assembly from the first curing unit to the second curing unit,and wherein the second conveyor is configured to convey the moldassemblies through the second curing unit.
 858. The apparatus of claim832, wherein the conveyor system comprises a flexible member configuredto interact with a mold assembly, and wherein the flexible member iscoupled to a motor configured to move the flexible member through theconveyor system.
 859. A method of preparing an eyeglass lens,comprising: placing a job ticket in a lens curing apparatus, wherein thejob ticket includes prescription information, the lens curing apparatuscomprising an activating light source and heating system, wherein theactivating light source is configured to direct activating light towarda mold assembly during use; and wherein the heat system is configured toheat the interior of the lens curing unit; reading the prescriptioninformation from the job ticket; placing a mold assembly comprising alens forming composition into the lens curing unit; and operating thelens curing apparatus to produce curing conditions, the curingconditions being determined by the prescription information.
 860. Themethod of claim 859, wherein reading the prescription informationcomprises reading the prescription information from a barcode.
 861. Themethod of claim 859, further comprising forming a job ticket withprescription information, wherein the prescription information isentered into a job ticket printing device from an input device, whereinthe input device is operable by a user to enter prescriptioninformation.
 862. The method of claim 859, wherein the prescriptioninformation comprises a sphere power, a cylinder power, and a lenslocation.
 863. The method of claim 859, wherein the prescriptioninformation further comprises a monomer type and a lens type.
 864. Themethod of claim 859, wherein the prescription information comprises asphere power, a cylinder power, an add power and a lens location. 865.The method of claim 859, wherein operating the lens curing apparatuscomprises controlling the activating light source to produce the curingconditions for the eyeglass lens.
 866. The method of claim 859, whereinthe activating light source comprises a plurality of light sources, andwherein controlling the activating light source comprises controllingeach of the plurality of light sources independently.
 867. The method ofclaim 859, wherein the lens curing apparatus further comprises an annealunit, the further comprising controlling an anneal unit, the anneal unitbeing configured to apply heat to a demolded eyeglass lens.
 868. Themethod of claim 859, wherein operating the lens curing apparatuscomprises controlling the duration of time that the activating lightsource remains on.
 869. A computer-implemented method for controlling aneyeglass lens forming apparatus, the method comprising: receivingprescription information from a reader coupled to a lens formingapparatus, wherein the prescription information defines an eyeglassprescription; determining curing conditions based on the prescriptioninformation; controlling a curing unit, the curing unit being configuredto cure at least a portion of a lens forming composition in a mold,wherein the curing unit is controlled to produce the curing conditions.870. The method of claim 869, wherein the reader comprises a barcodereader.
 871. The method of claim 869, further comprising forming a jobticket with prescription information, wherein the prescriptioninformation is entered into a job ticket printing device from an inputdevice, wherein the input device is operable by a user to enterprescription information.
 872. The method of claim 869, wherein theprescription information comprises a sphere power, a cylinder power, anda lens location.
 873. The method of claim 869, wherein the prescriptioninformation further comprises a monomer type and a lens type.
 874. Themethod of claim 869, wherein the prescription information comprises asphere power, a cylinder power, an add power and a lens location. 875.The method of claim 869, wherein operating the lens curing apparatuscomprises controlling the activating light source to produce the curingconditions for the eyeglass lens.
 876. The method of claim 869, whereinthe activating light source comprises a plurality of light sources, andwherein controlling the activating light source comprises controllingeach of the plurality of light sources independently.
 877. The method ofclaim 869, wherein the lens curing apparatus further comprises an annealunit, the further comprising controlling an anneal unit, the anneal unitbeing configured to apply heat to a demolded eyeglass lens.
 878. Themethod of claim 869, wherein operating the lens curing apparatuscomprises controlling the duration of time that the activating lightsource remains on.
 879. An apparatus for preparing an eyeglass lens,comprising: a first lens curing unit comprising a first activating lightsource, wherein the first lens curing unit is configured to produceactivating light directed toward a mold assembly during use; a secondlens curing unit comprising a second activating light source and heatingsystem, wherein the activating light source is configured to directactivating light toward a mold assembly during use; and wherein the heatsystem is configured to heat the interior of the second lens curingunit; a first conveyor system configured to convey the mold assemblythrough the first lens curing unit, the first conveyor system operableat varying speeds; a second conveyor system configured to convey themold assembly through the second lens curing unit.
 880. The apparatus ofclaim 879, wherein the mold assembly resides on a mold assembly holder,the mold assembly holder comprising a body and an indentation formed inthe body, wherein the indentation is complementary to the shape of themold assembly.
 881. The apparatus of claim 879, wherein the firstactivating light source is an ultraviolet light source.
 882. Theapparatus of claim 879, wherein the second activating light source is anultraviolet light.
 883. The apparatus of claim 879, wherein the firstand second activating light sources are ultraviolet lights.
 884. Theapparatus of claim 879, wherein the first and second activating lightsources have substantially the same spectral output.
 885. The apparatusof claim 879, wherein the first and second activating light sources havea peak light intensity at a range of about 385 nm to about 490 nm. 886.The apparatus of claim 879, wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises a first set of lamps and a second set of lamps, wherein thefirst and second set of lamps are positioned on opposite sides of thefirst curing unit.
 887. The apparatus of claim 879, further comprising afilter disposed directly adjacent to the first activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the first activating light source.
 888. Theapparatus of claim 879, further comprising a filter disposed directlyadjacent to the second activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the second activating light source.
 889. The apparatus of claim879, further comprising a first filter disposed directly adjacent to thefirst activating light source, the filter being configured to manipulatean intensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source, and further comprising a second filter disposed directlyadjacent to the second activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the second activating light source.
 890. The apparatus of claim879, further comprising an air distributor positioned within the secondcuring unit, the air distributor being configured to circulate airwithin the second curing unit during use.
 891. The apparatus of claim879, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising ananneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system isconfigured to heat the interior of the anneal unit.
 892. The apparatusof claim 879, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unitcomprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit,and wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit to a temperature of up to about 250° F. 893.The apparatus of claim 879, further comprising an anneal unit, theanneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the annealunit heating system is configured to heat the interior of the annealunit, and wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unitconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly through theanneal unit.
 894. The apparatus of claim 879, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to substantially simultaneouslycontrol operation of the first curing unit and the second curing unitduring use.
 895. The apparatus of claim 879, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to control operation of the firstcuring unit as a function of the eyeglass lens prescription.
 896. Theapparatus of claim 879, wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the first activating lightsource further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 897. The apparatus of claim 879, wherein the secondactivating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein thesecond activating light source further comprises a flasher ballastsystem coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 898. The apparatus of claim 879,wherein the first activating light source comprises two or more lamps,and wherein the lamps are independently operable.
 899. The apparatus ofclaim 879, wherein the conveyor system comprises a continuous flexiblemember extending from the first curing unit through the second curingunit, wherein the flexible member is configured to interact with a moldassembly to convey the mold assembly through the first curing unit, tothe second curing unit, and through the second curing unit.
 900. Theapparatus of claim 879, wherein the conveyor system comprises twodiscrete conveyors, wherein the first conveyor is configured to conveythe mold assembly from the first curing unit to the second curing unit,and wherein the second conveyor is configured to convey the moldassemblies through the second curing unit.
 901. The apparatus of claim879, wherein the conveyor system comprises a flexible member configuredto interact with a mold assembly, and wherein the flexible member iscoupled to a motor configured to move the flexible member through theconveyor system.
 902. An method of preparing an eyeglass lens in a lensforming apparatus, the lens forming apparatus, comprising: a first lenscuring unit comprising a first activating light source, wherein thefirst lens curing unit is configured to produce activating lightdirected toward a mold assembly during use; a second lens curing unitcomprising a second activating light source and heating system, whereinthe activating light source is configured to direct activating lighttoward a mold assembly during use; and wherein the heat system isconfigured to heat the interior of the second lens curing unit; a firstconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly through the firstlens curing unit, the first conveyor system operable at varying speeds;a second conveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly throughthe second lens curing unit; wherein the method comprises: placing afirst mold assembly filled with a first lens forming composition in afirst mold assembly holder, the first mold assembly holder comprising abody and an indentation formed in the body, wherein the indentation iscomplementary to the shape of the mold assembly; placing the first moldassembly holder in the first lens curing unit; initiating curing of thelens forming composition by applying activating light to the first moldassembly; advancing the first mold assembly holder to the second curingunit; placing a second mold assembly filled with a lens formingcomposition in a second mold assembly holder, the second mold assemblyholder comprising a body and an indentation formed in the body, whereinthe indentation is complementary to the shape of the mold assembly;initiating curing of the second lens forming composition by applyingactivating light to the second mold assembly, wherein the activatinglight is applied at a time based on the position of the first moldassembly holder in the second curing unit; advancing the second moldassembly holder to the second curing unit.
 903. The method of claim 902,wherein the indentations of the first and second mold assembly holdersdefine an opening, and wherein the opening is positioned such thatactivating light passes through the opening and onto the mold assemblyduring use.
 904. The method of claim 902, wherein the first and secondmold assembly holders further comprise an additional indentation forholding an additional mold assembly, wherein the additional indentationhas a shape that is complementary with the additional mold assembly.905. The method of claim 902, wherein a portion of the first and secondmold assembly holders are configured to hold a job ticket.
 906. Themethod of claim 902, wherein the indentation in the first and secondmold assembly holders extend into the body to a depth such that an uppersurface of the mold assembly is positioned at or below the upper surfaceof the body.
 907. The method of claim 902, wherein initiating curing ofthe lens forming composition comprises directing activating light towardat least one of the mold members for less than 100 seconds.
 908. Themethod of claim 902, further comprising directing activating lighttoward at least one of the mold members and applying heat to both moldmembers in the second curing unit.
 909. The method of claim 902, furthercomprising directing activating light toward at least one of the moldmembers and applying heat to both mold members in the second curing unitto substantially cure the lens forming composition; demolding the curedlens forming composition from the mold assembly; and applying heat tothe lens in the absence of activating light, subsequent to directingactivating light and heat toward at least one of the mold members. 910.The method of claim 902, further comprising heating the lens formingcomposition; and placing the heated lens forming composition in a moldcavity.
 911. An apparatus for preparing an eyeglass lens, comprising: afirst lens curing unit comprising a first activating light source,wherein the first lens curing unit is configured to produce activatinglight directed toward a mold assembly during use; a second lens curingunit comprising a second activating light source and heating system,wherein the activating light source is configured to direct activatinglight toward a mold assembly during use; and wherein the heat system isconfigured to heat the interior of the second lens curing unit; aconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly from the firstlens curing unit into and through the second lens curing unit; and acontroller coupled to the first curing unit, wherein the controller isconfigured to control the operation of the first activating light sourcein the first curing unit in response to the eyeglass lens prescriptionand the position of a second mold assembly in the second curing unit.912. The apparatus of claim 911, wherein the mold assembly resides on amold assembly holder, the mold assembly holder comprising a body and anindentation formed in the body, wherein the indentation is complementaryto the shape of the mold assembly.
 913. The apparatus of claim 911,wherein the first activating light source is an ultraviolet lightsource.
 914. The apparatus of claim 911, wherein the second activatinglight source is an ultraviolet light.
 915. The apparatus of claim 911,wherein the first and second activating light sources are ultravioletlights.
 916. The apparatus of claim 911, wherein the first and secondactivating light sources have substantially the same spectral output.917. The apparatus of claim 911, wherein the first and second activatinglight sources have a peak light intensity at a range of about 385 nm toabout 490 nm.
 918. The apparatus of claim 911, wherein the firstactivating light source comprises a first set of lamps and a second setof lamps, wherein the first and second set of lamps are positioned onopposite sides of the first curing unit.
 919. The apparatus of claim911, further comprising a filter disposed directly adjacent to the firstactivating light source, the filter being configured to manipulate anintensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source.
 920. The apparatus of claim 911, further comprising afilter disposed directly adjacent to the second activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the second activating light source.
 921. Theapparatus of claim 911, further comprising a first filter disposeddirectly adjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source, and further comprising a secondfilter disposed directly adjacent to the second activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the second activating light source.
 922. Theapparatus of claim 911, further comprising an air distributor positionedwithin the second curing unit, the air distributor being configured tocirculate air within the second curing unit during use.
 923. Theapparatus of claim 911, further comprising an anneal unit, the annealunit comprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit.924. The apparatus of claim 911, further comprising an anneal unit, theanneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the annealunit heating system is configured to heat the interior of the annealunit, and wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heatthe interior of the anneal unit to a temperature of up to about 250° F.925. The apparatus of claim 911, further comprising an anneal unit, theanneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the annealunit heating system is configured to heat the interior of the annealunit, and wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unitconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly through theanneal unit.
 926. The apparatus of claim 911, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to substantially simultaneouslycontrol operation of the first curing unit and the second curing unitduring use.
 927. The apparatus of claim 911, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to control operation of the firstcuring unit as a function of the eyeglass lens prescription.
 928. Theapparatus of claim 911, wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the first activating lightsource further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 929. The apparatus of claim 911, wherein the secondactivating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein thesecond activating light source further comprises a flasher ballastsystem coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 930. The apparatus of claim 911,wherein the first activating light source comprises two or more lamps,and wherein the lamps are independently operable.
 931. The apparatus ofclaim 911, wherein the conveyor system comprises a continuous flexiblemember extending from the first curing unit through the second curingunit, wherein the flexible member is configured to interact with a moldassembly to convey the mold assembly through the first curing unit, tothe second curing unit, and through the second curing unit.
 932. Theapparatus of claim 911, wherein the conveyor system comprises twodiscrete conveyors, wherein the first conveyor is configured to conveythe mold assembly from the first curing unit to the second curing unit,and wherein the second conveyor is configured to convey the moldassemblies through the second curing unit.
 933. The apparatus of claim911, wherein the conveyor system comprises a flexible member configuredto interact with a mold assembly, and wherein the flexible member iscoupled to a motor configured to move the flexible member through theconveyor system.
 934. An apparatus for preparing an eyeglass lens,comprising: a first lens curing unit comprising a first activating lightsource, wherein the first lens curing unit is configured to produceactivating light directed toward a mold assembly during use; a secondlens curing unit comprising a second activating light source and heatingsystem, wherein the activating light source is configured to directactivating light toward a mold assembly during use, and wherein the heatsystem is configured to heat the interior of the second lens curingunit; a first computer system for receiving an eyeglass lensprescription; a second computer system coupled to the first curing unit,the second curing unit, and the first computer system, wherein thesecond computer system is configured to control the operation of thefirst and second curing units in response to the eyeglass lensprescription entered into the first computer system.
 935. The apparatusof claim 934, wherein the mold assembly resides on a mold assemblyholder, the mold assembly holder comprising a body and an indentationformed in the body, wherein the indentation is complementary to theshape of the mold assembly.
 936. The apparatus of claim 934, wherein thefirst activating light source is an ultraviolet light source.
 937. Theapparatus of claim 934, wherein the second activating light source is anultraviolet light.
 938. The apparatus of claim 934, wherein the firstand second activating light sources are ultraviolet lights.
 939. Theapparatus of claim 934, wherein the first and second activating lightsources have substantially the same spectral output.
 940. The apparatusof claim 934, wherein the first and second activating light sources havea peak light intensity at a range of about 385 nm to about 490 nm. 941.The apparatus of claim 934, wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises a first set of lamps and a second set of lamps, wherein thefirst and second set of lamps are positioned on opposite sides of thefirst curing unit.
 942. The apparatus of claim 934, further comprising afilter disposed directly adjacent to the first activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the first activating light source.
 943. Theapparatus of claim 934, further comprising a filter disposed directlyadjacent to the second activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the second activating light source.
 944. The apparatus of claim934, further comprising a first filter disposed directly adjacent to thefirst activating light source, the filter being configured to manipulatean intensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source, and further comprising a second filter disposed directlyadjacent to the second activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the second activating light source.
 945. The apparatus of claim934, further comprising an air distributor positioned within the secondcuring unit, the air distributor being configured to circulate airwithin the second curing unit during use.
 946. The apparatus of claim934, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising ananneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system isconfigured to heat the interior of the anneal unit.
 947. The apparatusof claim 934, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unitcomprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit,and wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit to a temperature of up to about 250° F. 948.The apparatus of claim 934, further comprising an anneal unit, theanneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the annealunit heating system is configured to heat the interior of the annealunit, and wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unitconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly through theanneal unit.
 949. The apparatus of claim 934, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to substantially simultaneouslycontrol operation of the first curing unit and the second curing unitduring use.
 950. The apparatus of claim 934, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to control operation of the firstcuring unit as a function of the eyeglass lens prescription.
 951. Theapparatus of claim 934, wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the first activating lightsource further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 952. The apparatus of claim 934, wherein the secondactivating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein thesecond activating light source further comprises a flasher ballastsystem coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 953. The apparatus of claim 934,wherein the first activating light source comprises two or more lamps,and wherein the lamps are independently operable.
 954. The apparatus ofclaim 934, further comprising a conveyor system configured to convey themold assembly from the first lens curing unit into and through thesecond lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyor system comprises acontinuous flexible member extending from the first curing unit throughthe second curing unit, wherein the flexible member is configured tointeract with a mold assembly to convey the mold assembly through thefirst curing unit, to the second curing unit, and through the secondcuring unit.
 955. The apparatus of claim 934, further comprising aconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly from the firstlens curing unit into and through the second lens curing unit, andwherein the conveyor system comprises two discrete conveyors, whereinthe first conveyor is configured to convey the mold assembly from thefirst curing unit to the second curing unit, and wherein the secondconveyor is configured to convey the mold assemblies through the secondcuring unit.
 956. The apparatus of claim 934, further comprising aconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly from the firstlens curing unit into and through the second lens curing unit, andwherein the conveyor system comprises a flexible member configured tointeract with a mold assembly, and wherein the flexible member iscoupled to a motor configured to move the flexible member through theconveyor system.
 957. An apparatus for preparing an eyeglass lens,comprising: a first lens curing unit comprising a first activating lightsource, wherein the first lens curing unit is configured to produceactivating light directed toward a mold assembly during use; a secondlens curing unit comprising a second activating light source and heatingsystem, wherein the activating light source is configured to directactivating light toward a mold assembly during use, and wherein the heatsystem is configured to heat the interior of the second lens curingunit; a computer system coupled to the first curing unit and the secondcuring unit, wherein the first computer system is configured to receiveeyeglass lens prescription information and control the operation of thefirst and second curing units in response to the eyeglass lensprescription entered.
 958. The apparatus of claim 957, wherein the moldassembly resides on a mold assembly holder, the mold assembly holdercomprising a body and an indentation formed in the body, wherein theindentation is complementary to the shape of the mold assembly.
 959. Theapparatus of claim 957, wherein the first activating light source is anultraviolet light source.
 960. The apparatus of claim 957, wherein thesecond activating light source is an ultraviolet light.
 961. Theapparatus of claim 957, wherein the first and second activating lightsources are ultraviolet lights.
 962. The apparatus of claim 957, whereinthe first and second activating light sources have substantially thesame spectral output.
 963. The apparatus of claim 957, wherein the firstand second activating light sources have a peak light intensity at arange of about 385 nm to about 490 nm.
 964. The apparatus of claim 957,wherein the first activating light source comprises a first set of lampsand a second set of lamps, wherein the first and second set of lamps arepositioned on opposite sides of the first curing unit.
 965. Theapparatus of claim 957, further comprising a filter disposed directlyadjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source.
 966. The apparatus of claim 957,further comprising a filter disposed directly adjacent to the secondactivating light source, the filter being configured to manipulate anintensity of the activating light emanating from the second activatinglight source.
 967. The apparatus of claim 957, further comprising afirst filter disposed directly adjacent to the first activating lightsource, the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of theactivating light emanating from the first activating light source, andfurther comprising a second filter disposed directly adjacent to thesecond activating light source, the filter being configured tomanipulate an intensity of the activating light emanating from thesecond activating light source.
 968. The apparatus of claim 957, furthercomprising an air distributor positioned within the second curing unit,the air distributor being configured to circulate air within the secondcuring unit during use.
 969. The apparatus of claim 957, furthercomprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unitheating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured toheat the interior of the anneal unit.
 970. The apparatus of claim 957,further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an annealunit heating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system isconfigured to heat the interior of the anneal unit, and wherein theanneal unit heating system is configured to heat the interior of theanneal unit to a temperature of up to about 250° F.
 971. The apparatusof claim 957, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unitcomprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit,and wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unit conveyorsystem configured to convey the mold assembly through the anneal unit.972. The apparatus of claim 957, further comprising a programmablecontroller configured to substantially simultaneously control operationof the first curing unit and the second curing unit during use.
 973. Theapparatus of claim 957, further comprising a programmable controllerconfigured to control operation of the first curing unit as a functionof the eyeglass lens prescription.
 974. The apparatus of claim 957,wherein the first activating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp,and wherein the first activating light source further comprises aflasher ballast system coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 975. Theapparatus of claim 957, wherein the second activating light sourcecomprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the second activating lightsource further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 976. The apparatus of claim 957, wherein the firstactivating light source comprises two or more lamps, and wherein thelamps are independently operable.
 977. The apparatus of claim 957,further comprising a conveyor system configured to convey the moldassembly from the first lens curing unit into and through the secondlens curing unit, and wherein the conveyor system comprises a continuousflexible member extending from the first curing unit through the secondcuring unit, wherein the flexible member is configured to interact witha mold assembly to convey the mold assembly through the first curingunit, to the second curing unit, and through the second curing unit.978. The apparatus of claim 957, further comprising a conveyor systemconfigured to convey the mold assembly from the first lens curing unitinto and through the second lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyorsystem comprises two discrete conveyors, wherein the first conveyor isconfigured to convey the mold assembly from the first curing unit to thesecond curing unit, and wherein the second conveyor is configured toconvey the mold assemblies through the second curing unit.
 979. Theapparatus of claim 957, further comprising a conveyor system configuredto convey the mold assembly from the first lens curing unit into andthrough the second lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyor systemcomprises a flexible member configured to interact with a mold assembly,and wherein the flexible member is coupled to a motor configured to movethe flexible member through the conveyor system.
 980. An apparatus forpreparing an eyeglass lens, comprising: a first lens curing unitcomprising a first activating light source, wherein the first lenscuring unit is configured to produce activating light directed toward amold assembly during use; a second lens curing unit comprising a secondactivating light source and heating system, wherein the secondactivating light source is configured to direct activating light towarda mold assembly during use, and wherein the heat system is configured toheat the interior of the second lens curing unit, and wherein the secondactivating light source is coupled to a movable member positioned withinthe curing unit, and wherein the movable member is positionable suchthat at least a portion of the second activating light source isdisposed outside the second curing unit; wherein the first and secondlens curing units are coupled together.
 981. The apparatus of claim 980,wherein the mold assembly resides on a mold assembly holder, the moldassembly holder comprising a body and an indentation formed in the body,wherein the indentation is complementary to the shape of the moldassembly.
 982. The apparatus of claim 980, wherein the first activatinglight source is an ultraviolet light source.
 983. The apparatus of claim980, wherein the second activating light source is an ultraviolet light.984. The apparatus of claim 980, wherein the first and second activatinglight sources are ultraviolet lights.
 985. The apparatus of claim 980,wherein the first and second activating light sources have substantiallythe same spectral output.
 986. The apparatus of claim 980, wherein thefirst and second activating light sources have a peak light intensity ata range of about 385 nm to about 490 nm.
 987. The apparatus of claim980, wherein the first activating light source comprises a first set oflamps and a second set of lamps, wherein the first and second set oflamps are positioned on opposite sides of the first curing unit. 988.The apparatus of claim 980, further comprising a filter disposeddirectly adjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source.
 989. The apparatus of claim 980,further comprising a filter disposed directly adjacent to the secondactivating light source, the filter being configured to manipulate anintensity of the activating light emanating from the second activatinglight source.
 990. The apparatus of claim 980, further comprising afirst filter disposed directly adjacent to the first activating lightsource, the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of theactivating light emanating from the first activating light source, andfurther comprising a second filter disposed directly adjacent to thesecond activating light source, the filter being configured tomanipulate an intensity of the activating light emanating from thesecond activating light source.
 991. The apparatus of claim 980, furthercomprising an air distributor positioned within the second curing unit,the air distributor being configured to circulate air within the secondcuring unit during use.
 992. The apparatus of claim 980, furthercomprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unitheating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured toheat the interior of the anneal unit.
 993. The apparatus of claim 980,further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an annealunit heating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system isconfigured to heat the interior of the anneal unit, and wherein theanneal unit heating system is configured to heat the interior of theanneal unit to a temperature of up to about 250° F.
 994. The apparatusof claim 980, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unitcomprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit,and wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unit conveyorsystem configured to convey the mold assembly through the anneal unit.995. The apparatus of claim 980, further comprising a programmablecontroller configured to substantially simultaneously control operationof the first curing unit and the second curing unit during use.
 996. Theapparatus of claim 980, further comprising a programmable controllerconfigured to control operation of the first curing unit as a functionof the eyeglass lens prescription.
 997. The apparatus of claim 980,wherein the first activating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp,and wherein the first activating light source further comprises aflasher ballast system coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 998. Theapparatus of claim 980, wherein the second activating light sourcecomprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the second activating lightsource further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 999. The apparatus of claim 980, wherein the firstactivating light source comprises two or more lamps, and wherein thelamps are independently operable.
 1000. The apparatus of claim 980,further comprising a conveyor system configured to convey the moldassembly from the first lens curing unit into and through the secondlens curing unit, and wherein the conveyor system comprises a continuousflexible member extending from the first curing unit through the secondcuring unit, wherein the flexible member is configured to interact witha mold assembly to convey the mold assembly through the first curingunit, to the second curing unit, and through the second curing unit.1001. The apparatus of claim 980, further comprising a conveyor systemconfigured to convey the mold assembly from the first lens curing unitinto and through the second lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyorsystem comprises two discrete conveyors, wherein the first conveyor isconfigured to convey the mold assembly from the first curing unit to thesecond curing unit, and wherein the second conveyor is configured toconvey the mold assemblies through the second curing unit.
 1002. Theapparatus of claim 980, further comprising a conveyor system configuredto convey the mold assembly from the first lens curing unit into andthrough the second lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyor systemcomprises a flexible member configured to interact with a mold assembly,and wherein the flexible member is coupled to a motor configured to movethe flexible member through the conveyor system.
 1003. An apparatus forpreparing an eyeglass lens, comprising: a first lens curing unitcomprising a first activating light source, wherein the first lenscuring unit is configured to produce activating light directed toward amold assembly during use; a second lens curing unit comprising a secondactivating light source and heating system, wherein the secondactivating light source is configured to direct activating light towarda mold assembly during use, and wherein the heat system is configured toheat the interior of the second lens curing unit, and wherein the heatsystem comprises a heater unit, the heater unit comprising a heatelement and a fan; wherein the first and second lens curing units arecoupled together.
 1004. The apparatus of claim 1003, wherein the moldassembly resides on a mold assembly holder, the mold assembly holdercomprising a body and an indentation formed in the body, wherein theindentation is complementary to the shape of the mold assembly. 1005.The apparatus of claim 1003, wherein the first activating light sourceis an ultraviolet light source.
 1006. The apparatus of claim 1003,wherein the second activating light source is an ultraviolet light.1007. The apparatus of claim 1003, wherein the first and secondactivating light sources are ultraviolet lights.
 1008. The apparatus ofclaim 1003, wherein the first and second activating light sources havesubstantially the same spectral output.
 1009. The apparatus of claim1003, wherein the first and second activating light sources have a peaklight intensity at a range of about 385 nm to about 490 nm.
 1010. Theapparatus of claim 1003, wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises a first set of lamps and a second set of lamps, wherein thefirst and second set of lamps are positioned on opposite sides of thefirst curing unit.
 1011. The apparatus of claim 1003, further comprisinga filter disposed directly adjacent to the first activating lightsource, the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of theactivating light emanating from the first activating light source. 1012.The apparatus of claim 1003, further comprising a filter disposeddirectly adjacent to the second activating light source, the filterbeing configured to manipulate an intensity of the activating lightemanating from the second activating light source.
 1013. The apparatusof claim 1003, further comprising a first filter disposed directlyadjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source, and further comprising a secondfilter disposed directly adjacent to the second activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the second activating light source.
 1014. Theapparatus of claim 1003, further comprising an air distributorpositioned within the second curing unit, the air distributor beingconfigured to circulate air within the second curing unit during use.1015. The apparatus of claim 1003, further comprising an anneal unit,the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein theanneal unit heating system is configured to heat the interior of theanneal unit.
 1016. The apparatus of claim 1003, further comprising ananneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system,wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit, and wherein the anneal unit heating systemis configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit to a temperatureof up to about 250° F.
 1017. The apparatus of claim 1003, furthercomprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unitheating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured toheat the interior of the anneal unit, and wherein the anneal unitfurther comprises an anneal unit conveyor system configured to conveythe mold assembly through the anneal unit.
 1018. The apparatus of claim1003, further comprising a programmable controller configured tosubstantially simultaneously control operation of the first curing unitand the second curing unit during use.
 1019. The apparatus of claim1003, further comprising a programmable controller configured to controloperation of the first curing unit as a function of the eyeglass lensprescription.
 1020. The apparatus of claim 1003, wherein the firstactivating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein thefirst activating light source further comprises a flasher ballast systemcoupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 1021. The apparatus of claim 1003,wherein the second activating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp,and wherein the second activating light source further comprises aflasher ballast system coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 1022. Theapparatus of claim 1003, wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises two or more lamps, and wherein the lamps are independentlyoperable.
 1023. The apparatus of claim 1003, further comprising aconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly from the firstlens curing unit into and through the second lens curing unit, andwherein the conveyor system comprises a continuous flexible memberextending from the first curing unit through the second curing unit,wherein the flexible member is configured to interact with a moldassembly to convey the mold assembly through the first curing unit, tothe second curing unit, and through the second curing unit.
 1024. Theapparatus of claim 1003, further comprising a conveyor system configuredto convey the mold assembly from the first lens curing unit into andthrough the second lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyor systemcomprises two discrete conveyors, wherein the first conveyor isconfigured to convey the mold assembly from the first curing unit to thesecond curing unit, and wherein the second conveyor is configured toconvey the mold assemblies through the second curing unit.
 1025. Theapparatus of claim 1003, further comprising a conveyor system configuredto convey the mold assembly from the first lens curing unit into andthrough the second lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyor systemcomprises a flexible member configured to interact with a mold assembly,and wherein the flexible member is coupled to a motor configured to movethe flexible member through the conveyor system.
 1026. An apparatus forpreparing an eyeglass lens, comprising: a first lens curing unitcomprising a first activating light source, wherein the first lenscuring unit is configured to produce activating light directed toward amold assembly during use; a second lens curing unit comprising a secondactivating light source and heating system, wherein the activating lightsource is configured to direct activating light toward a mold assemblyduring use; and wherein the heat system is configured to heat theinterior of the second lens curing unit; a conveyor system configured toconvey the mold assembly from the first lens curing unit into andthrough the second lens curing unit; a first sensor disposed in thefirst lens curing unit, wherein the sensor is configured to sense when amold assembly enters the first curing unit, and a second sensor disposedin the second curing unit, wherein the wherein the second sensor isconfigured to sense when a mold assembly enters the second curing unit;wherein the first and second sensors are configured to produce signalsthat allow the progress of a mold assembly through the apparatus to bemonitored.
 1027. The apparatus of claim 1026, wherein the mold assemblyresides on a mold assembly holder, the mold assembly holder comprising abody and an indentation formed in the body, wherein the indentation iscomplementary to the shape of the mold assembly.
 1028. The apparatus ofclaim 1026, wherein the first activating light source is an ultravioletlight source.
 1029. The apparatus of claim 1026, wherein the secondactivating light source is an ultraviolet light.
 1030. The apparatus ofclaim 1026, wherein the first and second activating light sources areultraviolet lights.
 1031. The apparatus of claim 1026, wherein the firstand second activating light sources have substantially the same spectraloutput.
 1032. The apparatus of claim 1026, wherein the first and secondactivating light sources have a peak light intensity at a range of about385 nm to about 490 nm.
 1033. The apparatus of claim 1026, wherein thefirst activating light source comprises a first set of lamps and asecond set of lamps, wherein the first and second set of lamps arepositioned on opposite sides of the first curing unit.
 1034. Theapparatus of claim 1026, further comprising a filter disposed directlyadjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source.
 1035. The apparatus of claim1026, further comprising a filter disposed directly adjacent to thesecond activating light source, the filter being configured tomanipulate an intensity of the activating light emanating from thesecond activating light source.
 1036. The apparatus of claim 1026,further comprising a first filter disposed directly adjacent to thefirst activating light source, the filter being configured to manipulatean intensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source, and further comprising a second filter disposed directlyadjacent to the second activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the second activating light source.
 1037. The apparatus of claim1026, further comprising an air distributor positioned within the secondcuring unit, the air distributor being configured to circulate airwithin the second curing unit during use.
 1038. The apparatus of claim1026, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising ananneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system isconfigured to heat the interior of the anneal unit.
 1039. The apparatusof claim 1026, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unitcomprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit,and wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit to a temperature of up to about 250° F.1040. The apparatus of claim 1026, further comprising an anneal unit,the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein theanneal unit heating system is configured to heat the interior of theanneal unit, and wherein the anneal unit further comprises an annealunit conveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly through theanneal unit.
 1041. The apparatus of claim 1026, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to substantially simultaneouslycontrol operation of the first curing unit and the second curing unitduring use.
 1042. The apparatus of claim 1026, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to control operation of the firstcuring unit as a function of the eyeglass lens prescription.
 1043. Theapparatus of claim 1026, wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the first activating lightsource further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 1044. The apparatus of claim 1026, wherein the secondactivating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein thesecond activating light source further comprises a flasher ballastsystem coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 1045. The apparatus of claim1026, wherein the first activating light source comprises two or morelamps, and wherein the lamps are independently operable.
 1046. Theapparatus of claim 1026, wherein the conveyor system comprises acontinuous flexible member extending from the first curing unit throughthe second curing unit, wherein the flexible member is configured tointeract with a mold assembly to convey the mold assembly through thefirst curing unit, to the second curing unit, and through the secondcuring unit.
 1047. The apparatus of claim 1026, wherein the conveyorsystem comprises two discrete conveyors, wherein the first conveyor isconfigured to convey the mold assembly from the first curing unit to thesecond curing unit, and wherein the second conveyor is configured toconvey the mold assemblies through the second curing unit.
 1048. Theapparatus of claim 1026, wherein the conveyor system comprises aflexible member configured to interact with a mold assembly, and whereinthe flexible member is coupled to a motor configured to move theflexible member through the conveyor system.
 1049. An apparatus forpreparing an eyeglass lens, comprising: a lens curing unit configured todirect activating light toward a mold assembly during use, wherein theapparatus is configured to produce greater than about 25 eyeglass lensesper hour.
 1050. The apparatus of claim 1049, wherein the mold assemblyresides on a mold assembly holder, the mold assembly holder comprising abody and an indentation formed in the body, wherein the indentation iscomplementary to the shape of the mold assembly.
 1051. The apparatus ofclaim 1049, wherein the lens curing unit comprises a first activatinglight source, wherein the first activating light source is anultraviolet light source.
 1052. The apparatus of claim 1049, wherein thelens curing unit comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, wherein the second activating light source isan ultraviolet light.
 1053. The apparatus of claim 1049, wherein thelens curing unit comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the first and second activatinglight sources are ultraviolet lights.
 1054. The apparatus of claim 1049,wherein the lens curing unit comprises a first activating light sourceand a second activating light source, and wherein the first and secondactivating light sources have substantially the same spectral output.1055. The apparatus of claim 1049, wherein the lens curing unitcomprises a first activating light source and a second activating lightsource, and wherein the first and second activating light sources have apeak light intensity at a range of about 385 nm to about 490 nm. 1056.The apparatus of claim 1049, wherein the lens curing unit comprises afirst activating light source and a second activating light source, andwherein the first activating light source comprises a first set of lampsand a second set of lamps, wherein the first and second set of lamps arepositioned on opposite sides of the lens curing unit.
 1057. Theapparatus of claim 1049, wherein the lens curing unit comprises a firstactivating light source and a second activating light source, andfurther comprising a filter disposed directly adjacent to the firstactivating light source, the filter being configured to manipulate anintensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source.
 1058. The apparatus of claim 1049, wherein the lens curingunit comprises a first activating light source and a second activatinglight source, and further comprising a filter disposed directly adjacentto the second activating light source, the filter being configured tomanipulate an intensity of the activating light emanating from thesecond activating light source.
 1059. The apparatus of claim 1049,wherein the lens curing unit comprises a first activating light sourceand a second activating light source, further comprising a first filterdisposed directly adjacent to the first activating light source, thefilter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the first activating light source, and furthercomprising a second filter disposed directly adjacent to the secondactivating light source, the filter being configured to manipulate anintensity of the activating light emanating from the second activatinglight source.
 1060. The apparatus of claim 1049, further comprising anair distributor positioned within the lens curing unit, the airdistributor being configured to circulate air within the lens curingunit during use.
 1061. The apparatus of claim 1049, further comprisingan anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heatingsystem, wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit.
 1062. The apparatus of claim 1049, furthercomprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unitheating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured toheat the interior of the anneal unit, and wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit toa temperature of up to about 250° F.
 1063. The apparatus of claim 1049,further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an annealunit heating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system isconfigured to heat the interior of the anneal unit, and wherein theanneal unit further comprises an anneal unit conveyor system configuredto convey the mold assembly through the anneal unit.
 1064. The apparatusof claim 1049, further comprising a programmable controller configuredto substantially simultaneously control operation of the lens curingunit during use.
 1065. The apparatus of claim 1049, further comprising aprogrammable controller configured to control operation of the lenscuring unit as a function of the eyeglass lens prescription.
 1066. Theapparatus of claim 1049, wherein the lens curing unit comprises a firstactivating light source and a second activating light source, andwherein the first activating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp,and wherein the first activating light source further comprises aflasher ballast system coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 1067. Theapparatus of claim 1049, wherein the lens curing unit comprises a firstactivating light source and a second activating light source, andwherein the second activating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp,and wherein the second activating light source further comprises aflasher ballast system coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 1068. Theapparatus of claim 1049, wherein the lens curing unit comprises a firstactivating light source and a second activating light source, andwherein the first activating light source comprises two or more lamps,and wherein the lamps are independently operable.
 1069. The apparatus ofclaim 1049, further comprising a conveyor system configured to conveythe mold assembly through the lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyorsystem comprises a continuous flexible member extending from the firstcuring unit through the second curing unit, wherein the flexible memberis configured to interact with a mold assembly to convey the moldassembly through the first curing unit, to the second curing unit, andthrough the second curing unit.
 1070. The apparatus of claim 1049,further comprising a conveyor system configured to convey the moldassembly through the lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyor systemcomprises two discrete conveyors, wherein the first conveyor isconfigured to convey the mold assembly from the first curing unit to thesecond curing unit, and wherein the second conveyor is configured toconvey the mold assemblies through the second curing unit.
 1071. Theapparatus of claim 1049, further comprising a conveyor system configuredto convey the mold assembly through the lens curing unit, and whereinthe conveyor system comprises a flexible member configured to interactwith a mold assembly, and wherein the flexible member is coupled to amotor configured to move the flexible member through the conveyorsystem.
 1072. A method of preparing an eyeglass lens, comprising:placing a lens forming composition in a mold cavity of a mold assembly;placing the mold assembly in a lens curing unit; applying light and heatto the mold assembly with the lens curing unit to at least partiallycure the lens forming composition; monitoring usage of the lens curingunit; turning off components of the lens curing unit when the lenscuring unit is not used for a predetermined amount of time.
 1073. Themethod of claim 1072, further comprising placing the mold assembly in amold assembly holder, the mold assembly holder comprising a body and anindentation formed in the body, the indentation complementary to theshape of the mold assembly.
 1074. The method of claim 1072, furthercomprising placing the mold assembly in a mold assembly holder, the moldassembly holder comprising a body and an indentation formed in the body,the indentation complementary to the shape of the mold assembly, andwherein the indentations of the mold assembly holder defines an opening,and wherein the opening is positioned such that activating light passesthrough the opening and onto the mold assembly during use.
 1075. Themethod of claim 1072, further comprising placing the mold assembly in amold assembly holder, the mold assembly holder comprising a body and anindentation formed in the body, the indentation complementary to theshape of the mold assembly, and wherein the mold assembly holder furthercomprises an additional indentation for holding an additional moldassembly, wherein the additional indentation has a shape that iscomplementary with the additional mold assembly.
 1076. The method ofclaim 1072, further comprising placing the mold assembly in a moldassembly holder, the mold assembly holder comprising a body and anindentation formed in the body, the indentation complementary to theshape of the mold assembly, and wherein a portion of the mold assemblyholder is configured to hold a job ticket.
 1077. The method of claim1072, further comprising placing the mold assembly in a mold assemblyholder, the mold assembly holder comprising a body and an indentationformed in the body, the indentation complementary to the shape of themold assembly, and wherein the indentation in the mold assembly holderextends into the body to a depth such that an upper surface of the moldassembly is positioned at or below the upper surface of the body. 1078.The method of claim 1072, applying light and heat to mold assemblycomprises directing activating light toward at least one of the moldmembers for less than 100 seconds.
 1079. The method of claim 1072,further comprising demolding the cured lens forming composition from themold assembly; and applying heat to the lens in the absence ofactivating light, subsequent to directing activating light and heattoward at least one of the mold members.
 1080. The method of claim 1072,further comprising heating the lens forming composition; and placing theheated lens forming composition in a mold cavity.
 1081. A method ofpreparing an eyeglass lens, comprising: placing a lens formingcomposition in a mold cavity of a mold assembly; placing the moldassembly in a lens curing unit; monitoring the status of the lens curingunit with a controller; sending a control signal from the controller tothe lens curing system when the status of the lens curing unit indicatesthat the lens curing unit is ready for use, wherein the lens curing unitis configured to apply light and heat to the mold assembly to at leastpartially cure the lens forming composition in response to the controlsignal.
 1082. The method of claim 1081, further comprising placing themold assembly in a mold assembly holder, the mold assembly holdercomprising a body and an indentation formed in the body, the indentationcomplementary to the shape of the mold assembly.
 1083. The method ofclaim 1081, further comprising placing the mold assembly in a moldassembly holder, the mold assembly holder comprising a body and anindentation formed in the body, the indentation complementary to theshape of the mold assembly, and wherein the indentations of the moldassembly holder defines an opening, and wherein the opening ispositioned such that activating light passes through the opening andonto the mold assembly during use.
 1084. The method of claim 1081,further comprising placing the mold assembly in a mold assembly holder,the mold assembly holder comprising a body and an indentation formed inthe body, the indentation complementary to the shape of the moldassembly, and wherein the mold assembly holder further comprises anadditional indentation for holding an additional mold assembly, whereinthe additional indentation has a shape that is complementary with theadditional mold assembly.
 1085. The method of claim 1081, furthercomprising placing the mold assembly in a mold assembly holder, the moldassembly holder comprising a body and an indentation formed in the body,the indentation complementary to the shape of the mold assembly, andwherein a portion of the mold assembly holder is configured to hold ajob ticket.
 1086. The method of claim 1081, further comprising placingthe mold assembly in a mold assembly holder, the mold assembly holdercomprising a body and an indentation formed in the body, the indentationcomplementary to the shape of the mold assembly, and wherein theindentation in the mold assembly holder extends into the body to a depthsuch that an upper surface of the mold assembly is positioned at orbelow the upper surface of the body.
 1087. The method of claim 1081,applying light and heat to mold assembly comprises directing activatinglight toward at least one of the mold members for less than 100 seconds.1088. The method of claim 1081, further comprising demolding the curedlens forming composition from the mold assembly; and applying heat tothe lens in the absence of activating light, subsequent to directingactivating light and heat toward at least one of the mold members. 1089.The method of claim 1081, further comprising heating the lens formingcomposition prior to placing the lens forming composition in the moldassembly.
 1090. An apparatus for preparing an eyeglass lens, comprising:a first lens curing unit comprising a first activating light source,wherein the first lens curing unit is configured to produce activatinglight directed toward a mold assembly during use; a second lens curingunit comprising a second activating light source and heating system,wherein the activating light source is configured to direct activatinglight toward a mold assembly during use, and wherein the heat system isconfigured to heat the interior of the second lens curing unit; acomputer system coupled to the first curing unit and the second curingunit, wherein the computer system is configured to turn on components ofthe first and second curing units in response to a predetermined signal.1091. The apparatus of claim 1090, wherein the predetermined signalcomprises a time, and wherein the computer system is configured to turnon the components of the first and second lens curing units at apredetermined time.
 1092. The apparatus of claim 1090, wherein thecomputer system is further configured to accept prescriptioninformation, and wherein the predetermined signal comprises an entry ofprescription information into the computer system.
 1093. The apparatusof claim 1090, wherein the computer system is further configured toaccept user inputs, and wherein the predetermined signal comprises auser input to turn on the curing unit.
 1094. The apparatus of claim1090, wherein the mold assembly resides on a mold assembly holder, themold assembly holder comprising a body and an indentation formed in thebody, wherein the indentation is complementary to the shape of the moldassembly.
 1095. The apparatus of claim 1090, wherein the firstactivating light source is an ultraviolet light source.
 1096. Theapparatus of claim 1090, wherein the second activating light source isan ultraviolet light.
 1097. The apparatus of claim 1090, wherein thefirst and second activating light sources are ultraviolet lights. 1098.The apparatus of claim 1090, wherein the first and second activatinglight sources have substantially the same spectral output.
 1099. Theapparatus of claim 1090, wherein the first and second activating lightsources have a peak light intensity at a range of about 385 nm to about490 nm.
 1100. The apparatus of claim 1090, wherein the first activatinglight source comprises a first set of lamps and a second set of lamps,wherein the first and second set of lamps are positioned on oppositesides of the first curing unit.
 1101. The apparatus of claim 1090,further comprising a filter disposed directly adjacent to the firstactivating light source, the filter being configured to manipulate anintensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source.
 1102. The apparatus of claim 1090, further comprising afilter disposed directly adjacent to the second activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the second activating light source.
 1103. Theapparatus of claim 1090, further comprising a first filter disposeddirectly adjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source, and further comprising a secondfilter disposed directly adjacent to the second activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the second activating light source.
 1104. Theapparatus of claim 1090, further comprising an air distributorpositioned within the second curing unit, the air distributor beingconfigured to circulate air within the second curing unit during use.1105. The apparatus of claim 1090, further comprising an anneal unit,the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein theanneal unit heating system is configured to heat the interior of theanneal unit.
 1106. The apparatus of claim 1090, further comprising ananneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system,wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit, and wherein the anneal unit heating systemis configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit to a temperatureof up to about 250° F.
 1107. The apparatus of claim 1090, furthercomprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unitheating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured toheat the interior of the anneal unit, and wherein the anneal unitfurther comprises an anneal unit conveyor system configured to conveythe mold assembly through the anneal unit.
 1108. The apparatus of claim1090, further comprising a programmable controller configured tosubstantially simultaneously control operation of the first curing unitand the second curing unit during use.
 1109. The apparatus of claim1090, further comprising a programmable controller configured to controloperation of the first curing unit as a function of the eyeglass lensprescription.
 1110. The apparatus of claim 1090, wherein the firstactivating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein thefirst activating light source further comprises a flasher ballast systemcoupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 1111. The apparatus of claim 1090,wherein the second activating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp,and wherein the second activating light source further comprises aflasher ballast system coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 1112. Theapparatus of claim 1090, wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises two or more lamps, and wherein the lamps are independentlyoperable.
 1113. The apparatus of claim 1090, further comprising aconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly from the firstlens curing unit into and through the second lens curing unit, andwherein the conveyor system comprises a continuous flexible memberextending from the first curing unit through the second curing unit,wherein the flexible member is configured to interact with a moldassembly to convey the mold assembly through the first curing unit, tothe second curing unit, and through the second curing unit.
 1114. Theapparatus of claim 1090, further comprising a conveyor system configuredto convey the mold assembly from the first lens curing unit into andthrough the second lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyor systemcomprises two discrete conveyors, wherein the first conveyor isconfigured to convey the mold assembly from the first curing unit to thesecond curing unit, and wherein the second conveyor is configured toconvey the mold assemblies through the second curing unit.
 1115. Theapparatus of claim 1090, further comprising a conveyor system configuredto convey the mold assembly from the first lens curing unit into andthrough the second lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyor systemcomprises a flexible member configured to interact with a mold assembly,and wherein the flexible member is coupled to a motor configured to movethe flexible member through the conveyor system.
 1116. A system fordispensing a heated polymerizable lens forming composition comprising: alens forming composition heating unit comprising: a body, the body beingconfigured to hold the lens forming composition, the body comprising anopening for receiving a fluid container and an outlet; a heating systempositioned within the body for heating the lens forming composition; anda valve positioned proximate the outlet, wherein the valve comprises anelongated member, wherein the elongated member is positionable withinthe outlet in a closed position, wherein the elongated member in theclosed position inhibits flow of the lens forming composition throughthe outlet, and wherein the elongated member is positionable within theoutlet in an open position, wherein the elongated member in an openposition allows flow of the lens forming composition flows through theoutlet during use; and a controller coupled to the lens formingcomposition heating unit, wherein the controller is configured tomonitor the amount of lens forming composition used, and wherein thecontroller is configured to produce a signal indicating that additionallens forming composition is needed when a predetermined amount ofmonomer is used.
 1117. The system of claim 1116, wherein the valvecomprises a movable member coupled to the elongated member, wherein theelongated member contacts the movable member at a first position suchthat the elongated member is in the closed position, and wherein theelongated member contacts the movable member at a second position suchthat the elongated member is in the open position, and wherein themovable member is movable such that the position elongated member can bevaried from the first position to the second position.
 1118. The systemof claim 1116, wherein the heating apparatus body further comprises achamber positioned within the heating apparatus body, and wherein theheating system is positioned within the chamber, and wherein the chamberinhibits the lens forming composition from contacting the heatingsystem.
 1119. The system of claim 1116, wherein the heating systemcomprises a resistive heating system.
 1120. The system of claim 1116.wherein the elongated member extends substantially completely throughthe outlet when the elongated member is in the closed position. 1121.The system of claim 1116, wherein the elongated member extends partiallyinto the outlet when the elongated member is an open position.
 1122. Thesystem of claim 1116, wherein the heating apparatus further comprises athermostat coupled to the heating apparatus body, the thermostat beingconfigured to measure a temperature of the lens forming compositionwithin the heating apparatus body, and wherein the thermostat is furtherconfigured to control the heating system in response to the measuredtemperature.
 1123. The system of claim 1116, wherein the heatingapparatus further comprising a thermocouple coupled to the heatingapparatus body, the thermocouple being configured to measure atemperature of the lens forming composition, and wherein the systemfurther comprises a controller coupled to the thermocouple and theheating system, the controller configured to control the heating systemin response to the temperature measured by the thermocouple.
 1124. Thesystem of claim 1116, wherein the heating apparatus further comprises afluid level monitor disposed within the heating apparatus body, whereinthe fluid level monitor is configured to measure the level of the lensforming composition disposed within the heating apparatus body. 1125.The system of claim 1116, wherein the heating apparatus furthercomprises a fluid level monitor disposed within the heating apparatusbody and a controller coupled to the fluid level monitor and the heatingsystem, wherein the fluid level monitor is configured to measure thelevel of the lens forming composition disposed within the heatingapparatus body, and wherein the controller configured to control theheating system in response to the level of fluid measured by the fluidlevel monitor.
 1126. The system of claim 1116, wherein the heatingapparatus is electrically coupleable to a controller of a lens formingapparatus.
 1127. The system of claim 1116, wherein the heating apparatusfurther comprises a mold assembly holder coupled to the heatingapparatus body, wherein the mold assembly holder is configured to hold amold assembly in a position such that the outlet of the heatingapparatus body is positioned proximate an inlet of the mold assembly.1128. The system of claim 1116, wherein the fluid control member issubstantially spherical.
 1129. The system of claim 1116, wherein thefluid control member is substantially spherical, and wherein the elasticmember is a spring.
 1130. The system of claim 1116, further comprising afluid container configured to hold a lens forming composition, the fluidcontainer comprising: a fluid container body and a cap, wherein the capcomprises a fluid control member and an elastic member, wherein theelastic member is coupled to the fluid control member such that theelastic member exerts a force on the fluid control member such that thefluid control member is forced against a top inner surface of the cap;wherein the fluid container is insertable into the opening of theheating apparatus, and wherein insertion of the fluid container into theopening causes the fluid control member to be moved to a position suchthat the lens forming composition flows from the fluid container intothe heating apparatus body.
 1131. The system of claim 1130, wherein theheating apparatus body further comprises a projection extending towardthe opening, and wherein the projection is positioned such that theprojection forces the fluid control member away from the top innersurface of the cap when the bottle is inserted into the opening. 1132.The system of claim 1130, wherein the cap of the fluid container isremovable from the fluid container body.
 1133. The system of claim 1130,wherein the cap of the fluid container is coupled to the fluid containerbody with an adhesive.
 1134. A computer-implemented method forcontrolling an eyeglass lens forming apparatus, the eyeglass lensforming apparatus comprising: a first lens curing unit comprising afirst activating light source, wherein the first lens curing unit isconfigured to produce activating light directed toward a mold assemblyduring use; a second lens curing unit comprising a second activatinglight source and heating system, wherein the activating light source isconfigured to direct activating light toward a mold assembly during use;and wherein the heat system is configured to heat the interior of thesecond lens curing unit; a mold assembly holder configured to support amold assembly, the mold assembly holder comprising a body and anindentation formed in the body, wherein the indentation is complementaryto the shape of the mold assembly; and a conveyor system configured toconvey the mold assembly holder from the first lens curing unit into andthrough the second lens curing unit; the method comprising: monitoringthe position of the mold assembly holder in the lens forming apparatus;and displaying the position of the mold assembly holder within the lensforming apparatus on a display device.
 1135. The method of claim 1134,wherein the lens forming apparatus comprises a sensor configured todetect the position of a mold assembly holder within the lens curingapparatus, wherein displaying the position of the mold assembly holdercomprises displaying a pictorial depiction of the mold assembly holderon the display device based on the sensed position of the mold assemblyholder.
 1136. The method of claim 1134, wherein the lens formingapparatus comprises a sensor configured to detect the presence of a moldassembly holder in the first curing unit, and wherein displaying theposition of the mold assembly holder comprises displaying a pictorialdepiction of the mold assembly holder on the display device based on thetime between when the mold assembly holder is sensed by the sensor andthe current time.
 1137. The method of claim 1134, further comprisingdisplaying components of the lens curing apparatus, wherein thedisplaying the position of the mold assembly holder comprises displayinga pictorial depiction of the mold assembly holder on the display devicein relation to the components of the lens curing apparatus.
 1138. Themethod of claim 1134, wherein the mold assembly resides on a moldassembly holder, the mold assembly holder comprising a body and anindentation formed in the body, wherein the indentation is complementaryto the shape of the mold assembly.
 1139. The method of claim 1134,wherein the first activating light source is an ultraviolet lightsource.
 1140. The method of claim 1134, wherein the second activatinglight source is an ultraviolet light.
 1141. The method of claim 1134,wherein the first and second activating light sources are ultravioletlights.
 1142. The method of claim 1134, wherein the first and secondactivating light sources have substantially the same spectral output.1143. The method of claim 1134, wherein the first and second activatinglight sources have a peak light intensity at a range of about 385 nm toabout 490 nm.
 1144. The method of claim 1134, wherein the firstactivating light source comprises a first set of lamps and a second setof lamps, wherein the first and second set of lamps are positioned onopposite sides of the first curing unit.
 1145. The method of claim 1134,wherein the lens forming apparatus further comprises a filter disposeddirectly adjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source.
 1146. The method of claim 1134,wherein the lens forming apparatus further comprises a filter disposeddirectly adjacent to the second activating light source, the filterbeing configured to manipulate an intensity of the activating lightemanating from the second activating light source.
 1147. The method ofclaim 1134, wherein the lens forming apparatus further comprises a firstfilter disposed directly adjacent to the first activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the first activating light source, and furthercomprising a second filter disposed directly adjacent to the secondactivating light source, the filter being configured to manipulate anintensity of the activating light emanating from the second activatinglight source.
 1148. The method of claim 1134, wherein the lens formingapparatus further comprises an air distributor positioned within thesecond curing unit, the air distributor being configured to circulateair within the second curing unit during use.
 1149. The method of claim1134, wherein the lens forming apparatus further comprises an annealunit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system, whereinthe anneal unit heating system is configured to heat the interior of theanneal unit.
 1150. The method of claim 1134, wherein the lens formingapparatus further comprises an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprisingan anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system isconfigured to heat the interior of the anneal unit, and wherein theanneal unit heating system is configured to heat the interior of theanneal unit to a temperature of up to about 250° F.
 1151. The method ofclaim 1134, wherein the lens forming apparatus further comprises ananneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system,wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit, and wherein the anneal unit furthercomprises an anneal unit conveyor system configured to convey the moldassembly through the anneal unit.
 1152. The method of claim 1134,further comprising controlling the curing operation of the first curingunit and the second curing unit.
 1153. The method of claim 1134, furthercomprising controlling the operation of the first curing unit as afunction of the eyeglass lens prescription.
 1154. The method of claim1134, wherein the first activating light source comprises a fluorescentlamp, and wherein the first activating light source further comprises aflasher ballast system coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 1155. The methodof claim 1134, wherein the second activating light source comprises afluorescent lamp, and wherein the second activating light source furthercomprises a flasher ballast system coupled to the fluorescent lamp.1156. The method of claim 1134, wherein the first activating lightsource comprises two or more lamps, and wherein the lamps areindependently operable.
 1157. The method of claim 1134, wherein theconveyor system comprises a continuous flexible member extending fromthe first curing unit through the second curing unit, wherein theflexible member is configured to interact with a mold assembly to conveythe mold assembly through the first curing unit, to the second curingunit, and through the second curing unit.
 1158. The method of claim1134, wherein the conveyor system comprises two discrete conveyors,wherein the first conveyor is configured to convey the mold assemblyfrom the first curing unit to the second curing unit, and wherein thesecond conveyor is configured to convey the mold assemblies through thesecond curing unit.
 1159. The method of claim 1134, wherein the conveyorsystem comprises a flexible member configured to interact with a moldassembly, and wherein the flexible member is coupled to a motorconfigured to move the flexible member through the conveyor system.1160. A computer-implemented method for displaying the status of aneyeglass lens forming apparatus, the eyeglass lens forming apparatuscomprising a curing unit configured to apply light and heat to a moldassembly; the method comprising: monitoring the status of the componentsof the curing unit; and displaying the status of the components of thecuring unit on a display device.
 1161. The method of claim 1160, whereindisplaying the status of the components of the curing unit comprisesdisplaying a picture representative of the component, and wherein thepicture of the component is colored to indicate the status of thecomponent.
 1162. The method of claim 1160, wherein displaying the statusof the components of the curing unit comprises displaying a table with alisting of the components, and wherein the table the table includes anindication of the status of the component.
 1163. The method of claim1160, wherein the component comprises a heating system of the curingunit.
 1164. The method of claim 1160, wherein the component comprises anactivating light system of the curing unit.
 1165. A computer-implementedmethod for collecting prescription information for an eyeglass lensforming apparatus, the eyeglass lens forming apparatus comprising acuring unit configured to apply light and heat to a mold assembly; themethod comprising: displaying menu items that are configured to collectprescription information from a user; and saving the collectedprescription information as a job in a database.
 1166. The method ofclaim 1165, wherein displaying menu items comprises displaying a menuitem requesting the lens type.
 1167. The method of claim 1165, whereindisplaying menu items comprises displaying a menu item requesting themonomer type.
 1168. The method of claim 1165, wherein displaying menuitems comprises displaying a menu item requesting the lens position.1169. The method of claim 1165, wherein displaying menu items comprisesdisplaying a menu item requesting the tinting of the eyeglass lens.1170. The method of claim 1165, wherein the eyeglass lens comprises aspheric single vision lens or an aspheric single vision lens, andwherein displaying menu items comprises displaying menu items requestingthe sphere and cylinder of the eyeglass lens.
 1171. The method of claim1165, wherein the eyeglass lens comprises a flattop bifocal lens or anasymmetrical progressive lens, and wherein displaying menu itemscomprises displaying menu items requesting the sphere, cylinder, axis,and add power of the eyeglass lens.
 1172. The method of claim 1165,further comprising verifying that information has been entered in themenu items.
 1173. The method of claim 1165, further comprising verifyingthat information has been entered in the menu items, and waiting untilall the information is entered before saving the prescriptioninformation.
 1174. The method of claim 1165, further comprisingverifying that information has been entered in the menu items, andverifying that the entered information represents a lens that can beformed by the curing unit.
 1175. The method of claim 1165, furthercomprising generating a job ticket the job ticket comprising theprescription information.
 1176. A computer-implemented method forcontrolling formation of an eyeglass lens, the method comprising:receiving prescription information, wherein the prescription informationdefines an eyeglass prescription; verifying that the eyeglassprescription can be formed in a lens curing apparatus; displaying awarning message if the eyeglass prescription can not be formed in thelens curing apparatus; and determining a front mold identificationmarking, a back mold identification marking, and a gasket identificationmarking of an appropriate front mold, back mold and gasket for producingthe eyeglass lens in response to the prescription information, if theeyeglass prescription can be formed in the lens curing apparatus;wherein the front mold, the back mold and the gasket together areoperable to produce a mold cavity, the mold cavity being configured tohold a lens forming composition which is curable to produce the eyeglasslens from the prescription, the front mold member comprising the frontmold identification marking, the back mold member comprising the backmold identification marking, and the gasket member comprising the gasketidentification marking.
 1177. The method of claim 1176, furthercomprising forming a job ticket with prescription information, whereinthe prescription information is entered into a job ticket printingdevice from an input device, wherein the input device is operable by auser to enter prescription information.
 1178. The method of claim 1176,wherein the prescription information comprises a sphere power, acylinder power, and a lens location.
 1179. The method of claim 1176,wherein the prescription information further comprises a monomer typeand a lens type.
 1180. The method of claim 1176, wherein theprescription information comprises a sphere power, a cylinder power, anadd power and a lens location.
 1181. The method of claim 1176, whereinthe eyeglass lens comprises a spheric single vision lens or an asphericsingle vision lens, and wherein the prescription information comprisesthe sphere and cylinder of the eyeglass lens.
 1182. The method of claim1176, wherein the eyeglass lens comprises a flattop bifocal lens or anasymmetrical progressive lens, and wherein the prescription informationcomprises the sphere, cylinder, axis, and add power of the eyeglasslens.
 1183. An apparatus for preparing an eyeglass lens, comprising: afirst lens curing unit comprising a first activating light source,wherein the first lens curing unit is configured to produce activatinglight directed toward a mold assembly during use; a second lens curingunit comprising a second activating light source and heating system,wherein the activating light source is configured to direct activatinglight toward a mold assembly during use; and wherein the heat system isconfigured to heat the interior of the second lens curing unit; aconveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly from the firstlens curing unit into and through the second lens curing unit; acontroller coupled to the heating system of the second curing unit andthe conveyor system, the controller being configured to control theoperation of the heating system and the conveyor system during use.1184. The apparatus of claim 1183, wherein the mold assembly resides ona mold assembly holder, the mold assembly holder comprising a body andan indentation formed in the body, wherein the indentation iscomplementary to the shape of the mold assembly.
 1185. The apparatus ofclaim 1183, wherein the first activating light source is an ultravioletlight source.
 1186. The apparatus of claim 1183, wherein the secondactivating light source is an ultraviolet light.
 1187. The apparatus ofclaim 1183, wherein the first and second activating light sources areultraviolet lights.
 1188. The apparatus of claim 1183, wherein the firstand second activating light sources have substantially the same spectraloutput.
 1189. The apparatus of claim 1183, wherein the first and secondactivating light sources have a peak light intensity at a range of about385 nm to about 490 nm.
 1190. The apparatus of claim 1183, wherein thefirst activating light source comprises a first set of lamps and asecond set of lamps, wherein the first and second set of lamps arepositioned on opposite sides of the first curing unit.
 1191. Theapparatus of claim 1183, further comprising a filter disposed directlyadjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source.
 1192. The apparatus of claim1183, further comprising a filter disposed directly adjacent to thesecond activating light source, the filter being configured tomanipulate an intensity of the activating light emanating from thesecond activating light source.
 1193. The apparatus of claim 1183,further comprising a first filter disposed directly adjacent to thefirst activating light source, the filter being configured to manipulatean intensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source, and further comprising a second filter disposed directlyadjacent to the second activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the second activating light source.
 1194. The apparatus of claim1183, further comprising an air distributor positioned within the secondcuring unit, the air distributor being configured to circulate airwithin the second curing unit during use.
 1195. The apparatus of claim1183, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising ananneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system isconfigured to heat the interior of the anneal unit.
 1196. The apparatusof claim 1183, further comprising an anneal unit, the anneal unitcomprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit,and wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit to a temperature of up to about 250° F.1197. The apparatus of claim 1183, further comprising an anneal unit,the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein theanneal unit heating system is configured to heat the interior of theanneal unit, and wherein the anneal unit further comprises an annealunit conveyor system configured to convey the mold assembly through theanneal unit.
 1198. The apparatus of claim 1183, wherein the firstactivating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein thefirst activating light source further comprises a flasher ballast systemcoupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 1199. The apparatus of claim 1183,wherein the second activating light source comprises a fluorescent lamp,and wherein the second activating light source further comprises aflasher ballast system coupled to the fluorescent lamp.
 1200. Theapparatus of claim 1183, wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises two or more lamps, and wherein the lamps are independentlyoperable.
 1201. The apparatus of claim 1183, wherein the conveyor systemcomprises a continuous flexible member extending from the first curingunit through the second curing unit, wherein the flexible member isconfigured to interact with a mold assembly to convey the mold assemblythrough the first curing unit, to the second curing unit, and throughthe second curing unit.
 1202. The apparatus of claim 1183, wherein theconveyor system comprises two discrete conveyors, wherein the firstconveyor is configured to convey the mold assembly from the first curingunit to the second curing unit, and wherein the second conveyor isconfigured to convey the mold assemblies through the second curing unit.1203. The apparatus of claim 1183, wherein the conveyor system comprisesa flexible member configured to interact with a mold assembly, andwherein the flexible member is coupled to a motor configured to move theflexible member through the conveyor system.
 1204. A system forpreparing a eyeglass lens, comprising: a mold assembly, the moldassembly comprising a first and second mold member, wherein the firstand second mold members at least partially define a mold cavity; a lenscuring apparatus configured to direct activating light toward the moldassembly during use, wherein the lens curing unit is configured toproduce greater than about 25 eyeglass lenses per hour; a mold fillingapparatus, wherein the mold filling apparatus is configured to dispensea lens forming composition into the mold cavity of the mold assemblyduring use; and a controller computer, wherein the controller computercomprises controller software executable on the controller computer,wherein the controller software is operable to: receive an eyeglassprescription; identify the first and second mold members that willproduce an eyeglass l lens having the eyeglass prescription; anddetermine curing conditions; wherein the lens curing apparatus, the moldfilling apparatus, and the controller computer are located proximate toeach other.
 1205. The system of claim 1204, further comprising a moldassembly holder, the mold assembly holder comprising a body and anindentation formed in the body, wherein the indentation is complementaryto the shape of the mold assembly.
 1206. The system of claim 1204,wherein the lens curing apparatus comprises a first activating lightsource, wherein the first activating light source is an ultravioletlight source.
 1207. The system of claim 1204, wherein the lens curingapparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, wherein the second activating light source isan ultraviolet light.
 1208. The system of claim 1204, wherein the lenscuring apparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the first and second activatinglight sources are ultraviolet lights.
 1209. The system of claim 1204,wherein the lens curing apparatus comprises a first activating lightsource and a second activating light source, and wherein the first andsecond activating light sources have substantially the same spectraloutput.
 1210. The system of claim 1204, wherein the lens curingapparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the first and second activatinglight sources have a peak light intensity at a range of about 385 nm toabout 490 nm.
 1211. The system of claim 1204, wherein the lens curingapparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises a first set of lamps and a second set of lamps, wherein thefirst and second set of lamps are positioned on opposite sides of thelens curing unit.
 1212. The system of claim 1204, wherein the lenscuring apparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and further comprising a filter disposeddirectly adjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source.
 1213. The system of claim 1204,wherein the lens curing apparatus comprises a first activating lightsource and a second activating light source, and further comprising afilter disposed directly adjacent to the second activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the second activating light source.
 1214. Thesystem of claim 1204, wherein the lens curing apparatus comprises afirst activating light source and a second activating light source,further comprising a first filter disposed directly adjacent to thefirst activating light source, the filter being configured to manipulatean intensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source, and further comprising a second filter disposed directlyadjacent to the second activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the second activating light source.
 1215. The system of claim 1204,wherein the lens curing apparatus further comprises an air distributorpositioned within the lens curing unit, the air distributor beingconfigured to circulate air within the lens curing unit during use.1216. The system of claim 1204, wherein the lens curing apparatusfurther comprises an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an annealunit heating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system isconfigured to heat the interior of the anneal unit.
 1217. The system ofclaim 1204, wherein the lens curing apparatus further comprises ananneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system,wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit, and wherein the anneal unit heating systemis configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit to a temperatureof up to about 250° F.
 1218. The system of claim 1204, wherein the lenscuring apparatus further comprises an anneal unit, the anneal unitcomprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit,and wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unit conveyorsystem configured to convey the mold assembly through the anneal unit.1219. The system of claim 1204, wherein the lens curing apparatusfurther comprises a programmable controller configured to substantiallysimultaneously control operation of the lens curing unit during use.1220. The system of claim 1204, wherein the lens curing apparatusfurther comprises a programmable controller configured to controloperation of the lens curing unit as a function of the eyeglass lensprescription.
 1221. The system of claim 1204, wherein the lens curingapparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the first activating lightsource further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 1222. The system of claim 1204, wherein the lenscuring apparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the second activating light sourcecomprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the second activating lightsource further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 1223. The system of claim 1204, wherein the lenscuring apparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises two or more lamps, and wherein the lamps are independentlyoperable.
 1224. The system of claim 1204, wherein the lens curingapparatus further comprises a conveyor system configured to convey themold assembly through the lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyorsystem comprises a continuous flexible member extending from the firstcuring unit through the second curing unit, wherein the flexible memberis configured to interact with a mold assembly to convey the moldassembly through the first curing unit, to the second curing unit, andthrough the second curing unit.
 1225. The system of claim 1204, whereinthe lens curing apparatus further comprises a conveyor system configuredto convey the mold assembly through the lens curing unit, and whereinthe conveyor system comprises two discrete conveyors, wherein the firstconveyor is configured to convey the mold assembly from the first curingunit to the second curing unit, and wherein the second conveyor isconfigured to convey the mold assemblies through the second curing unit.1226. The system of claim 1204, wherein the lens curing apparatusfurther comprises a conveyor system configured to convey the moldassembly through the lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyor systemcomprises a flexible member configured to interact with a mold assembly,and wherein the flexible member is coupled to a motor configured to movethe flexible member through the conveyor system.
 1227. The system ofclaim 1204, further comprising a coating apparatus for applying acoating to at least one of the mold members or the eyeglass lens duringuse.
 1228. A system for preparing a eyeglass lens, comprising: a moldassembly, the mold assembly comprising a first and second mold member,wherein the first and second mold members at least partially define amold cavity; a lens curing apparatus configured to direct activatinglight toward the mold assembly during use; a mold filling apparatus,wherein the mold filling apparatus is configured to dispense a lensforming composition into the mold cavity of the mold assembly duringuse, the mold filling apparatus comprising: a heating apparatus body,the heating apparatus body being configured to hold the lens formingcomposition, the heating apparatus body comprising an opening forreceiving a fluid container and an outlet a heating system positionedwithin the heating apparatus body for heating the lens formingcomposition; and a valve positioned proximate the outlet, wherein thevalve comprises an elongated member, wherein the elongated member ispositionable within the outlet in a closed position, wherein theelongated member in the closed position inhibits flow of the lensforming composition through the outlet, and wherein the elongated memberis positionable within the outlet in an open position, wherein theelongated member in an open position allows flow of the lens formingcomposition flows through the outlet during use; a controller computer,wherein the controller computer comprises controller software executableon the controller computer, wherein the controller software is operableto: receive an eyeglass prescription; identify the first and second moldmembers that will produce an eyeglass lens having the eyeglassprescription; and determine curing conditions; wherein the coatingapparatus, the lens curing apparatus, the mold filling apparatus, andthe controller computer are located proximate to each other.
 1229. Thesystem of claim 1228, further comprising a mold assembly holder, themold assembly holder comprising a body and an indentation formed in thebody, wherein the indentation is complementary to the shape of the moldassembly.
 1230. The system of claim 1228, wherein the lens curingapparatus comprises a first activating light source, wherein the firstactivating light source is an ultraviolet light source.
 1231. The systemof claim 1228, wherein the lens curing apparatus comprises a firstactivating light source and a second activating light source, whereinthe second activating light source is an ultraviolet light.
 1232. Thesystem of claim 1228, wherein the lens curing apparatus comprises afirst activating light source and a second activating light source, andwherein the first and second activating light sources are ultravioletlights.
 1233. The system of claim 1228, wherein the lens curingapparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the first and second activatinglight sources have substantially the same spectral output.
 1234. Thesystem of claim 1228, wherein the lens curing apparatus comprises afirst activating light source and a second activating light source, andwherein the first and second activating light sources have a peak lightintensity at a range of about 385 nm to about 490 nm.
 1235. The systemof claim 1228, wherein the lens curing apparatus comprises a firstactivating light source and a second activating light source, andwherein the first activating light source comprises a first set of lampsand a second set of lamps, wherein the first and second set of lamps arepositioned on opposite sides of the lens curing unit.
 1236. The systemof claim 1228, wherein the lens curing apparatus comprises a firstactivating light source and a second activating light source, andfurther comprising a filter disposed directly adjacent to the firstactivating light source, the filter being configured to manipulate anintensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source.
 1237. The system of claim 1228, wherein the lens curingapparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and further comprising a filter disposeddirectly adjacent to the second activating light source, the filterbeing configured to manipulate an intensity of the activating lightemanating from the second activating light source.
 1238. The system ofclaim 1228, wherein the lens curing apparatus comprises a firstactivating light source and a second activating light source, furthercomprising a first filter disposed directly adjacent to the firstactivating light source, the filter being configured to manipulate anintensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source, and further comprising a second filter disposed directlyadjacent to the second activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the second activating light source.
 1239. The system of claim 1228,wherein the lens curing apparatus further comprises an air distributorpositioned within the lens curing unit, the air distributor beingconfigured to circulate air within the lens curing unit during use.1240. The system of claim 1228, wherein the lens curing apparatusfurther comprises an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an annealunit heating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system isconfigured to heat the interior of the anneal unit.
 1241. The system ofclaim 1228, wherein the lens curing apparatus further comprises ananneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system,wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit, and wherein the anneal unit heating systemis configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit to a temperatureof up to about 250° F.
 1242. The system of claim 1228, wherein the lenscuring apparatus further comprises an anneal unit, the anneal unitcomprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit,and wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unit conveyorsystem configured to convey the mold assembly through the anneal unit.1243. The system of claim 1228, wherein the lens curing apparatusfurther comprises a programmable controller configured to substantiallysimultaneously control operation of the lens curing unit during use.1244. The system of claim 1228, wherein the lens curing apparatusfurther comprises a programmable controller configured to controloperation of the lens curing unit as a function of the eyeglass lensprescription.
 1245. The system of claim 1228, wherein the lens curingapparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the first activating lightsource further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 1246. The system of claim 1228, wherein the lenscuring apparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the second activating light sourcecomprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the second activating lightsource further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 1247. The system of claim 1228, wherein the lenscuring apparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises two or more lamps, and wherein the lamps are independentlyoperable.
 1248. The system of claim 1228, wherein the lens curingapparatus further comprises a conveyor system configured to convey themold assembly through the lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyorsystem comprises a continuous flexible member extending from the firstcuring unit through the second curing unit, wherein the flexible memberis configured to interact with a mold assembly to convey the moldassembly through the first curing unit, to the second curing unit, andthrough the second curing unit.
 1249. The system of claim 1228, whereinthe lens curing apparatus further comprises a conveyor system configuredto convey the mold assembly through the lens curing unit, and whereinthe conveyor system comprises two discrete conveyors, wherein the firstconveyor is configured to convey the mold assembly from the first curingunit to the second curing unit, and wherein the second conveyor isconfigured to convey the mold assemblies through the second curing unit.1250. The system of claim 1228, wherein the lens curing apparatusfurther comprises a conveyor system configured to convey the moldassembly through the lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyor systemcomprises a flexible member configured to interact with a mold assembly,and wherein the flexible member is coupled to a motor configured to movethe flexible member through the conveyor system.
 1251. The system ofclaim 1228, further comprising a coating apparatus for applying acoating to at least one of the mold members or the eyeglass lens duringuse.
 1252. A system for preparing a eyeglass lens, comprising: acontroller computer, wherein the controller computer comprisescontroller software executable on the controller computer, wherein thecontroller software is operable to: receive an eyeglass prescription;identify the first and second mold members that will produce an eyeglasslens having the eyeglass prescription; determine curing conditions; ajob ticket printing device, wherein the job ticket printing device iscoupled to the controller computer, and wherein the job ticket printingdevice is configured to receive prescription information from thecontroller computer and print a job ticket having the prescriptioninformation; a lens curing apparatus configured to direct activatinglight toward the mold assembly during use, wherein the lens curing unitcomprising a controller computer and a reader, the reader beingconfigured to read information from a job ticket and transfer theinformation to the controller computer, wherein the controller computeris configured to determine curing conditions for producing the eyeglassprescription and control the lens curing system to produce the curingconditions.
 1253. The system of claim 1252, further comprising a moldassembly holder, the mold assembly holder comprising a body and anindentation formed in the body, wherein the indentation is complementaryto the shape of the mold assembly.
 1254. The system of claim 1252,wherein the lens curing apparatus comprises a first activating lightsource, wherein the first activating light source is an ultravioletlight source.
 1255. The system of claim 1252, wherein the lens curingapparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, wherein the second activating light source isan ultraviolet light.
 1256. The system of claim 1252, wherein the lenscuring apparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the first and second activatinglight sources are ultraviolet lights.
 1257. The system of claim 1252,wherein the lens curing apparatus comprises a first activating lightsource and a second activating light source, and wherein the first andsecond activating light sources have substantially the same spectraloutput.
 1258. The system of claim 1252, wherein the lens curingapparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the first and second activatinglight sources have a peak light intensity at a range of about 385 nm toabout 490 nm.
 1259. The system of claim 1252, wherein the lens curingapparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises a first set of lamps and a second set of lamps, wherein thefirst and second set of lamps are positioned on opposite sides of thelens curing unit.
 1260. The system of claim 1252, wherein the lenscuring apparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and further comprising a filter disposeddirectly adjacent to the first activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the first activating light source.
 1261. The system of claim 1252,wherein the lens curing apparatus comprises a first activating lightsource and a second activating light source, and further comprising afilter disposed directly adjacent to the second activating light source,the filter being configured to manipulate an intensity of the activatinglight emanating from the second activating light source.
 1262. Thesystem of claim 1252, wherein the lens curing apparatus comprises afirst activating light source and a second activating light source,further comprising a first filter disposed directly adjacent to thefirst activating light source, the filter being configured to manipulatean intensity of the activating light emanating from the first activatinglight source, and further comprising a second filter disposed directlyadjacent to the second activating light source, the filter beingconfigured to manipulate an intensity of the activating light emanatingfrom the second activating light source.
 1263. The system of claim 1252,wherein the lens curing apparatus further comprises an air distributorpositioned within the lens curing unit, the air distributor beingconfigured to circulate air within the lens curing unit during use.1264. The system of claim 1252, wherein the lens curing apparatusfurther comprises an anneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an annealunit heating system, wherein the anneal unit heating system isconfigured to heat the interior of the anneal unit.
 1265. The system ofclaim 1252, wherein the lens curing apparatus further comprises ananneal unit, the anneal unit comprising an anneal unit heating system,wherein the anneal unit heating system is configured to heat theinterior of the anneal unit, and wherein the anneal unit heating systemis configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit to a temperatureof up to about 250° F.
 1266. The system of claim 1252, wherein the lenscuring apparatus further comprises an anneal unit, the anneal unitcomprising an anneal unit heating system, wherein the anneal unitheating system is configured to heat the interior of the anneal unit,and wherein the anneal unit further comprises an anneal unit conveyorsystem configured to convey the mold assembly through the anneal unit.1267. The system of claim 1252, wherein the lens curing apparatusfurther comprises a programmable controller configured to substantiallysimultaneously control operation of the lens curing unit during use.1268. The system of claim 1252, wherein the lens curing apparatusfurther comprises a programmable controller configured to controloperation of the lens curing unit as a function of the eyeglass lensprescription.
 1269. The system of claim 1252, wherein the lens curingapparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the first activating lightsource further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 1270. The system of claim 1252, wherein the lenscuring apparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the second activating light sourcecomprises a fluorescent lamp, and wherein the second activating lightsource further comprises a flasher ballast system coupled to thefluorescent lamp.
 1271. The system of claim 1252, wherein the lenscuring apparatus comprises a first activating light source and a secondactivating light source, and wherein the first activating light sourcecomprises two or more lamps, and wherein the lamps are independentlyoperable.
 1272. The system of claim 1252, wherein the lens curingapparatus further comprises a conveyor system configured to convey themold assembly through the lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyorsystem comprises a continuous flexible member extending from the firstcuring unit through the second curing unit, wherein the flexible memberis configured to interact with a mold assembly to convey the moldassembly through the first curing unit, to the second curing unit, andthrough the second curing unit.
 1273. The system of claim 1252, whereinthe lens curing apparatus further comprises a conveyor system configuredto convey the mold assembly through the lens curing unit, and whereinthe conveyor system comprises two discrete conveyors, wherein the firstconveyor is configured to convey the mold assembly from the first curingunit to the second curing unit, and wherein the second conveyor isconfigured to convey the mold assemblies through the second curing unit.1274. The system of claim 1252, wherein the lens curing apparatusfurther comprises a conveyor system configured to convey the moldassembly through the lens curing unit, and wherein the conveyor systemcomprises a flexible member configured to interact with a mold assembly,and wherein the flexible member is coupled to a motor configured to movethe flexible member through the conveyor system.
 1275. The system ofclaim 1252, further comprising a coating apparatus for applying acoating to at least one of the mold members or the eyeglass lens duringuse.
 1276. A mold filling apparatus comprising: a body; at least twochambers disposed in the body, the chambers being configured to hold thelens forming composition, the chambers comprising an opening forreceiving a fluid container and an outlet; a heating system positionedwithin each of the chambers for heating the lens forming composition;and a valve positioned proximate the outlet of each of the chambers,wherein the valve comprises an elongated member, wherein the elongatedmember is positionable within the outlet in a closed position, whereinthe elongated member in the closed position inhibits flow of the lensforming composition through the outlet, and wherein the elongated memberis positionable within the outlet in an open position, wherein theelongated member in an open position allows flow of the lens formingcomposition flows through the outlet during use.
 1277. The system ofclaim 1276, wherein the valve comprises a movable member coupled to theelongated member, wherein the elongated member contacts the movablemember at a first position such that the elongated member is in theclosed position, and wherein the elongated member contacts the movablemember at a second position such that the elongated member is in theopen position, and wherein the movable member is movable such that theposition elongated member can be varied from the first position to thesecond position.
 1278. The system of claim 1276, wherein the chamberinhibits the lens forming composition from contacting the heatingsystem.
 1279. The system of claim 1276, wherein the heating systemcomprises a resistive heating system.
 1280. The system of claim 1276,wherein the elongated member extends substantially completely throughthe outlet when the elongated member is in the closed position. 1281.The system of claim 1276, wherein the elongated member extends partiallyinto the outlet when the elongated member is an open position.
 1282. Thesystem of claim 1276, wherein the heating apparatus further comprises athermostat coupled to the chambers, the thermostat being configured tomeasure a temperature of the lens forming composition within thechamber, and wherein the thermostat is further configured to control theheating system in response to the measured temperature.
 1283. The systemof claim 1276, wherein the heating apparatus further comprises athermocouple coupled to the chamber, the thermocouple being configuredto measure a temperature of the lens forming composition, and whereinthe system further comprises a controller coupled to the thermocoupleand the heating system, the controller configured to control the heatingsystem in response to the temperature measured by the thermocouple.1284. The system of claim 1276, wherein the heating apparatus furthercomprises a fluid level monitor disposed within the chamber, wherein thefluid level monitor is configured to measure the level of the lensforming composition disposed within the chamber.
 1285. The system ofclaim 1276, wherein the heating apparatus further comprises a fluidlevel monitor disposed within the chamber and a controller coupled tothe fluid level monitor and the heating system, wherein the fluid levelmonitor is configured to measure the level of the lens formingcomposition disposed within the chamber, and wherein the controller isconfigured to control the heating system in response to the level offluid measured by the fluid level monitor.
 1286. The system of claim1276, wherein the heating apparatus is electrically coupleable to acontroller of a lens forming apparatus.
 1287. The system of claim 1276,wherein the heating apparatus further comprises a mold assembly holdercoupled to the heating apparatus body, wherein the mold assembly holderis configured to hold a mold assembly in a position such that the outletof the heating apparatus body is positioned proximate an inlet of themold assembly.